C2000 User Manual PDF

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com Email: charles@automatedpt.
com
&(

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com Email: [email protected]

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

; AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive
is made.
DANGER ; Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link
capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Please do
not touch the internal circuit and components.
; There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards.
These components are especially sensitive to static electricity. Please do not
touch these components or the circuit boards before taking anti-static
measures. Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
; Ground the AC motor drive using the ground terminal. The grounding method
must comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be
installed.
; DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature,
direct sunlight and inflammables.
; Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3
directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.
CAU TION
; Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain the AC motor
drives.
; Even if the 3-phase AC motor is stop, a charge may still remain in the main
circuit terminals of the AC motor drive with hazardous voltages.
; If the AC motor drive is stored in no charge condition for more than 3 months,
the ambient temperature should not be higher than 30 °C. Storage longer than
one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation of the
electrolytic capacitors.
NOTE
The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download the most
updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 1-1
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 2-1
CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING .......................................................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4 WIRING .................................................................................................................. 4-1
CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS ................................................................................ 5-1
CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ......................................................................................... 6-1
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................ 7-1
CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS .................................................................................................... 8-1
CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................... 9-1
CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD .............................................................................................. 10-1
CHAPTER 11 SUMMARPY OF PARAMETERS........................................................................ 11-1
CHPAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS.................................................. 12-1
CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES............................................................................................. 13-1
CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................... 14-1
CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW...................................................................................... 15-1
CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION ................................................................................................. 16-1
CHAPTER 17 HOW TO SELECT THE RIGHT AC MOTOR DIRVE........................................... 17-1
CHAPTER 18 SUGGESTIONS AND ERROR CORRECTIONS FOR STANDARD AC MOTOR

DRIVES ..................................................................................................................................... 18-1
Application Control BD V1.01;

Keypad V1.01;

Summary of Updates|C2000 Series
Publication History
The following changes summarize the differences to the C2000 Simplified Manual, Version
5011694702.
Chatpers Changes Detail

[Table of Content] New New Chapters:
• Chapter 2 Installation
• Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
• Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings
• Chapter 15 CANopen Overview
• Chapter 16 PLC Function
• (Applicable model, AC motor drive selection)
Applicable model
AC motor drive selection
[01 Introduction] New Frame FRAME A~H
KPC-CC01 digital keypad
Update Serial number
[02 Installation] New Mounting clearances and wiring information
Update Unpacking details moved to CH3
[03 Unpacking] New FRAME F~H
FRAME H secure the drive
FRAME F~H lifting weight
[04Wiring] New RB-RC power protection system diagram
Updates Wiring diagram 1, 2
Control circuit description
Figure1,2
Figure 3 FRAME E-H DC-LINK
[05 Main circuit terminal]
Update
Remove the cover for wiring figure
Main circuit terminal specifications
Frame A~E (max. and min. wire gauge,torque, note, diagram)
[06 Control circuit terminal] Update Remove the cover for wiring figure
[07 Optional Acessories ] Update 1. All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
2. AC Reactor
3. EMI Filter
4. Fan kit Model 『MKC-FFKB』
5. Fan kit Model 『MKC-GFKM』
[08 Option cards] New EMC-BPS01: terminal Screw Sepecifications
Update EMC-PG01O, EMC-PG01L, EMC-PG01U, EMC-PG01R:
terminal Screw epecifications, wiring diagram
[09 Specification] New AC Drive Weight
Update Braking Chopper
DC reactor
EMC Filter
EMC-COP01
[10 Digital Keypad] New 10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
[11 Summary of Parameters] Update Group 00
[12 Description of Parameters] Pr. 00-04, 00-29, 00-40,
Group 01
Pr. 01-34, 01-43, 01-44,
Goup 02
Pr.02-10, 02-12, 02-18~02-20, 02-34
Goup 03
Pr.03-06, 03-15~03-17
Group 05
0-1
Pr.05-05~05-09, 05-018~05-21
Group 06
Pr.06-48, 06-69, 06-70
Group 07
Pr.07-05
Group 08
Pr.08-00, 08-06
Group 09
Pr.09-04, 09-31, 09-43
Group 10
Pr.10-31~10-42
Group 11
Pr.11-02, 11-13, 11-39, 11-42
NEW Pr. 02-55~02-58,
[13 Warning Codes] New PLra
[14 Fault Codes and New Fault code:
Descriptions] “ryF” “PGF5”, “FStp”, “ictE”
Update LCM display icons
Fault codes:
“oH1”, “oH2”, “Uoc”, “Voc”, “Woc”,
Remove LED display content
Fault code:
“PWR”, “ccod”, “ocU”, “ovU”,
[15 CAN Slave] Update 15.3 How to control by CANopen
[16 PLC] Update 16.6 Commands
16.7 Error Code and Troubleshoot
[18 ] NEW New charpter
0-2
Chapter 1 Introduction|C2000 Series
Chapter 1 Introduction
Receiving and Inspection

After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
1. Please inspect the unit after unpacking to assure it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure
that the part number printed on the package corresponds with the part number indicated on the
nameplate.
2. Make sure that the voltage for the wiring lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate. Please
install the AC motor drive according to this manual.
3. Before applying the power, please make sure that all the devices, including power, motor, control
board and digital keypad, are connected correctly.
4. When wiring the AC motor drive, please make sure that the wiring of input terminals “R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3” and output terminals”U/T1, V/T2, W/T3” are correct to prevent drive damage.
5. When power is applied, select the language and set parameter groups via the digital keypad
(KPC-CC01). When executes trial run, please begin with a low speed and then gradually increases
the speed untill the desired speed is reached.
Nameplate Information
AC Dri ve Mode l MODEL:VFD007C43A
Inpu t Volta ge/Current INPUT:
Normal Duty: 3PH 380-4 80V 50/60Hz 4.3A
Heavy Duty: 3PH 38 0-4 80V 50/60Hz 4.1A
Output Voltage /Cu rren t OUTPUT:
Normal Duty: 3PH 0-480 V 3A 2.4KVA 1HP
Heavy Duty: 3PH 0- 480 V 2.9A 2.3KVA 1 HP
Frequ ency Range FREQUENCY RANGE:
Normal Duty: 0-600Hz
Heavy Duty: 0-300Hz
Firmware Versio n Version: VX.XX
Certifications
Encl osure type (IPXX)
Serial Number 007 C4 3A7T9300 002

DELTA E LEC TRONIC S. INC .
MAD E IN XXXXXXX
1-1
Model Name
VFD 007 C 43 A
Versi on ty pe
Inpu t vo ltage
23:2 30V 3-PHASE
43:4 60V 3-PHASE
C2000 serie s
Appli cabl e motor capacity
007 :1HP(0.75 kW)~ 3350:475HP(335kW
Refer to the specifications for detail s
Series name(Variable Frequ ency Drive)
Serial Number
007C43A0 T 9 30 0002
Production numb er
Production we ek
Production year
T: Tauy uan W: Wujian
S: Sha nghai Production factory
460V 3-PHASE 1HP(0.75kW)
Mo del numbe r
1-2
RFI Jumper
RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress the
interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line.
Frame A~C
Screw Torque: 8~10kg-cm(6.9-8.7 lb -in.)
Loosen the screws and remove the MOV-PLATE. Fasten the screws back to the original position after
MOV-PLATE is removed.
1-3
Frame D~H
Remove the MOV-PLATE by hands, no screws need to be loosen.
Main power isolated from earth:

If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off. Then
the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage
(according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current.
CAUTION!
1. When power is applied to the AC motor drive, do not cut off the RFI jumper.
2. Make sure main power is switched off before cutting the RFI jumper.
3. The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1,000V. Besides,
electro-magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI jumper.
4. Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth.
5. The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi-pot tests are performed. The mains power and motor must be
separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are too high.
6. To prevent drive damage, the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC motor drive is
installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power
system or a corner grounded TN system.
1-4
Dimensions
Frame A
VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/E;
VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 D1* S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
130.0 250.0 170.0 116.0 236.0 45.8 6.2 22.2 34.0 28.0
A1
[5.12] [9.84] [6.69] [4.57] [9.29] [1.80] [0.24] [0.87] [1.34] [1.10]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-5
Frame B
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E; VFD150C43A/E
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Unit: mm [inch]
190.0 320.0 190.0 173.0 303.0 77.9 8.5 22.2 34.0 28.0
B1
[7.48] [12.60] [7.48] [6.81] [11.93] [3.07] [0.33] [0.87] [1.34] [1.10]
1-6
Frame C
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E; VFD300C43A/E
See Detail A
See Detail B

Unit: mm [inch]
250.0 400.0 210.0 231.0 381.0 92.9 8.5 22.2 34.0 50.0
C1
[9.84] [15.75] [8.27] [9.09] [15.00] [3.66] [0.33] [0.87] [1.34] [1.97]
1-7
Frame D
D1: VFD300C23A; VFD370C23A; VFD370C43A; VFD450C43A; VFD550C43A; VFD750C43A
D
W SEE DETAIL A D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
S2
SEE DETAIL B
S1 S1
DETAIL A DETAIL B
(MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
330.0 - 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2 16.0 11.0 18.0
D1 - - -
[12.99] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37] [4.22] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71]
1-8
D2: VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD370C43E; VFD450C43E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E
D
W SEE DETAIL A D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
H
S2
SEE DETAIL B
1 1
3 3
2 2
S1 S1
DETAIL A DETAIL B
(MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
330.0 688.3 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2 16.0 11.0 18.0 76.2 34.0 22.0
D2
[12.99] [27.10] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37] [4.22] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71] [3.00] [1.34] [0.87]
1-9
Frame E
E1: VFD450C23A; VFD550C23A; VFD750C23A; VFD900C43A; VFD1100C43A
W D
W1 D1
H1
H2
H3
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1, S2 S3 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3
370.0 300.0 335.0 589 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 - - -
E1 -
[14.57] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71]
1-10
Frame E
E2: VFD450C23E; VFD550C23E; VFD750C23E; VFD900C43E; VFD1100C43E
W D
W1 D1
H1
H2
H3
H
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1, S2 S3 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3
370.0 715.8 300.0 335.0 589 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 22.0 34.0 92.0
E2
[14.57] [28.18] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71] [0.87] [1.34] [3.62]
1-11
Frame F
F1: VFD900C23A; VFD1320C43A; VFD1600C43A
W D
W1 D1
See Detail A
H1
H2
H3
See Detail B S3 D2
S1
S2
S1
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 S3
420.0 - 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0
F1
[16.54] [11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23] [4.88] [0.71] [0.51] [0.98] [0.71]
1-12
Frame F
F2: VFD900C23E; VFD1320C43E; VFD1600C43E
W D
W1 D1
See Detail A
H1
H2
H3
H
See Detail B S3 D2
S1
2
1
1
3
3
2
S2
S1
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 S3
420.0 940.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0
F2
[16.54] [37.00] [11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23] [4.88] [0.71] [0.51] [0.98] [0.71]
Frame ψ1 ψ2 ψ3
F2 92.0 35.0 22.0
[3.62] [1.38] [0.87]
1-13
Frame G
G1: VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A
W D
W1
H3
H2
H1
S3
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 S1 S2 S3 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3
500.0 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0
G1 - - - -
[19.69] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06]
1-14
Frame G
G2: VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E
W D
W1
H3
H2
H1
H
S3
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 S1 S2 S3 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3
500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
G2
[19.69] [48.83] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
1-15
Frame H
H1: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 H1 H2 H3 H4
700.0 1435.0 398.0 630.0 290.0 1403.0 1346.6
H1 - - - - - -
[27.56] [56.5] [15.67] [24.8] [11.42] [55.24] [53.02]
Frame H5 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 S1 S2 S3 ψ1 ψ2 ψ3
- 45.0 13.0 26.5 25.0
H1 - - - - - - - -
[1.77] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
1-16
Frame H
H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1
Unit: mm [inch]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 1701.6
H2 - - -
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99]
Frame H5 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 S1 S2 S3 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
- 51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0
H2 - - -
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.39] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
1-17
Frame H
H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E
Unit: mm [inch]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 1701.6
H3 - - -
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.8] [19.69] [24.8] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99]
Frame H5 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 S1 S2 S3 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
- 51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
H3
[2.01] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.39] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
1-18
Digital Keypad
KPC-CC01
1-19
Chapter 2 Installation|C2000 Series
Chapter 2 Installation
Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation

NOTE
; Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood saw dust, metal particles, etc. from
adhereing to the heat sink
; Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one,
use a metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating and to
prevent the risk of fire accident.
; Install the AC motor drive in Pollution Degree 2 environments only: normallyl only
nonconductive pollution occurs and temporary conductivity caused by condensation is
expected.
The appearances shown in the following figures are for reference only.
Airflow direction: (Blue arrow) inflow (Red arrow) outflow
Single drive installation Side-by-side installation(Frame A-C)
(Frame A-H)
Multiple drives, side-by-side installation（Frame A,B,C, G, H）
2-1
Multiple drives, side-by-side installation (Frame D, E, F) Install metal separation between the drives.
Multiple drives side-by-side installation and in rows (Frame A,B,C )

Ta: Frame A~G Ta*: Frame H
When installing one AC motor drive below another one (top-bottom installation), use a metal separation
between the drives to prevent mutual heating. The temperature measured at the fan’s inflow side must be
lower than the temperature measured at the operation side. If the fan’s inflow temperature is higher, use
a thicker or larger size of metal seperature. Operation temperature is the temperature measured at 50mm
away from the fan’s inflow side. (As shown in the figure below)
Minimum mounting clearance

Frame A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm)
A~C 60 30 10 0
D~F 100 50 - 0
G 200 100 - 0
H 350 0 0 200 (100, Ta=40℃)
Frame A VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A;

VFD022C43A/E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/E; VFD040C43A/E; VFD055C43A/E
Frame B VFD055C23A; VFD75C23A; VFD075C43A/E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/E;
VFD150C43A/E
Frame C VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD185C43A/E; VFD220C23A; VFD220C43A/E;
VFD300C43A/E;
Frame D VFD300C23A/E; VFD370C23A/E; VFD370C43A/E; VFD450C43A/E; VFD550C43A/E;
VFD750C43A/E
2-2
Frame E VFD450C23A/E; VFD550C23A/E; VFD750C23A/E; VFD900C43A/E; VFD1100C43A/E

Frame F VFD900C23A/E; VFD1320C43A/E; VFD1600C43A/E
Frame G VFD1850C43A; VFD2200C43A; VFD1850C43E; VFD2200C43E
Frame H VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A; VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1;
VFD3550C43E-1;VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E
NOTE
1. The minimum mounting clearances stated in the table above applies to AC motor drives frame A to D. A drive
fails to follow the minimum mounting clearances may cause the fan to malfunction and heat dissipation problem.
NOT E
※ The mounting clearances stated in the figure is for installing the drive in an
open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or
electric box), please follow the following three rules: (1) Keep the minimum
mounting clearances. (2) Install a ventilation equipment or an air
conditioner to keep surrounding temperature lower than operation
temperature. (3) Refer to parameter setting and set up Pr. 00-16, Pr.00-17,
and Pr. 06-55.
※ The following table shows the heat dissipation and the required air
volume when installing a single drive in a confined space. When
installing multiple drives, the required air volume shall be multiplied
by the number the drives.
※ Refer to the chart (Air flow rate for cooling) for ventilation equipment
design and selection.
※ Refer to the chart (Power dissipation) for air conditioner design and
selection.
Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor

drive
Flow Rate (cfm) Flow Rate (m3/hr) Power Dissipation
Model No. Loss External
External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total
(Heat sink)
VFD007C23A - - - - - - 33 27 61
VFD015C23A 14 - 14 24 - 24 56 31 88
VFD022C23A 14 - 14 24 - 24 79 36 115
VFD037C23A 10 - 10 17 - 17 113 46 159
VFD055C23A 40 14 54 68 24 92 197 67 264
VFD075C23A 66 14 80 112 24 136 249 86 335
VFD110C23A 58 14 73 99 24 124 409 121 529
VFD150C23A 166 12 178 282 20 302 455 161 616
VFD185C23A 166 12 178 282 20 302 549 184 733
VFD220C23A 146 12 158 248 20 268 649 216 865
VFD300C23A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 913 186 1099
VFD370C23A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 1091 220 1311
VFD450C23A/E 228 73 301 387 124 511 1251 267 1518
VFD550C23A/E 228 73 301 387 124 511 1401 308 1709
VFD750C23A/E 246 73 319 418 124 542 1770 369 2139
VFD900C23A/E 224 112 336 381 190 571 2304 484 2788
VFD007C43A/E - - - - - - 33 25 59
VFD015C43A/E - - - - - - 45 29 74
VFD022C43A/E 14 - 14 24 - 24 71 33 104
2-3
VFD037C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 103 38 141

VFD040C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 116 42 158
VFD055C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 134 46 180
VFD075C43A/E 40 14 54 68 24 92 216 76 292
VFD110C43A/E 66 14 80 112 24 136 287 93 380
VFD150C43A/E 58 14 73 99 24 124 396 122 518
VFD185C43A/E 99 21 120 168 36 204 369 138 507
VFD220C43A/E 99 21 120 168 36 204 476 158 635
VFD300C43A/E 126 21 147 214 36 250 655 211 866
VFD370C43A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 809 184 993
VFD450C43A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 929 218 1147
VFD550C43A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 1156 257 1413
drive
Flow Rate (cfm) Flow Rate (m3/hr) Power Dissipation
(Heat sink)
VFD750C43A/E 186 30 216 316 51 367 1408 334 1742
VFD900C43A/E 257 73 330 437 124 561 1693 399 2092
VFD1100C43A/E 223 73 296 379 124 503 2107 491 2599
VFD1320C43A/E 224 112 336 381 190 571 2502 579 3081
VFD1600C43A/E 289 112 401 491 190 681 3096 687 3783
VFD1850C43A/E 454 771 4589
VFD2200C43A/E 454 771 5772
VFD2800C43A/E 769 1307 6381
VFD3150C43A/E 769 1307 7156
VFD3550C43A/E 769 1307 8007
※ The required airflow shown in chart is for installing single drive in a ※ The heat dissipation shown
confined space. in the chart is for installing
※ When installing the multiple drives, the required air volume should single drive in a confined
be the required air volume for single drive X the number of the space.
drives. ※ When installing the multiple
drives, volume of heat
dissipation should be the
heat dissipated for single
drive X the number of the
drives.
※ Heat dissipation for each
model is calculated by rated
voltage, current and default
carrier.
2-4
Derating Curve Diagram of Normal Duty (Pr.00-16=0)

Set Pr.06-55 = 1 Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2
Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
(40℃:UL type1 or open type_size by size)
460V 460V
VFD007~150C43A/E VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E VFD750~3550C43A/E
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz) Fc (kHz)
Set Pr.06-55 = 1 Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2

230V 230V
VFD007~110C23A VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A; VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E VFD450~900C23A/E
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz) Fc (kHz)
2-5
Derating Curve Diagram of Heavy Duty (Pr.00-16=1)

Set Pr.06-55 = 1 Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2
(40℃: UL type1 or open type_size by size)
460V 460V
VFD007~150C43A/E VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E VFD750~3550C43A/E
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz) Fc (kHz)
230V 230V
VFD007~110C23A VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A; VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E VFD450~900C23A/E
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)
90 90
Ratio(%)
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz) Fc (kHz)
2-6
Chapter 3 Unpacking|C2000 Series
Chapter 3 Unpacking
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the
warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an
extended period of time.
The AC motor drive is packed in the crate. Follows the following step for unpack:
Frame D
Crate 1 (VFDXXXCXXA) Crate 2 (VFDXXXCXXE)
Loosen the 12 cover screws to open the crate. Loosen the 4 screws on the iron plates. There are 4
iron plates and in total of 16 screws.
Remove the EPEs and manual. Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and
manual.
Loosen the 8 screws that fastened on the pallet

and remove the wooden plate.
3-1
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet, remove the
ready for installation. wooden plate.
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

ready for installation.
Frame E
Loosen the 4 screws on the iron plates. There are 4 Loosen the 4 screws on the iron plates. There are
iron plates and in total of 16 screws. 4 iron plates and in total of 16 screws.
3-2
Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual. Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubbers and
manual.
Loosen the 8 screws on the pallet as shown in the Loosen the 10 screws on the pallet and remove the
following figure. wooden plate.
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation. ready for installation.
3-3
Frame F
Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a Remove the 6 clips on the side of the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.) flat-head screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
6
6
5
5
4
4
1
1 2
2
3
3
manual.
Loosen the 5 screws on the pallet Loosen the 9 screws on the pallet and remove the
as shown in the following figure. wooden plate.
5
4 9
8
3 wood plate2 7
6
2 5
wood plate1 4
1 3
2
1
3-4
ready for installation ready for installation.
.
Frame G
flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.) flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
4 4
5 5
6 6
1 1
2 2
3 3
Remove the crate cover, EPEs and manual. Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual.
3-5
Loosen the 5 screws as shown in following figure: Loosen the 9 screws and remove the wooden plate.
3 3
11 5 4
6
4 7
12 98
10 wood plate1
5 wood plate2 1
wood plate3
wood plate5
wood plate4 2
1
ready for installation. ready for installation.
Frame H
Crate 1 (VFDXXXCXXA) Crate 2 (VFDXXXCXXE-1)
flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.) flathead screwdriver. (As shown in figure below.)
3-6
manual.
Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6 Loosen the 6 screws on the top then remove 6
metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in
figure below. figure below.
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen 6 of the M6 screws on the side and remove
ready for installation. the 2 plates, as shown in below. The removed
screws and plates can be used to secure the AC
motor drive from the external.
3-7
Secure the drive from the external. (Skip to the

next step if this situation does not apply to you.)
Loosen 8 of M8 screws on the both sides and place
the 2 plates that were removed from the last step.
Fix the plates to AC motor drive by fasten 8 of the
M8 screws. (As shown in below)
Torque: 150~180kg-cm (130.20~156.24lb-in.)
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

ready for installation.
Frame H
Crate 3 (VFDXXXCXXE)
Use flathead screwdriver to remove the clips on the side of the crate, 8 clips in total.
3-8
Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual.
Loosen the 6 screws on the cover, remove 6 metal washers and 6 plastic washers as shown in below:
Loosen 6 of the M6 screws on the side and removes the 2 plates, as shown in following figure. The
removed screws and plates can be used to secure AC motor drive from the external.
3-9
Secure the drive from the internal. Secure the drive from the external.
Loosen 18 of the M6 screws and remove the top Loosen 8 of the M8 screws on the both sides and
cover as shown in figure 2. Mount the cover (figure place the 2 plates that were removed from the last
1) back to the drive by fasten the M6 screws to the step. Fix the plates to rive by fasten 8 of the M8
two sides of the drive, as shown in figure 2. screws. (As shown in figure below).
Torque: 35~45kg-cm (30.38~39.06lb-in.)
Torque: 150~180kg-cm (130.20~156.24lb-in.)
Figure 1
Top cover (Use M12 screws)
Figure 2
Fasten 6 of the M6 screws back to the original position where it was removed. As shown in the figure:
3-10
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation.
Frame H Secure the drive

(VFDXXXCXXA)
Screw: M12*6
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
3-11
(VFDXXXCXXE) & (VFDXXXCXXE-1)
Secure the drive from the internal.
Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
Secure the drive from the external.

Screw: M12*8
Torque: 340-420kg-cm [295.1-364.6lb-in.]
3-12
The Lifting Hook

The arrows indicate the location of the lifting holes of frame D to H, as shown in figure below:
D E
F
Figure 1 Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
3-13
Ensure the lifting hook properly goes through the Ensure the angle between the lifting holes and the
lifting hole, as shown in the following diagram. lifting device is within the specification, as shown
(Applicable to Frame D~E) in the following figure. (Applicable to Frame D~E)
(Applicable to Frame F~H)
(Applicable to Frame F~H)
3-14
Weight
VFDXXXXCXXA
D 37.6 kg(82.9 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXE
D 40 kg(88.2 Ibs.)
VFDXXXXCXXA E 63.6 kg(140.2 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXE E 66 kg(145.5 Ibs.)
VFDXXXXCXXA 85kg(187.2 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXE 88kg(193.8 Ibs.)
VFDXXXXCXXA 130kg(286.5 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCXXE 138kg(303.9 lbs)
H1: VFD2800C43A; VFD3150C43A; VFD3550C43A 235kg (518.1lbs)
H2: VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1 257kg (566.6lbs)
3-15
H3: VFD2800C43E; VFD3150C43E; VFD3550C43E 263kg (579.8lbs)
3-16
Chapter 4 Wiring|C2000 Series
Chapter 4 Wiring
After removing the front cover, examine if the power and control terminals are clearly noted. Please read
following precautions before wiring.
; Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may result
in damage to the equipments. The voltage and current should lie within the range as indicated on
the nameplate (Chapter 1-1).
; All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike or
electric shock.
; Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is made
by the loose screws due to vibration
; It is crucial to turn off the AC motor drive power before any wiring installation are
made. A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages
even if the power has been turned off therefore it is suggested for users to measure
DANGER
the remaining voltage before wiring. For your personnel saftery, please do not
perform any wiring before the voltage drops to a safe level < 25 Vdc. Wiring
installation with remaninig voltage condition may caus sparks and short circuit.
; Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform
installation, wiring and commissioning. Make sure the power is turned off before
wiring to prevent electric shock.
; When wiring, please choose the wires with specification that complys with local
regulation for your personnel safety.
; Check following items after finishing the wiring:
1. Are all connections correct?
2. Any loosen wires?
3. Any short-circuits between the terminals or to ground?
4-1
Wiring Diagram for Frame A~C DC choke

* It pr ovides 3-phase power (optional) Br ak e res istor
Jumper (optional)
F us e/NF B(No F use B reaker)

- +2 +1 B1 B2
R (L1) R(L1) Motor
U(T 1)
S(L2) S(L2)
V( T2) IM
T (L3) T (L3) 3~
W( T3)
It is recommended to install a SA
protective circ uit at RB-RC MC
to protect it from system RB 1
damage.
When fault oc curs, the ON
RC 1
OFF
contact will switch ON to shut
the power and protect the power s ystem. MC
Fac tor y setting: NPN (SINK) Mode +24 V

RA1 Multi-function output terminals
Please refer to COM 2 50 Vac /5A (N.O.)
F WD/STOP 2 50 Vac /3A (N.C.)
Figure 2 for wir ing RB1
FWD
of NPN mode and REV/STO P 250 Vac /2A (N.O.)
REV R C1 Estim ate at COS ( 0.4)
PNP mode. Multi-s tep 1
MI1 2 50Vac /1.2A ( N.C.)
Multi-s tep 2 RA2
MI2 Estim ate at COS (0.4 )
Multi-s tep 3 3 0Vdc /5A (N.O.)
Fac tor y MI3 RB2
Multi-s tep 4 3 0Vdc /3A (N.C.)
setting MI4
N/A R C2
MI5
N/A
MI6
N/A DFMMulti-function outp ut
MI7 fre quency te rmin als
N/A 30V 30mA 10 0kHz
MI8
NOTE DCM
Digital Si gnal C ommon
DCM
* MI8 can input 100 kHz pulses Multi-f unction outp ut
* Do NOT ap ply the mains vo ltage directly MO1 fre quency te rmin als
to a bove te rmin als. 48V /50 mA
S1 Multi-f unction outp ut

Po wer r e mo val sa fe ty fu nct ion f or MO2 fre quency te rmin als
EN 9 54 -1 a nd IEC / EN 61 50 8 48V /50 mA
Digital Signal Commo n
SCM MCM Multi-f unction
Ph otocoup le r Ou tput
+10V AFM1 An alog Multi-function
+1 0V/ 20 mA
3 Ou tput Terminal
0~1 0V/ 0 ~2 0mA
5K 2 AVI 0~ 10VDC/ -10~ +10V
1 4 ~20 mA/0~1 0V ACM An alog S ig nal common
ACI
- 10 ~+10 V AFM2
AUI An alog Mult i-f unction
An alog S ig nal Common Ou tput Terminal
AC M 0~ 10VDC/ 4~2 0mA
-10V/ 20 mA -10V
Option
Slot 1 IO ext ensio n car d
Modb us RS-485 Option

CAN B US Slot 2 PG extensio n ca r d
Pin 1~2 , 7, 8: reserved 8 1 8 1
Pin 3, 6 :G ND SG + Option IO&RELAY
Pin 4:S G- Slot 3 e xten si on ca rd
Pin 5:S G+ SG－
Main circ uit (power) terminals Contr ol terminals Shielded l eads & Cable
4-2
Wiring Diagram for Fra me D a nd Frames Abov e

* It pr ovides 3-phase power
Please ref er to f igure 3
F us e/NF B(No F use Breaker) +/D C+ -/DC -
R(L1) R(L1) Motor

U(T 1)
S( L2) S( L2)
V( T2) IM
T (L3) T (L3) 3~
W( T3)
It is rec ommended to install a SA
protective cir cuit at RB- RC MC
to protect it from system RB 1
damage. RC 1
OFF ON
When fault oc curs, the
contact will switch ON to s hut MC
the power and protect the power system.
F ac tor y sett ing: NPN (SINK) Mode +24V Multi-function out put t erminals
RA1
Please refer to CO M 2 50 Va c/5A (N.O .)
F WD/ST OP R B1 2 50 Va c/3A (N.C .)
F igur e 2 for wir ing FWD
REV/ ST OP 2 50Va c/2 A (N.O .)
of NPN mode and RE V RC1 E stim ate at COS (0.4 )
PNP mode. Multi-s tep 1
MI1 2 50 Vac/1 .2A ( N.C.)
Mult i-s tep 2 RA2
MI2 E stim ate at COS ( 0.4)
Mult i-s tep 3
F ac tor y MI3 R B2 3 0V dc /5A (N.O.)
Multi-s tep 4 3 0V dc /3A (N.C.)
set ting MI4
N/ A RC2
MI5
N/ A
MI6
N/ A DFMMulti-f unc tion outp ut
MI7
N/ A fre quency te rm in als
MI8 30V 30mA 100k Hz
NOTE Digital Si gnal C om mon DCM
DCM
* MI8 c an input 100k Hz puls es Multi-f unction outp ut
* Do NO T apply th e mains v oltag e direc tly M O1 fre quenc y te rm in als
t o a bov e te rm in als. 48V /50 mA
S1 M ulti-f unc tion outp ut
po w er r em ova l sa fe ty fu nc tio n
MO2 fre quenc y te rm in als
fo r E N9 54 -1 an d I EC /EN 6 150 8 48V /50 mA
Digital S ignal Commo n
SCM MCM Multi-f unction
Ph otoc oup le r Ou tput
+10V AFM1 An alog Mu lt i-f unc tion
+10V/ 20mA
3 0 ~10 V/ 0 ~2 0mA Ou tput Terminal
5K 2 AVI
0~ 10VDC/ -10~ +10V
1 4 ~2 0 mA /0~1 0V ACM An alog S ig nal c ommon
ACI
-10~+10V AFM2
AUI An alog Mu lt i-f unc tion
An alog S ig nal Commo n Ou tput Terminal
ACM
0~10VDC/ 4~2 0mA
- 10 V/ 20 mA -10V
Opt ion
IO ext en sion card
Slot 1
Modb us RS-485 Option

PG exte nsi on ca rd
CAN B US Slot 2
Pin 1~2 , 7, 8: res erv ed 8 1 8 1
Pin 3, 6 :G ND SG + Option IO& RELA Y
Pin 4:S G- Slot 3 e xtension card
SG－
Pin 5:S G+
Main circ uit (power) t erminals Contr ol t erminals Shielded l eads & Cable
4-3
Figure 1
In put power t erminals for frame G a nd H It prov ides 12 -p ulse power
Prov ides 3-p has e po we r
Fus e or NFB (non-f use break er) R/L11
R/L11 R S/L12
R
R/L21 T/L13
S S/L12 S
S/L22 R/L21
T T/L 13
T/L 23
T Y S/L22
T/L23
Figure 2
SINK（NPN）/SOURCE（PNP）Mode
1 Sink Mode 2 Sourc e Mode

with internal pow er (+24VDC) with internal power (+24VDC )
MI1 MI1
MI2 MI2
~
~
MI8 MI8
+2 4V DCM
COM COM
DCM internal c irc ui t +2 4V internal c irc ui t
3 Sink Mode 4 Sourc e Mode

with external pow er with external pow er
MI1 MI1
MI2 MI2
~
MI8 MI8
+2 4V +2 4V
COM COM
DCM DCM
external power +24V internal c irc ui t internal c irc ui t
external power +24V
4-4
Figure 3
Function of DC Link
; Applicable to Frame E~H
; Operation Instruction
1. When RST power is off, please disconnect terminal r and terminal s. (As circled in dotted line,
uninstall the gray section and properly store cable r and cable s. Cable r and cable s are not
available in optional accessories, do not dispose them.)
After terminal r and terminal s are cleared, user may now connect new power source to terminal r
and terminal s. Please connect 220Vac for 220V model and 440 Vac for 440V model.
When the drive power is on, if terminal r and terminal s are not connected to new power source
(220 Vac for 220V model and 440Vac for 440 V model), the digital keypad will display an error
message “ryF”.
2. When DC Link is used as a DC Bus connection (RST power is applied), it is not required to
remove terminal r and terminal s.
NOTE
Common DC Bus can only be applied to the drives with same power range. If in your case the
drives are in different power range, please contact with us (Delta Industrial Automation Business
Unit).
r s
4-5
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals|C2000 Series
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals

Main Circuit Diagram 1
For frame A~C Brake resis tor
(optio nal)
* Provid e 3-ph ase input power
Jumper
Fuse/NFB(No F use Breaker) - +2 +1 B1 B2

R(L1) U(T1)
R(L1) Motor
IM
S(L2)
S(L2) V(T2) 3~
T(L3) W(T3)
T(L3)
For frame A~C D C choke

(optional) Br ak e r es istor
(optional)
* Provide 3-phase i nput power J umper
F us e/N F B(N o F use B reaker) - +2 +1 B1 B2

R(L1) U(T 1)
R(L1) Motor
S(L2)
IM
S(L2) V(T2) 3~
T(L3) W(T 3)
T(L3)
For frame D and above D

* Pr ovide 3-p has e inpu t po wer
Fus e/ NFB (N o Fus e B rea ke r)

+1/DC+ -/DC- Motor
R(L1) U(T 1)
R(L1) IM
S(L2)
S(L2) V(T2) 3~
T(L3) W(T 3)
T(L3)
5-1
Po we r input te rm in als o f f rame G and H It prov ides 12 -pulse rec tifier

Provides 3-p has e po we r
Fus e or NFB (non-f us e brea ker) R/L11

R/L11 R S/L12
R
R/L21
S/L12 T/L13
S S
S/L22 R/L21
T T/L13
T/L23
T Y S/L2 2
T/L 23
Terminals Descriptions
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals 3-phase
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor
Applicable to frame A~C
+1, +2 Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor. It needs to remove the
jumper for installation.
Connections for brake unit (VFDB series)
(for 230V models: ≦22kW, built-in brake unit)
+1/DC+, -/DC-
(for 460V models: ≦30kW, built-in brake unit)
Common DC Bus
B1, B2 Connections for brake resistor (optional)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
Main power terminals
; Do not connect 3-phase model to one-phase power. R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3
has no phase-sequence requirement, it can be used upon random
selection.
; It is recommend to add a magnetic contactor (MC) to the power input
wiring to cut off power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating
the protection function of the AC motor drive. Both ends of the MC
should have an R-C surge absorber.
; Fasten the screws in the main circuit terminal to prevent sparks condition
made by the loose screws due to vibration.
; Please use voltage and current within the specification.
; When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a
current sensor with sensitivity of 200mA or above and not less than
0.1-second operation time to avoid nuisance tripping.
; Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the
two ends of the shield wire or tube.
; Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF.
5-2
Run/stop AC motor drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals

or keypad. If you still need to run/stop AC motor drives by turning power
ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per hour.
Output terminals for main circuit
; When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3 on the AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not
use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or
R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by Delta.
; DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at
the output terminals of AC motor drives.
; Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor, external
brake resistor and DC circuit
; This is the terminals used to connect the DC reactor to improve the
power factor. For the factory setting, it connects the short-circuit object.
Please remove this short-circuit object before connecting to the DC
reactor.
DC rea ct or (o ption al)
+1 +2
; When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power
transformer (600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is
switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power input circuit due
to the load changes and the converter section may be damaged. To
avoid this, it is recommend to use a serial connected AC input
reactor(6%) at the AC Motor Drive mains input side to reduce the current
and improve the input power efficiency.
; Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent

deceleration ramps, short deceleration time, too low brake torque or
requiring increased brake torque.
B rak e re sistor
(optional)
Brak e re sistor
(optional) BR
Brake un it
VFDB (o ption al)
B1 B2 + -
; The external brake resistor should connect to the terminals (B1, B2) of
AC motor drives.
; For those models without built-in brake resistor, please connect external
brake unit and brake resistor (both of them are optional) to increase
5-3
brake torque.
; When the terminals +1, +2 and - are not used, please leave the terminals
open.
; DO NOT connect [+1, -], [+2, -], [+1/DC+, -/DC-] or brake resistor directly
to prevent drive damage.
; DC+ and DC- are connected by common DC bus, please refer to
Chapter 5-1(Main Circuit Terminal) for the wiring terminal specification
and the wire gauge information.
; Please refer to the VFDB manual for more information on wire gauge
when installing the brake unit.
5-4
5-1 Main Circuit Terminals

Frame A Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Max. Wire Torque
Models Min. Wire Gauge
Gauge (±10%)
VFD007C23A 14 AWG (2.1mm2)
VFD015C23A 12 AWG (3.3mm2)
VFD022C23A 10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD037C23A 8 AWG (8.4mm2)
VFD007C43A 14 AWG (2.1mm2)
VFD007C43E 14 AWG (2.1mm2)
VFD015C43A 14 AWG (2.1mm2) M4
2
VFD015C43E 8 AWG 14 AWG (2.1mm ) 20kg-cm
VFD022C43A (8.4mm2) 14 AWG (2.1mm2) (17.4 lb-in.)
VFD022C43E 14 AWG (2.1mm2) (1.962Nm)
VFD037C43A 10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD037C43E 10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD040C43A 10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD040C43E 10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD055C43A 10 AWG (5.3mm2)
VFD055C43E 10 AWG (5.3mm2)
UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper wire
only.
1. Figure 1 shows the terminal specification.
2. Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600V, YDPU2).
Figure 1 Figure 2
5-5
Frame B Main circuit terminals:

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Max. Wire Torque
Gauge (±10%)
VFD055C23A 8 AWG (8.4mm2)
VFD075C23A 6 AWG (13.3mm2)
VFD110C23A 4 AWG (21.2mm2) M5
VFD075C43A 8 AWG (8.4mm2) 35kg-cm
4 AWG
VFD075C43E 10 AWG (5.3mm2) (30.4 lb-in.)
(21.2mm2)
VFD110C43A 8 AWG (8.4mm2) (3.434Nm)
2
VFD110C43E 8 AWG (8.4mm )
VFD150C43A 6 AWG (13.3mm2)
VFD150C43E 8 AWG (8.4mm2)
only.
NOTE
Terminal D+ [+2 & +1]: Torque: 45 kg-cm [39.0lb-in.] (4.415Nm) (±10%)

1. VFD110C23A must use 600V, 90℃ wire when surrounding
temperature exceeds 45℃.
Figure 1 Figure 2
5-6
Frame C Main circuit terminals:

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , B1, B2, +1, +2, -
Max. Wire Torque
Gauge (±10%)
VFD150C23A 1 AWG (42.4mm2)
VFD185C23A 1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
VFD220C23A 1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
M8
VFD185C43A 4 AWG (21.2mm2)
1/0 AWG 80kg-cm
VFD185C43E 6 AWG (13.3mm2)
(53.5mm2) (69.4 lb-in.)
VFD220C43A 4 AWG (21.2mm2) (7.85Nm)
2
VFD220C43E 4 AWG (21.2mm )
VFD300C43A 2 AWG (33.6mm2)
VFD300C43E 3 AWG (26.7mm2)
only.
NOTE
Terminal D+ [+2 & +1]: Torque: 90 kg-cm [78.2lb-in.] (8.83Nm) (±10%)
1. VFD220C23A must use 600V, 90℃ wire when surrounding
temperature exceeds 40℃.
Figure 1 Figure 2
5-7
Frame D Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1/DC+, -/DC-

Max. Wire Torque
Gauge (±10%)
VFD300C23A 4/0 AWG (107mm2)
VFD370C23A 250MCM (127mm2)
VFD370C43A 300MCM 1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
2
VFD450C43A (152mm ) 2/0 AWG (67.4mm2)
VFD550C43A 3/0 AWG (85mm2) M8
VFD750C43A 300MCM (152mm2) 200kg-cm
VFD300C23E 3/0 AWG (85mm2) (173 lb-in.)
2
VFD370C23E 4/0 AWG (107mm ) (19.62Nm)
VFD370C43E 4/0 AWG. 1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
VFD450C43E (107mm2) 1/0 AWG (53.5mm2)
VFD550C43E 2/0 AWG (67.4mm2)
VFD750C43E 4/0 AWG (107mm2)
1. UL installations must use 600V, 75oC or 90 oC wires. Use copper
wire only.
3. Figure 2 shows the specification of insulated heat shrink tubing
that comply with UL (600V, YDPU2).
Figure 1 Figure 2
5-8
Frame E
Main circuit terminals:
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, , +1/DC+, -/DC-
Max. Wire Torque
Gauge (±10%)
VFD450C23A 1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD550C23A 3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
300MCM*2
VFD750C23A 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2)
(152mm2*2)
VFD900C43A 1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
Inco rrec t i ns a
t la
l ti on may
res ul t i n d am ag e to op ti on
or i nv erter.Pl ea se re fe r to
op e ra tio n ma nu al fo r
n
i sta l ati on n
警
i struc ti on s.
告 M8
3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
錯誤的安裝將會導
VFD1100C43A
致變頻器及選配品
損壞，安裝前請務
必參閱使用手冊後
200kg-cm
才進行裝配。
VFD450C23E 2
1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm *2) (173 lb-in.)
(19.62Nm)
VFD550C23E 2/0AWG*2 (67.4mm2*2)
4/0 AWG*2
VFD750C23E 3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
(107mm2*2)
VFD900C43E 1/0AWG*2 (53.5mm2*2)
VFD1100C43E 2/0AWG*2 (67.4mm2*2)
1. UL installations must use 600V, 75oC or 90 oC wires. Use copper
wire only.
2. Specification of grounding wire : 300MCM [152 mm2]
Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (±10%), as shown in
Figure 2.
3. Figure 1 shows the specification for ring lug.
that comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1 Figure 2 E
17.0MAX.
+0
16-4
31MAX.
70MAX.
8.2MI 28.0MAX.
N.
65.0MAX.
8.2MIN
.
26.5MAX.
Figure 3
5-9
Frame F
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC-
Max. Wire Torque
Gauge (±10%)
VFD900C23A 300MCM*2 (152mm2*2)
300MCM*2
VFD1320C43A 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2)
(152mm2*2) M8
VFD1600C43A 300MCM*2 (152mm2) 200kg-cm
VFD900C23E 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2) (173 lb-in.)
4/0 AWG*2 (19.62Nm)
VFD1320C43E 2 3/0AWG*2 (85mm2*2)
(107mm *2)
VFD1600C43E 4/0 AWG*2 (107mm2*2)
1. VFD900C23A/E installations must use 90℃ wire.
2. For other model, UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃
wire. Use copper wire only.
3. Specification of grounding wire ：300MCM*2 [152 mm2*2]
Torque: M8 200kg-cm (173 lb-in.) (19.62Nm) (±10%)
5. Figure 1 shows the specification for ring lug.
that comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1 Figure 2
+0
16-4
31MAX.
70MAX.
8.2MI
N .
26.5MAX.
5-10
Frame G
R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32
Max. Wire Torque

Gauge (±10%)
VFD1850C43A 2/0AWG*4 (67.4mm2*4)
M8
VFD2200C43A 300MCM*4 3/0AWG*4 (85mm2*4) 200kg-cm
2
VFD1850C43E (152mm *4) 1/0AWG*4 (53.5mm2*4) (173 lb-in.)
(19.62Nm)
VFD2200C43E 2/0AWG*4 (67.4mm2*4)

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC-
Max. Wire Torque
Gauge (±10%)
VFD1850C43A 400MCM*2 (203mm2*2)
M12
VFD2200C43A 500MCM*2 500MCM*2 (253mm2*2) 408kg-cm
2
VFD1850C43E (253mm *2) 300MCM*2 (152mm2*2) (354lb-in.)
( 40Nm)
VFD2200C43E 400MCM*2 (203mm2*2)
1. UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper

wire only.
2. Use 600V, 90℃wire for VFD2200C43A when the surrounding
temperature is over 45℃.
3. Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the specification for using ring lug.
4. Specification for grounding wire : 300MCM*4 [152 mm2*2]
Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (±10%), as shown
in Figure 1
5. Figure 3 and Figure 4 shows the specification of insulated heat
shrink tubing that comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1 Figure2
R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC-
T/L31, T/L32,
21.0(MAX.)
54MAX.
+0
16-4
31MAX.
42.0(MAX.)
8.2MI
N. 12.2(MIN.)
26.5MAX. 42.0(MAX.)
70.0(MAX.)
Figure 3 Figure 4
5-11
Frame H Main circuit terminals:
R/11,R12,S/21,S/22,T/31,T/32, U/T1,V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+,

-/DC-
Max. Wire Torque
Gauge (±10%)
VFD2800C43A 4/0 AWG*4 (107mm2*4)
VFD3150C43A 300MCM*4 (152mm2*4)
VFD3550C43A 300MCM*4 (152mm2*4)
VFD2800C43E-1 3/0 AWG*4 (85mm2*4)M8
300MCM*4 200kg-cm
VFD3150C43E-1 4/0 AWG*4 (107mm2*4)
(152mm2*4) (173 lb-in.)
2
VFD3550C43E-1 250MCM*4 (127mm *4) (19.62Nm)
VFD2800C43E 3/0 AWG*4 (85mm2*4)
VFD3150C43E 4/0 AWG*4 (107mm2*4)
VFD3550C43E 250MCM*4 (127mm2*4)
1. UL installations must use 600V, 75℃ or 90℃ wire. Use copper

wire only.
2. Figure 1 shows the specification for using the ring lug.
3. Specification of grounding wire : 300MCM*4 [152 mm2*4],
Torque: M8 180kg-cm (156 lb-in.) (17.64Nm) (±10%), as
shown in figure 1.
4. Figure 2 shows the specification of heat shrink tubing that
comply with UL (600C, YDPU2).
Figure 1 Figure 2
5-12
Chapter 6 Control Terminals|C2000 Series
Chapter 6 Control Terminals

Please remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals,
The drive appearances shown in the figures are for reference only, a real drive may look different.
Remove the cover for wiring. Frame A~H

Frame A&B Frame C&D
Loosen the screws and press the tabs on both sides Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
to remove the cover.
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame E
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward.
Frame F
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward
6-1
Frame G
Screw torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward
Frame H
Screw torque: 14~16Kg-cm [12.15~13.89lb-in.] To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward
0-1 0V
0-1 0V 0-1 0V 0-2 0m A Ope n RC2 RB2 RA 2R C1 R B1 R A1
AF M1 AFM2 AVI AC I 48 5
-10 -10V
0-2 0m A 0-2 0m A 0-1 0V 12 0
AFM1 + 10 V AVI AC I MO1 MO2 MC M+24 VC OM F W D MI1 MI3 MI5 MI7
AF M 2-10 V AUI ACM S 1 S C M DFM DC M R EV MI 2 MI4MI 6 MI 8 S G+ SG-
Re mo va bl e Te rm in al Blo ck
Specifications of Control Terminal
Wire Gauge: 26~16AWG（0.1281-1.318mm2）,

Torque: (A) 5kg-cm [4.31Ib-in.] (0.49Nm) (As shown in figure above)
(B) 8kg-cm [6.94Ib-in.] (0.78Nm) (As shown in figure above)
6-2
Wiring precautions:
Reserves 5mm and properly install the wire into the terminal; fasten the installation by a
slotted screwdriver. If the wire is stripped, sort the wire before install into the terminal.
Flathead screwdriver: blade width 3.5mm, tip thickness 0.6mm
In the figure above, the factory setting for S1-SCM is short circuit. The factory setting for
+24V-COM is short circuit and SINK mode (NPN); please refer to Chapter 4 Wiring for more
detail.
Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode)
Digital control signal common +24V±5% 200mA
+24V
(Source)
Digital control signal common Common for multi-function input terminals
COM
(Sink)
FWD-DCM:
FWD Forward-Stop command ONÎ forward running
OFFÎ deceleration to stop
REV-DCM:
REV Reverse-Stop command ONÎ reverse running
OFFÎ deceleration to stop
Refer to parameters 02-01~02-08 to program the
MI1
multi-function inputs MI1~MI8.
~ Multi-function input 1~8
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA≧11Vdc
MI8
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA≦11Vdc
Digital frequency meter Regard the pulse voltage as the output monitor
DFM signal
DFM Duty-cycle: 50%
Min. load impedance: 1kΩ/100pf
DCM
Max. current: 30mA
DCM Digital frequency signal common Max. voltage: 30Vdc
The AC motor drive releases various monitor
Multi-function Output 1 signals, such as drive in operation, frequency
MO1 attained and overload indication, via transistor (open
(photocoupler) collector).
MO1
Multi-function Output 2
MO2 MO2
(photocoupler)
MCM
MCM Multi-function Output Common Max 48Vdc 50mA
Multi-function relay output 1 Resistive Load:

RA1
(N.O.) a 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 250VAC
Multi-function relay output 1 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 30VDC
RB1
(N.C.) b
Inductive Load (COS 0.4):
RC1 Multi-function relay common 2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 250VAC
Multi-function relay output 2 2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A(N.C.) 30VDC
RA2
(N.O.) a
Multi-function relay output 2 It is used to output each monitor signal, such as
RB2 drive is in operation, frequency attained or overload
(N.C.) b
indication.
RC2 Multi-function relay common
+10V Potentiometer power supply Analog frequency setting: +10Vdc 20mA
6-3
Terminals Terminal Function Factory Setting (NPN mode)

Analog frequency setting: -10Vdc 20mA
-10V Potentiometer power supply
Analog voltage input

+10V AVI circuit
Impedance: 20kΩ
Range: 4 ~ 20mA/0~10V =0~Max. Output
AVI AVI
Frequency (Pr.01-00)
AVI switch, factory setting is 0~10V
ACM
internal circuit
Analog current input

ACI ACI circuit
Impedance: 250Ω
Range: 4 ~ 20mA/0~10V= 0 ~ Max. Output
ACI
Frequency (Pr.01-00)
ACI Switch, factory setting is 4~20mA
ACM internal circuit
Auxiliary analog voltage input

+10
~ AUI cir cuit
- 10V Impedance: 20kΩ
AUI AU I Range: -10~+10VDC=0 ~ Max. Output
Frequency(Pr.01-00)
AC M
internal cir cuit
0~10V impedance 100kΩ (voltage output)
-10~10V impedance 100kΩ (voltage output)
Output current: 2mA max
AFM1 Resolution: 0~10V corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0~10V Æ -10~+10V
AFM Switch, factory setting is 0~10V
0~10V impedance 100kΩ (voltage output)
0~20mA impedance100Ω (current output)
Output current: 20mA max
AFM2 Resolution: 0~10V corresponds to Max. operation
frequency
Range: 0~10V Æ 4~20mA
AFM Switch, factory setting is 0~10V
ACM Analog Signal Common Common for analog terminals
S1
Power removal safety function for EN954-1 and IEC/EN61508
SCM
SG+ Modbus RS-485
PIN 1,2,7,8 :Reserved PIN 3, 6: GND
SG-
PIN 4: SG- PIN 5: SG+
NOTE: Wire size of analog control signals: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) with shielded wire
6-4
Analog input terminals (AVI, ACI, AUI, ACM)

; Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it as
short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting the shield to
terminal ACM can bring improvement.
; If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect a
capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagram.
AVI/AC I/ AUI
C
AC M
ferrite core
Wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (FWD, REV, MI1~MI8, COM)
; When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality
components to avoid contact bounce.
Transistor outputs (MO1, MO2, MCM)

; Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity.
; When connecting a relay to the digital outputs connect a surge absorber across the coil and
check the polarity.
Remove the Terminal Block

1. Loosen the screws by screwdriver. (As shown in figure below).
2. Remove the control board by pulling it out for a distance 6~8 cm (as 1 in the figure) then lift the control
board upward(as 2 in the figure).
6-5
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories|C2000 Series
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories

The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional
accessories to your drive would substantially improves the drive’s performance. Please select an
applicable accessory according to your need or contact the local distributor for suggestion.
• All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

• Non-fuse Circuit Breaker
• Fuse (Specification Chart)
• AC Reactor
• Zero Phase Reactor
• DC Reactor
• EMI Filter
• Digital Keypad
• Panel Mounting
• Conduit Box Kit
• Fan Kit
• Flange Mounting Kit
• USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530
7-1
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories |C2000 Series
All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

230V
Applicable 1 2
* 125%Braking Torque 10%ED * Max. Brake Torque
Motor
Braking Brake Resistor value Total Min. Max. Total Peak
*3Braking Resistor series
HP kW Torque Unit spec. for each Braking Resistor Braking Power
for each Brake Unit
(kg-m) *4VFDB AC motor Drive Current (A) Value (Ω) Current (A) (kW)
1 0.7 0.5 - BR080W200*1 80W200Ω 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
2 1.5 1.0 - BR200W091*1 200W91Ω 4.2 47.5 8 3.0
3 2.2 1.5 - BR300W070*1 300W70Ω 5.4 38.0 10 3.8
5 3.7 2.5 - BR400W040*1 400W40Ω 9.5 19.0 20 7.6
7.5 5.5 3.7 - BR1K0W020*1 1000W20Ω 19 14.6 26 9.9
10 7.5 5.1 - BR1K0W020*1 1000W20Ω 19 14.6 26 9.9
15 11 7.5 - BR1K5W013*1 1500W13Ω 29 13.6 28 10.6
20 15 10.2 - BR1K0W4P3*2 2 series 2000W8.6Ω 44 8.3 46 17.5
25 18 12.2 - BR1K0W4P3*2 2 series 2000W8.6Ω 44 8.3 46 17.5
30 22 14.9 - BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 3000W6.6Ω 58 5.8 66 25.1
40 30 20.3 2015*2 BR1K0W5P1*2 2 series 4000W5.1Ω 75 4.8 80 30.4
50 37 25.1 2022*2 BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series 4800W3.9Ω 97 3.2 120 45.6
60 45 30.5 2022*2 BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 6000W3.3Ω 118 3.2 120 45.6
75 55 37.2 2022*3 BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series 7200W2.6Ω 145 2.1 180 68.4
100 75 50.8 2022*4 BR1K2W3P9*2 2 series 9600W2Ω 190 1.6 240 91.2
125 90 60.9 2022*4 BR1K5W3P3*2 2 series 12000W1.65Ω 230 1.6 240 91.2
460V
Applicable
*1 125%Braking Torque 10%ED *2 Max. Brake Torque
Motor
Braking Brake Resistor
3 Total Min. Max. Total Peak
Torque Unit * Braking Resistor series for value spec.
HP kW Braking Resistor Braking Power
(kg-m) 4 each Brake Unit for each AC
* VFDB Currnet (A) Value (Ω) Current (A) (kW)
motor Drive
1 0.7 0.5 - BR080W750*1 80W750Ω 1 190.0 4 3.0
2 1.5 1.0 - BR200W360*1 200W360Ω 2.1 126.7 6 4.6
3 2.2 1.5 - BR300W250*1 300W250Ω 3 108.6 7 5.3
5 3.7 2.5 - BR400W150*1 400W150Ω 5.1 84.4 9 6.8
5.5 4.0 2.7
- BR1K0W075*1 1000W75Ω 10.2 54.3 14 10.6
7.5 5.5 3.7
10 7.5 5.1 - BR1K0W075*1 1000W75Ω 10.2 47.5 16 12.2
15 11 7.5 - BR1K5W043*1 1500W43Ω 17.6 42.2 18 13.7
20 15 10.2 - BR1K0W016*2 2 series 2000W32Ω 24 26.2 29 22.0
25 18 12.2 - BR1K0W016*2 2 series 2000W32Ω 24 23.0 33 25.1
30 22 14.9 - BR1K5W013*2 2 series 3000W26Ω 29 23.0 33 25.1
2 parallel,
40 30 20.3 - BR1K0W016*4 4000W16Ω 47.5 14.1 54 41.0
2 series
2 parallel,
50 40 25.1 4045*1 BR1K2W015*4 4800W15Ω 50 12.7 60 45.6
2 series
2 parallel,
60 45 30.5 4045*1 BR1K5W013*4 6000W13Ω 59 12.7 60 45.6
2 series
75 55 37.2 4030*2 BR1K0W5P1*4 4 parallel 8000W10.2Ω 76 9.5 80 60.8
50.8 4045*2 2 parallel,
100 75 BR1K2W015*4 9600W7.5Ω 100 6.3 120 91.2
2 series
2 parallel,
125 90 60.9 4045*2 BR1K5W013*4 12000W6.5Ω 117 6.3 120 91.2
2 series
5 parallel,
150 110 74.5 4110*1 BR1K2W015*10 12000W6Ω 126 6.0 126 95.8
2 series
6 parallel,
175 132 89.4 4160*1 BR1K5W012*12 18000W4Ω 190 4.0 190 144.4
2 series
7-2
460V
Applicable 1 2
* 125%Braking Torque 10%ED * Max. Brake Torque
Motor
Braking Resistor
Total Min. Max. Total Peak
Torque Brake *3Braking Resistor series for value spec.
HP kW Braking Resistor Braking Power
(kg-m) Unit each Brake Unit for each AC
Currnet (A) Value (Ω) Current (A) (kW)
motor Drive
6 parallel,
215 160 108.3 4160*1 BR1K5W012*12 18000W4Ω 190 4.0 190 144.4
2 series
7 parallel,
250 185 125.3 4185*1 BR1K5W012*14 21000W3.4Ω 225 3.4 225 172.1
2 series
5 parallel,
300 220 148.9 4110*2 BR1K2W015*10 24000W3Ω 252 3.0 252 190.5
2 series
6 parallel,
375 280 189.6 4160*2 BR1K5W012*12 36000W2Ω 380 2.0 380 288.8
2 series
6 parallel,
425 315 213.3 4160*2 BR1K5W012*12 36000W2Ω 380 2.0 380 288.8
2 series
7 parallel,
475 355 240.3 4185*2 BR1K5W012*14 42000W1.7Ω 450 1.7 450 344.2
2 series
1
* Calculation for 125% brake toque: (kw)*125%*0.8; where 0.8 is motor efficiency.
Because there is a resistor limit of power consumption, the longest operation time for 10%ED is 10sec (on: 10sec/ off:
90sec).
2
* Please refer to the Brake Performance Curve for “Operation Duration & ED” vs. “Braking Current”.
3
* For heat dissipation, a resistor of 400W or lower should be fixed to the frame and maintain the surface temperature below
50℃; a resistor of 1000W and above should maintain the surface temperature below 350℃.
*4 Please refer to VFDB series Braking Module Instruction for more detail on braking resistor.
NOTE
1. Definition for Brake Usage ED%

Explanation: The definition of the brake usage ED (%) is for assurance of enough time for the brake unit and brake resistor
to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with
temperature, and brake torque would decrease accordingly. Recommended cycle time is one minute.
For safety concern, install an overload relay (O.L) between the brake unit and the brake resistor in conjunction with the
magnetic contactor (MC) prior to the drive for abnormal protection. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to
protect the brake resistor from damage due to frequent brake, or due to brake unit keeping operating resulted from unusual
high input voltage. Under such circumstance, just turn off the power to prevent damaging the brake resistor.
NFB V FD
MC MOTOR
R/L1 R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 S/L2
V /T2 IM
T/L3 T/L3
W/T3
O.L.
MC +(P )
SA - (N)
Varist or
T hermal relay T hermal relay
+ - B1 + - B1
(P) (N ) Brake (P) (N) Brake
O.L. O.L. Resistor
Resistor
Brake unit Brake unit
VFDB VFDB
XXXX XXXX
B2 B2
MASTER MASTER
22Parallel /Serie
Thermal relay M1 M2 Temperature M1 M2
or Temperature Switch switch
Trip Contact
Temperature switch
When AC Drive is equipped with a DC reactor, please rea d user m anual to kn ow th

wiring m ethod o f input
。 circuit of brake unit +(P).
Do Not conn ect input circuit -(N) to the neu tral poin t of the power system .
7-3
2. If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and brake modules in use are not
provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
3. Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors. If the minimum resistance value is
to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of Watt figures.
4. When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be less than the value in the
column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the right-most column in the table). Please read the wiring
information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to operation
5. This chart is for normal usage; if the AC motor drive is applied for frequent braking, it is suggested to enlarge 2~3 times of
the Watts.
6. Thermal Relay:
Thermal relay selection is basing on its overload capability. A standard braking capacity for C2000 is 10%ED (Tripping
time=10s). The figure below is an example of 406V, 110kw AC motor drive. It requires the thermal relay to take 260%
overload capacity in 10s (Host starting) and the braking current is 126A. In this case, user should select a rated 50A
thermal relay. The property of each thermal relay may vary among different manufacturer, please carefully read
specification.
60
40
30
20
10
Second
Tripping tim e
8
6
4
3
2
1
0. 8
0. 6
0.4
0.3
0.8 1 1. 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15
M ultiple of current setting xln (A)
7-4
Non-fuse Circuit Breaker

Comply with UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a,
The rated current of the breaker shall be 2~4 times of the maximum rated input current of AC motor
drive.
3-phase 230V 3-phase 460V
Recommended Recommended
Model non-fuse breaker Model non-fuse
(A) breaker(A)
VFD007C23A 15 VFD007C43A/E 5
VFD015C23A 20 VFD015C43A/E 10
VFD022C23A 30 VFD022C43A/E 15
VFD037C23A 40 VFD040C43A/E 20
VFD055C23A 50 VFD037C43A/E 20
VFD075C23A 60 VFD055C43A/E 30
VFD110C23A 100 VFD075C43A/E 40
VFD150C23A 125 VFD110C43A/E 50
VFD185C23A 150 VFD150C43A/E 60
VFD220C23A 200 VFD185C43A/E 75
VFD300C23A/E 225 VFD220C43A/E 100
VFD370C23A/E 250 VFD300C43A/E 125
VFD450C23A/E 300 VFD370C43A/E 150
VFD550C23A/E 400 VFD450C43A/E 175
VFD750C23A/E 450 VFD550C43A/E 250
VFD900C23A/E 600 VFD750C43A/E 300
VFD900C43A/E 300
VFD1100C43A/E 400
VFD1320C43A/E 500
VFD1600C43A/E 600
VFD1850C43A/E 600
VFD2200C43A/E 800
VFD2800C43A/E 1000
VFD3150C43A/E 1200
VFD3550C43A/E 1350
7-5
Fuse Specification Chart

Use only the fuses comply with UL certificated.
Use only the fuses comply with local regulations.
Input Currnet I(A) Line Fuse

230V Model
Heavy Duty Normal Duty I (A) Bussmann P/N
VFD007C23A 6.1 6.4 15 JJN-15
VFD015C23A 11 12 20 JJN-20
VFD022C23A 15 16 30 JJN-30
VFD037C23A 18.5 20 80 JJN-80
VFD055C23A 26 28 50 JJN-50
VFD075C23A 34 36 60 JJN-60
VFD110C23A 50 52 175 JJN-175
VFD150C23A 68 72 125 JJN-125
VFD185C23A 78 83 150 JJN-150
VFD220C23A 95 99 350 JJN-350
VFD300C23A/E 118 124 225 JJN-225
VFD370C23A/E 136 143 500 DLS-R-500
VFD450C23A/E 162 171 300 JJN-300
VFD550C23A/E 196 206 400 JJN-400
VFD750C23A/E 233 245 1000 JJN-1000
VFD007C23A 6.1 6.4 15 JJN-15
Input Current I(A) Line Fuse
460VModel
Heavy Duty Normal Duty I (A) Bussmann P/N
VFD007C43A/E 4.1 4.3 10 JJS-10
VFD015C43A/E 5.6 5.9 10 JJS-10
VFD022C43A/E 8.3 8.7 15 JJS-15
VFD037C43A/E 13 14 20 JJS-20
VFD040C43A/E 14.5 15.5 20 JJS-20
VFD055C43A/E 16 17 45 JJS-45
VFD075C43A/E 19 20 40 JJS-40
VFD110C43A/E 25 26 50 JJS-50
VFD150C43A/E 33 35 125 JJS-125
VFD185C43A/E 38 40 75 JJS-75
VFD220C43A/E 45 47 100 JJS-100
VFD300C43A/E 60 63 200 JJS-200
VFD370C43A/E 70 74 150 JJS-150
VFD450C43A/E 96 101 175 JJS-175
VFD550C43A/E 108 114 250 JJS-250
VFD750C43A/E 149 157 600 DLS-R-600
VFD900C43A/E 159 167 300 JJS-300
VFD1100C43A/E 197 207 800 JJS-800
VFD1320C43A/E 228 240 500 JJS-500
VFD1600C43A/E 285 300 600 JJS-600
VFD1850C43A/E 361 380 600 JJS-600
VFD2200C43A/E 380 400 800 JJS-800
VFD2800C43A/E 469 494 1000 KTU-1000
VFD3150C43A/E 527 555 1200 KTU-1200
VFD3550C43A/E 594 625 1350 KTU-1350
7-6
AC Reactor
When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or
above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power
input circuit due to the load changes and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid this, it is
recommend to use a serial connected AC input reactor(6%) at the AC Motor Drive mains input side
to reduce the current and improve the input power efficiency.
230V, 50/60Hz, 3-phase

Rated Amps of AC Max. continuous Inductance（mh）
kW HP
Reactor Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance
0.75 1 4 6 3 6.5
1.5 2 8 12 1.5 3
2.2 3 12 18 1.25 2.5
3.7 5 18 27 0.8 1.5
5.5 7.5 25 37.5 0.5 1.2
7.5 10 35 52.5 0.4 0.8
11 15 45 67.5 0.3 0.7
15 20 55 82.5 0.25 0.5
18.5 25 80 120 0.2 0.4
22 30 100 150 0.15 0.3
30 40 130 195 0.1 0.2
37 50 160 240 0.075 0.15
45 60 200 300 0.055 0.110
55 75 250 375 0.090 0.150
75 100 320 480 0.040 0.075
90 125 400 600 0.03 0.006
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-phase

Rated Amps of AC Max. continuous Inductance（mh）
kW HP
Reactor Amps 3% impedance 5% impedance
0.75 1 4 6 9 12
1.5 2 4 6 6.5 9
2.2 3 8 12 5 7.5
3.7 5 12 18 2.5 4.2
4 5 12 18 2.5 4.2
5.5 7.5 18 27 1.5 2.5
7.5 10 18 27 1.5 2.5
11 15 25 37.5 1.2 2
15 20 35 52.5 0.8 1.2
18.5 25 45 67.5 0.7 1.2
22 30 45 67.5 0.7 1.2
30 40 80 120 0.4 0.7
37 50 80 120 0.4 0.7
45 60 100 150 0.3 0.45
55 75 130 195 0.2 0.3
75 100 160 240 0.15 0.23
90 125 200 300 0.110 0.185
110 150 250 375 0.090 0.150
132 175 320 480 0.075 0.125
160 215 400 600 0.03 0.06
185 250 400 600 0.03 0.06
220 300 500 750 0.025 0.05
280 375 600 900 0.02 0.04
315 425 750 1125 0.029 0.048
355 475 750 1125 0.029 0.048
7-7
Applications for AC Reactor

Connected in input circuit
Application 1
When more than one AC motor drive is connected to the same mains power, and one of them is ON
during operation.
Problem: When applying power to one of the AC motor drive, the charge current of the capacitors
may cause voltage dip. The AC motor drive may be damaged when over current occurs
during operation.
Correct wiring:
M1 reactor
AC motor drive motor
M2
Mn
Application 2
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are connected to the same power.
Problem: Switching spikes will be generated when the silicon rectifier switches ON/OFF. These
spikes may damage the mains circuit.
Correct wiring:
silicon rectifier
power reactor
DC
AC motor drive
reactor
motor
Application 3
When the power supply capacity exceeds 10 times of the inverter capacity.
Problem: When the mains power capacity is too large, line impedance will be small and the charge
current will be too high. This may damage AC motor drive due to higher rectifier
temperature.
Correct wiring
large-capacity small-capacity
power reactor AC motor drive
motor
7-8
Zero Phase Reactors

RF220X00A UNIT: mm (inch)
Recommended Diagram A
Cable 2
Wire Size (mm ) Wiring Wind each wire around the core for 4 times. The reactor
type Qty.
Nominal Method must be placed at the AC motor drive output side as
(Note) AWG mm
2
2 close as possible.
(mm )
Single- Diagram
≤10 ≤5.3 ≤5.5 1
core A
Diagram
≤2 ≤33.6 ≤38 4
B
Diagram
≤12 ≤3.3 ≤3.5 1
Three- A
core Diagram
≤1 ≤42.4 ≤50 4
B
NOTE Diagram B
Put the wires/cables through the middle of the 4 cores
600V insulated cable wire
that lines in parallel.
1. The table above gives approximate wire size for
the zero phase reactors but the selection is
ultimately governed by the type and the
diameter of the cable, i.e. the cable diameter
must small enough to go through the center of
the zero phase reactor.
2. When wiring, do not goes through the earth
core. It only needs to pass through the motor
cable or the power cable.
3. When a long motor cable for output is used, a
zero phase reactor may be necessary to reduce
the radiated emission.
7-9
DC Reactor
230V DC Choke
Input Voltage kW HP DC Amps Inductance（mh）
0.75 1 9.4 3.43
1.5 2 18 1.83
2.2 3 24 1.37
3.7 5 30 1.1
230Vac
5.5 7.5 42 0.78
50/60Hz
7.5 10 53 0.61
3-Phase
11 15 76 0.42
15 20 106 0.31
18.5 25 122 0.26
22 30 145 0.22
460V DC Choke
Input Voltage kW HP DC Amps Inductance（mh）
0.75 1 6 9.77
1.5 2 9 7.12
2.2 3 13 4.83
3.7 5 23 2.7
460Vac
5.5 7.5 25 2.47
50/60Hz 7.5 10 30 2.1
11 15 38 1.62
3-Phase
15 20 52 1.2
18.5 25 60 1.05
22 30 70 0.89
30 40 93 0.67
7-10
EMI Filter
Applicable
Model Reference Website
EMI Filter
VFD007C23A; http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/three_phase_industrial_
VFD015C23A;
KMF325A mains_filters_high_performance/
VFD022C23A;
VFD037C23A; KMF325A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 25 Amps
http://www.dem-uk.com/roxburgh/products/industrial_emc_filters/three_phase_industrial_
VFD055C23A;
VFD075C23A; KMF370A mains_filters_high_performance/
VFD110C23A;
KMF370A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 70 Amps
VFD150C23A;
VFD220C23A;
VFD300C23A; multi_stage_drive_filters/
MIF3150
VFD370C23A; MIF3150 Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High Performance 150
Amps
VFD550C23A;
MIF3400B multi_stage_drive_filters/
VFD750C23A;
VFD900C23A; MIF3400 Three Phase Industrial Drive Filters - Very High Performance 340 Amps
VFD007C43A;
VFD022C43A;
KMF318A mains_filters_high_performance/
VFD037C43A;
VFD040C43A; KMF318A Three Phase Industrial Mains Filters - High Performance 18 Amps
VFD055C43A;
VFD075C43A;
VFD150C43A;
VFD185C43A;
VFD300C43A;
VFD370C43A;
MIF3150
VFD550C43A; MIF3150 Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High Performance 150
VFD750C43A;
Amps
VFD900C43A;
MIF3400B
VFD1320C43A; MIF3400B Three Phase Industrial Multi Stage Drive Filters - Very High Performance 400
VFD1600C43A;
Amps
7-11
Applicable
Model Reference Website
EMI Filter
VFD1850C43A; MIF3800 & drive_filters_very_high_performance/

VFD2200C43A; Ring Cores *3 MIF3800 Three Phase Industrial Drive Filters - Very High Performance 800 Amps
Ring Core Part No. : T102-15
VFD2800C43A; MIF3800 & drive_filters_very_high_performance/
VFD3150C43A;
VFD3550C43A; Ring Cores *2 MIF3800 Three Phase Industrial Drive Filters - Very High Performance 800 Amps
Ring Core Part No. : T102-15
EMI Filter Installation

All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency noise and will
interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By using an EMI filter with correct
installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best
interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed and wired
according to user manual:
EN61000-6-4
EN61800-3: 1996
EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)
General precaution
1. EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
2. Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to the AC motor drive.
3. Please wire as short as possible.
4. Metal plate should be grounded.
5. The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and the contact area
should be as large as possible.
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions

Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to observe the
following precautions when selecting motor cable.
1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).

2. The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length and maximum
contact area.
3. Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle the plate with grounding
Figure 1
7-12
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
Figure 2
The length of motor cable

When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge voltages easily
due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the motor cable is very long
(especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation quality. To prevent this situation, please
follow the rules below:
Use a motor with enhanced insulation.
Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible (10 to 20 m or less)
For models 7.5hp and above:
Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V
460VAC input voltage 66 ft (20m) 328 ft (100m) 1312 ft (400m)
For models 5hp and less:

Insulation level of motor 1000V 1300V 1600V
NOTE
Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor drive.
If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may cause leakage current. It
will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage current or not insure the correction of current
display. The worst case is that AC motor drive may damage.
If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the sum of the wiring
length from AC motor drive to each motor.
For the 460V series AC motor drive, when an overload relay is installed between the drive and the motor to
protect motor over heating, the connecting cable must be shorter than 50m. However, an overload relay
malfunction may still occur. To prevent the malfunction, install an output reactor (optional) to the drive or lower
the carrier frequency setting (Pr.00-17).
NOTE
When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may malfunction
(especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or less. To prevent it, please use
AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 00-17 PWM carrier frequency).
7-13
Digital Keypad
KPC-CE01
A : LED Disp lay

D ispla y freq uen cy, cu rre nt, vo ltag e and erro r etc.
: Status Indicator
F: Fre que ncy C omma nd
H: Outp ut Frequ ency
U: User De fine d Units
ERR: CAN Erro r Ind icator
RU N: CAN Ru n Indica tor
C : Function
(Re fer to the chart foll ow s for deta il de scripti on )
Key Description
ESC ESC Key
Press ESC key to return to the previous page. It also functions as a return to last category key in the sub-menu.
MENU Menu Key
Press MENU key under any condition will return to the main MENU.
Menu content:
1. Parameter Detail 3. Keypad locked
2. Copy Parameter 4. PLC Function
ENTER ENTER Key
Press ENTER and go to the next level. If it is the last level then press ENTER to execute the command.
HAND HAND ON Key
1. HAND key will operates according to the parameter settings when the source of HAND master frequency
command and the source of HAND operation command is properly set,. The factory setting of the source
command for frequency and operation are from the digital keypad .
2. Press HAND key in stop status, the drive setting switches to the parametr setting of HAND. Press HAND key
in during operation, the drive will come to stop then switches to the parameter setting of HAND.
3. When process complete: H/A LED ON.
AUTO Auto Operation Key
1. AUTO function executes according to the parameter settings of the source of AUTO frequency and AUTO
operation. The factory setting is the external terminal (source of operation is 4-20mA).
2. Press the ATUO key in stop status, the drivel switches to auto-setting. Press the auto key during operation
statu, the drivel will come to stop and switch to auto-setting.
3. When process complete: H/A LED is OFF
FWD/REV Operation Direction Key
1. FWD/REV key controls the operation direction but will NOT activate the drive. FWD: forward, REV: reverse.
2. The drive operates in the direction as shown by the LED light.
RUN Start Key
1. It is only valid when the source of operation command is from the keypad.
2. Press the RUN key, the drive will according to the start-up setting and the RUN LED will be ON.
3. RUN key can be pressed for many times when the drive is in stop status.
4. “HAND” mode is enabled only when the source of operation command is by keypad.
STOP Stop Key.
1. STOP key has the highest priority in command.
2. Press STOP key, the drive will come to stop under any condition.
3. The RESET key can be used to reset the drive when faults occur. If the RESET key is not responding, check
MENU Æ Fault Records and checck the most recent fault.
7-14
Dimension
RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad

Part # Description
CBC-K3FT 3 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 0.9m)
CBC-K5FT 5 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 1.5 m)
CBC-K10FT 10 feet RJ45 extension lead (approximately 3 m)
7-15
Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK)

For MKC-KPPK model, user can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, protection level is IP56.
Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01 & KPC-CE01).
Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting
accessories*1 accessories*2
Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm

Screw *4 ~M4*p 0.7 *L8mm
Torque: 10-12kg-cm (8.7-10.4lb-in.)
Torque: 10-12kg-cm (8.7-10.4lb-in.)
Panel cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] Panel cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch]
Normal cutout dimension

Panel
1.2mm 1.6mm 2.0mm
thickness
A 66.4 [2.614]
B 110.2 [4.339] 111.3 [4.382] 112.5 [4.429]
*Deviation: ±0.15mm /±0.0059inch
Cutout dimension (Waterproof level: IP56)
Panel
1.2mm 1.6mm 2.0mm
thickness
A 66.4 [2.614]
B 110.8 [4.362]
*Deviation: ±0.15mm /±0.0059inch
7-16
7-17
Conduit Box Kit

Appearance
Frame D Frame E
Applicable models Applicable models
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E;VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E;
VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
Model number『MKC-DN1CB』 Model number『MKC-EN1CB』

ITEM Description Qty. ITEM Description Qty.
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 4 1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 6
2 Rubber28 2 2 Bushing Rubber 28 2
5 Conduit box cover 1 5 Conduit box cover 1
6 Conduit box base 1 6 Conduit box base 1
Frame F Frame G
Applicable models Applicable models
VFD900C23A/23E; VFD1320C43A/43E; VFD1600C43A/43E VFD1850C23A/23E; VFD2200C43A/43E
Model number『MKC-FN1CB』 Model number『MKC-GN1CB』

ITEM Description Qty. ITEM Description Qty.
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 8 1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 12
2 Bushing Rubber28 2 2 Bushing Rubber 28 2
3 Bushing Rubber 44 4 3 Bushing Rubber 44 2
4 Bushing Rubber 100 2 4 Bushing Rubber 130 3
5 Conduit box cover 1 5 Conduit box base 1
6 Conduit box base 1 6 Conduit box cover 1
7-18
Conduit Box Installation

Frame D
1. Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the
following figure. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.66~10.39Ib-in)
2. Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
3. Install the conduit box by fasten the 5 screws shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
4. Fasten the 4 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.66~10.39Ib-in).
7-19
Frame E
1. Loosen the 4 cover screws and lift the cover; Screw torque: 12~ 15 kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
2. Fasten the 6 screws shown in the following figure and place the cover back to the original position. Screw
torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
3. Fasten the 4 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque:12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in)』
7-20
Frame F
1. Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the
following figure. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in).
1
2
2. Install the conduit box by fastens the 4 screws, as shown in the following figure.
3. Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure
12
15
9
10
13
14
16
11
7-21
Frame G
1. On the conduit box, loosen 7 of the cover screws and remove the cover. On the drive, loosen 4 of the cover
screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
1
2
Remove the top cover and loosen the screws. Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
2. Install the conduit box by fastening all the screws shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (20.8~30Ib-in); Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in)
7-22
Fasten all the screws. Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (20.8~30Ib-in).
Place the cover back to the top and fasten the screws (as shown in the figure).
Screw torque: 12~15kg-cm (10.4~13Ib-in).
7-23
Fan Kit
Frames of the fan kit
Frame A Model『MKC-AFKM』
Applicable Model
VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD037C23A;VFD022C43A/43E;
VFD037C43A/43E;VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E
Frame B Model『MKC-BFKM1』
Applicable Model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C43A/43E
Frame B Model 『MKC-BFKM2』
Applicable Model
VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E;
VFD150C43A/43E
Frame B Model 『MKC-BFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A;VFD075C43A/43E;
VFD110C43A/43E;VFD150C43A/43E
Frame C Model 『MKC-CFKB1』
Applicable Model
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A
7-24
Frame C Model 『MKC-CFKB2』
Applicable Model
VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E;VFD300C43A/43E
Frame D Model 『MKC-DFKM』 Model 『MKC-DFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E;
VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E
Frame E Model 『MKC-EFKM1』
Applicable Model
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E
Frame E Model『MKC-EFKM2』
Applicable Model
Frame E Model 『MKC-EFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
7-25
Frame F Model 『MKC-FFKM』
Applicable Model
;
Frame F Model 『MKC-FFKB』
Applicable Model
Frame G Model 『MKC-GFKM』
Applicable Model
VFD1850C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E
Frame H Model 『MKC-HFKM』
Applicable Model
VFD2800C43E-1; VFD3150C43E-1; VFD3550C43E-1
7-26
Fan Removal
Frame A
Applicable model
VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E; VFD055C43A/43E
1. Press the tabs on both side of the fan to successfully 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan.
remove the fan. (The arrow) (As shown below.)
Frame B
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C43A/43E;VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E
1. Press the tab on both side of the fan to successfully 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing the fan.
remove the fan.
Frame B&C
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C23A; VFD110C43A/43E;
VFD150C43A/43E; VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD185C43A/43E;
VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E
Disconnect the power terminal by slotted screwdriver to remove the fan cover.
Frame D
Applicable model
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E; VFD750C43A/43E
7-27
1. (Figure 1) Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the on the 2. (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3 and screw 4, press the tab on
right and the left to remove the cover, follow the direction the right and the left to remove the cover. Screw torque:
the arrows indicate. Press on top of digital keypad 6~8kg-cm (5.2~6.9in-lbf).
KPC-CE01 to properly remove the keypad. Screw torque:
10~12kg-cm (8.6~10.4in-lbf).
4
3
1
2
Figure 2
Figure 1
3. (Figure 3) Loosen screw 5 and disconnect the fan power. 4. (Figure 4) Loosen the screws. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm
Screw torque: 10~12kg-cm (8.6~10.4in-lbf). (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
5. Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the
larger picture)
5
1
2
3
Figure 3 4
Figure 4
Frame E
Applicable model:
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
Loosen screw 1~4 (as shown in the figure below), and Loosen screw 1~4(as shown in the figure below), and
disconnect the fan power then remove the fan. Screw torque: disconnect the fan power then remove the fan. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf). 24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
7-28
Loosen screw 1 and screw 2 (as shown in the figure below), and disconnect fan power before removing the fan. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~25.6in-lbf).
Frame F
Applicable model
Fan model『MKC-FFKM』
Loosen the screws and removes the fan (as shown in figure below). Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in』
Fan model 『MKC-FFKB』

(1) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and removes (2) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and removes
the cover. Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in). the cover. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
7
7-29
(3) Loosen the screws and remove the fan. (As shown in the figure below) Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
11
10
9
11
10
9
Frame G
Applicable model
VFD1800C43A/43E; VFD2200C43A/43E;
Fan model『MKC-GFKM』 (2) For 1~8 shown in the figure: Loosen the screws
Screw torque:35~40kg-cm (30.4~34.7lb-in)
(1) Loosen the screw (as shown in figure below) and remove
the cover. Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in). For 9~10 shown in the figure: Loosen the screws and
removes the cover.
9
4
10
1
6
3 7
2 1
4 2
(3) Loosen screw 1,2,3 and remove the protective ring (as (4) Lift the fan by putting your fingure through the protective
shown in figure below) Screw torque: 15~20kg-cm holes, as indicates in 1 and 2 on the figure.
(12.2~13.9Ib-in).
2 5
1
7-30
Frame H
Applicable model
Fan model 『MKC-HFKM』 (2) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover.
(1) Loosen the screw and remove the top cover.
Screw torque: 14~16kg-cm (12.2~13.9Ib-in)
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
1
(3) Disconnect the fan. (4) Loosen the screw and remove the fan. Make sure fan power
is properly disconnected before removal. Screw torque:
24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
15
15 14
14
13 13
18
17 18
16
17
16
7-31
Flange Mounting Kit

Applicable Models, Frame A~F
Frame A
『MKC-AFM1』
Applicable model
VFD015C23A; VFD022C23A; VFD022C43A/43E
Screw 1 *4
M3*P 0.5; L=6mm
Screw 2*8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessories 1*1 Accessories 2*2 Accessories 3*2
『MKC-AFM』
Applicable model
VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/43E; VFD015C43A/43E; VFD037C23A; VFD037C43A/43E; VFD040C43A/43E;
VFD055C43A/43E
Screw *8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessories 2*2 Accessories t 3*2
Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch]
7-32
『MKC-AFM1』Installation
1. Install accessory 1 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 6~8kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
2. Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
3. Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
4. Plate installation, place 4 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 2&3 and the plate then fasten the screws.
『MKC-AFM』 Installation
1. Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 2 of the screw 1(M3). Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in).
(As shown in following figure)
7-33
(As shown in following figure)
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in following figure)
7-34
Frame B
『MKC-BFM』
Applicable model
VFD055C23A; VFD075C23A; VFD110C23A; VFD075C43A/43E; VFD110C43A/43E; VFD150C43A/43E
Screw 1 *4 ~ M8*P 1.25;

Screw 2*6 ~ M6*P 1.0;
Accessories 1*2 Accessories 2*2
7-35
『MKC-BFM』Installation
(As shown in the following figure)
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure)
7-36
Frame C
『MKC-CFM』
Applicable model
VFD150C23A; VFD185C23A; VFD220C23A; VFD185C43A/43E; VFD220C43A/43E; VFD300C43A/43E
Screw 1*4 ~ M8*P 1.25;

Screw 2*8 ~ M6*P 1.0;
Accessories 1*2 Accessories 2*2
7-37
『MKC-CFM』Installation
(As shown in the following figure)
2. Plate installation, place 8 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessories 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25~30kg-cm (5.21~6.94Ib-in). (As shown in the following figure)
7-38
Frame D
Applicable model
VFD300C23A/23E; VFD370C23A/23E; VFD370C43A/43E; VFD450C43A/43E; VFD550C43A/43E;
VFD750C43A/43E
M10*P1.5(4X)
OR 11.0[0.43](4X)
7-39
Frame D&E
1. Loosen 8 screws and remove Fixture 2 (as shown in 2. Loosen 10 screws and remove Fixture 1 (as shown
the following figure). in the following figure).
3. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure). 4. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 30~32kg-cm (26.0~27.8Ib-in). Screw torque: 30~32kg-cm (26.0~27.8Ib-in).
5. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure). 6. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in). Screw torque: 24~26kg-cm (20.8~22.6Ib-in).
7. Place 4 screws (M10) through Fixture 1&2 and the

plate then fasten the screws. (as shown in the
following figure)
7-40
Frame E
Applicable model
VFD450C23A/23E; VFD550C23A/23E; VFD750C23A/23E; VFD900C43A/43E; VFD1100C43A/43E
7-41
Frame F
Applicable model
7-42
Frame F
1. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. 2. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2.
1 1
6 6
5
5
4
12 3
2 12 4
7 3
8 7 2
FIXTURE 2 8
9
FIXTURE2
10 9
11 10
11
3. Loosen screw 13 ~26 and remove Fixture 1. 4. Install Fixture 1 by fasten screw 13 ~26
13
13
19
19 18
18 17
17
20
20
26
16
26 16
14 14
25 15
15
25
24
24 FIXTURE1
FIXTURE1
23
21
23 22
21
22
5. Place 4 of the M12 screws through Fixture 1&2 and

plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 300~400kg-cm (260~347Ib-in).
Screws M12*4
7-43
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530

Warning
3 Please thoroughly read this instruction sheet before installation and putting it into use.
3 The content of this instruction sheet and the driver file may be revised without prior notice. Please
consult our distributors or download the most updated instruction/driver version at
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/control/cm/control_cm_main.asp
1. Introduction
IFD6530 is a convenient RS-485-to-USB converter, which does not require external power-supply and complex
setting process. It supports baud rate from 75 to 115.2kbps and auto switching direction of data transmission. In
addition, it adopts RJ-45 in RS-485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny dimension, handy use of
plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA IABU products to your PC.
Applicable Models: All DELTA IABU products.
(Application & Dimension)
2. Specifications
Power supply No external power is needed
Power consumption 1.5W
Isolated voltage 2,500VDC
Baud rate 75, 150, 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, 115,200 bps
RS-485 connector RJ-45
USB connector A type (plug)
Compatibility Full compliance with USB V2.0 specification
Max. cable length RS-485 Communication Port: 100 m
Support RS-485 half-duplex transmission
7-44
RJ-45
PIN Description PIN Description
1 Reserved 5 SG+
2 Reserved 6 GND
3 GND 7 Reserved
4 SG- 8 +9V
3. Preparations before Driver Installation

Please extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps. You could find driver file
(IFD6530_Drivers.exe) in the CD supplied with IFD6530.
Note: DO NOT connect IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file.
STEP 1 STEP 2
STEP 3 STEP 4
STEP 5
You should have a folder marked SiLabs under drive C. c:\ SiLabs
7-45
4. Driver Installation
After connecting IFD6530 to PC, please install driver by following steps.
7-46
5. LED Display
1. Steady Green LED ON: power is ON.
2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting.
7-47
Chapter 8 Optional Cards |C2000 Series
Chapter 8 Option Cards
Please select applicable option cards for your drive or contact local distributor for suggestion.
To prevent drive damage during installation, please removes the digital keypad and the cover before
wiring. Refer to the following instruction.
Removed key cover

Frame A&B&C
Screw Torque: 8~10Kg-cm [6.9~8.7lb-in.]
Frame D
Frame E
Slightly lift the cover then pull to remove. Screw Torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
8-1
Frame F
Screw Torque: 12~ 15 Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame G
Screw Torque: 12~15Kg-cm [10.4~13lb-in.]
Frame H
8-2
1
RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad
KPC-CC01; KPC-CE01
Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on

KPC-CE01.
Please refer to CH10 Digital Keypad for more details on

1
optional accessory RJ45 extension cable.
3 Slot 3
2 Communication extension card (Slot 1)

2
4 Slot 2 Slot 1 CMC-MOD01;
CMC-PD01;
CMC-DN01;
CMC-EIP01;
EMC-COP01;
3 I/O & Relay extension card (Slot 3)
EMC-D42A;
EMC-D611A;
EMC-R6AA;
EMC-BPS01;
4 PG Card (Slot 2)
EMC-PG01L;
EMC-PG01O;
EMC-PG01U;
EMC-PG01R;
Screws Speciation for option card terminals:

2
EMC-D42A Wire gauge 24~12AWG（0.205~3.31mm ）
EMC-D611A
Torque 4Kg-cm [3.47Ib-in]
EMC-BPS01
2
Wire gauge 24~16AWG（0.205~1.31mm ）
EMC-R6AA
Torque 6Kg-cm [5.21Ib-in]
EMC-PG01L
2
EMC-PG01O Wire gauge 30~16AWG（0.0509~1.31mm ）
EMC-PG01R Torque 2Kg-cm [1.74Ib-in]
EMC-PG01U
8-3
EMC-D42A
Common for Multi-function input terminals
COM Select SINK（NPN）/SOURCE（PNP）in J1 jumper / external power
supply
Refer to parameters 02-26~02-29 to program the multi-function
inputs MI10~MI13.
Internal power is applied from terminal E24: +24Vdc±5% 200mA,
5W
MI10~ MI13
External power +24VDC: max. voltage 30VDC, min. voltage
I/O Extension 19VDC, 30W
ON: the activation current is 6.5mA
Card
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA
Multi-function output terminals (photocoupler)
Duty-cycle: 50%
MO10~MO11 Max. output frequency: 100Hz
Max. current: 50mA
Max. voltage: 48Vdc
Common for multi-function output terminals MO10,
MXM MO11(photocoupler)
Max 48VDC 50mA
EMC-D611A
AC AC power Common for multi-function input terminal (Neutral)
Refer to Pr. 02.26~ Pr. 02.31 for multi-function input selection
Input voltage: 100~130VAC
I/O Extension
Input frequency: 57~63Hz
Card
MI10~ MI15 Input impedance: 27Kohm
Terminal response time:
ON: 10ms
OFF: 20ms
EMC-R6AA
Refer to Pr. 02.36~ Pr. 02.41 for multi-function input selection
Resistive load:
5A(N.O.)/3A 250VAC
Relay Extension 5A(N.O.)/3A 30VDC
R10A~R15A
Card Inductive load (COS 0.4)
R10C~R15C
2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A 250VAC
2.0A(N.O.)/1.2A 30VDC
It is used to output each monitor signal, such as drive is in
operation, frequency attained or overload indication.
8-4
EMC-BPS01
Input power: 24V±5%
Maximum input current:0.5A
External Power Note:
24V
Supply GND
1) Do not connect control terminal +24V (Digital control signal common:
SOURCE) directly to the EMC-BPS01input terminal 24V.
2) Do not connect control terminal GND directly to the EMC-BPS01 input
termina GND.
8-5
EMC-PG01L
Terminal description
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V±5% (use FSW3 to
VP switch +5V/+12V)
Max. output current: 200mA
PG1 DCM Common for power and signal
Encoder input signal (Line Driver)
A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
Pulse Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
A2, /A2, Open Collector input voltage: +5~+24V (Note1)
PG2
B2, /B2 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec.
PG Card Output signals. It has division frequency function:
1~255 times
AO, /AO, Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5VDC
BO, /BO, Max. output current: 50mA
PG OUT
ZO, /ZO, Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
SG,
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position machine or
PLC to make the ouput signal to be the common pivot point.
Note 1: Open Collector application, input current 5~15mA to each set then each set needs one pull-up resistor.
5V Recommanded pull-up resistor: above100~220Ω, 1/2W
12V Recommanded pull-up resistor: above 510~1.35kΩ, 1/2W
24V Recommanded pull-up resistor, above1.8k~3.3kΩ, 1/2W
PG2 Wiring Diagram

Ext Power
(5-24V)
Ext Pull
high RES
AB2
4.7kΩ
AB2 Ext Ground
8-6
Wiring Diagram
; Please use a shielded cable to prevent interference. Do not run control wires parallel to any high voltage
AC power line (200 V and above).
2
; Recommended wire size 0.21 to 0.81mm (AWG24 to AWG18).
; Cable length: Less than 100m
Jumper
Braking resist or (optional)
No-F use Breaker

- +1 +2/B1 B2
NFB U
R R/L 1 U/T1
Motor
V
S S/L2 V/T2 M
T W/T3 W 3~
T/L3
VP
DCM
A1
A1
PG
B1
B1 Line driv er
Z1
Z1
R ef lective Encoders
EH-PLC
Y0
AO
Y0 A2 AO AO
Y0
Y0 A2 BO AO
Y1
Y1 B2 BO BO
Y1
Phas e difference90 o Y1 B2 ZO BO
ZO Phas e differenc e90 o
SG
EM C-PG01L
8-7
EMC-PG01O
Terminal descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V±5% (use FSW3 to switch +5V/+12V)
VP
DCM Common for power and signal
PG1 Encoder Input signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
A1, /A1, B1, Open Collector Input Voltage: +5V/+12V
/B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
Pulse Input Signal (Line Driver or Open Collector)
A2, /A2, Open Collector Input Voltage: +5~+24V
PG2
Needs external power source for PG OUT circuit.
V+, V+
Input voltage of power:+12V ~ +24V
V- Input voltage for the negative side
PG Card Output signals has division frequency function: 1~255 times.
PG OUT
On the open collector’s output signal, add a high-pull resistor on the external
A/O, B/O, Z/O power V+ ~ V- (e.g. power of PLC) to prevent the interference of the receiving
signal. Max. 。[Three pull-up resistor are included in the package (1.8kW/1W)]
Max. output frequency: 300KP/Sec
PG1 Wiring Diagram

Vp Vp
Ext Pull
high RES
ABZ1
4.7kΩ
ABZ1 DCM
Vp
ABZ1
4.7kΩ
ABZ1
DCM DCM
When wiring in this way, if there 　 a signal on EMC-PG01's

A1, B1 and Z1,LED lights is OFF.
if A1, B1 and Z1 have no signals, LED lights is ON.
8-8
PG2 Wiring Diagram

Ext Power
(5-24V)
Ext Pull
high RES
AB2
4.7kΩ
AB2 Ext Ground
Wiring Diagram
2
Jumper
Braking resistor (opt ional)
No-F use Breaker

- +1 +2/B1 B2
NFB U
R R/L1 U/T1
Motor
V
S S/L2 V/T2 M
T W/T3 W 3~
T/L3
VP
DCM
A1
A1
PG
B1
B1 Line driver/
Z1 Open Collector
Z1
Reflect ive Encoders
EH-PLC
V+ EH-PLC
Y0 V+ +24V
Y0 A2 R
Y0
Y0 A2 A/O X0
R
Y1
Y1 B2 B/O X1
R
Y1
Y1 B2 Z/O X2
Phase differenc e90
V-
o
S/ S
24G
EMC-PG01O
8-9
EMC-PG01U
FJMP1 S: Standard UVW Output Encoder; D: Delta Encoder
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Output voltage for power: +5V/+12V±5% (use FSW3 to
VP switch +5V/+12V)
DCM Common for power and signal
PG1
Encoder input signal (Line Driver)
A1, /A1, B1, /B1, Z1, /Z1 It can be 1-phase or 2-phase input.
U1, /U1, V1, /V1, W1, /W1 Encoder input signal
A2, /A2, Open Collector Input Voltage: +5~+24V (Note1)
PG2
PG Card Output signals.
It has division frequency function: 1~255 times
Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5Vdc
AO, /AO, BO, /BO, ZO, Max. output current: 50mA
PG OUT
/ZO, SG Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position
machine or PLC to make the ouput signal to be the common
pivot point.
PG2 Wiring Diagram

Ext Power
(5-24V)
Ext Pull
high RES
AB2
4.7k Ω
AB2 Ext Ground
8-10
Wiring Diagram
2
Jumper
Braking resistor (opt ional)
N o-F use Breaker - +1 +2 /B1 B2

NFB U
R R/L1 U/T1
Motor
V
S S/L2 V/T2 M
T W/T3 W 3~
T/L3
VP
DCM
A1
Encoder
A1
PG
B1
Line driv er
B1
Z1
Z1
U1
U1
V1
V1
W1
W1
EH-PLC
AO
Y0 Y0 A2 AO
Y0 Y0 A2 BO AO
Y1 Y1 B2 BO AO
Y1 Y1 B2 ZO BO
BO
Phas e difference90 ZO
o
Phas e difference90
o
SG
EMC-PG01U
8-11
EMC-PG01R
Terminal Descriptions
Set by Pr.10-00~10-02
Resolver Output Power
R1- R2
7Vrms, 10kHz
PG1
Resolver Input Signal
S1,S2, S3, S4,
3.5±0.175Vrms, 10kHz
A2, /A2, Open Collector Input Voltage: +5~+24V (Note1)
PG2
PG Card Output signals. It has division frequency function: 1~255
times
AO, /AO, Max. output voltage for Line driver: 5VDC
PG OUT BO, /BO, Max. output current: 50mA
ZO, /ZO, Max. output frequency: 300kP/sec
SG,
SG is the GND of PG card. It is also the GND of position machine or PLC to
make the ouput signal to be the common pivot point.
PG2 Wiring Diagram

Ext Power
(5-24V)
Ext Pull
high RES
AB2
4.7k Ω
AB2 Ext Ground
8-12
Wiring Diagram
2
Jumper
Braking resist or (optional)
N o-F use Breaker

- +1 +2 /B1 B2
NFB U
R R/L1 U/T1
Mot or
V
S S/L2 V/T2 M
T W/T3 W 3~
T/L3
R1
R2
S2 PG
S4
R e so lve r
S1 En co d e r
S3
EH-PLC
AO
Y0 Y0 A2 AO
BO AO
Y0 Y0 A2
BO AO
Y1 Y1 B2
ZO BO
Y1 Y1 B2
ZO BO
Phas e difference90
o
Phas e difference90
o
SG
8-13
CMC-MOD01
Features
1. Supports Modbus TCP protocol
2. MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
3. Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect
4. E-mail alarm
5. AC motor drive keypad/Ethernet configuration
6. Virtual serial port.
Product File
1 I/O CARD & Relay Card

2 PG Card
3 Comm. Card
4 RJ-45 connection port
5 Removable control circuit
terminal
Specifications
Network Interface
Interface RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX

Number of ports 1 Port
Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP,
Network protocol
Delta Configuration
Electrical Specification
Power supply voltage 5VDC (supply by the AC motor drive)

Insulation voltage 2KV
Weight 25g
8-14
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)

EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation/storage
Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/IEC
Vibration/shock immunity
61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
Install CMC-MOD01 to VFD-C2000

1. Switch off the power supply of VFD-C2000.
2. Open the front cover of VFD-C2000.
3. Place the insulation spacer into the positioning pin at Slot 1 (shown in Figure 3), and aim the
two holes on the PCB at the positioning pin. Press the pin to clip the holes with the PCB (shown
in Figure 4).
4. Screw up at torque 6 ~ 8 kg-cm (5.21 ~ 6.94 in-lbs) after the PCB is clipped with the holes
(shown in Figure 5).
Slot 3
Slot 2 Slot 1
[Figure 3] [Figure 4]
[Figure 5]
Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet
When VFD-C2000 is link to Ethernet, please set up the communication parameters base on the table
below. Ethernet master will be able to read/write the frequency word and control word of VFD-C2000
after communication parameters setup.
Parameter Function Set value (Dec) Explanation
Source of frequency The frequency command is controlled by
P00-20 8
command setting communication card.
Source of operation The operation command is controlled by
P00-21 5
8-15
Decoding method for Decoding method for Delta AC motor

P09-30 0
communication drive
P09-75 IP setting 0 Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
P09-76 IP address -1 192 IP address 192.168.1.5
P09-80 Netmask -1 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
P09-84 Default gateway -1 192 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
Disconnecting CMC- MOD01 from VFD-C2000

2. Remove the two screws (shown in Figure 6).
3. Twist opens the card clip and inserts the slot type screwdriver to the hollow to prize the PCB off
the card clip (shown in Figure 7).
4. Twist opens the other card clip to remove the PCB (shown in Figure 8).
[Figure 8]
Basic Registers
BR# R/W Content Explanation

Model name Set up by the system; read only. The model code of
#0 R
CMC-MOD01=H’0203
Firmware Displaying the current firmware version in hex, e.g. H’0100 indicates the
#1 R
version firmware version V1.00.
Displaying the data in decimal form. 10,000s digit and 1,000s digit are for
Release date of
#2 R “month”; 100s digit and 10s digit are for “day”.
the version
For 1 digit: 0 = morning; 1 = afternoon.
#11 R/W Modbus Timeout Pre-defined setting: 500 (ms)
#13 R/W Keep Alive Time Pre-defined setting: 30 (s)
8-16
LED Indicator & Troubleshooting

LED Indicators
LED Status Indication How to correct it?
On Power supply in normal status --
POWER Green
Off No power supply Check the power supply
On Network connection in normal status --
LINK Green Flashes Network in operation --

Off Network not connected Check if the network cable is
connected
Troubleshooting
Abnormality Cause How to correct it?
Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the
AC motor drive not powered
power supply is normal.
POWER LED off
CMC-MOD01 not connected Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to AC motor
to AC motor drive drive.
CMC-MOD01 not connected Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
to network to network.
LINK LED off
Poor contact to RJ-45 Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to
connector Ethernet port.
CMC-MOD01 not connected

Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to network.
to network
No module found PC and CMC-MOD01 in
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC
different networks and
motor drive keypad.
blocked by network firewall.
CMC-MOD01 not connected Make sure CMC-MOD01 is connected to the
to network network.
Fail to open Incorrect communication Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
CMC-MOD01 setting in DCISoft set to Ethernet.
setup page PC and CMC-MOD01 in
different networks and Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.
blocked by network firewall.
Able to open Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is
CMC-MOD01 correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
Incorrect network setting in
setup page but fail please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
CMC-MOD01
to utilize webpage in your home, please refer to the network setting
monitoring instruction provided by your ISP.
Incorrect network setting in Check if the network setting for CMC-MOD01 is
CMC-MOD01 correct.
Fail to send e-mail
Incorrect mail server setting Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
8-17
CMC-PD01
Features
1. Supports PZD control data exchange.
2. Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters.
3. Supports user diagnosis function.
4. Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12Mbps.
Product Profile
1. NET indicator
2. POWER indicator
3. Positioning hole
4. AC motor drive connection
port
5. PROFIBUS DP connection
port
6. Screw fixing hole
7. Fool-proof groove
Specifications
PROFIBUS DP Connector
Interface DB9 connector

Transmission method High-speed RS-485
Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable
Electrical isolation 500VDC
Communication
Message type Cyclic data exchange

Module name CMC-PD01
GSD document DELA08DB.GSD
Company ID 08DB (HEX)
Serial transmission
9.6kbps; 19.2kbps; 93.75kbps; 187.5kbps; 125kbps; 250kbps; 500kbps; 1.5Mbps;
speed supported
3Mbps; 6Mbps; 12Mbps (bit per second)
(auto-detection)
Power supply 5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)

Insulation voltage 500VDC
Power consumption 1W
Weight 28g
8-18
Environment
ESD(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2)
EFT(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4)
Noise immunity Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6)
Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation /storage
Storage: -25ºC ~ 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Shock / vibration International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC61131-2 & IEC
resistance 68-2-27 (TEST Ea)
Installation
PROFIBUS DP Connector
PIN PIN name Definition

1 - Not defined
2 - Not defined 9 5
3 Rxd/Txd-P Sending/receiving data P(B)
4 - Not defined
5 DGND Data reference ground
6 1
6 VP Power voltage – positive
7 - Not defined
8 Rxd/Txd-N Sending/receiving data N(A)
9 - Not defined

There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-PD01. POWER LED displays the status of the working power.
NET LED displays the connection status of the communication.
POWER LED
LED status Indication How to correct it?

Green light on Power supply in normal status. --
Check if the connection between CMC-PD01 and AC
Off No power
motor drive is normal.
NET LED

Green light on Normal status --
CMC-PD01 is not connected to
Red light on Connect CMC-PD01 to PROFIBUS DP bus.
PROFIBUS DP bus.
Red light Invalid PROFIBUS communication Set the PROFIBUS address of CMC-PD01 between 1 ~
flashes address 125 (decimal)
Orange light CMC-PD01 fails to communication Switch off the power and check whether CMC-PD01 is
flashes with AC motor drive. correctly and normally connected to AC motor drive.
8-19
CMC-DN01
Functions
1. Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta HSSP protocol, able to conduct
immediate control to AC motor drive.
2. Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange.
3. For I/O mapping, supports Max. 32 words of input and 32 words of output.
4. Supports EDS file configuration in DeviceNet configuration software.
5. Supports all baud rates on DeviceNet bus: 125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps and extendable serial
transmission speed mode.
6. Node address and serial transmission speed can be set up on AC motor drive.
7. Power supplied from AC motor drive.
Product Profile
1. NS indicator
2. MS indicator
3. POWER indicator
4. Positioning hole
5. DeviceNet connection port
port
Specifications
DeviceNet Connector
Interface 5-PIN open removable connector. Of 5.08mm PIN interval

Transmission CAN
th d
Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable (with 2 power cables)
Transmission speed 125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps and extendable serial transmission speed
d
Network protocol DeviceNet protocol
AC Motor Drive Connection Port
Interface 50 PIN communication terminal

Transmission method SPI communication
1. Communicating with AC motor drive
Terminal function
2. Transmitting power supply from AC motor drive
Communication Delta HSSP protocol
t l
8-20
Power supply voltage 5VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)

Communication wire
0.85W
power consumption
Power consumption 1W
Weight 23g
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Teat(IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 6100-4-6)
Operation: -10ºC ~ 50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation /storage
Storage: -25ºC ~ 70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Shock / vibration International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC61131-2 &
resistance IEC 68-2-27 (TEST Ea)
DeviceNet Connector
PIN Signal Color Definition

1 V+ Red DC24V 1
2 H White Signal+ 2
3
3 S - Earth 4
4 L Blue Signal- 5
5 V- Black 0V

There are 3 LED indicators on CMC-DN01. POWER LED displays the status of power supply. MS
LED and NS LED are dual-color LED, displaying the connection status of the communication and
error messages.
POWER LED

On Power supply in abnormal status. Check the power supply of CMC-DN01.
Off Power supply in normal status --
8-21
NS LED
1. Check the power of CMC-DN01 and see if the

connection is normal.
No power supply or CMC-DN01 has 2. Make sure at least one or more nodes are on the
Off
not completed MAC ID test yet. bus.
3. Check if the serial transmission speed of
CMC-DN01 is the same as that of other nodes.
1. Configure CMC-DN01 to the scan list of the

Green light CMC-DN01 is on-line but has not master.
flashes established connection to the master.
2. Re-download the configured data to the master.
CMC-DN01 is on-line and is normally

Green light on --
connected to the master
Red light CMC-DN01 is on-line, but I/O 1. Check if the network connection is normal.
flashes connection is timed-out. 2. Check if the master operates normally.
1. Make sure all the MAC IDs on the network are
not repeated.
1. The communication is down. 2. Check if the network installation is normal.
2. MAC ID test failure. 3. Check if the baud rate of CMC-DN01 is
Red light on
3. No network power supply. consistent with that of other nodes.
4. CMC-DN01 is off-line. 4. Check if the node address of CMC-DN01 is
illegal.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.
MS LED

Check the power supply of CMC-DN01 and see of
Off No power supply or being off-line
the connection is normal.
Green light
Waiting for I/O data Switch the master PLC to RUN status
flashes
Green light on I/O data are normal --
Red light 1. Reconfigure CMC-DN01
Mapping error
flashes 2. Re-power AC motor drive
1. See the error code displayed on AC motor drive.
Red light on Hardware error
2. Send back to the factory for repair if necessary.
If the flashing lasts for a long time, check if
Orange light CMC-DN01 is establishing connection
CMC-DN01 and AC motor drive are correctly
flashes with AC motor drive.
installed and normally connected to each other.
8-22
CMC-EIP01
Features
1. Supports Modbus TCP and Ethernet/IP protocol

2. MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
3. Baud rate: 10/100Mbps auto-detect
4. AC motor drive keypad/Ethernet configuration
5. Virtual serial port
Product Profile
[Figure1]

2. Positioning hole
port
4. LINK indicator
5. RJ-45 connection port
6. POWER indicator
Specifications
Network Interface
Interface RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX

Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, MODBUS OVER TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP, Delta
Network protocol
Configuration
Weight 25g
Power supply voltage 5VDC
8-23
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-2)

EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation: -10°C ~ 50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation/storage
Storage: -25°C ~ 70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration/shock
International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
immunity
Installation
Connecting CMC-EIP01 to Network
1. Turn off the power of AC motor drive.

2. Open the cover of AC motor drive.
3. Connect CAT-5e network cable to RJ-45 port on
CMC-EIP01 (See Figure 2).
[Figure 2]
RJ-45 PIN Definition
PIN Signal Definition PIN Signal Definition

Positive pole for
1 Tx+ 5 -- N/C
data transmission
Negative pole for Negative pole for
2 Tx- 6 Rx-
data transmission data receiving
Positive pole for
3 Rx+ 7 -- N/C
data receiving
4 -- N/C 8 -- N/C
Connecting CMC-EIP01 to VFD-C2000

1. Switch off the power of AC motor drive.
2. Open the front cover of AC motor drive.
3. Place the insulation spacer into the positioning pin at Slot 1 (shown in Figure 3), and aim the
two holes on the PCB at the positioning pin. Press the pin to clip the holes with the PCB (see
Figure 4).
4. Screw up at torque 6 ~ 8 kg-cm (5.21 ~ 6.94 in-lbs) after the PCB is clipped with the holes (see
Figure 5).
8-24
Slot 3
Slot 2 Slot 1
[Figure 5]
Communication Parameters for VFD-C2000 Connected to Ethernet

When VFD-C2000 is connected to Ethernet network, please set up the communication parameters
for it according to the table below. The Ethernet master is only able to read/write the frequency word
and control word of VFD-C2000 after the communication parameters are set.
Parameter
Function Set value (Dec) Explanation
(Dec)
Source of frequency The frequency command is controlled by
P00-20 8
Source of operation The operation command is controlled by
P00-21 5
Decoding method for The decoding method for Delta AC motor
P09-30 0
communication drive
P09-75 IP setting 0 Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
8-25
Disconnecting CMC- EIP01 from VFD-C2000

2. Remove the two screws (see Figure 6).
3. Twist opens the card clip and inserts the slot type screwdriver to the hollow to prize the PCB off the
card clip (see Figure 7).
4. Twist opens the other card clip to remove the PCB (see Figure 8).
[Figure 8]

There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-EIP01. The POWER LED displays the status of power supply,
and the LINK LED displays the connection status of the communication.
LED Indicators
LED Status Indication How to correct it?

On Power supply in normal status --
POWER Green
Off No power supply Check the power supply.
Network connection in normal
On --
status
LINK Green Flashes Network in operation --
Check if the network cable is
Off Network not connected
connected.
Troubleshooting

Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the
AC motor drive not powered
power supply is normal.
POWER LED off
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to AC motor
AC motor drive drive.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
LINK LED off
network to network.
8-26

Poor contact to RJ-45 Make sure RJ-45 connector is connected to
connector Ethernet port.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to network.
network
No communication
card found PC and CMC-EIP01 in
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC
different networks and blocked
motor drive keypad.
by network firewall.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to the

network network.
Fail to open Incorrect communication Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
CMC-EIP01 setup setting in DCISoft set to Ethernet.
page PC and CMC-EIP01 in
different networks and blocked Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.
by network firewall.
Able to open Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
CMC-EIP01 setup correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
Incorrect network setting in
page but fail to please consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting
CMC-EIP01
utilize webpage in your home, please refer to the network setting
monitoring instruction provided by your ISP.
Incorrect network setting in Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
CMC-EIP01 correct.
Fail to send e-mail
Incorrect mail server setting Please confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
8-27
EMC-COP01
Built-in EMC-COP01 card are available in VFDXXXC23E/VFDXXXC43E series.
RJ-45 Pin definition

Pin Pin name Definition
1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant
high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground/0V/V-
RS485 socket
7 CAN_GND Ground/0V/V-
Specifications
Interface RJ-45
Transmission method CAN
Transmission cable CAN standard cable
Transmission speed 1M 500k 250k 125k 100k 50k
Communication protocol CANopen
CANopen Communication Cable

Model: TAP-CB03, TAP-CB04
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 TAP-CB03 500 ± 10 19 ± 0.4
2 TAP-CB04 1000± 10 39 ± 0.4
CANopen Dimension
Model: TAP-CN03
NOTE
For more information on CANopen, please refer to Chapter 15 CANopen Overview or CANopen user
manual can also be downloaded on Delta website: http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/.
8-28
Chapter 9 Specifications |C2000 Series
Chapter 9 Specification
230V Series
Frame Size A B C
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ 007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220
Power of corresponding heavy duty
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
motor (kW)
Power of corrsponding normal duty
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
motor (kW)
Rated Output Capacity
1.9 2.8 4.0 6.4 9.6 12 19 25 28 34
(kVA)
HEAVY
DUTY
Rated Output Current

4.8 7.1 10 16 24 31 47 62 71 86
(A)
Output Rating
Carrier Frequency
2~6kHz
(kHz)
Rate Output Capacity
2.0 3.2 4.4 6.8 10 13 20 26 30 36
(kVA)
NORMAL
DUTY

5 8 11 17 25 33 49 65 75 90
(A)
Carrier Frequency
2~15kHz 2~10kHz
(kHz)
Input Current (A) Heavy Duty 6.1 11 15 18.5 26 34 50 68 78 95
Input Rating
Input Current (A)

6.4 12 16 20 28 36 52 72 83 99
Normal Duty
Rated Voltage/Frequency 3-phase AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz
Operating Voltage Range 170~265Vac
Frequency Tolerance 47~63Hz
AC Drive Weight 2.6± 0.3Kg 5.4± 1Kg 9.8± 1.5Kg
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Braking Chopper Frame A to C (built-in); Frame D and above (optional)
DC reactor Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above (built-in)
EMC Filter Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above (optional)
EMC-COP01 VFDXXC23A (optional); VFDXXXC23E (built-in)
Frame Size D E F
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ 300 370 450 550 750 900
Power of corresponding heavy duty
22 30 37 45 55 75
motor (kW)
Power of corrsponding normal duty
30 37 45 55 75 90
motor (kW)
Rated Output Capacity
45 55 68 81 96 131
HEAVY
DUTY
(kVA)
Output Rating
114 139 171 204 242 329

(A)
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~6kHz
NORMAL
48 58 72 86 102 138
DUTY
(kVA)
120 146 180 215 255 346
(A)
Carrier Frequency (kHz) 2~10kHz 2~9 kHz
Input Current (A) Heavy Duty 118 136 162 196 233 315
Input Rating
Input Current (A)

124 143 171 206 245 331
Normal Duty
Rated Voltage/Frequency 3-phase AC 200V~240V (-15% ~ +10%), 50/60Hz
86.5±
AC Drive Weight 38.5± 1.5Kg 64.8± 1.5Kg
1.5Kg
Cooling method Fan Cooling
9-1

EMI Filter Frame A to C (optional); Frame D and above
(optional)
9-2
460V Series
Frame Size A B C
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ 007 015 022 037 040 055 075 110 150 185 220 300
Power of corresponding heavy
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
duty motor (kW)
Power of corrsponding normal
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30
duty motor (kW)
Rated Output
2.3 3.0 4.5 6.5 7.6 9.6 14 18 24 29 34 45
Capacity (kVA)
HEAVY
DUTY
Rated Output
2.9 3.8 5.7 8.1 9.5 11 17 23 30 36 43 57
Current (A)
Output Rating
Carrier Frequency
2~6kHz
(kHz)
Rate Output
2.4 3.2 4.8 7.2 8.4 10 14 19 25 30 36 48
Capacity (kVA)
NORMAL
DUTY
Rated Output
3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 10.5 12 18 24 32 38 45 60
Current (A)
Carrier Frequency
2~15kHz 2~10kHz
(kHz)
Input Current (A) Heavy
4.1 5.6 8.3 13 14.5 16 19 25 33 38 45 60
Duty
Input Rating
Input Current (A)

4.3 5.9 8.7 14 15.5 17 20 26 35 40 47 63
Normal Duty
Rated Voltage/Frequency 3-Phase AC 380V~480V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60Hz
AC Drive Weight 2.6± 0.3Kg 5.4± 1Kg 9.8± 1.5Kg
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling
VFDXXXC43A Frame A to C: No EMI Filter;
EMI Filter VFDXXXC43E: Built-in EMI Filter
VFDXXXC43A/43E Frame D and above: EMI Filter is optional
Frame Size D E *F *G *H
Model VFD-_ _ _C_ _ 370 450 550 750 900 1100 1320 1600 1850 2200 2800 3150 3550
Power of corresponding heavy
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 280 315
duty motor (kW)
Power of corrsponding normal
37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 280 315 355
duty motor (kW)
Rated Output
55 69 84 114 136 167 197 235 280 348 417 466 517
Capacity (kVA)
HEAVY
DUTY

69 86 105 143 171 209 247 295 352 437 523 585 649
(A)
Output Rating
Carrier Frequency
2~6kHz
(kHz)
58 73 88 120 143 175 207 247 295 367 438 491 544
(kVA)
NORMAL
DUTY

73 91 110 150 180 220 260 310 370 460 550 616 683
(A)
Carrier Frequency
2~10kHz 2~9kHz
(kHz)
Input Current (A) Heavy
70 96 108 149 159 197 228 285 361 380 469 527 594
Duty
Input Rating
Input Current (A)

74 101 114 157 167 207 240 300 380 400 494 555 625
Normal Duty
Rated Voltage/Frequency 3-Phase AC 380V~480V ( -15%~+10%), 50/60Hz
AC Drive Weight 38.5± 1.5Kg 64.8± 1.5Kg 86.5± 1.5Kg 134± 4Kg 228
Cooling method Fan cooling
9-3
VFDXXXC43A: No EMI Filter;

EMI Filter VFDXXXC43E: Built-in EMI Filter
VFDXXXC43A/43E Frame D and above: EMI Filter is optional
NOTE
For FRAME A, B and C, Model VFDXXXC43A the enclosure type is IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1.
For FRAME D and above, if the last character of the model is A then the enclosure type is IP20 but the wiring terminal is
IP00; if the last character of the model is E, the enclosure type is IP20/NEMA1/UL TYPE1.
General Specifications
Control Method 1: V/F, 2: SVC, 3: VF+PG, 4: FOC+PG, 5: TQC+PG,
Reach up to 150% or above at 0.5Hz.
Starting Torque
Under FOC+PG mode, starting torque can reach 150% at 0Hz.
V/F Curve 4 point adjustable V/F curve and square curve
Speed Response
5Hz (vector control can reach up to 40Hz)
Ability
Torque Limit Max. 200% torque current
Torque Accuracy ±5%
Max. Output
Light duty and normal duty: 0.01~600.00Hz; Heavy duty: 0.00 ~ 300.00 Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency Output
Digital command:±0.01%, -10℃~+40℃, Analog command: ±0.1%, 25±10℃
Accuracy
Output Frequency Digital command:0.01Hz, Analog command: 0.03 X max. output frequency/60 Hz
Control Characteristics
Resolution (±11 bit)

Light duty: rated output current is 110 % for 60 seconds
Overload Tolerance Normal duty: rated output current is 120% for 60 seconds
Heavy duty: rated output current is 150% for 60 seconds
Frequency Setting
+10V~-10, 0~+10V, 4~20mA, 0~20mA, Pulse input
Signal
Accel./decel. Time 0.00~600.00/0.0~6000.0 seconds
Torque control, Droop control, Speed/torque control switching, Feed forward control,
Zero-servo control, Momentary power loss ride thru, Speed search, Over-torque
detection, Torque limit, 17-step speed (max), Accel/decel time switch, S-curve
accel/decel, 3-wire sequence, Auto-Tuning (rotational, stationary), Dwell, Cooling fan
Main control function
on/off switch, Slip compensation, Torque compensation, JOG frequency, Frequency
upper/lower limit settings, DC injection braking at start/stop, High slip braking, PID
control (with sleep function),Energy saving control, MODOBUS communication
(RS-485 RJ45, max. 115.2 kbps), Fault restart, Parameter copy
230V model
VFD150C23A(include) and series above: PMW control; VFD150C23A and series
below: on/off switch control
Fan Control
460V model
VFD150C23A(include) and series above: PMW control; VFD150C23A and series
below: on/off switch control
Motor Protection Electronic thermal relay protection
For drive model 230V and 440V
Over-current Over-current protection for 220% rated current
Protection Characteristics
Protection
current clamp『Normal duty: 170~175%』;『Heavy duty: 180~185%』
Over-voltage 230: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 410V
Protection 460: drive will stop when DC-BUS voltage exceeds 820V
Over-temperature
Built-in temperature sensor
Protection
Stall Prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently
Restart After
Instantaneous Power Parameter setting up to 20 seconds
Failure
Grounding Leakage
Leakage current is higher than 50% of rated current of the AC motor drive
Current Protection
Certifications
, , GB/T12668-2, (certification in progress)
9-4
Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation

DO NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive/inflammable
2
gasses, humidity, liquid and vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg/cm every year.
Installation IEC60364-1/IEC60664-1 Pollution degree 2, Indoor use only
location
Storage -25 oC ~ +70 oC
Surrounding
Transportation -25 oC ~ +70 oC
Temperature
Non-condensation, non-frozen
Operation Max. 90%
Rated Storage/ Max. 95%
Humidity Transportation
No condense water
Operation/ 86 to 106 kPa
Air Pressure Storage
Environment Transportation 70 to 106 kPa
IEC721-3-3
Operation Class 3C2; Class 3S2
Pollution
Storage Class 2C2; Class 2S2
Level
Transportation Class 1C2; Class 1S2
No concentrate
If AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0~1000m, follow normal
operation restriction. If it is install at altitude 1000~3000m, decrease
Operation 2% of rated current or lower 0.5℃ of temeperature for every 100m
Altitude
increase in altitude. Maximum altitude for Corner Grounded is
2000m.
Package Storage
ISTA procedure 1A(according to weight) IEC60068-2-31
Drop Transportation
1.0mm, peak to peak value range from 2Hz to 13.2 Hz; 0.7G~1.0G range from 13.2Hz to 55Hz;
Vibration
1.0G range from 55Hz to 512 Hz. Comply with IEC 60068-2-6
Impact IEC/EN 60068-2-27
10 10
Max. allowed offset angle ±10 (under normal
o
Operation
Position installation position)
9-5
Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level

Operation
Model Frame Top cover Conduit Box Protection Level
Temperature
Frame A~C Top cover
IP20/UL Open Type -10~50℃
230V: Removed
Standard
0.75~22kW Standard
conduit plate
460V: with top IP20/UL Type1/NEMA1 -10~40℃
0.75~30kW cover
Frame D~H IP00/IP20/UL Open Type
VFDxxxCxxA
O nl y the ci rcl ed ar ea
230V: >22kW i s IP00 , o th er ar e IP2 0.
460V: >30kW
N/A No conduit box -10~50℃
Frame A~C Top cover

IP20/UL Open Type -10~50℃
460V: Removed
Standard
0.75~30kW Standard
conduit plate
with top IP20/UL Type1/NEMA1 -10~40℃
VFDxxxCxxE
cover
Frame D~H
Standard
230V: >22kW N/A IP20/UL Type1/NEMA1 -10~40℃
conduit box
460V: >30kW
9-6
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad

10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad
10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction
10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad

KPC-CC01 KPC-CE01(Option)
Communication Interface
RJ-45 (socket)、RS-485 interface;
Installation Method
Embedded type and can be put flat on the surface
of the control box. The front cover is water proof.
Descriptions of Keypad Functions

Key Descriptions
Start Operation Key
1. It is only valid when the source of operation command is from the keypad.
2. It can operate the AC motor drive by the function setting and the RUN LED will be ON.
3. It can be pressed again and again at stop process.
4. When enabling “HAND” mode, it is only valid when the source of operation command is
from the keypad.
Stop Command Key. This key has the highest processing priority in any situation.
1. When it receives STOP command, no matter the AC motor drive is in operation or stop
status, the AC motor drive needs to execute “STOP” command.
2. The RESET key can be used to reset the drive after the fault occurs. For those faults that
can’t be reset by the RESET key, see the fault records after pressing MENU key for
details.
Operation Direction Key
1. This key is only control the operation direction NOT for activate the drive. FWD: forward,
REV: reverse.
2. Refer to the LED descriptions for more details.
ENTER Key
Press ENTER and go to the next level. If it is the last level then press ENTER to execute the command.
ESC Key
ESC key function is to leave current menu and return to the last menu. It is also functioned as a
return key in the sub-menu.
10-1
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad|C2000 Series
Press menu to return to main menu.

Menu content:
KPC-CE01 does not support function 5 ~13.
1. Detail Parameter 7. Quick/Simple Setup 13. PC Link
2. Copy Parameter 8. Display Setup
3. Keypad Locked 9. Time Setup
4. PLC Function 10. Language Setup
5. Copy PLC 11. Startup Menu
6. Fault Record 12. Main Page
Direction: Left/Right/Up/Down
1. In the numeric value setting mode, it is used to move the cursor and change the numeric
value.
2. In the menu/text selection mode, it is used for item selection.
Function Key
1. It has the factory setting function and the function can be set by the user. The present
factory setting: F1 is JOG function.
2. Other functions must be defined by TPEditor first. TPEditor software V1.30.6 is available
for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act=3&pid=1&cid=1&tp
id=3
3. Installation Instruction for TPEditor is on page 10-15 of this chapter.
HAND ON Key
1. This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of Hand frequency and hand
operation. The factory settings of both source of Hand frequency and hand operation are
the digital keypad.
2. Press HAND ON key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and
hand operation source. Press HAND ON key at operation status, it stops the AC motor
drive first (display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source.
3. Successful mode switching for KPC-CE01, “H/A” LED will be on; for KPC-CC01, it will
display HAND mode/ AUTO mode on the screen.
1. This key is executed by the parameter settings of the source of AUTO frequency and
AUTO operation. The factory setting is the external terminal (source of operation is
4-20mA).
2. Press Auto key at stop status, the setting will switch to hand frequency source and hand
operation source. Press Auto key at operation status, it stops the AC motor drive first
(display AHSP warning), and switch to hand frequency source and hand operation source.
3. Successful mode switching for KPC-CE01, “H/A” LED will be off; for KPC-CC01, it will
display HAND mode/ AUTO mode on the screen
Descriptions of LED Functions

LED Descriptions
Steady ON: operation indicator of the AC motor drive, including DC brake, zero speed,
standby, restart after fault and speed search.
Blinking: drive is decelerating to stop or in the status of base block.
Steady OFF: drive doesn’t execute the operation command
Steady ON: stop indicator of the AC motor drive.
Blinking: drive is in the standby status.
Steady OFF: drive doesn’t execute “STOP” command.
Operation Direction LED
1. Green light is on, the drive is running forward.
2. Red light is on, the drive is running backward.
3. Twinkling light: the drive is changing direction.
(Only KPC-CE01 support this function)
Setting can be done during operation.
HAND LED: When HAND LED is on (HAND mode); when HAND LED is off (AUTO mode).
(Only KPC-CE01Support this function )
Setting can be done during operation.
AUTO LED: when AUTO LED is on (AUTO mode); when AUTO LED is off (HAND mode).
10-2
RUN LED:
LED Condition/State
status
OFF CANopen at initial
No LED
Blinking CANopen at pre-operation
CANopen ~”RUN”
Single CANopen at stopped

flash
ON CANopen at operation status

No LED
ERR LED:
LED Condition/ State
status
OFF No Error
Single One message fail
flash
Double Guarding fail or heartbeat fail

CANopen ~”ERR” flash
Triple SYNC fail

flash
ON Bus off
10-3
10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01

POWER ON
1)The defau lt Start-up page is Delta Logo.(Default 1and 2)

Start -up 2) User can customize their start-up page through the edited fun ction.
(Need to purchase the optional accessories)
Skip to main page
afer 3sec.
A U TO The to p line of LCD displays the status of drive.

F 60.00Hz After main menu is selecte d, the start-u p p age will display in
H 0.00Hz the format user defin ed. The page shown on the left is display
A 0.00 as Delta default setting.
J OG 14 ：35 :3 6 The button lin e of LCD disp lays time and JOG.
P ress onc e P res s aga in P res s aga in

A U TO AU TO A U TO
F 60.00Hz F 60.00Hz H 0.00Hz

H 0.00Hz H 0.00Hz A 0.00
A 0.00 A 0.00 A 0.00 Amp
J OG 14 ：35 :3 6 J OG 1 4 ：3 5 :3 6 J OG 14 ：35 :3 6
Pre ss MENU
MENU
MENU
1. Detail Paramete r 5. Copy PLC
1.Detail Paramete r 2.Copy Paramete r 6. Fault Record
2.Copy Paramete r 3.Keypad Locked 7. Quick/Simple Setup
3.Keypad Locked 4.PLC Function 8. Display Setup
9. Time Setup
Item 1~4 are the
10. Language Setup
common items for 11. Start-up
KPC-CC01 &KPC-C E01
12. Main page
NOTE
1. Startup page can only display pictures, no flash.
2. When Power ON, it will display startup page then the main page. The main page displays Delta’s default setting F/H/A/U,
the display order can be set by Pr.00.03 (Startup display). When the selected item is U page, use left key and right key to
switch between the items, the display order of U page is set by Pr.00.04 (User display).
10-4
Display Icon
Star t-up : prese nt se tting
1.Default 1
: roll down the page for more options
2.Default 2
3.User define
Press for more options.
Pr setup
: show complete se ntence
00:System Pr
01:Basic Pr Press for complete information
02:DI/DO Pr
Display item
MENU
MENU 1. Detail Parameter 5. Copy PLC
2.Copy Parameter 6. Fault Record
1.Detail Parameter 7. Quick/Simple Setup
3.Keypad Locked
2.Copy Parameter 4.PLC Function 8. Displa y Setup
3.Keypad Locked 9. Time Setup
10. Language Setup
Item 1~4 are the common items for 11. Start-up
KPC-C C01 &KPC-CE01 12. Main page
13. PC Link
1. Detail Parameter
00 System Pr Content
Pr setup 00- System Pr

00:System Pr 01 ID code
01:Basic Pr 02 Rated curre
02:DI/DO Pr 03 Pr reset
00-08 Password Set

Press ENTER to select.
00-08
0000
Password set
0000~9999 MY MODE
01-00 The maximum output freq.
01-00 Hz
600.00
Max. output freq.
0.00~600.00 MY MODE
10-5
2. Copy Parameter
Copy parameters (Pr)
Copy pr 1. 4 sets of parameters duplication.
1. 2. When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the copy
2. parameters (Pr) page.
3.
Copy pr
1.2009/05/04
2.
3. Press ENTER
File 1
1.SAVE
Press to save or load
2.LOAD
After selecting save and pressing "ENTER", the parameter

setting will be saved in the keypad.
3. Keypad locked
Keypad Locked
Keypad locked
This function is used to lock the keypad. The main page would not display
“keypad locked” when the keypad is locked, however it will display the
Press "ENTER" message”please press ESC and then ENTER to unlock the keypad” when any
to lock key is pressed.
HAND
Keypad locked
Press ENTER to lock
Press "ESC" for
3 seconds to unlock
JOG 14：35:56
Press any key.
4. PLC Function
When activate and stop PLC function, the PLC status will be displayed on
PLC main page of Delta default setting.
1.Disable
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop
F 600.00Hz
H 600.00Hz
A 23.5A
PLC function
1. Disable The PLC function of KPC-CE01 can only displays:
2. PLC run
3. PLC stop 1. PLC0
2. PLC1
3. PLC2
10-6
5. Copy PLC
Copy PLC
Copy PLC 1. Duplicate 4 sets of parameters.
1. 2. When the setting is complete, the date will be written to the Copy
PLC page.
2.
3.
Copy PLC
1.2010/03/14
2.
3. Press ENTER to setting me nu.
File 1
Press to sele ct where to save the file
1. Save to the drive
2. Save to the
digital display Press ENTER execute filesaving process.
If select save to the drive and press enter, the file will be saved to the drive.
NOTE
If password protection for WPLSoft editor was set, it is required to enter the
password before the file can successfully be saved onto the digital display.
File 1
P as s w o rd 0000
I n p u t T i m es 0
6. Fault record
Fault Record
Fault record It can accumulate 6 sets of recent fault records.
1:GFF The first fault code displays in the record is the latest fault. Select the fault
2:ocA code for details on time, date, frequency, current, voltage and DC BUS Volt..
3:oH
Fault record
1:GFF
Press ENTER to select. 2:ocA Press ENTER to view the
3:oH
current and voltage of the fault
KPC-CE01 does not support
this function. 2: ocA
Time: 19:47:00
Frequency: 0.00
Current: 0.00
NOTE
Fault actions of AC motor drive are record and save to KPC-CC01. When
KPC-CC01 is removed and apply to another AC motor drive, the previous
fault records will not be deleted. The new fault records of the present AC
motor drive will accumulate to KPC-CC01.
10-7
7. Quick/Simple Setting
Quick Setting:
Quick setting
1. V/F Mode
1: V/F mode 01: Password Input (Decode)
2: VFPG mode
3: SVC mode V/F mode P00-07 00-07
01. Password Input 0
02. Password Setting
Password Input
Press ENTER to select. 03. Control Mode
0~ 65535
Items
Quick Setting: 1. Parameter Protection Password Input (P00-07)
1. VF Mode 2. Parameter Protection Password Setting (P00-08)
2. VFPG Mode 3. Control Mode (P00-10)
3. SVC Mode 4. Control of Speed Mode (P00-11)
4. FOCPG Mode 5. Load Selection (P00-16)
5. TQCPG Mode 6. Carrier Frequency (P00-17)
6. My Mode 7. Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO) (P00-20)
8. Source of the Operation Command (AUTO) (P00-21)
9. Stop Method (P00-22)
10. Digital Keypad STOP function (P00-32)
11. Max. Operation Frequency (P01-00)
12. Base Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-01)
13. Max. Output Voltage Setting of Motor 1 (P01-02)
14. Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1 (P01-03)
15. Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1 (P01-04)
16. Mid-point Frequency 2 of Motor 1 (P01-05)
17. Mid-point Voltage 2 of Motor 1 (P01-06)
18. Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (P01-07)
19. Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1 (P01-08)
20. Output Frequency Upper Limit (P01-10)
21. Output Frequency Lower Limit (P01-11)
22. Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
23. Decel Time 1 (P01-13)
24. Over-voltage Stall Prevention (P06-01)
25. Derating Protection (P06-55)
26. Software Brake Level (P07-00)
27. Speed Search during Start-up (P07-12)
28. Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection (P07-20)
29. Filter Time of Torque Command (P07-24)
30. Filter Time of Slip Compensation (P07-25)
31. Torque Compensation Gain (P07-26)
32. Slip Compensation Gain (P07-27)
2. VFPG Mode
01: Password Input (Decode)
V/F mode P00-07 00-07

Password Input
03. Control Mode
0~ 65535
Items
1. Parameter Protection Password Input (P00-07)
2. Parameter Protection Password Setting (P00-08)
3. Control Mode (P00-10)
4. Control of Speed Mode (P00-11)
5. Load Selection (P00-16)
6. Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO) (P00-20)
10-8

17. Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
24. Encoder Type Selection (P10-00)
25. Encoder Pulse (P10-01)
26. Encoder Input Type Setting (P10-02)
27. ASR Control ( P) 1 (P11-06)
28. ASR Control (I) 1 (P11-07)
29. ASR Control ( P) 2 (P11-08)
30. ASR Control (I) 2 (P11-09)
31. P Gain of Zero Speed (P11-10)
32. I Gain of Zero Speed (P11-11)
3. SVCPG Mode
V/F mode P00-07 00-07

Password Input
03. Control Mode
0~ 65535
Items
5. Load Selection (P00-16)
6. Carrier Frequency (P00-17)
7. Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO) (P00-20)
18. Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
20. Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-01)
21. Rated Power of Induction Motor 1 (P05-02)
22. Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (P05-03)
23. Pole Number of Induction Motor 1 (P05-04)
24. No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (P05-05)
26. Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration (P06-03)
10-9

4. FOCPG Mode
V/F mode P00-07 00-07

Password Input
03. Control Mode
0~ 65535
Items
5. Source of the Master Frequency Command (AUTO)
(P00-20)
13. Accel. Time 1 (P01-12)
21. Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration (P06-03)
28. System Control (P11-00)
29. Per Unit of System Inertia (P11-01)
30. ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth (P11-03)
31. ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth (P11-04)
32. Zero-speed Bandwidth (P11-05)
5. TQCPG Mode
V/F mode P00-07 00-07

(Decode)
Password Input
03. Control Mode 0~ 65535
Items
1. Password Input (Decode) (P00-07)
2. Password Setting (P00-08)
5. Source of the Master Frequency Command (P00-20)
10-10
6. Source of the Operation Command (P00-21)

20. System Control (P11-00)
21. Per Unit of System Inertia (P11-01)
22. ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth (P11-03)
23. ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth (P11-04)
24. Zero-speed Bandwidth (P11-05)
25. Max. Torque Command (P11-27)
26. Source of Torque Offset (P11-28)
27. Torque Offset Setting (P11-29)
28. Source of Torque Command (P11-33)
29. Torque Command (P11-34)
30. Speed Limit Selection (P11-36)
31. Forward Speed Limit (torque mode) (P11-37)
32. Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode) (P11-38)
6.My Mode
My mode:
My mode It can save 01~32 sets of
01: parameters (Pr).
02: 1
03:
05-02 Amps
05-02
Click F4 in parameter setting motor current
page, the parameter will save 0.00~ 600.00 MY MODE
to My Mode. To delete or
correct the parameter, enter Press F4 and save to my mode.
this parameter and click the
“DEL” on the bottom right 2
corner.
My mode
01: motor current
02:
03:
The parameter (Pr) will be displayed
in My mode if it is properly saved.
To correct or to delete this Pr. clicks
DEL.
05-02 Amps
05-02
motor current
0.00~ 600.00 DEL
Press F4 to delete this Pr. setting
in My Mode.
10-11
8. Display setup
1. Contrast Adjustment
Disp setup Contrast adjust
1.Contrast Ad Adjust setting value
6
2.BKLT time
0 10
2. Back-lighted Time
BKLT Time Min
Press ENTER to
5 Adjust setting value
enter the setting menu.
0 10
9. Time setting
Time setup Enter time setup page, "9" will continue to blink
2009/01/01 move to left / right

_ _ : _ _ :_ _
increase / decrease the value
Press ENTER to confirm.
NOTE
When the digital keypad is removed, the time setting will be in standby
status for 7 days. After this period, the time needs to be reset.
10. Language setup

Language selection.
Language
1:English
2:繁體中文
3:簡體中文
11. Startup Page Setting

1. Default picture 1
Start-up DELTA LOGO
2. Default picture 2
1.Default 1 DELTA Text
2.Default 2 3. User defined: optional accessory is require (TPEditor & USB/RS-485
Communication Interface-IFD6530)
3.User define Install an editing accessory would allow users to design their own start-up
page.If editor accessory is not installed, “user defined” option will dispay a
blank page.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530
Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Acessories for more detail.
TPEditor
TPEditor Installation Instruction is on page 10-15 and TPEditor V1.03.6 is
available for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act
=3&pid=1&cid=1&tpid=3
10-12
12. Main page

1. Default page
Main Page Default picture and editable picture are available upon selection.
1.Default
F 60.00Hz
2.User define
H 0.00Hz
A 0.00
Press ENTER to select. F 600.00Hz >>> H >>> A >>> U (circulate)

2. User defined: optional accessory is require (TPEditor & USB/RS-485
Communication Interface-IFD6530)
Install an editing accessory would allow users to design their own start-up
page.If editor accessory is not installed, “user defined” option will dispay a
blank page.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530
Please refer to Chapter 07 Optional Acessories for more detail.
TPEditor
TPEditor Installation Instruction is on page 10-15 and TPEditor V1.30.6 is
available for download at:
http://www.delta.com.tw/ch/product/em/download/download_main.asp?act
=3&pid=1&cid=1&tpid=3
13. PC Link
The function of PC Link is to establish a connection with computer to
PC Link download the page for user defined editing. After enter to PC Link page,
check if the connection of KPC-CC01 and computer is successfully establish,
then press enter to go to next page and wait for communication response.
Press "ENTER"
1. If the connection failed, the screen will show “Time Out”.
to link
PC Link
Select 1 and press ENTER Time Out
Press "ESC"back
PC Link to MENU
Waiting 2. If the connection succeeds, the screen page will show “Downloading”.
When the download is done, it returns to MENU page.
28% PC Link
Downloading
Select 2 and press ENTER
28%
3. In order to set the start-up page and main page in the format user
defined, user must check the user define option for start-up page and
main page. If the user define page for editing has not yet downloaded to
KPC-CC01, the start-up page and main page will display as blank.
10-13
Other display
When fault occur, the menu will display:
Fault Warning
ocA CE01
Oc at accel Comm. Error 1
1. Press ENTER and start RESET. If still no response, please contact local distributor or return to the factory. To
view the fault DC BUS voltage, output current and output voltage, press “MENU”Æ“Fault Record”.
2. Press ENTER again, if the screen returns to main page, the fault is clear.
3. When fault or warning message appears, backlight LED will blinks until the fault or the warning is cleared.
Optional accessory: RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad

Part No. Description
CBC-K3FT RJ45 extension lead, 3 feet (approximately 0.9m)
CBC-K5FT RJ45 extension lead, 5 feet (approximately 1.5 m)
CBC-K10FT RJ45 extension lead, 10 feet (approximately 3 m)
10-14
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction

1) TPEditor: Setup & Basic Functions
1. Run TPEditor version 1.30
2. Go to File(F)ÆClick on New. The Window below will pop up. At the device type, click on the drop down
menu and choose DELTA VFD-C Inverter. At the TP type, click on the drop down menu and choose VFD-C
KeyPad. As for File Name, enter TPE0. Now click on OK.
3. You are now at the designing page. Go to Edit (E)ÆClick on Add a New Page (A) or go to the TP page on
the upper right side, right click once on TP page and choose Add to increase one more page for editing. The
current firmware of Keypad is version1.00 and can support up to 4 pages.
4. Download setting, Go to Tool ÆCommunication settings (C) to set up the PC Com Port and Baud Rate. The
supporting speeds of Baud rate are 9600bps, 19200bps and 38400bps. The default setting of TP address is
1, please do not modify.
2) Edit Startup Page

1. Click once on the Boot Page on the right hand side of your computer screen or click on View (V) Æclick on
Boot Page (B). Then a blank Boot Page window will pop up. Use the circled items to design your Startup page.
10-15
2. Static Text . Open a blank page, click once on this button , and then double click on that blank
page. The following windows will pop up.
On the right hand side of the Static Text Setting, you can adjust the frame setting, the text direction, the
alignment and the font setting. Once you finish all the adjustments that you need.
You can continue to input your text in the blank space of Static Text Setting window. When you finish
inputting your text, click on OK to continue your next step or click cancel to abort the current step.
3. Static Bitmap ÆOpen a blank page, then click once on this button and then double click on that
blank page. The following window will pop up.
Please note that Static Bitmap setting support only images in BMP format. Now choose a image that you
need and click open, then that image will appear in the Static Bitmap window.
4. Geometric Bitmap Æ As shown in the picture on the left side, there

are 11 kinds of geometric bitmap to choose. Open a new blank page then click once on a geometric bitmap
10-16
icon that you need. Then drag that icon and enlarge it to the size that you need on that blank page. For
example, if you drag this icon to a blank page, you will see the following window.
5. Download---Take the image below as an example. The sentence “Boot page” is static text, the 11 images
below are geometric bitmaps. The image on the right hand side is a Static Bitmap. To upload a start up
page, double click to activate “Boot page. Make sure that you have followed the instruction on page 3 to
choose the right com port. Then go to “Communication (M)” ÆClick on “Write Boot Page TP (B).” When
you see the pop up message below
Go to the C2000 Keypad, press Menu then keep on pressing the Upward key until you see “PC Link,” then
press ENTER once, when you see “Press Enter to PC Link” on the keypad, press the ENTER again. Then
click the YES button to begin the upload.
10-17
3) Edit Main Page

1. Click on a page under the TP Page to edit or go to View Æ click on Boot Page to begin to edit main page.
The objects available for you to use are in the red circles below.
From left to right: Static Text, ASCII Display, Static Bitmap, Scale, Bar Graph, Button, Clock Display, Units,
Numeric Input, 11 geometric bitmaps and different width of lines. The application of Static Text, Static
Bitmap, and geometric bitmap is the same as the editing startup page.
2. Numeric/ASCII Display A): Go to Objects (O)ÆClick once on the Numeric/ASCII Display(A)

ÆDrag to enlarge to reach the size that you need to add objects in the
screen where you want to create an object ÆDouble click on the object to set up Related Devices, Frame
Setting , Fonts and Alignment.
Related Device: Choose the VFD Communication Port that you need, if you want to read output
frequency (H), set the VFD Communication Port to $2202. For other values, please refer to ACMD
ModBus Comm Address List.
3. Scale Setting : On the Tool Bar, click on this for Scale Setting. You can also edit Scale Setting in
the Property Window on the right hand side of your computer screen.
a. Scale Position: Click on the drop down list to choose which position that you need to place a scale.
b. Scale Side: Click on the drop down list to choose if you want to number your scale from smaller
number to bigger number or from big to small. Click OK to accept this setting or click Cancel to
abort.
c. Font Setting: Click on the drop down list to choose the Font setting that you need then click OK to
accept the setting or click Cancel to abort.
10-18
d. Value Length: Click on the drop down to choose 16bits or 32 bits. Then click OK to accept the
setting or click Cancel to abort.
e. Main Scale & Sub Scale: In order to divide the whole scale into equal parts, key in the numbers of
your choices for main scale and sub scale.
f. Maximum value & Minimum Value are the numbers on the two ends of a scale. They can be
negative numbers but the input numbers are limited by value.
g. Follow the Scale setting mentioned above; you will have a scale as shown below.
4. Bar Graph setting :
a. Related Device: Choose the VFD Communication Port that you need.
b. Direction Setting: Click on the drop down menu to choose one of the following directions: From
Bottom to Top, From Top to Bottom, From Left to Right or From Right to Left.
c. Maximum Value & Minimum Value: They define the range covered by the maximum value and
minimum value. If a value is smaller than or equal to the minimum value, then the bar graph will be
blank. If a value is bigger or equal to the maximum value, then the bar graph will be full. If a value is
between minimum and maximum value, then the bar graph will be filled proportionally.
5. Button : Currently this function only allows the Keypad to switch pages, other functions are not yet
available. Text input function and Image inserted functions are not yet supported.
Double click on to open set up window.
a. <Button Type> allows you set up buttons’ functions. But Page Jump is the only supported function
currently.
b. Page Jump setting: After you choose the Page Jump function in the drop down list, you will see this
Page Jump Setting Menu
c. <Function Key> allows you to assign functions to the following keys on the KPC-CC01 keypad: F1,
F2, F3, F4, Up, Down, Left and Right. Please note that the Up and Down keys are locked by
TPEditor. These two keys cannot be programmed. If you want to program Up and Down keys, go to
ToolÆFunction Key Settings (F)ÆRe-Define Up/Down Key(R).
10-19
d. There are no supported functions other than the setting mentioned above.
6. Clock Display Setting : Click once on this button .

Open a new file and click once in that window, you will see the following
In the clock display setting, you can choose to display Time, Day or Date on the Keypad. To adjust time,
go to #9 on the Keypad’s menu. You can also adjust Frame Setting, Font Setting and Alignment.
7. Unit Measurement : Click once on this Button:

Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following
Choose from the drop down list the Metrology and the Unity Name that you need.
As for Metrology, you have the following choices Length, Square Measure, Volume/Solid Measure,
Weight, Speed, Time and Temperature. The unit name changes automatically when you change
metrology type.
8. Numeric Input Setting :
This menu allows you to provide parameters or communication ports and to input numbers.
Click once on this button .
Open a new file and double click on that window, you will see the following:
10-20
a. Related Device: There are two blank spaces to fill in, one is <Write> and another one is <Read>.
Input the numbers that you want to display and the corresponding numbers of a parameter and that
of a communication port. For example, input 012C to Read and Write Parameter P01-44.
b. OutLine Setting: The Frame setting, Font setting, Vertical Alignment and Horizontal Alignment are
the same as mentioned before. Click on the drop down menu and choose the setting that you need.
c. Function key: The setting here allows you to program keys on the keypad. Press the key on the
menu then the corresponding key on the keypad will start to blink, then press Enter to confirm the
setting.
d. Value Type & Value Length: These two factors influence the range of the Minimum and Maximum
Value of the Limit Setting. Please note that the corresponding supporting values for C2000 have to
be 16bits. The 32bits values are not supported.
e. Value Setting: This part is set automatically by the keypad itself.
f. Limit Setting: Input the range the security setting here.
g. For example, if you set Function Key as F1, Minimum Value as 0 and Maximum Value ias 4, then
press F1 on Keypad Then you can press Up and Down key on the keypad to increase or decrease
the value. Press Enter Key on the keypad to confirm your setting. You can also go to parameter
table 01-44 to verify if your input correctly the value.
9. Download TP Page : Press Up or Down key on the keypad until you reach #13 PC
Link.
Then press Enter on the keypad and you will see the word “Waiting” on keypad’s screen. Now choose a
page that you have created then go to Communication (M)ÆWrite to TP(W) to start downloading the
page to the keypad
When you see the word Completed on the keypad’s screen, that means the download is done.
Then you can press ESC on the keypad to go back to the menu of the keypad.
10-21
10-4 Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Fault Codes and Descriptions

Following fault codes and description are for digital keypad KPC-CC01 with version V1.01 and version
higher.
LCM Display Description
Fault
FrEr Keypad flash memory read error
kpdFlash Read Er
Fault
FSEr Keypad flash memory save error
kpdFlash Save Er
Fault
FPEr Keypad flash memory parameter error
kpdFlash Pr Er
Fault
VFDr Keypad flash memory when read AC drive data error
Read VFD Info Er
Warning
CE01
Modbus function code error
Comm Command Er
Warning
CE02
Modbus data address error
Comm Address Er
Warning
CE03
Modbus data value error
Comm Data Error
Warning
CE04 Modbus slave drive error
Comm Slave Error
Warning
CE10
Modbus transmission time-Out
KpdCom m Time O ut
Warning
TPNO
Object not supported by TP Editor
TP No Object
10-22
Fault Descriptoin of File Copy and Setting Errors

File 1
Err Parameter and rile are read only
Read Only
File 1
Err Fail to write parameter and file
Write Fail
File 1
Err AC drive is in operating status
VFD Running
File 1
Err AC drive parameter is locked
Pr Lock
File 1
Err AC drive parameter changing
Pr Changing
File 1
Err Fault code
Fault Code
File 1
Err Warning code
Warning Code
File 1
Err File type dismatch
Type Dismatch
File 1
Err File is locked with password
Password Lock
File 1
Err File version dismatch
Version Fail
File 1
Err AC drive copy function time-out
VFD Time Out
File 1
Err Other keypad error
Keypad Issue
10-23
File 1
Err Other AC drive error
VFD Issue
10-24
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings

This chapter provides summary of parameter settings for user to gather the parameter setting ranges,
factory settings and set parameters. The parameters can be set, changed and reset by the digital keypad.
NOTE
1） : the parameter can be set during operation

2） For more detail on parameters, please refer to Ch12 Description of Parameter Settings.
00 Drive Parameters
NOTE IM: Induction Motor; PM: Permanent Magnet Motor
Factory
Pr. Explanation Settings
Setting
4: 230V, 1HP
5: 460 V, 1HP
6: 230V,2HP
7: 460 V, 2HP
8: 230V, 3HP
9: 460 V, 3HP
10: 230V, 5HP
11: 460 V, 5HP
12: 230V, 7.5HP
13: 460 V, 7.5HP
14: 230V, 10HP
15: 460V, 10HP
16: 230V, 15HP
17: 460V, 15HP
18: 230V, 20HP
19: 460V, 20HP
20: 230V, 25HP
21: 460V, 25HP
22: 230V, 30HP
23: 460V, 30HP Read
00-00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive 24: 230V, 40HP only
25: 460V, 40HP
26: 230V, 50HP
27: 460V, 50HP
28: 230V, 60HP
29: 460V, 60HP
30: 230V, 75HP
31: 460V, 75HP
32: 230V, 100HP
33: 460V, 100HP
34: 230V, 125HP
35: 460V, 125HP
37: 460V, 150HP
39: 460V, 175HP
41: 460V, 215HP
43: 460V, 250HP
45: 460V, 300HP
47: 460V, 375HP
49: 460V, 425HP
51: 460V, 475HP
93: 460V, 5HP（4kW）
Display AC Motor Drive Rated
00-01 Display by models Read
Current
only
11-1
Factory
Setting
0: No function
1: Read only
5: Reset KWH display to 0
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
00-02 Parameter Reset 0
8: keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base
frequency is 50Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings
(base frequency is 60Hz)
0: F (frequency command)
1: H (output frequency)
00-03 Start-up Display Selection 0
2: U (multi-function display, see Pr.00-04)
3: A (output current)
0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (c)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display output power angle (n)
6: Display output power in kW (P)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r)
8: Display estimate output torque % (t)
9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to
Pr.10-00,10-01)
10: Display PID feedback in % (b)
11: Display AVI in % (1.)
12: Display ACI in % (2.)
13: Display AUI in % (3.)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT in oC (i.)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance in oC
(c.)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) (i)
17: The status of digital output (ON/OFF) (o)
18: Multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
input (d.)
00-04 Content of Multi-function Display 3
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital
output (0.)
21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card) (P.)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (q.)
24: Position command tracing error (E.)
25: Overload count (0.00~100.00%) (h.)
26: Ground Fault GFF (Unit :%)(G.)
27: DC Bus voltage ripple (Unit: Vdc) (r.)
28: Display PLC data D1043 (C)
29: Display PM motor pole section (EMC-PG01U
application) (4.)
30: Display output of user defined (U)
31: Display Pr.00-05 user Gain(K)
32: Number of actual motor revolution during
operation (PG card plug in and Z phase signal
input) (Z.)
33: Motor actual position during operation (when
PG card is connected)(q)
34: Operation speed of fan(%) (F.)
35: Control Mode display: 0= Speed control mode
(SPD), 1= torque control mode (TQR) (t.)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive
11-2
Factory
Setting
(Hz) (J.)
37: Reserved
38: Display drive status (6.)
39: Display estimated output torque, postitive and
negative, using Nt-m as unit (t 0.0: postitive
torque; -0.0: negative torque (C.)
Coefficient Gain in Actual Output
00-05 0~160.00 0
Frequency
00-06 Software Version Read-only #.#
Parameter Protection Password 0～65535
00-07
Input 0~3: the times of password attempts 0
0 ~ 65535
Parameter Protection Password 0: No password protection / password is entered
00-08 0
Setting correctly (Pr00-07)
1: Parameter is locked
00-09 Reserved
0: Speed mode
1: Point-to-Point position control
00-10 Control Mode 0
2: Torque mode
3: Home mode
0: VF (IM V/f control)
1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
2: SVC(IM Sensorless vector control)
3: FOCPG (IM FOC vector control+ encoder)
00-11 Control of Speed Mode 4: FOCPG（PM FOC vector control + Encoder） 0
5: FOC Sensorless (IM field oriented sensorless
vector control)
6: PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless
vector control)
0: Relative position
00-12 Point-to-Point Position mode
1: Absolute position
0: TQCPG（IM Torque control + Encoder）
00-13 Torque Mode Control 1: TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder) 0
2: TQC Sensorless (IM Sensorless torque control)
00-14 Reserved
00-15 Reserved
0: Normal load
00-16 Load Selection 0
1: Heavy load
Normal load
230V 460V Carrier Frequency
1-15HP 1-20HP 2~15KHz 8
20-50HP 25-75HP 2~10KHz 6
60-125HP 100-475HP 2~09KHz 4
00-17 Carrier Frequency
Heavy load
230V 460V Carrier Frequency
1-15HP 1-20HP 2~15KHz
20-50HP 25-75HP 2~10KHz
2
60-125HP 100-475HP 2~09KHz
00-18 Reserved
Bit 0: Control command by PLC force control
Bit 1: Frequency command by PLC force control Read
00-19 PLC Command Mask
Bit 2: Position command by PLC force control only
Bit 3: Torque command by PLC force control
0: Digital keypad
Source of Master Frequency
00-20 1: RS-485 serial communication 0
Command（AUTO）
2: External analog input (Pr.03-00)
11-3
Factory
Setting
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16
without direction)
5: Pulse input with direction command (Pr.10-16)
6: CANopen communication card
7: Reserved
8: Communication card (no CANopen card)
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP disabled.
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP
Source of the Operation Command
00-21 disabled. 0
（AUTO）
4: Reserved
0: Ramp to stop
00-22 Stop Method 0
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable forward/reverse
00-23 Control of Motor Direction 1: Reverse disable 0
2: Forward disable
Read
00-24 Memory of Frequency Command Read only
only
Bit 0~3: user define on decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place
00-25 User Defined Characteristics 0
Bit 4~15: user define on unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
0: Disable
0~65535 (when Pr.00-25 set to no decimal place)
00-26 Max. User Defined Value 0.0~6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 set to 1 decimal place) 0
0.0~655.35 (when Pr.00-25 set to 2 decimal place)
Read
00-27 User Defined Value Read only
Only
00-28 Reserved
0: Standard HOA function
1: Switching Local/Remote, the drive stops
2: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as the
REMOTE setting for frequency and operation
status
00-29 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection 3: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as the 0
LOCAL setting for frequency and operation status
4: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as
LOCAL setting when switch to Local and runs as
REMOTE setting when switch to Remote for
frequency and operation status.
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 serial communication
Source of the Master Frequency 4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16
00-30 0
Command（HAND） without direction)
7: Reserved
11-4
Factory
Setting
0: Digital keypad
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP
Source of the Operation Command
00-31 disabled. 0
（HAND）
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not include CANopen card)
0: STOP key disable
00-32 Digital Keypad STOP Function 0
1: STOP key enable
00-33
~ Reserved
00-39
Note: Forward run = closckwise (CW)

Reverse run = counterclockwise (CCW)
0: Forward run to home. Set PL forward limit as
check point.
1: Reverse run (CCW) to home. Set NL reverse
limit (CCWL) as check point.
2: Forward run to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON
as check point.
3: Reverse to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON as
X check point.
Homing mode 4: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check
00-40 0000
point.
5: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check
point.
6: Forward run to home. Set ORG: ON→OFF
as check point.
7: Reverse run to home. Set ORG : ON→OFF
as check point.
8: Define current position as home.
Set X to 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 first.
Y 0: reverse run to Z pulse
1: continue forward run to Z pulse
2: Ignore Z pulse
When home limit is reached, set X to 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 7 first.
Z
0: display the error
1: reverse the direction
00-41 Homing by frequency 1 0.00~600.00Hz 8.00
00-42 Homing by frequency 2 0.00~600.00Hz 2.00
00-43
~ Reserved
00-47
00-48 Display Filter Time (Current) 0.001~65.535 sec 0.100
00-49 Display Filter Time (Keypad) 0.001~65.535 sec 0.100
00-50 Software Version (date) Read only #####
11-5
01 Basic Parameters
Factory
Setting
60.00/
01-00 Max. Operation Frequency 50.00~600.00Hz 50.00
60.00/
01-01 Output Frequency of Motor 1 0.00~600.00Hz 50.00
230V: 0.0V~255.0V 200.0
01-02 Output Voltage of Motor 1
460V: 0.0V~510.0V 400.0
01-03 Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1 0.00~600.00Hz 3.00

230V: 0.0V~240.0V 11.0
01-04 Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 22.0

230V: 0.0V~240.0V 2.0
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 4.0
01-07 Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 0.0

01-08 Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 0.0
01-09 Start-Up Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0.50

01-10 Output Frequency Upper Limit 0.00~600.00Hz 600.00
01-11 Output Frequency Lower Limit 0.00~600.00Hz 0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-12 Accel. Time 1 Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
AC drive with power greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-13 Decel Time 1 Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-14 Accel Time 2 Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.00
01-20 JOG Acceleration Time Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second 10.0
10.00
01-21 JOG Deceleration Time Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 second 10.0
11-6
Factory
Setting
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.0 second
01-22 JOG Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 6.00
01-23 1st/4th Accel/decel Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 0.20

01-24 S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1
Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 0.20
01-25 S-curve Acceleration Arrival Time 2
Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 0.20
01-26 S-curve Deceleration Begin Time 1
Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.2
Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 second 0.20
01-27 S-curve Deceleration Arrival Time 2
Pr.01-45=1: 0.0~250.0 second 0.2
01-28 Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit) 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
01-29 Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit) 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
0: Output waiting
01-34 Zero-speed Mode 1: Zero-speed operation 0
2: Fmin (Refer to Pr.01-07, 01-41)
60.00/
01-35 Output Frequency of Motor 2 0.00~600.00Hz 50.00
230V: 0.0V~255.0V 200.0
01-36 Output Voltage of Motor 2
460V: 0.0V~510.0V 400.0
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 11.0

460V: 0.0V~480.0V 22.0
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 2.0
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 4.0
01-41 Min. Output Frequency of Motor 2 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
230V: 0.0V~240.0V 0.0

01-42 Min. Output Voltage of Motor 2
460V: 0.0V~480.0V 0.0
0: V/f curve determined by Pr.01-00~01-08
01-43 V/f Curve Selection 1: Curve to the power of 1.5 0
2: Curve to the power of 2
0: Linear accel. /decel.
1: Auto accel.; linear decel.
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration 2: Linear accel.; auto decel.
01-44 3: Auto accel./decel. 0
Setting
4: Linear, stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limit
by Pr.01-12~01-21)
Time Unit for Accel. /Decel. and S 0: Unit: 0.01 sec
01-45 0
Curve 1: Unit: 0.1sec
Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 sec
01-46 CANopen Quick Stop Time 1.00
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0~6000.0 sec
11-7
02 Digital Input/Output Parameters

Factory
Setting
0: 2-wire mode, power on for operation control
02-00 2-wire/3-wire Operation Control 1: 2-wire mode 2, power on for operation control 0
2: 3-wire, power on for operation control
Multi-function Input Command 1
02-01 0: No function 1
(MI1)
Multi-function Input Command 2 1: Multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position
02-02 2
(MI2) command 1
02-03 3
(MI3) command 2
02-04 4
(MI4) command 3
02-05 0
(MI5) command 4
02-06 5: Reset 0
(MI6)
02-07 6: JOG command（By KPC-CC01 or external control） 0
(MI7)
02-08 7: Acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit 0
(MI8)
Input terminal of I/O st nd
02-26 8: The 1 , 2 acceleration/deceleration time selection 0
extension card (MI10)
Input terminal of I/O extension
02-27 9: The 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection 0
card (MI11)
02-28 10: EF Input (Pr.07-20) 0
card (MI12)
02-29 11: B.B input from external (Base Block) 0
card (MI13)
02-30 12: Output stop 0
card (MI14)
02-31 Input terminal of I/O extension 13: Cancel the setting of optimal accel. /decel. time 0
card (MI15)
14: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: Operation speed command from AVI
16: Operation speed command from ACI
17: Operation speed command from AUI
18: Emergency stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: TQC/FOCmodel selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ-connection
31: High torque bias (Pr.11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr.11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr.11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and
multi-speed control
35: Enable single point position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid
at stop)
37: Full position control pulse command input enable
38: Disable EEPROM write function
11-8
Factory
Setting
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43: Enable resolution selection (Pr.02-48)
44: Reversed direction homing
45: Forward direction homing
46: Homing (ORG)
47: Homing function enable
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Master dEb action input
51: Selection for PLC mode bit0
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
54~55: Reserve
56: Local/Remote Selection
57~70: Reserve
02-09 UP/DOWN key mode 0: up/down by the accel. /decel. time 0

1: up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
Constant speed. The Accel.
02-10 /Decel. Speed of the UP/DOWN 0.01~1.00Hz/ms 0.01
Key
02-11 Digital Input Response Time 0.000~30.000 second 0.005
02-12 Digital Input Mode Selection 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.） 0000
02-13 Multi-function Output 1 RY1 0: No function 11
02-14 Multi-function Output 2 RY2 1: Operation Indication 1
02-16 Multi-function Output 3 (MO1) 2: Operation speed attained 0
02-17 Multi-function Output 4 (MO2) 3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-22) 0
Output terminal of the I/O
02-36 4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-24) 0
extension card (MO10)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension
02-37 5: Zero speed (Frequency command) 0
Card (MO11)
02-38 6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency command) 0
Card (MO12)
02-39 7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08) 0
Card (MO13)
02-40 8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11) 0
Card (MO14)
02-41 9: Drive is ready 0
Card (MO15)
02-42 10: Low voltage warning（LV）(Pr.06-00) 0
Card (MO16)
02-43 11: Malfunction indication 0
Card (MO17)
02-44 12: Mechanical brake release(Pr.02-32) 0
Card (MO18)
02-45 13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15) 0
Card (MO19)
02-46 14: Software brake signal indication(Pr.07-00) 0
Card (MO20)
15: PID feedback error
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Terminal count value attained, does not return to 0
(Pr.02-20)
11-9
Factory
Setting
18: Preliminary count value attained, returns to 0
(Pr.02-19)
19: Base Block
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33)
28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33(<= 02-33)
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>= 02-34)
30: Output when frequency <= Pr.02-34 (<= 02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop(actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1(Pr.06-23)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including Stop)
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed slower than Pr.02-47
44: Low current output (use with Pr.06-71~06-73)
45: UVW Output Electromagnetic valve Switch
46: Master dEb warning output
47: Closed brake output
48: Reserved
49: Homing action complete
50: Output for CANopen control
51: Output for communication card
52: Output for RS485
53~62: Reserved
02-18 Multi-function output direction 0000h~FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.） 0000
Terminal counting value attained
02-19 0~65500 0
(returns to 0)
Preliminary counting value
02-20 0~65500 0
attained (not return to 0)
02-21 Digital Output Gain (DFM) 1～166 1
60.00/
02-22 Desired Frequency Attained 1 0.00～600.00Hz 50.00
The Width of the Desired
02-23 0.00～600.00Hz 2.00
Frequency Attained 1
60.00/
02-24 Desired Frequency Attained 2 0.00～600.00Hz 50.00
The Width of the Desired
02-25 0.00～600.00Hz 2.00
Frequency Attained 2
02-32 Brake Delay Time 0.000~65.000 sec. 0.000
Output Current Level Setting for
02-33 0~100% 0
Multi-function External Terminals
Output frequency setting
02-34 for multi-function output 0.00~600.00Hz（Motor speed when using PG Card） 0.00
terminal
External Operation Control
02-35 0: Disable 0
Selection after Reset and
11-10
Factory
Setting
Activate 1: Drive runs if run command exists after reset
02-47 Zero-speed Level of Motor 0~65535 rpm 0

Max. Frequency of Resolution
02-48 0.01~600.00Hz 60.00
Switch
Switch the delay time of Max.
02-49 0.000~65.000 sec. 0.000
output frequency
Status of Multi-function Input Read
02-50 Monitor the status of multi-function input terminals
Terminal only
Status of Multi-function Output Read
02-51 Monitor the status of multi-function output terminals
Terminal only
Display External Output terminal Read
02-52 Monitor the status of PLC input terminals
occupied by PLC only
Display Analog Input Terminal Read
02-53 Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
occupied by PLC only
Display the Frequency
Read
02-54 Command Executed by External Read only
only
Terminal
02-55 Reserved
02-56 Reserved
Multi-function output terminal:
02-57 Function 42: Brake Current 0~150% 0
Checking Point
Multi-function output terminal:
02-58 Function 42: Brake Frequency 0.00~655.35Hz 0.00
Checking Point
11-11
03 Analog Input/Output Parameters

Factory
Setting
03-00 Analog Input Selection (AVI) 0: No function 1
1: Frequency command (torque limit under torque
03-01 Analog Input Selection (ACI) 0
control mode)
03-02 Analog Input Selection (AUI) 2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode) 0
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: PT100 thermistor input value
12~17: Reserved
03-03 Analog Input Bias (AVI) -100.0~100.0% 0
03-04 Analog Input Bias (ACI) -100.0~100.0% 0
Analog Positive Voltage Input
03-05 -100.0~100.0% 0
Bias (AUI)
03-06 Reserved
Positive/negative Bias Mode 0: No bias
03-07
(AVI) 1: Lower than or equal to bias
Positive/negative Bias Mode 2: Greater than or equal to bias
03-08 0
(ACI) 3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
Positive/negative Bias Mode as the center
03-09
(AUI) 4: Serve bias as the center
0: Negative frequency is not valid. Forward and
reverse run is controlled by digital keypad or
external terminal.
Analog Frequency Command
03-10 1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive frequency = 0
for Reverse Run
forward run; negative frequency = reverse run.
Direction can not be switched by digital keypad or
external teriminal control.
03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) -500.0~500.0% 100.0
03-12 Analog Input Gain (ACI) -500.0~500.0% 100.0
03-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI) -500.0~500.0% 100.0
Analog Negative Input Gain
03-14 -500.0~500.0% 100.0
(AUI)
03-15 Analog Input Filter Time (AVI) 0.00~20.00 sec. 0.01
03-16 Analog Input Filter Time (ACI) 0.00~20.00 sec. 0.01
03-17 Analog Input Filter Time (AUI) 0.00~20.00 sec. 0.01
Addition Function of the Analog 0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
03-18 1: Enable 0
Input
0: Disable
03-19 ACI Signal Loss 1: Continue operation at the last frequency 0
2: Decelerate to 0Hz
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
11-12
Factory
Setting
03-20 Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1) 0: Output frequency (Hz) 0
03-23 Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2) 1: Frequency command (Hz) 0
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AVI
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: Iq current
13: Iq feedback value
14: Id current
15: Id feedback value
16: Vq-axis voltage
17: Vd-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19: PG2 frequency command
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS485 analog output
22: Communication card analog output
23: Constant voltage/current output
03-21 Gain of Analog Output 1 (AFM1) 0~500.0% 100.0
0: Absolute output voltage
Analog Output 1 when in REV 1: Reverse output 0V; Positive output 0-10V
03-22 0
Direction (AFM1) 2: Reverse output 5-0V; Positive output 5-10V
03-24 Gain of Analog Output 2 (AFM2) 0~500.0% 100.0
0: Absolute output voltage
Analog Output 2 when in REV 1: Output 0V in REV direction; output 0-10V in FWD
03-25 direction 0
Direction (AFM2)
2: Output 5-0V in REV direction; output 5-10V in FWD
direction
03-26 Reserved
03-27 AFM2 Output Bias -100.00~100.00% 0.00
0: 0-10V
03-28 AVI Selection 1: 0-20mA 0
2: 4-20mA
0: 4-20mA
03-29 ACI Selection 1: 0-10V 0
2: 0-20mA
Read
03-30 Status of PLC Output Terminal Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
only
0: 0-20mA Output
03-31 AFM2 0-20mA Output Selection 0
1: 4-20mA Output
03-32 AFM1 DC output setting level 0.00~100.00% 0.00
03-33 AFM2 DC Output Setting Level 0.00~100.00% 0.00
03-34
~ Reserve
03-49
0: Regular Curve
03-50 Analog Input Curve Selection 1: 3 point curve of AVI 0
2: 3 point curve of ACI
11-13
Factory
Setting
3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI
4: 3 point curve of AUI
5: 3 point curve of AVI & AUI
6: 3 point curve of ACI & AUI
7: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI & AUI
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-51 AVI Low Point 0.00
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
03-52 AVI Proportional Low Point 0.00~100.00% 0.00
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-53 AVI Mid Point 5.00
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
03-54 AVI Proportional Mid Point 0.00~100.00% 50.00
Pr.03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-55 AVI High Point 10.00
Pr.03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
03-56 AVI Proportional High Point 0.00~100.00% 100.00
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-57 ACI Low Point 4.00
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
03-58 ACI Proportional Low Point 0.00~100.00% 0.00
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-59 ACI Mid Point 12.00
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
03-60 ACI Proportional Mid Point 0.00~100.00% 50.00
Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-61 ACI High Point 20.00
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
03-62 ACI Proportional High Point 0.00~100.00% 100.00
03-63 Positive AUI Voltage Low Point 0.00~10.00V 0.00
Positive AUI Voltage
03-64 0.00~100.00% 0.00
Proportional Low Point
03-65 Positive AUI Voltage Mid Point 0.00~10.00V 5.00
03-66 0.00~100.00% 50.00
Proportional Mid Point
03-67 Positive AUI Voltage High Point 0.00~10.00V 10.00
03-68 0.00~100.00% 100.00
Proportional High Point
03-69 Negative AUI Voltage Low Point 0.00~ -10.00V 0.00
Negative AUI Voltage
03-70 0.00~ -100.00% 0.00
Proportional Low Point
03-71 Negative AUI Voltage Mid Point 0.00~ -10.00V -5.00
03-72 0.00~ -100.00% -50.00
Proportional Mid Point
03-73 Negative AUI Voltage High Point 0.00~ -10.00V -10.00
03-74 0.00~ -100.00% -100.00
Proportional High Point
11-14
04 Multi-step Speed Parameters

Factory
Setting
04-00 1st Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-01 2nd Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-02 3rd Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-03 4th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~600.00Hz 0
04-15 Position command 1 (revolution) -30000~30000 0
04-16 Position command 1 (pulse) -32767~32767 0
Position command 10 -30000~30000
04-33 0
(revolution)
04-35 0
(revolution)
11-15
Factory
Setting
04-37 0
(revolution)
04-39 0
(revolution)
04-41 0
(revolution)
04-43 0
(revolution)
11-16
05 Motor Parameters
Factory
Setting
0: No function
1: Rolling test for induction motor(IM) (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx,
no-load current)
2: Static test for induction motor(IM)
3: No function
05-00 Motor Auto Tuning 0
4: Rolling test for PM motor magnetic pole
5: Rolling test for PM motor
6: Rolling test for IM motor flux curve
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
13: High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor
Full-load Current of Induction 10~120% of drive’s rated current
05-01 #.##
Motor 1(A)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 0~655.35kW
05-02 #.##
1(kW)
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 0~65535
05-03 1710
1 (rpm) 1710(60Hz 4poles) ; 1410(50Hz 4 poles)
Pole Number of Induction Motor 2~20
05-04 4
1
No-load Current of Induction 0~ Pr.05-01 factory setting
05-05 #.##
Motor 1 (A)
Stator Resistance (Rs) of
05-06 0~65.535Ω #.###
Induction Motor 1
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of
05-07 0~65.535Ω #.###
Induction Motor 1
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of 0~6553.5mH
05-08 #.#
Induction Motor 1
Stator Inductance (Lx) of 0~6553.5mH
05-09 #.#
Induction Motor 1
05-10
Reserved
~
05-12
Full-load Current of Induction 10~120%
05-13 #.##
Motor 2 (A)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 0~655.35kW
05-14 #.##
2 (kW)
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 0~65535
05-15 1710
2 (rpm) 1710(60Hz 4 poles) ; 1410(50Hz 4 poles)
Pole Number of Induction Motor 2~20
05-16 4
2
No-load Current of Induction 0~ Pr.05-01 factory setting
05-17 #.##
Motor 2 (A)
Stator Resistance (Rs) of
05-18 0~65.535Ω #.###
Induction Motor 2
Rotor Resistance (Rr) of
05-19 0~65.535Ω #.###
Induction Motor 2
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of 0~6553.5mH
05-20 #.#
Induction Motor 2
Stator Inductance (Lx) of 0~6553.5mH
05-21 #.#
Induction Motor 2
05-22 Induction Motor 1/ 2 Selection 1: motor 1 1

2: motor 2
Frequency for
05-23 Y-connection/△-connection 0.00~600.00Hz 60.00
Switch of Induction Motor
Y-connection/△-connection 0: Disable
05-24 0
Switch of Induction Motor 1: Enable
11-17
Factory
Setting
Delay Time for
05-25 Y-connection/△-connection 0.000~60.000 sec. 0.200
Switch of Induction Motor
Accumulative Watt-second of
05-26 Read only #.#
Motor in Low Word (W-sec)
Accumulative Watt-second of
05-27 Read only #.#
Motor in High Word (W-sec)
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor
05-28 Read only #.#
(W-Hour)
05-29 Read only #.#
in Low Word (KW-Hour)
05-30 Read only #.#
in High Word (KW-Hour)
Accumulative Motor Operation 00~1439
05-31 0
Time (Min)
Accumulative Motor Operation 00~65535
05-32 0
Time (day)
Induction Motor and Permanent 0: Induction Motor
05-33 0
Magnet Motor Selection 1: Permanent Magnet Motor
Full-load current of Permanent 0.00~655.35Amps
05-34 0.00
Magnet Motor
Rated Power of Permanent 0.00~655.35kW
05-35 0.00
Magnet Motor
Rated speed of Permanent 0~65535rpm
05-36 2000
Magnet Motor
Pole number of Permanent 0~65535
05-37 10
Magnet Motor
2
Inertia of Permanent Magnet 0.0~6553.5 kg.cm
05-38 0.0
Motor
05-39 Stator Resistance of PM Motor 0.000~65.535Ω 0.000
05-40 Permanent Magnet Motor Ld 0.00~655.35mH 0.000
05-41 Permanent Magnet Motor Lq 0.00~655.35mH 0.000
05-42 PG Offset angle of PM Motor 0.0~360.0° 0.0
05-43 Ke parameter of PM Motor 0~65535 (Unit: V/1000rpm) 0
11-18
06 Protection Parameters
Factory
Setting
230V:
Frame A to D: 150.0~220.0Vdc 180.0
Frame E and frames above E: 190.0~220.0V 200.0
06-00 Low Voltage Level
460V:
Frame A to D: 300.0~440.0Vdc 360.0
0: Disabled
06-01 Over-voltage Stall Prevention 230V: 0.0~450.0Vdc 380.0
460V: 0.0~900.0Vdc 760.0
Selection for Over-voltage Stall 0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
06-02 0
Prevention 1: Smart over-voltage prevention
Over-current Stall Prevention Normal Load: 0~160%(100%: drive’s rated current) 120
06-03
during Acceleration Heavy Load: 0~180%(100%: drive’s rated current) 150
Over-current Stall Prevention Normal Load: 0~160%(100%: drive’s rated current) 120
06-04
during Operation Heavy Load: 0~180%(100%: drive’s rated current) 150
0: by current accel/decel time
1: by the 1st accel/decel time
Accel. /Decel. Time Selection of 2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
06-05 Stall Prevention at Constant 3: by the 3rd accel/decel time 0
Speed 4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel
0: No function
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed
operation, continue to operate after detection
Over-torque Detection Selection 2: Over-torque detection during constant speed
06-06 operation, stop operation after detection 0
(OT1)
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to
operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque Detection Level
06-07 10~250% (100%: drive’s rated current) 120
(OT1)
Over-torque Detection Time
06-08 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.1
(OT1)
0: No function
operation, continue to operate after detection
Over-torque Detection Selection
06-09 operation, stop operation after detection 0
(OT2)
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop
Over-torque Detection Level 10~250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
06-10 120
(OT2)
Over-torque Detection Time
06-11 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.1
(OT2)
06-12 Current Limit 0~250% (100%: drive’s rated current） 150
Electronic Thermal Relay 0: Inverter motor

06-13 1: Standard motor 2
Selection (Motor 1)
2: Disable
Electronic Thermal Characteristic
06-14 30.0~600.0 sec. 60.0
for Motor 1
Heat Sink Over-heat (OH)
06-15 0.0~110.0℃ 85.0
Warning
11-19
Factory
Setting
06-16 Stall Prevention Limit Level 0～100% (Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04) 50
06-17 Present Fault Record 0: No fault record 0
Second Most Recent Fault
06-18 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) 0
Record
06-19 Third Most Recent Fault Record 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 0
06-20 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record 3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn) 0
06-21 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record 4: Ground fault (GFF) 0
06-22 Sixth Most Recent Fault Record 5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) 0
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2)
18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat
protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat
protection error)
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL)
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1)
24: Motor overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1)
28: Low current (uC)
29: Home limit error (LMIT)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref loss (PGr1)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
51: External Base Block (bb)
52: Password error (PcodE)
11-20
Factory
Setting
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1)
58: Communication Time-out (CE10)
59: PU Time-out (CP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5)
66-72: Reserved
73: External safety gate S1
74~78: Reserved
79: U phase over current (Uocc)
80: V phase over current (Vocc)
81: W phase over current (Wocc)
82: U phase output phase loss (OPHL)
83: V phase output phase loss (OPHL)
84: W phase output phase loss (OPHL)
85~100: Reserved
101: CANopen software disconnect1 (CGdE)
102: CAN open software disconnect2 (CHbE)
103: CANopen synchronous error (CSYE)
104: CANopen hardware disconnect (CbFE)
105: CANopen index setting error (CIdE)
106: CANopen slave station number setting error
(CAdE)
107: CANopen index setting exceed limit (CFrE)
111: Internal communication overtime error(InrCOM)
06-23 Fault Output Option 1 0~65535(refer to bit table for fault code) 0
Electronic Thermal Relay 0: Inverter motor

06-27 1: Standard motor 2
Selection 2 (Motor 2)
2: Disable
Electronic Thermal
06-28 30.0~600.0 sec 60.0
Characteristic for Motor 2
0: Warn and keep operation
06-29 PTC Detection Selection 1: Warn and ramp to stop 0
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
06-30 PTC Level 0.0～100.0% 50.0
Frequency Command for Read
06-31 0.00~655.35 Hz
Malfunction only
Read
06-32 Output Frequency at Malfunction 0.00~655.35 Hz only
Read
06-33 Output Voltage at Malfunction 0.0~6553.5 V only
Read
06-34 DC Voltage at Malfunction 0.0~6553.5 V only
Read
06-35 Output Current at Malfunction 0.00~655.35 Amp only
11-21
Factory
Setting
Read
06-36 IGBT Temperature at Malfunction 0.0~6553.5 ℃ only
Capacitance Temperature at Read
06-37 0.0~6553.5 ℃
Malfunction only
Motor Speed in rpm at Read
06-38 0~65535
Malfunction only
Read
06-39 Torque Command at Malfunction 0~65535 only
Status of Multi-function Input Read
06-40 0000h~FFFFh
Terminal at Malfunction only
Status of Multi-function Output Read
06-41 0000h~FFFFh
Terminal at Malfunction only
Read
06-42 Drive Status at Malfunction 0000h~FFFFh
only
06-43 Reserved
06-44 Reserved
Treatment to Output Phase Loss 1: Warn and ramp to stop
06-45 3
Detection (OPHL) 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning
Deceleration Time of Output
06-46 0.000~65.535 sec 0.500
Phase Loss
06-47 Current Bandwidth 0.00~655.35% 1.00
DC Brake Time of Output Phase
06-48 0.000~65.535sec 0.100
Loss
06-49 Reserved
Time for Input Phase Loss
06-50 0.00~600.00 sec. 0.20
Detection
06-51 Reserved
230V model: 0.0~160.0 Vdc 30.0

06-52 Ripple of Input Phase Loss
/60.0
460V model: 0.0~320.0 Vdc
Treatment for the detected Input 0: warn and ramp to stop
06-53 0
Phase Loss (OrP) 1: warn and coast to stop
06-54 Reserved
0: constant rated current and limit carrier wave by
load current and temperature
1: constant carrier frequency and limit load current
06-55 Derating Protection 0
by setting carrier wave
2: constant rated current(same as setting 0), but
close current limit
06-56 PT100 Detected Level 1 0.000~10.000V 5.000
06-57 PT100 Detected Level 2 0.000~10.000V 7.000
PT100 Level 1 Frequency
06-58 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
Protect
06-59 Reserved
Software Detection GFF Current 0.0~6553.5 %
06-60 60.0
Level
Software Detection GFF Filter 0.0~6553.5 %
06-61 0.10
Time
230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vdc 180.0
06-62 Disable Level of dEb
460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vdc /360.0
Read
06-63 Fault Record 1 (Min) 0~64799 min
only
11-22
Factory
Setting
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Read
only
Time interval between errors Read
06-69 Read only
occur (day) only
Time interval between errors Read
06-70 Read only
occur (minute) only
06-71 Low Current Setting Level 0.0 ~ 6553.5 % 0.0
06-72 Low Current Detection Time 0.00 ~ 655.35sec 0.00
0 : No function
1 : Warn and coast to stop
06-73 Treatment for low current 0
2 : Warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : Warn and operation continue
11-23
07 Special Parameters
Factory
Setting
230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc 380.0
07-00 Software Brake Level
460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc 760.0
07-01 DC Brake Current Level 0~100% 0
07-02 DC Brake Time at Start-up 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.0
07-03 DC Brake Time at Stop 0.0~60.0 sec. 0.0
07-04 Startup Frequency for DC Brake 0.00~600.00Hz 0.00
07-05 Maximum Power Loss Duration 1~200% 100
Restart after Momentary Power 0: Stop operation

07-06 1: Speed search for last frequency command 0
Loss
2: Speed search for minimum output frequency
07-07 Maximum Power Loss Duration 0.1~20.0 sec. 2.0
07-08 Base Block Time 0.1~5.0 sec. 0.5
07-09 Current Limit for Speed Search 20~200% 50
0: Stop operation
07-10 Treatment to Reboots After Fault 1: Speed search starts with current speed 0
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
07-11 Auto Restart After Fault 0~10 0
0: Disable
07-12 Speed Search during Start-up 1: Speed search for maximum output frequency 0
2: Speed search for start-up motor frequency
3: Speed search for minimum output frequency
0: Disable
1: 1st decel. time
Decel. Time to Momentary 2: 2nd decel. time
07-13 3: 3rd decel. time 0
Power Loss
4: 4th decel. time
5: current decel. time
6: Auto decel. time
07-14 DEB Return Time 0.0~25.0sec 0.0
07-15 Dwell Time at Accel. 0.00 ~ 600.00sec 0.00
07-16 Dwell Frequency at Accel. 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 0.00
07-17 Dwell Time at Decel. 0.00 ~ 600.00sec 0.00
07-18 Dwell Frequency at Decel. 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 0.00
0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will be
OFF
07-19 Fan Cooling Control 2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When 0
the AC motor drive stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when preliminary heat sink
o
temperature (around 60 C) is attained.
4: Fan always OFF
0: Coast stop
1: By deceleration Time 1
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to 2: By deceleration Time 2
07-20 3: By deceleration Time 3 0
Stop Selection
4: By deceleration Time 4
5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
11-24
Factory
Setting
07-21 Auto Energy-saving Operation 0: Disable 0
1: Enable
07-22 Energy-saving Gain 10～1000% 100
Auto Voltage Regulation(AVR) 0: Enable AVR

07-23 1: Disable AVR 0
Function
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
Filter Time of Torque Command
07-24 0.001~10.000 sec 0.020
(V/F and SVC control mode)
Filter Time of Slip
07-25 Compensation (V/F and SVC 0.001~10.000 sec 0.100
control mode)
Torque Compensation Gain (V/F
07-26 0~10 0
and SVC control mode)
Slip Compensation Gain (V/F
07-27 0.00~10.00 0.00
and SVC control mode)
07-28 Reserved
07-29 Slip Deviation Level 0.0~100.0% 0
07-30 Detection Time of Slip Deviation 0.0~10.0 sec 1.0
1: Warn and ramp to stop
07-31 Over Slip Treatment 2: Warn and coast to stop 0
3: No warning
07-32 Motor Hunting Gain 0~10000 1000
Auto Reset Time for Restart
07-33 0.0~6000.0 sec 60.0
after Fault
11-25
08 High-function PID Parameters

Factory
Setting
0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: input from external terminal
AVI (Pr.03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
08-00 Input Terminal for PID Feedback 4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI 0
(Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip
direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
7: Negative PID feeback from communication protocol
8: Positive PID feedback from communication protocol
08-01 Proportional Gain (P) 0.0~500.0% 80.0
08-02 Integral Time (I) 0.00~100.00sec 1.00
08-03 Derivative Control (D) 0.00~1.00sec 0.00
08-04 Upper Limit of Integral Control 0.0~100.0% 100.0
08-05 PID Output Frequency Limit 0.0~110.0% 100.0
PID feedback value by
08-06 0.00~200.00% 0.00
communication protocol
08-07 PID Delay Time 0.0~2.5 秒 0.0
08-08 Feedback Signal Detection Time 0.0~3600.0sec 0.0

Feedback Signal Fault 1: Warn and ramp to stop
08-09 0
Treatment 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
08-10 Sleep Frequency 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 0.00
08-11 Wake-up Frequency 0.00 ~ 600.00Hz 0.00
08-12 Sleep Time 0.0 ~ 6000.0sec 0.0
08-13 PID Deviation Level 1.0 ~ 50.0% 10.0
08-14 PID Deviation Time 0.1~300.0sec 5.0
08-15 Filter Time for PID Feedback 0.1~300.0sec 5.0
08-16 PID Compensation Selection 0: Parameter setting 0

1: Reserve
08-17 PID Compensation -100.0~+100.0% 0
0: Follow PID output command
08-18 Setting of Sleep Mode Function 0
1: Follow PID feedback signal
08-19 Wake-up Integral Limit 0.0~200.0% 50.0
0: Serial connection
08-20 PID Mode Selection 0
1: Parallel connection
Enable PID to Change 0: Operation direction can be changed
08-21 0
Operation Direction 1: Operation direction can not be changed
11-26
09 Communication Parameters
Factory
Setting
09-00 COM1 Communication Address 1~254 1
09-01 COM1 Transmission Speed 4.8～115.2Kbps 9.6
0: Warn and continue operation

COM1 Transmission Fault 1: Warn and ramp to stop
09-02 3
Treatment 2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and continue operation
09-03 COM1 Time-out Detection 0.0～100.0 sec. 0.0
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
09-04 COM1 Communication Protocol 9: 8O1 (ASCII) 1
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
09-05
~ Reserved
09-08
09-09 Response Delay Time 0.0~200.0ms 2.0
Main Frequency of the
09-10 0.00~600.00Hz 60.00
Communication
09-11 Block Transfer 1 0~65535 0
09-20 Block Transfer 10 0~65535 0
09-21 Block Transfer 11 0~65535 0
09-22 Block Transfer 12 0~65535 0
09-23 Block Transfer 13 0~65535 0
09-24 Block Transfer 14 0~65535 0
09-25 Block Transfer 15 0~65535 0
09-26 Block Transfer 16 0~65535 0
11-27
Factory
Setting
09-27
~ Reserved
09-29
Communication Decoding 0: Decoding Method 1
09-30 1
Method 1: Decoding Methond 2
0: Modbus 485
-1: Internal Communication Slave 1
Internal Communication
09-31 -6: Internal Communication Slave 6 0
Protocol
-9: Reserve
-10: Internal Communication Master
-11: Reserve
-12: Internal PLC Control
09-32
~ Reserve
09-34
09-35 PLC Address 1~254 2
09-36 CANopen Slave Address 0: Disable 0

1~127
0: 1M
1: 500k
09-37 CANopen Speed 2: 250k 0
3: 125k
4: 100k (Delta only)
5: 50k
09-38 CANopen Frequency Gain 1.00 ~ 2.00 1.00
bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out
bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out
09-39 CANopen Warning Record bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out 0
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: Can Bus Off
bit 6: Error protocol of CANopen
0: Delta defined decoding method
09-40 CANopen Decoding Method 1
1: CANopen DS402 Standard
0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
CANopen Communication 2: Boot up State Read
09-41
Status 3: Pre Operation State Only
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state Read
09-42 CANopen Control Status 4: Enable operation state Only
7: Quick Stop Active state
13: Err Reaction Activation state
14: Error state
bit0: reset address 20XX to 0.
bit1: reset address 264X to 0
09-43 Reset CANopen Index 65535
bit2: reset address 26AX to 0
bit3: reset address 60XX to 0
11-28
Factory
Setting
09-44 Reserved
09-45 CANopen Master Function 0: Disable 0

1: Enable
09-46 CANopen Master Address 1~127 100
09-47
~ Reserved
09-59
0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
Identifications for 2: Profibus-DP Slave
09-60 3: CANopen Slave/Master ##
Communication Card
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: Ethernet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
Firmware Version of
09-61 Read only ##
Communication Card
09-62 Product Code Read only ##
09-63 Error Code Read only ##
09-64
~ Reserved
09-69
DeviceNet: 0-63
09-70 Address of Communication Card 1
Profibus-DP: 1-125
Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125Kbps
1: 250Kbps
2: 500Kbps
3: 1Mbps (Delta Only)
Non standard DeviceNet: (Delta Only)

09-71 Setting of DeviceNet Speed 0: 10Kbps 2
1: 20Kbps
2: 50Kbps
3: 100Kbps
4: 125Kbps
5: 250Kbps
6: 500Kbps
7: 800Kbps
8: 1Mbps
0: Disable
In this mode, baud rate can only be 0,1,2,3 in
Other Setting of DeviceNet standard DeviceNet speed
09-72 0
Speed 1: Enable
In this mode, the baud rate of DeviceNet can be
same as CANopen (0-8).
09-73 Reserved
09-74 Reserved
IP Configuration of the 0: Static IP
09-75 0
Communication Card 1: Dynamic IP (DHCP)
IP Address 1 of the
09-76 0~255 0
Communication Card
IP Address 2 of the
09-77 0~255 0
Communication Card
IP Address 3 of the
09-78 0~255 0
Communication Card
IP Address 4 of the
09-79 0~255 0
Communication Card
11-29
Factory
Setting
Address Mask 1 of the
09-80 0~255
Communication Card 0
09-81 0~255 0
Communication Card
09-82 0~255 0
Communication Card
09-83 0~255 0
Communication Card
Getway Address 1 of the
09-84 0~255 0
Communication Card
09-85 0~255 0
Communication Card
09-86 0~255 0
Communication Card
09-87 0~255 0
Communication Card
Password for Communication
09-88 0~255 0
Card (Low word)
Password for Communication

09-89 0~255 0
Card (High word)
0: No function
09-90 Reset Communication Card 0
1: Reset, return to factory setting
Bit0: Enable IP filter
Bit1: Enable to write internet parameters (1bit).
Bit 1: Enable to write internet parameters (1bit). This bit
Additional Setting for will change to disable when it finishes saving the
09-91 0
Communication Card internet parameter updates.
Bit 2: Enable login password (1bit). This bit will be
changed to disable when it finishes saving the
internet parameter updates.
Bit 0: password enable
When the communication card is set with
09-92 Status of Communication Card 0
password, this bit is enabled. When the password
is clear, this bit is disabled.
11-30
10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters

Factory
Setting
0: Disable
1: ABZ
10-00 Encoder Type Selection 2: ABZ (Delta Encoder for PM motor) 0
3: Resolver 1x (Standard encoder for PM motor)
4: ABZ/UVW (Standard encoder for PM motor)
10-01 Encoder Pulse 1~20000 600
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction
10-02 Encoder Input Type Setting 0
input. (low input=reverse direction, high input=forward
direction)
input. (low input=forward direction, high input=reverse
direction)
5: Single-phase input
Output Setting for Frequency
10-03 1~255 1
Division (denominator)
10-04 Electrical Gear at Load Side A1 1~65535 100
10-05 Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1 1~65535 100
10-06 Electrical Gear at Load Side A2 1~65535 100
10-07 Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2 1~65535 100
Treatment for Encoder
10-08 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
Feedback Fault
Detection Time of Encoder 0.0~10.0sec
10-09 1.0
Feedback Fault 0: No function
0~120%
10-10 Encoder Stall Level 115
0: No function
10-11 Detection Time of Encoder Stall 0.0 ~ 2.0sec 0.1
10-12 Treatment for Encoder Stall 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
10-13 Encoder Slip Range 0~50% (0: disable) 50
10-14 Detection Time of Encoder Slip 0.0~10.0sec 0.5
Treatment for Encoder Stall and
10-15 1: Warn and ramp to stop 2
Slip Error
0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase
B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase
10-16 Pulse Input Type Setting A leads in a reverse run command 0
input. (L=reverse direction, H=forward direction).
input. (L=forward direction, H=reverse direction).
10-17 Electrical Gear A 1~65535 100
10-18 Electrical Gear B 1~65535 100
10-19 Positioning for Encoder Position 0~65535pulse 0
11-31
Factory
Setting
Range for Encoder Position
10-20 0~65535pulse 10
Attained
10-21 Filter Time (PG2) 0~65.535 sec 0.100
0: Electronic Frequency
10-22 Speed Mode (PG2) 0
1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair)
10-23 Reserved
10-24 FOC&TQC Function Control 0~65535 0
FOC Bandwidth of
10-25 1.0~100.0Hz 40.0
Speed Observer
10-26 FOC Minimum Stator Frequency 0.0~2.0%fN 2.0
FOC Low-pass Filter Time
10-27 1~1000ms 50
Constant
FOC Excitation Current Rise
10-28 33~100%Tr 100
Time
10-29 Top Limit of Frequency Deviation 0.00~100.00Hz 20.00
10-30 Resolver Pole Pair 1~50 1
10-31 I/F Mode, current command 0~150%Irated (Rated current % of the drive) 40
PM Sensorless Obeserver
10-32 0.00~600.00Hz 5.00
Bandwith for High Speed Zone
10-33 Reserved
PM Sensorless Observer
10-34 0.00~655.35 Hz 1.00
Low-pass Filter Gain
10-35 Reserved
10-36 Reserved
10-37 PM Sensorless Control Word 0000~FFFFh 0000
10-38 Reserved
Frequency when switch from I/F
10-39 0.00~600.00Hz 20.00
Mode to PM sensorless mode.
Frequency when switch from PM
10-40 sensorless observer mode to 0.00~600.00Hz 20.00
V/F mode.
10-41 I/F mode, low pass-filter time 0.0~6.0sec 0.2
10-42 Initial Angle Detection Time 0~20ms 5
11-32
11 Advanced Parameters
Factory
Setting
bit 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
bit 1: Inertia estimate (only for FOCPG mode)
bit 2: Zero servo
11-00 System Control 0
bit 3: Dead Time compensation closed
Bit 7: Selection to save or not save the freqeuncy
Bit 8: Maximum speed of point to point position control
11-01 Per Unit of System Inertia 1~65535（256=1PU） 400
ASR1/ASR2 Switch
11-02 5.00~600.00Hz 7.00
Frequency
11-03 ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) 10
11-04 ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) 10
11-05 Zero-speed Bandwidth 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) 10
11-06 ASR Control ( P) 1 0~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM) 10
11-07 ASR Control (I) 1 0.000~10.000 sec 0.100
11-08 ASR Control ( P) 2 0~40Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM) 10
11-09 ASR Control (I) 2 0.000~10.000 sec 0.100
11-10 P Gain of Zero Speed 0~40Hz (IM)/ 0~100Hz (PM) 10
11-11 I Gain of Zero Speed 0.000~10.000 sec 0.100
Gain for ASR Speed Feed
11-12 0~100% 0
Forward
11-13 PDFF Gain 0~200% 30
Low-pass Filter Time of ASR
11-14 0.000~0.350 sec 0.008
Output
11-15 Notch Filter Depth 0~20db 0
11-16 Notch Filter Frequency 0.00~200.00Hz 0.0
11-17 Forward Motor Torque Limit 0~500% 200
Forward Regenerative Torque
11-18 0~500% 200
Limit
11-19 Reverse Motor Torque Limit 0~500% 200
Reverse Regenerative Torque
11-20 0~500% 200
Limit
Gain Value of Flux Weakening
11-21 0~200% 90
Curve for Motor 1
Gain Value of Flux Weakening
11-22 0~200% 90
Curve for Motor 2
Speed Response of Flux
11-23 0~150% 65
Weakening Area
11-24 APR Gain 0.00~40.00Hz (IM)/ 0~100.00Hz (PM) 10.00
Gain Value of APR Feed
11-25 0~100 30
Forward
11-26 APR Curve Time 0.00~655.35 sec 3.00
11-27 Max. Torque Command 0~500% 100
0: No function
11-28 Source of Torque Offset 1: Analog signal input (Pr.03-00) 0
2: RS485 communication (Pr.11-29)
3: Control by external terminal (Pr.11-30~11-32)
11-33
Factory
Setting
11-29 Torque Offset Setting 0~100% 0.0
11-30 High Torque Offset 0~100% 30.0
11-31 Middle Torque Offset 0~100% 20.0
11-32 Low Torque Offset 0~100% 10.0
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 communication (Pr.11-34)
11-33 Source of Torque Command 2: Analog input (Pr.03-00) 0
3: CANopen
4: Reserved
5: Communication extension card
11-34 Torque Command -100.0~+100.0% (Pr.11-27*11-34) 0
Filter Time of Torque
11-35 0.000~1.000sec 0.000
Command
0: Set by Pr.11-37 (Forward speed limit) and Pr.11-38
(Reverse speed limit)
11-36 Speed Limit Selection 1: Set by Pr.11-37,11-38 and Pr.00-20 (Source of 0
Master Frequency Command)
2: Set by Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency
Command).
11-37 Forward Speed Limit (torque 10

0~120%
mode)
11-38 Reverse Speed Limit (torque 10
0~120%
mode)
11-39 Zero Torque Command Mode 0: Torque mode 0

1: Speed mode
0: External terminal
1: Reserved
Command Source of 2: RS485
11-40 0
Point-to-Point Position Control 3: CAN
4: PLC
5: Communication card
11-41 Reserved
11-42 System Control Flags 0000~FFFFh 0000
11-43 Max. Frequency of Point- 0.00~327.67Hz 10.00

to-Point Position Control
11-44 Accel. Time of Point-to Point 0.00~655.35 sec 1.00
Position Control
11-45 Decel. Time of Point-to Point 0.00~655.35 sec 3.00
Position Control
11-34
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings|C2000 Series
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter Settings
00 Drive Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.
Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive

Factory Setting: #.#
Settings Read Only
Display AC Motor Drive Rated Current
Settings Read Only
Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. Using the following table to check if
Pr.00-01 setting is the rated current of the AC motor drive. Pr.00-01 corresponds to the identity
code Pr.00-01.
The factory setting is the rated current for normal duty. Please set Pr.00-16 to 1 to display the rated
current for the heavy duty.
230V Series
Frame A B C
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Pr.00-00 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Rated Current for
4.8 7.1 10 16 24 31 47 62 71 86
Heavy Duty (A)
Rated Current for
5 8 11 17 25 33 49 65 75 90
Normal Duty (A)
Frame D E F
kW 30 37 45 50 75 90
HP 40 50 60 75 100 125
Pr.00-00 24 26 28 30 32 34
Rated Current for
114 139 171 204 242 329
Heavy Duty (A)
Rated Current for
120 146 180 215 255 346
Normal Duty (A)
460V Series
Frame A B C
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7. 5 11 15 18.5 22 30
HP 1 2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40
Pr.00-00 5 7 9 11 93 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
Rated Current for
2.9 3.8 5.7 8.1 9.5 11 17 23 30 36 43 57
Heavy Duty (A)
Rated Current for
3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 10.5 12 18 24 32 38 45 60
Normal Duty (A)
Frame D E F G H
kW 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 280 315 355
HP 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 250 300 375 425 475
Pr.00-00 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Rated Current for
69 86 105 143 171 209 247 295 352 437 523 585 649
Heavy Duty (A)
Rated Current for
73 91 110 150 180 220 260 310 370 460 550 616 683
Normal Duty (A)
12-1
Parameter Reset
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: No Function
1: Write protection for parameters
5: Reset KWH display to 0
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Index (Slave)
8: keypad lock
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings(base frequency is 50Hz)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (base frequency is 60Hz)
When it is set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr.00-02~00-08 and it can be used with
password setting for password protection. It needs to set Pr.00-02 to 0 before changing other
parameter settings.
When it is set to 9 or 10: all parameters are reset to factory settings. If password is set in Pr.00-08,
input the password set in Pr.00-07 to reset to factory settings.
When it is set to 5, KWH display value can be reset to 0 even when the drive is operating. Pr.
05-26, 05-27, 05-28, 05-29, 05-30 reset to 0.
When it is set to 6: clear internal PLC program (includes the related settings of PLC internal
CANopen master)
When it is set to 7: reset the related settings of CANopen slave.
Start-up Display Selection

Factory setting: 0
Settings 0: Display the frequency command (F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (H)
2: Display User define (U)
3: Output current ( A)
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive. User
defined choice display according to the setting in Pr.00-04.
Content of Multi-function Display

Factory setting: 3
Settings 0: Display output current (A)
1: Display counter value (c)
2: Display actual output frequency (H.)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (v)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display output power angle (n)
6: Display output power in kW (P)
7: Display actual motor speed rpm (r = 00: positive speed; -00 negative
speed)
12-2
8: Display estimate output torque % (t = 00: positive torque; -00 negative

torque) (t)
9: Display PG feedback (G) (refer to Note 1)
10: Display PID feedback in % (b)
11: Display AVI in % (1.), 0~10V/4-20mA/0-20mA corresponds to 0~100%
(Refer to Note 2)
12: Display ACI in % (2.), 4~20mA/0~10V/0-20mA corresponds to
0~100%（Refer to Note 2）
13: Display AUI in % (3.), -10V~10V corresponds to -100~100%(Refer to
Note 2)
14: Display the temperature of IGBT in oC (i.)
15: Display the temperature of capacitance in oC (c.)
16: The status of digital input (ON/OFF) refer to Pr.02-12 (i) (Refer to
Note3)
17: Display digital output status ON/OFF (Pr.02-18) (o) (refer to NOTE 4)
18: Display the multi-step speed that is executing (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d) (refer to NOTE 3)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (0.) (refer to NOTE
4)
21: Actual motor position (PG1 of PG card). When the motor direction
changes or the drive stops, the counter will start from 0 (display value
restarts counting from 0) (Max. 65535) (P.)
22: Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card) (S.)
23: Pulse input position (PG2 of PG card) (max. 65535) (q.)
24: Position command tracing error (E.)
25: Overload counting (0.00~100.00%) (o.) (Refer to Note 6)
26: GFF Ground Fault (Unit :%)(G.)
27:DC Bus voltage ripple (Unit: Vdc)(r.)
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C) display in hexadecimal
29: Display PM motor pole section (EMC-PG01U application) (4.)
30 : Display output of user defined (U)
31 : H page x 00-05 Display user Gain(K)
32: Number of actual motor revolution during operation (PG card plug in
and Z phase signal input) (Z.)
33: Motor actual position during operation (when PG card is connected)(q)
34: Operation speed of fan(%) (F.)
35: Control Mode display: 0= Speed control mode (SPD), 1= torque control
mode (TQR) (t.)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of drive (Hz) (J.)
37: Reserved
38: Display drive status (6.) (Refer to Note 7)
12-3
39: Display estimated output torque, positive and negative, using Nt-m as
unit (t 0.0: positive; -0.0 negative torque（C.）
NOTE
1. When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 1/2, the display range for PG feedback will be from
0 to 4000.
When Pr.10-01 is set to 1000 and Pr.10-02 is set to 3/4/5, the display range for PG feedback will be
from 0 to 1000.
Home position: If it has Z phase, Z phase will be regarded as home position. Otherwise, home position
will be the encoder start up position.
2. It can display negative values when setting analog input bias (Pr.03-03~03-10).
Example: assume that AVI input voltage is 0V, Pr.03-03 is 10.0% and Pr.03-07 is 4 (Serve bias as the
center).
3. Example: If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the following table shows the status of the terminals.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Terminal MI15 MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
MI10~MI15 are the terminals for extension cards (Pr.02-26~02-31).
If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 0110 in binary and 0086h in HEX. When
Pr.00-04 is set to “16” or “19”, it will display “0086h” with LED U is ON on the keypad KPC-CE01. The
setting 16 is the status of digital input by Pr.02-12 setting and the setting 19 is the corresponding CPU
pin status of digital input, the FWD/REV action and the three-wire MI are not controlled by Pr.02-12.
User can set to 16 to monitor digital input status and then set to 19 to check if the wire is normal.
4. Assume that RY1: Pr.02-13 is set to 9 (Drive ready). After applying the power to the AC motor drive, if
there is no other abnormal status, the contact will be ON. The display status will be shown as follows.
N.O. switch status:
Terminal Reserved Reserved Reserved MO2 MO1 Reserved RY2 RY1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it will display in hexadecimal “0001h” with LED U is ON
on the keypad. The setting 17 is the status of digital output by Pr.02-18 setting and the setting 20 is the
corresponding CPU pin status of digital output. User can set 17 to monitor the digital output status and
then set to 20 to check if the wire is normal.
5. Setting 8: 100% means the motor rated torque. Motor rated torque = (motor rated power x60/2π)/motor
rated speed
6. If Pr.00-04 = 25, when display value reaches 100.00%, the drive will show “oL” as an overload warning.
7. If Pr.00-04 = 38,
Bit 0: The drive is running forward.
Bit 1: The drive is running backward.
Bit 2: The drive is ready.
Bit 3: Errors occurred on the drive.
Bit 4: The drive is running.
Bit 5: Warnings on the drive.
Coefficient Gain in Actual Output Frequency

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~160.00
This parameter is to set coefficient gain in actual output frequency. Set Pr.00-04= 31 to display the
calculation result on the screen (calculation = output frequency * Pr.00-05).
12-4
Software Version
Settings Read only
Parameter Protection Password Input
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 1~9998, 10000~65535
Display 0~3 (the times of password attempts)
This parameter allows user to enter their password (which is set in Pr.00-08) to unlock the
parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
Pr.00-07 and Pr.00-08 are used to prevent the personal misoperation.
When the user have forgotten the password, clear the setting by input 9999 and press ENTER key,
then input 9999 again and press Enter within 10 seconds. After decoding, all the settings will
return to factory setting.
Parameter Protection Password Setting
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 1~9998, 10000~65535
0: No password protection / password is entered correctly (Pr00-07)
1: Password has been set
To set a password to protect your parameter settings.If the display shows 0, no password is set
nor password has been correctly entered in Pr.00-07. All parameters can then be changed,
including Pr.00-08. The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of
password the display will show 1. Be sure to write down the password for later use. To cancel the
parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr. 00-07.
How to retrieve parameter protection after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-enter the password to Pr.00-08 (input the password once).
Method 2: After reboots, password function will be recovered.
Method 3: Input any value into Pr.00-07 (Do not enter the password).
.
Password Decode Flow Chart
Pass word Setting Pass word Forgotten Pass word Incor rect
00-07 00-07
00-08
Displays 01 afte r Enter 9999 and press ENTER, 3 chan ces of p assword inpu t:
correct passwo rd is then ente r 9999 aga in withi n 10 Incorre ct p ass word 1: d isplays "01"
entered to Pr.00 -08. se cond s an d pre ss ENTER. Incorre ct p ass word 2: disp lays "02 "
Then all pa ra meters will re set Incorre ct p ass word 3: "Pcode "(blin king)
to factory se ttings.
Keyp ad will be locked after 3 wrong attemp ted

pas swords. To re-activate t he k eypa d, please
reboo t the drive an d in put t he correct
pas sword.
12-5
Decode Flow Char t
00-08
Password Set
00-07
Password Input
Yes Shut down th drive

Pr.00-08=0 and re-app ly power
No
Re-apply po we r.
(The p assword is still valid)
Reserved
Control Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Speed mode
1: Point-to-Point position control
2: Torque mode
3: Home mode
This parameter determines the control mode of C2000 series AC motor drive.
Control of Speed Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: VF (IM V/f control)
1: VFPG (IM V/f control+ Encoder)
2: SVC(IM sensorless vector control)
3: FOCPG (IM FOC vector control+ encoder)
4: FOCPG（PM FOC vector control + Encoder）
5: FOC Sensorless (IM field oriented sensorless vector control)
6 : PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless vector control)
This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive:
0: (IM V/f control): user can design proportion of V/f as required and can control multiple motors
simultaneously.
1: (IM V/f control + Encoder): user can use optional PG card with encoder for the closed-loop
speed control.
2: (IM Sensorless vector control): get the optimal control by the auto-tuning of motor
parameters.
3: (IM FOC vector control+ encoder): besides torque increases, the speed control will be more
accurate (1:1000).
4: (PM FOC vector control + Encoder): besides torque increases, the speed control will be
more accurate (1:1000).
5: FOC Sensorless: IM field oriented sensorless vector control
12-6
6: PM Sensorless (PM field oriented sensorless vector control)

When setting Pr.00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is shown as follows.
Fcmd
Pr00-20
accel/decel time
DC BUS
Voltage DC BUS Voltage Protection
Detect
Current Detection
V/F 2/3 AVR IGBT M

table e->s 07-23 PWM
Top Limit F:01-10 01-00
01-00,01-01 01-01
01-02,01-03 Lower Limit F:01-11
01-02
01-04,01-05 05-01
01-06,01-07 05-02
01-08 Vcmd Filter Torque 3/2 05-03
Time Compe nsate s->e
05-04
07-24 07-26
When setting Pr.00-11 to 1, the V/F control + encoder diagram is shown as follows.
Fcmd Frequ en cy Frequ en cy
Cu rren t
D etec t
00-20 Ina cc ura cy Ina ccura cy
V/F IGBT M
table PWM
Vol tage Compe nsate
Vol tage
Co mm an d +
X
+
Vol tage Powe r
Filter cmd Slip Factor EN
com p. Irm s
Fcmd Time
07-24 07-26
Filter Time Real Speed Real Speed
12-7
When setting Pr.00-11 to 2, the sensorless vector control diagram is shown as follows.
DC BUS
Voltage DC BUS Voltage
Detection Protection
Current
Fcmd Detection
Pr00-20
V/F 2/3 AVR IGBT M
table e->s 07-23 PWM
Accel/decel 01-00,01- 01Top limit F:01-10 01-00

time 01-02,01- 03Lower limit F:01-11 01-01
01-04,01- 05 01-02
05-01
01-06,01- 07
05-02
01-08 Filter 3/2 05-03
Slip
Fcmd Time Compensate s->e 05-04
07-25 07- 27
When setting Pr.00-11 to 3, the FOCPG control diagram is shown as follows.
12-8
When setting Pr.00-11 to 5, FOC sensorless control diagram is shown as follows.
When setting Pr.00-11 to 6, PM FOC sensorless control diagram is shown as follows:

10- 39
07-01 Id
command
AMR
ACRd dq2abc
Id
feedback
Wr_cmd Iq
command
Wr_est ACRq
10-35 θ_est
11-01~11-05
10-31~10-33
10-36
Iq feedback
dq2abc
10-34
Point to Point Position control

Factory Settings: 0
Settings: 0: Incremental Type
1: Absolute Type
Pr. 00-12 = 0 is incremental type P2P; Pr.00-12 = 1 is absolute type P2P
12-9
Control of Torque Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: TQCPG（IM Torque control + Encoder）
1: TQCPG (PM Torque control + Encoder)
2: TQC Sensorless (IM Sensorless torque control)
TQCPG control diagram is shown in the following:
no off set
by P r.03- 00
by P r.11- 29
by multi -f unction input
+
Tor que command +
11- 34
06-12 11-35
11- 36 or 00- 20
Speed li mit or command
s peed/ torque
+
-
ASR mode switc h
11-00 B it 0=0 T orque l imit 11-14
11-06~11- 11 11- 17~ 11- 20
11-00 B it 0=1
11-03~11- 05
f lux weakening curve
11-21/11-22 lq
command
Cu rr en t IGBT
M En cod er
con tro l &
ld command 10-00
PWM Moto r 1 Moto r1
~
0 1- 0 1 0 1- 3 5
10-02
0 1- 0 2 0 1- 3 6
0 5- 0 1 0 5- 1 3
~ ~
Cur re nt 0 5- 0 9 0 5- 2 1
me asu re Current feedback
actual fr equency
12-10
TQC Sensorless control diagram is shown in the following:
Reserved
Reserved
Load Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Normal load
1: Heavy load
Normal duty: over load, rated output current 160% in 3 second. Please refer to Pr.00-17 for the
setting of carrier wave. Refer to chapter specifications or Pr.00-01 for the rated current.
Heavy duty: over load, rated output current 180% in 3 second. Please refer to Pr.00-17 for the
setting of carrier wave. Refer to chapter specifications or Pr.00-01 for the rated current.
Carrier Frequency
Factory setting: Table below
Settings 2～15kHz
This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
230V Series
Models 1-15HP [0.75-11kW] 20-50HP [15-37kW] 60-125HP [45-90kW]
Setting Range 02~15kHz 02~10kHz 02~09kHz
Normal Duty Factory 8kHz 6kHz 4kHz
Setting
Heavy Duty Factory 2kHz
Setting
12-11
460V Series
Models 1-20HP [0.75-15kW] 25-75HP [18.5-55kW] 100-475HP [75-355kW]
Setting Range 02~15kHz 02~10kHz 02~09kHz
Normal Duty Factory 8kHz 6kHz 4kHz
Setting
Heavy Duty Factory 2kHz
Setting
Electromagnetic Heat Current

Carrier Acoustic Noise or Leakage Dissipation
Frequency Noise Wave
Current
1kH z Significant M inimal Minimal
8kH z
15kHz
M inimal Significant Significant
From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise. Therefore, if the
surrounding noise is greater than the motor noise, lower the carrier frequency is good to reduce the
temperature rise. Although it is quiet operation in the higher carrier frequency, the entire wiring and
interference resistance should be considerate.
When the carrier frequency is higher than the factory setting, it needs to protect by decreasing the
carrier frequency. See Pr.06-55 for the related setting and details.
Reserved
PLC Command Mask

Factory Setting: Read Only
Settings Bit 0: Control command by PLC force control
Bit 1: Frequency command by PLC force control
Bit 2: Position command by PLC force control
Bit 3: Torque command by PLC force control
This parameter determines if frequency command or control command is occupied by PLC
Source of the Master Frequency Command（AUTO）

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Digital keypad
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction)
12-12

7: Reserved
It is used to set the source of the master frequency in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
The AUTO/HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 or multi-function input terminal
(MI).
The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to
AUTO mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal used
to switch AUTO/HAND mode. The highest priority is the mutli-function input terminal. When the
external terminal is OFF, the drive won’t receive any operation signal and can’t execute JOG.
Source of the Operation Command （AUTO）

Factory Setting: 0
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
3: CANopen card
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not includes CANopen card)
It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in AUTO mode.
When the operation command is controlled by the keypad KPC-CC01, keys RUN, STOP and JOG
(F1) are valid.
Stop Method
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Ramp to stop
1:Coast to stop
The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid stop
command.
Freq uen cy Freq uen cy
Output Ou tp ut
Frequenc y Freq uenc y
Moto r Moto r
Ro tatio n Ro tatio n
Spe ed Spe ed
Free running
Time to stop
Time
Oper atio n Stops acc ording t o
deceler ation time Oper atio n
Co mmand RUN STOP Co mmand RUN STOP
Ra mp to Stop and Co ast to Sto p
12-13
Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates from the setting of deceleration time to 0 or
minimum output frequency (Pr. 01-09) and then stop (by Pr.01-07).
Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon a STOP command and the
motor free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
(1) It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent material from
being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the drive is stopped. The
deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2) If the motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to select
“coast to stop”. For example, blowers, punching machines and pumps
The stop method of the torque control is also set by Pr.00-22.
Control of Motor Direction

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Enable forward/ reverse
1: Disable reverse
2: Disable forward
This parameter enables the AC motor drives to run in the forward/reverse Direction. It may be used
to prevent a motor from running in a direction that would consequently injure the user or damage
the equipment.
Memory of Frequency Command

Settings Read only
If keypad is the source of frequency command, when Lv or Fault occurs the present frequency
command will be saved in this parameter.
User Defined Characteristics

Factory Setting: 0
Settings Bit 0~3: user define on decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal place
0011b: three decimal place
Bit 4~15: user define on unit

000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
Bit 0~3: F & H page unit and Pr.00-26 decimal display is supported up to 3 decimal places.
Bit 4~15: F & H page unit and Pr.00-26 unit display is supported up to 4 types of unit display.
Max. User Defined Value

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
0~65535 (when Pr.00-25 set to no decimal place)
12-14

User define is enabled when Pr.00-26 is not 0. The setting of Pr.00-26 corresponds to Pr.01.00
(Max. output frequency of the drive).
Example: User define: 100.0%, Pr.01.00 = 60.00Hz
Pr.00.25 setting is 0021h; Pr.0026 setting is 100.0%
NOTE
The drive will display as Pr.00-25 setting when Pr.00-25 is properly set and Pr.00-26 is not 0.
User Defined Value

Factory Setting: Read only
Settings Read only
Pr.00-27 will show user defined value when Pr.00-26 is not set to 0.
User defined function is valid when Pr.00-20 is set to digital keypad control or RS-285
communication input control.
Reserved
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Standard HOA function
1: Switching Local/Remote, the drive stops
2: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as the REMOTE setting for
frequency and operation status
3: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as the LOCAL setting for frequency
and operation status
4: Swithcing Local/Remote, the drive runs as LOCAL setting when switch to
Local and runs as REMOTE setting when switch to Remote for frequency
and operation status.
The factory setting of Pr.00-29 is 0 (standard Hand-Off-Auto function). The AUTO frequency and
source of operation can be set by Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21, and the HAND frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. AUTO/HAND mode can be selected or switched by
using digital keypad(KPC-CC01) or setting multi-function input terminal MI= 41, 42.
When external terminal MI is set to 41 and 42 (AUTO/HAND mode), the settings Pr.00-29=1,2,3,4
will be disabled. The external terminal has the highest priority among all command, Pr.00-29 will
always function as Pr.00-29=0, standard HOA mode.
When Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, Local/Remote function is enabled, the top right corner of digital
keypad (KPC-CC01) will display “LOC” or “REM” (the display is available when KPC-CC01 is
installed with firmware version higher than version 1.021). The LOCAL frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21, and the REMOTE frequency and source of
operation can be set by Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. Local/Remote function can be selected or switched
by using digital keypad(KPC-CC01) or setting external terminal MI=56. The AUTO key of the digital
keypad now controls for the REMOTE function and HAND key now controls for the LOCAL
function.
When MI is set to 56 for LOC/REM selection, if Pr.00-29 is set to 0, then the external terminal is
12-15
disabled.
When MI is set to 56 for LOC/REM selection, if Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, the external terminal has
the highest priority of command and the ATUO/HAND keys will be disabled.
Source of the Master Frequency Command（HAND）

Factory Setting: 0
4: Pulse input without direction command (Pr.10-16 without direction)
7: Reserved
It is used to set the source of the master frequency in HAND mode.
Source of the Operation Command (HAND)
Factory Setting: 0
2: RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP disabled.
4: Reserved
5: Communication card (not include CANopen card
It is used to set the source of the operation frequency in HAND mode.
Pr.00-20 and 00-21 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and 00-31 are for the settings of frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
The AUTO/HAND mode can be switched by the keypad KPC-CC01 or multi-function input terminal
(MI).
The factory setting of frequency source or operation source is for AUTO mode. It will return to
AUTO mode whenever power on again after power off. If there is multi-function input terminal used
to switch AUTO/HAND mode. The highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When the
external terminal is OFF, the drive won’t receive any operation signal and can’t execute JOG.
Digital Keypad STOP Function

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: STOP key disable
1: STOP key enable
~ Reserved
12-16
Homing mode
Factory Setting: 0000h
Settings:
Note: Forward run = closckwise (CW)

Reverse run = counterclockwise (CCW)
X 0: Forward run to home. Set PL forward limit as check point.

1: Reverse run (CCW) to home. Set NL reverse limit (CCWL) as check
point.
2: Forward run to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON as check point.
3: Reverse to home. Set ORG : OFF→ON as check point.
4: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check point.
5: Forward run and search for Z-pulse as check point.
6: Forward run to home. Set ORG: ON→OFF as check point.
7: Reverse run to home. Set ORG : ON→OFF as check point.
8: Define current position as home.
Y Set X to 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 .
0: reverse run to Z pulse
1: continue forward run to Z pulse
2: Ignore Z pulse
Z When home limit is reached, set X to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 first.
0: display error
1: reverse the direction
Homing action is control by Pr. 00-40, 00-41, 00-42 and 02-01~02-08.
1. When Y=0, X=0 or Y=0, X=2

Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
CCWL /ORGP
2. When Y=0, X=1 or Y=0, X=3

Speed
Posi tion
Z p ulse
CWL/ORGP
12-17
3. When Y=1, X=2

Speed
Position
Z p ulse
ORGP
4. When Y=1, X=3

Speed
Position
Z p ulse
ORGP
5. When Y=2, X=2

Speed
Position
ORGP
6. When Y=2, X=3

Speed
Position
ORGP
7. When Y=2, X=4

Speed
Position
Z pulse
12-18
8. When Y=2, X=5

Spe ed
Position
Z pulse
Homing by Frequency 1
Factory Setting: 8.00
Settings 0.00~600.00Hz
Homing by Frequency 2
Control by Multi-funcion Input Terminal Pr. 02-01~02-08 (44~47).
44: Reverse direction homing
46: Homing (ORG)
If the drive is not control by CAN or PLC, set Pr.00-10 =1 (Contorl mode = P2P position control)
and set exterminal output terminal to 47 (homing function enable) for homing.
When Pr.00-10 is set to 3, after homing is complete, user must set control mode setting Pr.00-10
to 1 in order to perform P2P position control.
~ Reserved
Display Filter Time (Current)

Factory Settings: 0.100
Settings: 0.001~65.535 sec
Set this parameter to minimize the current fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
Display Filter Time (Keypad)

Factory Settings: 0.100
Settings: 0.001~65.535 sec
Set this parameter to minimize the display value fluctuation displayed by digital keypad.
Software Version (date)

Factory Settings: ####
Settings: Read only
This parameter displays the drive’s software version by date.
12-19
Group 1 Basic Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.
Maximum Output Frequency

Factory Setting: 60.00/50.00
This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC motor
drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 20mAand ±10V) are
scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.
Output Frequency of Motor 1（base frequency and motor rated frequency）

Output Frequency of Motor 2（base frequency and motor rated frequency）
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 60Hz, the setting should be 60Hz. If the motor is 50Hz, it should be set
to 50Hz.
Pr.01-35 is used for the application occasion that uses double base motor.
Output Voltage of Motor 1（base frequency and motor rated frequency）

Output Voltage of Motor 2（base frequency and motor rated frequency）
Settings 230V series: 0.0~255.0V
460V series: 0.0~510.0V
This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0. If the motor is 200V, it should be set to
200.0.
There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also difference.
The economic and convenience method to solve this problem is to install the AC motor drive. There
is no problem to use with the different voltage and frequency and also can amplify the original
characteristic and life of the motor.
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1

Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1
460V series: 0.0~480.0V

12-20

460V series: 0.0~480.0V

460V series: 0.0~480.0V

460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 1

Min. Output Voltage of Motor 1
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
Min. Output Frequency of Motor 2

Min. Output Voltage of Motor 2
460V series: 0.0~480.0V
V/f curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay special
attention to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity, if the loading
characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor.
There is no limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at low frequency may cause motor
damage, overheat, and stall prevention or over-current protection. Therefore, please use the low
voltage at the low frequency to prevent motor damage.
12-21
Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/f curve for the motor 2. When multi-function input terminals
Pr.02-01~02-08 and Pr.02-26 ~Pr.02-31 are set to 14 and enabled, the AC motor drive will act as
the 2nd V/f curve.
The V/f curve for the motor 1 is shown as follows. The V/f curve for the motor 2 can be deduced
from it.
Vol tage
1s t Output Output F requency
Voltage Set ting 01-11 Output Frequency Lower Limit 01-10Upper Limi t
01-02 F requenc y out put
2nd Output
ranges limit ation
Voltage Setting
01-04 R egul ar V /f Cur ve
3r d Output
Voltage Setting Special V/f C urve
01-06
4th Output
Voltage Setting
F requenc y
01-08 01-07 01-09 01-05 01-03 01-01 01-00
4t h F req. Start Freq. 2nd F req.1st F req. Maximum Output
3rd Fr eq. F requenc y
V/f Curve
Common settings of V/f curve:
(1) General purpose
Motor spec . 6 0Hz M otor s pe c. 5 0Hz
V V
2 20 Pr. Setting 2 20 Pr. Se ttin g
0 1-0 0 60 .0 0 1-00 5 0.0
0 1-0 1 60 .0 0 1-01 50 .0
01 -0 2 2 20 .0 0 1-02 22 0. 0
0 1-0 3 0 1-03
1.5 0 1.3 0
0 1-0 5 0 1-05
0 1-0 4 0 1-04
10 1 0.0 10 1 0.0
0 1-0 6 0 1-06
F F
1.5 6 0.0 0 1-0 7 1 .50 1 .3 50 .0 0 1-07 1 .30
0 1-0 8 10 .0 0 1-08 10 .0
(2) Fan and hydraulic machinery
Motor spec. 60Hz M otor spec. 50Hz
V Pr. Sett ing V Pr. Sett ing
220 220
01-00 60.0 01-00 50.0
01-01 60.0 01-01 50.0
01-02 220.0 01-02 220.0
01-03 01-03
30.0 25. 0
01-05 01-05
50 01-04 50 01-04
50.0 50.0
10 01-06 10 01-06
F 01-07 1. 50 F 01-07 1.30
1.5 30 60.0 1.3 25 50.0
01-08 10.0 01-08 10. 0
(3) High starting torque
Motor spec. 60Hz Motor spec. 50Hz
V Pr. Setting V Pr. Sett ing

220 01-00 60.0 220 01-00 50.0
01-01 60.0 01-01 50.0
01-02 220.0 01-02 220.0
01-03 01-03
3.00 2. 20
01-05 23 01-05
23
01-04 01-04
23.0 23.0
01-06 14 01-06
18
F 01-07 1.50 F 01-07 1.30
1. 5 3 60.0 01-08 18.0 1.3 2.2 50.0 01-08 14.0
12-22
Start-Up Frequency
When start frequency is higher than the min. output frequency, drives’ output will be from start
frequency to the setting frequency. Please refer to the following diagram for details.
Fcmd=frequency command,
Fstart=start frequency (Pr.01-09),
fstart=actual start frequency of drive,
Fmin=4th output frequency setting (Pr.01-07/Pr.01-41),
Flow=output frequency lower limit (Pr.01-11)
NO
F cmd>Fmi n by Pr.01- 34
Y ES
NO YES
F star t>Fmin fstart=F min F low= 0 H=Fc md
Hz
F cmd
Y ES
F min
fstart=F star t
F star t
Time
operation after NO
start-up NO
F low= 0 F cmd>Fl ow
NO
Y ES by
YES F cmd<Fmi n Pr.01- 34
by NO
F cmd>Fmi n
Pr.01- 34
NO
Y ES H=Fl ow
Y ES
H=Fc md
H =Fc md Hz
Hz Hz
60H z
60Hz H=Fl ow
H=Fc md1 F low F low> Fcmd1
F cmd
F cmd1 F cmd1>Flow & F cmd1 >F min
F star t F min F cmd1>Fmin F min
F min F cmd2 F cmd2
Time F low Time
Time by Pr.01- 34
by Pr.01- 34 F min>Fc md2
F cmd2>Flow &
F cmd2<Fmin
Output Frequency Upper Limit

Output Frequency Lower Limit
The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will run with the upper limit frequency. If output
frequency lower than output frequency lower limit and frequency setting is higher than min.
frequency, it will run with lower limit frequency. The upper limit frequency should be set to be higher
than the lower limit frequency.
12-23
Pr.01-10 setting must be ≥ Pr.01-11 setting. Pr.01-00 setting is regarded as 100.0%.

Output frequency upper limit = (Pr.01-00 × Pr.01-10) /100
This setting will limit the max. Output frequency of drive. If frequency setting is higher than Pr.01-10,
the output frequency will be limited by Pr.01-10 setting.
When the drive starts the function of slip compensation (Pr.07-27) or PID feedback control, drive
output frequency may exceed frequency command but still be limited by this setting.
Related parameters: Pr.01-00 Max. Operation Frequency and Pr.01-11 Output Frequency Lower
Limit
Volta ge
01.02
Motor ra te d voltage
(Vbase)
01.04
Mid-po in t volta ge
(Vmid)
01.06 Fre que ncy

Min. o utput vo ltag e 01.05 01.03 01.01 01.00
se tting (Vmin) Min . ou tp ut Mid-po in t Motor ra te d M ax. ope ra tion
freq uen cy frequ ency fre que ncy frequ ency
(Fmin ) (Fmid) (Fba se)
This setting will limit the min. output frequency of drive. When drive frequency command or
feedback control frequency is lower than this setting, drive output frequency will limit by the lower
limit of frequency.
When the drive starts, it will operate from min. output frequency (Pr.01-05) and accelerate to the
setting frequency. It won’t limit by this parameter setting.
The setting of output frequency upper/lower limit is used to prevent personal misoperation,
overheat due to too low operation frequency or damage due to too high speed.
If the output frequency upper limit setting is 50Hz and frequency setting is 60Hz, max. output
frequency will be 50Hz.
If the output frequency lower limit setting is 10Hz and min. operation frequency setting (Pr.01-05) is
1.5Hz, it will operate by 10Hz when the frequency command is greater than Pr.01-05 and less than
10Hz. If the frequency command is less than Pr.01-05, the drive will be in ready status and no
output.
If the frequency output upper limit is 60Hz and frequency setting is also 60Hz, it won’t exceed 60Hz
even after slip compensation. If the output frequency needs to exceed 60Hz, it can increase output
frequency upper limit or max. operation frequency.
Accel. Time 1
Decel. Time 1
Accel. Time 2
Decel. Time 2
Accel. Time 3
12-24
Decel. Time 3
Accel. Time 4
Decel. Time 4
JOG Acceleration Time
JOG Deceleration Time
Factory Setting for AC drive with power
greater than 30HP: 60.00/60.0
Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 seconds
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~6000.00 seconds
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from
0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00).
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time require for the AC motor drive to decelerate
from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0Hz.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time is invalid when using Pr.01-44 Optimal
Acceleration/Deceleration Setting.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals settings. The factory settings are Accel./Decel. time 1.
When enabling torque limits and stalls prevention function, actual accel./decel. time will be longer
than the above action time.
Please note that it may trigger the protection function (Pr.06-03 Over-current Stall Prevention
during Acceleration or Pr.06-01 Over-voltage Stall Prevention) when the setting of accel./decel.
time is too short.
Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current during
acceleration when the setting of acceleration time is too short.
Please note that it may cause motor damage or drive protection enabled due to over current during
deceleration or over-voltage when the setting of deceleration time is too short.
It can use suitable brake resistor (see Chapter 06 Accessories) to decelerate in a short time and
prevent over-voltage.
When enabling Pr.01-24~Pr.01-27, the actual accel./decel. time will be longer than the setting.
Frequency
01-00
M ax. O utput
Frequency
Frequency
Setting
Time
accel. time decel. time
01-12,14,16,18,20 01-13,15,17,19,21
Accel./Decel. Time
12-25
JOG Frequency
Both external terminal JOG and key “F1” on the keypad KPC-CC01 can be used. When the jog
command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22). When the
jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero. The Jog
Accel./Decel. time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21) is the time that accelerates from 0.0Hz to Pr.01-22 JOG
Frequency.
The JOG command can’t be executed when the AC motor drive is running. In the same way, when
the JOG command is executing, other operation commands are invalid except forward/reverse
commands and STOP key on the digital keypad.
It does not support JOG function in the optional keypad KPC-CE01.
1st/4th Accel./decel. Frequency
The transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 to acceleration/deceleration time 4, may also
be enabled by the external terminals. The external terminal has priority over Pr. 01-23.
F reque nc y
1st Acceler ati on 4th Dec ele ration

Time T ime
01-23
4th A cceleratio n 1s t Dec eleratio n

Time T ime Ti me
1st/4th A cceleratio n/Dec eleration F requenc y S witch i ng
S-curve Acceleration Begin Time 1

S-curve Acceleration Arrival Time 2
S-curve Deceleration Begin Time 1
S-curve Deceleration Arrival Time 2
Settings Pr.01-45=0: 0.00~25.00 seconds
Pr.01-45=1: 0.00~250.0 seconds
It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve can
adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel. When it is enabled, the drive will have different accel./decel.
curve by the accel./decel. time.
The S-curve function is disabled when accel./decel. time is set to 0.
When Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 ≥ Pr.01-24 and Pr.01-25,
The Actual Accel. Time = Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25)/2
When Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 ≥ Pr.01-26 and Pr.01-27,
The Actual Decel. Time = Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27)/2
12-26
Frequency
01-25 01-26
Time
01-24 01-27
Skip Frequency 1 (upper limit)

Skip Frequency 1 (lower limit)
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. But the frequency output is
continuous. There is no limit for the setting of these six parameters and can be used as required.
The skip frequencies are useful when a motor has vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. By
skipping this frequency, the vibration will be avoided. It offers 3 zones for use.
These parameters are used to set the skip frequency of the AC drive. But the frequency output is
continuous. The limit of these six parameters is 01-28≥01-29≥01-30≥01-31≥01-32≥01-33. This
function will be invalid when setting to 0.0.
The setting of frequency command (F) can be set within the range of skip frequencies. In this
moment, the output frequency (H) will be limited by these settings.
When accelerating/decelerating, the output frequency will still pass the range of skip frequencies.
01- 28
01- 29 fa ll in g fr eq ue ncy
Inter nal 01- 30
frequency
01- 31
command
01- 32
01- 33 r ising fre qu en cy
0
F requenc y s etting command
Zero-speed Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (Refer to Pr.01-07, 01-41)
12-27
When the frequency is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), it will operate by this parameter.
When it is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be in waiting mode without voltage output from terminals
U/V/W.
When setting 1, it will execute DC brake by Vmin(Pr.01-08 and Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG and SVC
modes. It executes zero-speed operation in VFPG and FOCPG mode.
When it is set to 2, the AC motor drive will run by Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41) and Vmin (Pr.01-08,
Pr.01-42) in V/f, VFPG, SVC and FOCPG modes.
In V/f, VFPG and SVC modes
fout
01-34=1 01-34=2
01-34=0
stop output
fmin
01-07 0H z 0Hz
stop w aiting for output 0H z oper ation
(D C br ake)
In FOCPG mode, when Pr.01-34 is set to 2, it will act according Pr.01-34 setting.
fout
01-34=1 01-34=2
01-34=0
fmin
01-07
frequency command frequency command
V/f Curve Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: V/f curve determined by group 01
1: 1.5 power curve
2: Square curve
When setting to 0, refer to Pr.01-01~01-08 for motor 1 V/f curve. For motor 2, please refer to
Pr.01-35~01-42.
When setting to 1 or 2, 2nd and 3rd voltage frequency setting are invalid.
If motor load is variable torque load (torque is in direct proportion to speed, such as the load of fan
or pump), it can decrease input voltage to reduce flux loss and iron loss of the motor at low speed
with low load torque to raise the entire efficiency.
When setting higher power V/f curve, it is lower torque at low frequency and is not suitable for rapid
acceleration/deceleration. It is recommended Not to use this parameter for the rapid
acceleration/deceleration.
12-28
01-02
Voltage %
100
90
80
70 1.5 power c urve
60
50
40
30
20
Square curve 01-01
10
F requenc y%
0 20 40 60 80 100
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Linear accel./decel.
1: Auto accel., linear decel.
2: Linear accel., auto decel.
3: Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load)
4: Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21)
Pr.01-44 is used to reduce the drive’s vibration during load starts and stops. Also it will speed up to
the setting frequency with the fastest and smoothest start-up current when it detects small torque.
At deceleration, it will auto stop the drive with the fastest and the smoothest deceleration time when
the regenerated voltage of the load is detected.
Setting 0 Linear accel./decel.: it will accelerate/decelerate according to the setting of
Pr.01-12~01-19.
Setting to Auto accel./decel.: it can reduce the mechanical vibration and prevent the complicated
auto-tuning processes. It won’t stall during acceleration and no need to use brake resistor. In
addition, it can improve the operation efficiency and save energy.
Setting 3 Auto accel./decel. (auto calculate the accel./decel. time by actual load): it can auto detect
the load torque and accelerate from the fastest acceleration time and smoothest start current to the
setting frequency. In the deceleration, it can auto detect the load re-generation and stop the motor
smoothly with the fastest decel. time.
Setting 4 Stall prevention by auto accel./decel. (limited by 01-12 to 01-21): if the
acceleration/deceleration is in the reasonable range, it will accelerate/decelerate by
Pr.01-12~01-19. If the accel./decel. time is too short, the actual accel./decel. time is greater than
the setting of accel./decel. time.
12-29
F requenc y
1
01-00
Max.
Fr equency 2
01- 07
Min. T ime
Fr equency accel. time decel. time
01-12 01-14 01-13 01-15
01-16 01-18 01-17 01-19
Acc el./Decel. Time
1 When P r. 01-44 is set to 0.
2 When P r. 01-44 is set to 3.
Time Unit for Acceleration/Deceleration and S Curve

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Unit 0.01 sec
1: Unit 0.1 sec
Time for CANopen Quick Stop

Settings Pr. 01-45=0: 0.00~600.00 sec
Pr. 01-45=1: 0.0~6000.0 sec
It is used to set the time that decelerates from the max. operation frequency (Pr.01-00) to 0.00Hz in
CANopen control
12-30
02 Digital Input/Output Parameter This parameter can be set during operation.
2-wire/3-wire Operation Control

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 2 wire mode 1
1: 2 wire mode 2
2: 3 wire mode
It is used to set the operation control method:
Pr.02-00 Control Circuits of the External Terminal

0
FWD/ STOP FWD: ("OPEN":STOP)
2-wire mode 1 ("CL OSE":FWD)
FWD/STOP REV/STOP REV:( "OPEN": ST OP)
REV/STOP ( "C LOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD -C
1
FWD: ("OPEN ": STOP)
2-wire mode 2 RUN /STOP
("CLOSE":RUN )
RUN/STOP FWD/ REV REV:( "OPEN": F WD)
REV/FWD ( "C LOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD -C
3
F WD "CLOSE": RUN
3-wire operation control STOP RUN
MI1 "OPEN":ST OP
REV/F WD "OPEN": F WD
REV/F WD "CLOSE": REV
DC M
VF D- C
Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1) (MI1= STOP command when in 3-wire operation
control)
Factory Setting: 1
Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2)
Factory Setting: 2
Factory Setting: 3
Factory Setting: 4
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI10)
12-31

Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1/multi-step position command 1
5: Reset
6: JOG command（By KPC-CC01 or external control）
7: acceleration/deceleration speed not allow
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF Input (Pr.07-20)
11: B.B input from external (Base Block)
12: Output stop
13: cancel the setting of the optimal acceleration/deceleration time
14: switch between motor 1 and motor 2
15: operation speed command from AVI
16: operation speed command from ACI
17: operation speed command from AUI
18: Emergency stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Digital up command
20: Digital down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: FOCG/TQC model selection
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for Δ-connection
31: High torque bias (Pr.11-30)
32: Middle torque bias (Pr.11-31)
33: Low torque bias (Pr.11-32)
34: Switch between multi-step position and multi-speed control
35: Enable position control
36: Enable multi-step position learning function (valid at stop)
37: Enable pulse position input command
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Force coast to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
43: Enable resolution selection (Pr.02-48)
44: Reverse direction homing
46: Homing ORG
48: Mechanical gear ratio switch
49: Drive enable
50: Master dEb action input
12-32

53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
54~55: Reserve
56: Local/Remote Selection
57~70: Reserve
This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
The terminals of Pr.02-26~Pr.02-29 are virtual and set as MI10~MI13 when using with optional card
EMC-D42A. Pr.02-30~02-31 are virtual terminals.
When being used as a virtual terminal, it needs to change the status (0/1: ON/OFF) of bit 8-15 of
Pr.02-12 by digital keypad KPC-CC01 or communication.
If Pr.02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control. Terminal MI1 is for STOP contact. Therefore, MI1 is
not allowed for any other operation.
Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed,
OFF: contact is open)
Settings Functions Descriptions

0 No Function
Multi-step speed
1 command 1/multi-step
position command 1
Multi-step speed
2 command 2/ multi-step
15 step speeds could be conducted through the digital status of the
position command 2
4 terminals, and 16 in total if the master speed is included. (Refer to
Multi-step speed
Parameter set 4)
position command 3
Multi-step speed
position command 4
After the error of the drive is eliminated, use this terminal to reset
5 Reset
the drive.
Before executing this function, it needs to wait for the drive stop
completely. During running, it can change the operation direction
and STOP key on the keypad is valid. Once the external terminal
receives OFF command, the motor will stop by the JOG
deceleration time. Refer to Pr.01-20~01-22 for details.
0 1- 22
JO G fr eq ue ncy
6 JOG Command
0 1- 07
Min. o utp ut freq ue ncy
o f moto r 1
JO G a ccel. time JO G d ece l. ti me
0 1-20 01 -2 1
MIx-G ND ON O FF
When this function is enabled, acceleration and deceleration is

Acceleration/deceleration stopped. After this function is disabled, the AC motor drive starts
7
Speed Inhibit
to accel./decel. from the inhibit point.
12-33

Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq uency A ccel . in hi bi t
De cel . in hibit
a re a
a re a A ctua l o pe ra tio n
A ccel. in hi bi t fr eq uency
a rea De cel . in hi bi t
a re a
Actua l o pe ra tion fr eq ue ncy
Time
MIx- GND ON ON ON ON
O pe ra tio n ON O FF
co mman d
The 1st, 2nd acceleration The acceleration/deceleration time of the drive could be selected
8 or deceleration time from this function or the digital status of the terminals; there are 4
selection acceleration/deceleration speeds in total for selection.
The 3rd, 4th acceleration
9 or deceleration time
selection
EF Input (EF: External External fault input terminal. It will decelerate by Pr.07-20 setting (it
10
fault) will have fault record when external fault occurs)
When this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off
External B.B. Input (Base
11 immediately, and the motor will be free run and display B.B. signal.
Block)
Refer to Pr.07-08 for details.
If this contact is ON, output of the drive will be cut off immediately,
and the motor will then be free run. And once it is turned to OFF,
the drive will accelerate to the setting frequency.
V ol tage
Fr eque ncy
Setti ng
fr eque ncy
12 Output Stop
Ti me
MI x - GND ON O FF ON
O pe ra tio n
ON
co mmand
Before using this function, Pr.01-44 should be set to 01/02/03/04
Cancel the setting of the
13 first. When this function is enabled, OFF is for auto mode and ON
optimal accel./decel. time
is for linear accel./decel.
Switch between drive When the contact is ON: use motor 2 parameters. OFF: use
14
settings 1 and 2 motor 1 parameters.
When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force to be
Operation speed AVI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AUI
15
command form AVI
at the same time. The priority is AVI＞ACI＞AUI)
When the contact is ON, the source of the frequency will force to be
Operation speed ACI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI, ACI and AUI
16
command form ACI
at the same time. The priority is AVI＞ACI＞AUI)
When this function is enabled, the source of the frequency will
Operation speed force to be AUI. (If the operation speed commands are set to AVI,
17
command form AUI
ACI and AUI at the same time. The priority is AVI＞ACI＞AUI)
When the contact is ON, the drive will ramp to stop by Pr.07-20
18 Emergency Stop (07-20)
setting.
When the contact is ON, the frequency will be increased and
19 Digital Up command
decreased. If this function is constantly ON, the frequency will be
12-34

increased/decreased by Pr.02-09/Pr.02-10.
20 Digital Down command
21 PID function disabled When the contact is ON, the PID function is disabled.
When the contact is ON, it will clear current counter value and
22 Clear counter display “0”. Only when this function is disabled, it will keep counting
upward.
Input the counter value
The counter value will increase 1 once the contact is ON. It needs
23 (multi-function input
to be used with Pr.02-19.
command 6)
When the contact is ON, the drive will execute forward Jog
command.
24 FWD JOG command When execute JOG command under torque mode, the drive will
automatically switch to speed mode; after JOG command is done,
the drive will return to torque mode.
When the contact is ON the drive will execute reverse Jog
command.
25 REV JOG command When execute JOG command under torque mode, the drive will
automatically switch to speed mode; after JOG command is done,
the drive will return to torque mode.
When the contact is ON: TQCPG mode.
When the contact is OFF: FOCPG mode.
RU N/STOP
command RU N STOP
Multi- func ti on i np ut
ter minal is set to 26
(to rque/speed OFF ON OFF ON
mode sw itch )
FOCPG/TQCPG mode 03 -0 0~02= 1 sp eed speed limit sp eed speed limit

26 (AVI/AUI/ACI i s command command
selection fr eq uency command)
03 -0 0~02= 2 tor que tor que
(AVI/AUI/ACI i s limit torque limit tor que
tor que command) command command
contro l sp eed sp eed sp eed

mode co ntrol tor que co ntrol tor que co ntrol
control control (decel. t o stop )
Sw itch timing for t orq ue/speed contr ol
(00-10=0/4 , mu lt i-fu nct ion inpu t t erminal is set to 2 6)
When the contact is ON: speed will be adjusted by ASR 2 setting.
27 ASR1/ASR2 selection OFF: speed will be adjusted by ASR 1 setting. Refer to Pr.11-02 for
details.
When the contact is ON, the drive will execute emergency stop and
display EF1 on the keypad. The motor won’t run and be in the free
run until the fault is cleared after pressing RESET” (EF: External
Fault)
V oltag e
Fr eq ue ncy
S etti ng
fr eq ue ncy
28 Emergency stop (EF1)
Ti me
MI x - GND ON OFF ON
Re set ON O FF
O pe ra tio n
ON
co mman d
12-35

Signal confirmation for
29 When is the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 1st V/f.
Y-connection
Signal confirmation for
30 When the contact is ON, the drive will operate by 2nd V/f.
Δ-connection
31 High torque bias
Refer to Pr.11-30~11-32 for details.
32 Middle torque bias
33 Low torque bias
When the contact is ON, the corresponding 15-step speed for the
multi-function inputs 1-4 will be 15 positions. (Refer to Pr.04-16 to
Pr.04-44)
sp eed m ode position mod e sp eed mode
Run
MI=d35
MI=d34
MI=d1 1 1 0 0
MI=d2 0 0 0 0
MI=d3 1 1 1 1
MI=d4 1 1 1 1
outp ut
freque ncy
10-19 04-40 04-38 04-11
mu lti- mu lti- 12th step
position
Switch between (Home) position position sp eed
34 multi-step position and 13 12 freque ncy
multi-speed control
sp eed m ode pos ition mod e
Run
MI=d34
MI=d35
MI=d1 1 1 1 0
0 0 0 0
MI=d2
MI=d3 1 1 1 1
MI=4 1 1 1 1
Ma ster
freque ncy
Output
freque ncy 04-12
13th step 04-38
04-40 mu lti-
sp eed mu lti-
pos ition
freque ncy pos ition
12
13
12-36

When the contact is ON, the AC motor drive will execute internal
single-point position control according to the setting in Pr.10-19.
This function is valid in FOCPG mode only.
Output
frequency
PG
feedbac k 10-19
10-01
10-02
RUN
MI=d35
Enable single-point MO= d39

35 position control
Time
O utp ut
fr eq ue ncy
PG
fe ed ba ck
10-1 9
10-01
10-02
RU N RUN RUN
MI=d35
MO= d39 Ti me
When the contact is ON/OFF, the drive will base the multi-function
inputs 1-4 ON/OFF status to find the corresponding multi-step
positions and write current motor position into such corresponding
multi-step position.
Run/Stop
1011 2=11 101 0 2=10

co rres pond s co rres pond s to
to Pr.04-36 Pr.04-34
MI=d1 1 0 0
Enable multi-step MI=d2 1 1 1

36 position learning function
(valid at stop) 0 0
MI=d3 0
MI=d4 1 1 1
MI=d36
Writing the motor positio n Writing the m otor p ositio n

in to the Pr.04-36 in to the Pr.04-34
12-37

When Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5 and this contact is ON, the input
pulse of PG card is position command. When using this function, it
is recommended to set Pr.11-25 to 0.
Example: please refer to the following diagram when using this
faction with MI=d35 return to home position,.
R UN
MI=d35
Full position control MO= d39

37 pulse command input
enable MI=d37
pulse
command
internal
positioning
output
frequency Time
Disable EEPROM write

38 When this contact is ON, write to EEPROM is disabled.
function
Torque command For torque control (Pr.00-10=2), when torque command is AVI or
39
direction ACI, the contact is ON and it is negative torque.
When this contact is ON during the operation, the drive will free run
40 Force coast to stop
to stop.
1. When MI is switched to off status, it executes a STOP
41 HAND switch command. , If MI is switched to off during operation, the drive
will also stop.
2. Using keypad KPC-CC01 to switch between HAND/AUTO,
the drive will stop first then switch to the HAND or AUTO status.
3. On the digital keypad KPC-CC01, it will display current drive
status (HAND/OFF/AUTO).
42 AUTO switch Bit 1 Bit 0
OFF 0 0
AUTO 0 1
HAND 1 0
OFF 1 1
Enable resolution
43 Refer to Pr.02-48 for details.
selection
Signal input for reverse direction limit switch. When this terminal is
Reverse direction ON, the drive will react to the setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42
44
homing accordingly to execute homing in a reverse direction (counter
clockwise).
Signal input for forward direction limit switch. When this terminal is
45 Forward direction homing ON, the drive will react to the setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42
accordingly to execute homing in a forward direction (clockwise).
ORG point input. When this terminal is ON, the drive will refer to the
46 Homing ORG
setting in Pr.00-40, 00-41, 00-42 accordingly to execute homing.
Pr.00-10 = 3 (homing mode), if the external terminal MIx=47 is
OFF, the drive will ignore the home command and execute Point to
47 Homing function enable
Point position control.
12-38

Mechanical gear ratio When this contact is ON, the mechanical gear ratio switch will be
48
switch the second group A2/B2 (refer to Pr.10-08 and Pr.10-09).
When drive=enable, RUN command is valid.
49 Drive enable When drive= disable, RUN command is invalid.
When drive is in operation, motor coast to stop.
Input the message setting in this parameter when dEb occurs to
50 Master dEb action input Master. This will ensure dEb also occurs to Slave, then Master and
Slave will stop simultaneously.
Selection for PLC mode

51
bit0 PLC status Bit 1 Bit 0
Disable PLC function (PLC 0) 0 0
Trigger PLC to operation (PLC 1) 0 1
Selection for PLC mode Trigger PLC to stop (PLC 2) 1 0
52 No function 1 1
bit1
Enable CANopen quick When this function is enabled under CANopen control, it will
53
stop change to quick stop. Refer to Chapter 15 for more details.
54~55 Reserved
Use Pr.00-29 to select for LOCAL/REMOTE mode(refer to
Pr.00-29)
When Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, on the digital keypad KPC-CC01 it
will display LOC/REM status. (It will display on the KPC-CC01 if the
56 LOCAL/REMOTE Selection firmware version is above version 1.021).
Bit 0
REM 0
LOC 1
57~70 Reserved
UP/DOWN Key Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Up/down by the accel/decel time
1: Up/down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
Constant speed. The Accel. /Decel. Speed of the UP/DOWN Key

Settings 0.01~1.00Hz/ms
These settings are used when multi-function input terminals are set to 19/20. Refer to Pr.02-09 and
02-10 for the frequency up/down command.
Pr.02-09 set to 0: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the external terminal
UP/DOWN key as shown in the following diagram. In this mode, it also can be controlled by
UP/DOWN key on the digital keypad.
12-39
F requenc y
F requenc y c ommand
T ime UP Ml1~15
DOWN Ml1~15
External ter minal ON OFF
DCM
UP k ey VFD-C
Pr.02-09 set to 1: it will increase/decrease frequency command (F) by the setting of
acceleration/deceleration (Pr.01-12~01-19) and only be valid during operation.
Fr eq ue ncy
Fr eq ue ncy
co mman d
In cre ase d b y acce le ra tio n ti me

Ti me
Mu lti-fu ncti on
i np ut te rmina l
1 0 Fr eq ue ncy ON OFF
i ncr ea sed comma nd
Digital Input Response Time

Settings 0.000~30.000 sec
This parameter is used to set the response time of digital input terminals FWD, REV and MI1~MI8.
It is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time is confirmation
time to prevent some uncertain interference that would cause error in the input of the digital
terminals. Under this condition, confirmation for this parameter would improve effectively, but the
response time will be somewhat delayed.
Digital Input Operation Direction

Factory Setting: 0000
Settings 0000h~FFFFh（0:N.O. ; 1:N.C.）
The setting of this parameter is In hexadecimal.
This parameter is used to set the input signal level and it won’t be affected by the SINK/SOURCE
status.
Bit0 is for FWD terminal, bit1 is for REV terminal and bit2 to bit15 is for MI1 to MI14.
User can change terminal status by communicating.
For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1), MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + 2nd step speed command=1001(binary)=9 (Decimal). Only need
to set Pr.02-12=9 by communication and it can forward with 2nd step speed. It doesn’t need to wire
any multi-function terminal.
Bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI9 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
12-40
Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1)

Factory Setting: 11
Multi-function Output 2 (Relay2)
Factory Setting: 1
Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)
Output terminal of I/O extension card (MO10)
Output terminal of the I/O extension card (MO20)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Operation Indication
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-24)
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed, include STOP(Frequency command)
7: Over torque 1(Pr.06-06~06-08)
8: Over torque 2(Pr.06-09~06-11)
9: Drive is ready
10: Low voltage warning（LV）(Pr.06-00)
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release(Pr.02-32)
13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication(Pr.07-00)
15: PID feedback error
17: Terminal count value attained (Pr.02-20; not return to 0)
18: Preliminary count value attained (Pr.02-19; returns to 0)
19: Base Block
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
12-41
22: Over-current stall prevention warning

23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33 (>= 02-33)
28: Output when current <=Pr.02-33 (<= 02-33)
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34 (>= 02-34)
30: Output when frequency <= Pr.02-34 (<= 02-34)
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed include stop(actual output frequency)
39: Position attained (Pr.10-19)
40: Speed attained (including Stop)
41: Multi-position attained
42: Crane function
43: Actual motor speed slower than Pr.02-47
44: Low current output (Pr.06-71 to Pr.06-73)
45: UVW Output Electromagnetic valve On/Off Switch
46: Master dEb action output
47: Closed brake output
48: Reserved
49: Homing action complete
50: Output for CANopen control
51: Output for communication card
52: Output for RS485
53~62: Reserved
This parameter is used for setting the function of multi-function terminals.
Pr.02-36~Pr.02-41 requires additional extension cards to display the parameters, the choices of
optional cards are EMC-D42A and EMC-R6AA.
The optional card EMC-D42A provides 2 output terminals and can be used with Pr.02-36~02-37.
The optional card EMC-R6AA provides 6 output terminals and can be used with Pr.02-36~02-41.
Summary of function settings (Take the normally open contact for example, ON: contact is closed,
OFF: contact is open)
12-42

0 No Function
1 Operation Indication Active when the drive is not at STOP.
Master Frequency Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency
2
Attained setting.
Desired Frequency
3 Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-22) is attained.
Attained 1 (Pr.02-22)
Desired Frequency
4 Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-24) is attained.
Attained 2 (Pr.02-24)
Zero Speed (frequency Active when frequency command =0. (the drive should be at RUN
5
command) mode)
Zero Speed with Stop
6 Active when frequency command =0 or stop.
(frequency command)
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-07 (over-torque
7 Over Torque 1 detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-08 (over-torque detection
time-OT1). Refer to Pr.06-06~06-08.
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-10 (over-torque
8 Over Torque 2 detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-11 (over-torque detection
time-OT2). Refer to Pr.06-09~06-11.
9 Drive Ready Active when the drive is ON and no abnormality detected.
Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low. (refer to Pr.06-00 low
10 Low voltage warn (Lv)
voltage level)
11 Malfunction Indication Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
When drive runs after Pr.02-32, it will be ON. This function should
Mechanical Brake
12 be used with DC brake and it is recommended to use
Release (Pr.02-32)
contact ”b”(N.C).
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn off
13 Overheat
the drive. (refer to Pr.06-15)
Software Brake Signal
14 Active when the soft brake function is ON. (refer to Pr.07-00)
Indication
15 PID Feedback Error Active when the feedback signal is abnormal.
16 Slip Error (oSL) Active when the slip error is detected.
Terminal Count Value
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Counter Value
17 Attained (Pr.02-20; not
(Pr.02-19). This contact won’t active when Pr.02-20>Pr.02-19.
return to 0)
Preliminary Counter
Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Counter Value
18 Value Attained
(Pr.02-19).
(Pr.02-19; returns to 0)
External Base Block Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off during
19
input (B.B.) base block.
20 Warning Output Active when the warning is detected.
21 Over-voltage Warning Active when the over-voltage is detected.
Over-current Stall
22 Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.
Prevention Warning
Over-voltage Stall
23 Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
prevention Warning
Operation Mode Active when the operation command is controlled by external
24
Indication terminal. (Pr.00-20≠0)
25 Forward Command Active when the operation direction is forward.
26 Reverse Command Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Output when Current >=
27 Active when current is >= Pr.02-33.
Pr.02-33
Output when Current <=
28 Active when current is <= Pr.02-33
Pr.02-33
Output when frequency
29 Active when frequency is >= Pr.02-34.
>= Pr.02-34
Output when Frequency
30 Active when frequency is <= Pr.02-34.
<= Pr.02-34
Active when PR.05-24 is less than Pr.05-23 and time is more than
Y-connection for the
31 Pr.05-25.
Motor Coil
12-43


　-connection for the Active when PR.05-24 is higher than Pr.05-23 and time is more
32
Motor Coil than Pr.05-25.
Zero Speed (actual Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should be
33
output frequency) at RUN mode)
Zero Speed with Stop
34 Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop.
(actual output frequency)
Error Output Selection 1
35 Active when Pr.06-23 is ON.
(Pr.06-23)
(Pr.06-24)
(Pr.06-25)
(Pr.06-26)
Position Attained
39 Active when the PG position control point reaches Pr.10-19.
(Pr.10-19)
Speed Attained Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting or
40
(including zero speed) stop.
User can set any three multi-function input terminals to 41. The
current position action status of these three terminals will be
outputted. Example: if setting Pr.02-36~02-38 to 41 and only the
multi-position of the second point has been done. Therefore,
current status is RA (ON), RA (OFF) and MO1 (OFF). In this way,
their status is 010. Bit0 is RA and so on.
MO2 MO1 RY2 RY1
Pr.02-17=41 Pr.02-16=41 Pr.02-14=41 Pr.02-13=41
Pr.04-16 0 0 0 1
Pr.04-18 0 0 1 0
Pr.04-20 0 0 1 1
41 Multi-position Attained Pr.04-22 0 1 0 0
Pr.04-24 0 1 0 1
Pr.04-26 0 1 1 0
Pr.04-28 0 1 1 1
Pr.04-30 1 0 0 0
Pr.04-32 1 0 0 1
Pr.04-34 1 0 1 0
Pr.04-36 1 0 1 1
Pr.04-38 1 1 0 0
Pr.04-40 1 1 0 1
Pr.04-42 1 1 1 0
Pr.04-44 1 1 1 1
This function should be used with Pr.02-32, Pr.02-33, Pr.02-34,
Pr.02-57 and Pr.02-58.
Active when setting Pr.07-16=Pr.02-34 and Fcmd > Pr.02-34 and
42 Crane Function
output current > Pr.02-33 and Time > Pr.02-32.
The example of the crane application is in the following for your
reference.
Motor Zero-speed
43 Active when motor actual speed is less than Pr.02-47.
Output (Pr.02-47)
44 Low Current Output This function needs to be used with Pr.06-71 ~ Pr.06-73
1. Under FOCPG control mode, set MI=49 (drive enable) and
MO=45 (electromagnetic contractor On/Off swictch), then the
UVW Phase Magnet magnetic contractor will follow the drive status to be On or Off.
45 Contractor ON/ OFF
Switch 2. For brake control, set MO=12 (mechanical brake release),
Pr.02-31=T1 sec (mechanical brake delay time); then
enable/disable DC braking by set 07-01 (DC brake current) to any
12-44

level except 0 and set Pr.07-02 = T2 (DC brake time at start up)
and Pr.07-03 = T2 (DC brake current at stop). It is recommend to
set T2 >T1 and try to activate brake control during zero-speed
status.
MC
AC Driver
U(T1) Motor
V(T2)
IM
3~
W(T3)
MOx=45
MIx=49
When dEb arise at Master, MO will send a dEb signal to Slave. Then
46 Master dEb signal output Slave will follow Master’s command and decelerate to stop
simultaneously.
When drive stops, the corresponding multi-function terminal will
be ON if the frequency is less than Pr.02-34. After it is ON, it will
be OFF when brake delay time exceeds Pr.02-32.
Output Freq uency
Output Freq uency

< Pr.02-34
47 Brake Release at Stop
RUN RUN
M ulti-function
Output Tim e
02 -3 2
M O=d 47
48 Reserved
49 Homing Action Complete Output when homing action complete.
Output for CANopen
50 For CANopen communication output
control
Output for For communication output of communication cards
51
communication card (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-PN01 and CMC-DN01)
52 Output for RS-485 For RS-485 output
53~62 Reserved
12-45
Example: Crane Application

Output
Frequency
Freq. Co mman d>02-34 Freq. command<02 -58
& output cu rre nt >02 -33 or o utput current <02-57
multi-function ou tput
MO=42 (Active when
Fcom>=02 -34, outp ut
current>02-33 and time 02-32 02 -32
>02-32 )
It is recommended to be used with Dwell function as shown in the following:

Set 07-16=02-34and Set 07-18=02-34 and
output current >02-33 output current <02-57
07-18 Dwell Freq.

07-16 Dwell at Decel.
Freq.
at Accel.
Output Freq. 07-15 07-17
Dwell Time at Accel. Dwell Time atDecel.
Multi-function output
MO= 42
( Activate when 02-32
Fcmd >= 02-34 02-32 Brake Delay Time
output current > 02-33 Brake Delay Time
Time > 02-32)
Multi-function Output Direction

Settings 0000h~FFFFh（0:N.O. ; 1:N.C.）
The setting of this parameter is in hexadecimal.
This parameter is set via bit setting. If a bit is 1, the corresponding output acts in the opposite way.
Example:
If Pr02-13=1 and Pr02-18=0, Relay 1 is ON when the drive runs and is open when the drive is
stopped.
If Pr02-13=1 and Pr02-18=1, Relay 1 is open when the drive runs and is closed when the drive is
stopped.
Bit setting
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MO20 MO19 MO18 MO17 MO16 MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 MO2 MO1 Reserved RY2 RY1
Terminal Counting Value Attained (return to 0)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535
The counter trigger can be set by the multi-function terminal MI6 (set Pr.02-06 to 23). Upon
completion of counting, the specified output terminal will be activated (Pr.02-13~02-14, Pr.02-36,
02-37 is set to 18). Pr.02-19 can’t be set to 0.
12-46
When the display shows c5555, the drive has counted 5,555 times. If display shows c5555•, it
means that real counter value is between 55,550 to 55,559.
Preliminary Counting Value Attained (not return to 0)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535
When the counter value counts from 1 and reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal will be activated, provided one of Pr. 02-13, 02-14, 02-36, 02-37 set to 17
(Preliminary Count Value Setting). This parameter can be used for the end of the counting to make
the drive runs from the low speed to stop.
1.0 msec
Di spl ay valu e
[00 -04 =0 1]
TRG [02-06=23]
Counter Trigger
1.0msec
( output signal) Th e wi dth of trig ger si gnal
P reli min ary Cou nte r V al ue 02 -20=3
RY1 P r.0 2- 13=17
02 -13, 02- 14, 0 2-3 6, 02 -37
02 -19=5
Te rmi nal Co unter Valu e 02 -14= 1 7
RY 2 P r.0 2-14 =18
Digital Output Gain（DFM）

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1~166
It is used to set the signal for the digital output terminals (DFM-DCM) and digital frequency output
(pulse X work period=50%). Output pulse per second = output frequency X Pr.02-21.
Desired Frequency Attained 1

The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1
Desired Frequency Attained 2
The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2
Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-36, and 02-37), this multi-function output terminal will
be ON.
12-47
H
Fcmd=60Hz
42Hz
02-24=40Hz 40Hz
02-25=2Hz 38Hz
12Hz
02-22=10Hz 10Hz
02-23=2Hz 8Hz
T
02-13,02-14,
=3
02-36,02-37,
02-13,02-14,
02-36,02-37, =4
Brake Delay Time

When the AC motor drive runs after Pr.02-32 delay time, the corresponding multi-function output
terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON. It is recommended to use this function with DC
brake.
A
frequ ency
comma nd
07 -0 2 07 -0 3
DC b ra ke DC b ra ke
time du ri ng time du ring
start-u p B=A stopp ing
Outp ut DC b ra ke DC b ra ke
freq uen cy
RUN STOP
RUN/STOP
02-3 2 br ake de lay time
Multi -fu nctio n outp ut

(mechan ical brake rele ase)
Pr.0 2-11 to 0 2-14=d1 2 boun ce time of mechani cal brake
braked rele ase braked

Mechanical b ra ke Time
12-48
If this parameter is used without DC brake, it will be invalid. Refer to the following operation timing.
zero A ze ro
frequency speed sp eed
co mma nd
B=A
output
frequency
RUN STOP
RUN/STOP
Multi-function output
(mec hani cal brake
relea se)
Pr.02-11 to 02-14=d12
brake relea se brak e

me chanical brake Tim e
Output Current Level Setting for Multi-function Output Terminals

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100%
When output current is higher or equal to Pr.02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-16, and 02-17 is set to 27).
When output current is lower or equal to Pr.02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal
(Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-16, and 02-17 is set to 28).
Output Boundary for Multi-function Output Terminals

When output frequency is higher or equal to Pr.02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal
(Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 29).
When output frequency is lower or equal to Pr.02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal
(Pr.02-13, 02-14, 02-16, 02-17 is set to 30).
External Operation Control Selection after Reset and Activate

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Drive runs if the run command still exists after reset or re-boots.
Setting 1:
Status 1: After the drive is powered on and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON, the drive will
run.
Status 2: After clearing fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN keeps ON,
the drive can run after pressing RESET key.
12-49
Zero-speed Level of Motor

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535 rpm
This parameter should be used with the multi-function output terminals (set to 43). It needs to be
used with PG cared and motor with encoder feedback.
This parameter is used to set the level of motor zero-speed. When the actual speed is lower than
this setting, the corresponding multi-function output terminal 43 will be ON as shown as follows.
a ctua l mo tor
sp ee d
0 2-47
MO =d 43
Ti me
Max. Frequency of Resolution Switch

Switch the delay time of Max. output frequency
It is used to improve the unstable speed or unstable position due to the insufficient of analog
resolution. It needs to be used with external terminal (set to 43). After setting this parameter, it
needs to adjust the analog output resolution of controller simultaneously by this setting.
AUI +10V
Acc el./ Decel. time
01-12~01-19
AUI 0V
Max. output frequency
Max. output frequency
01-00
AUI - 10V 01-00
F requenc y
command
Output
Resolution switch Resolution switch
frequency
0Hz frequency frequency
Delay t ime f or max . Delay time for max .
10-25 10-25
frequency switch frequency swit ch
Resolut ion ON
10-24 10-24
switch
MI=43
F or war d r unni ng Revers e running
12-50
Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal

Weights 15
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
2 2 2
6 5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F WD
R EV
0 =O n
MI1
1 =O ff
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI1 0
MI11
MI1 2 F or
MI1 3 opt ion
MI1 4 car d
MI1 5
For Example:
If Pr.02-50 displays 0034h (Hex), i.e. the value is 52, and 110100 (binary). It means MI1, MI3 and
MI4 are active.
Weights 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 0=O N
Bit 1 1 0 1 0 0 MI1 1=O FF
MI2 Settings
5 4 2
MI3 = bit5x 2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2
5 4 2
MI4 = 1x2 +1x2 + 1x2
=32+16+4 =52 NO TE
MI5 5 4 3 2
2 =32 2 =1 6 2 =8 2 =4
1 0
MI6 2 =2 2 =1
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal

For Example:
If Pr.02-51 displays 000Bh (Hex), i.e. the value is 11, and 1011 (binary). It means RY1, RY2 and
MO1 are ON.
W eights 2 15 2 14 2 13
2 12
2 11
2 10
2 9
2 8 27 26 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
20 2
B it 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Relay 1
0=ON
1=OFF Relay 2
Reserved
MO1
MO2
MO10
MO11
MO12
MO13
MO14 For
MO15 option
MO16 card NOT E
MO17 7 6
2 =128 2 =64
MO18 5 4 3
2 =32 2 =16 2 =8
MO19 2 1 0
2 =4 2 =2 2 =1
MO20
12-51
Display External Output terminal occupied by PLC

P.02-52 shows the external multi-function input terminal that used by PLC.
Weights 2 2 2 2 2 2
15 14 13 12 11 10
2 2
9 8
2
7
2 2
6 5
2
4
2 2
3 2
2
1
2
0
B it 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FWD
REV
0=ON MI1
1=OFF MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI10
MI11
MI12 For option
MI13 card
MI14
MI15
For Example:
When Pr.02-52 displays 0034h(hex) and switching to 110100 (binary), it means MI1, MI3 and MI4
are used by PLC.
Weights 2 2 2 2
11 10 9 8
2
7
2 2 2
6 5 4
2 2
3 2
2
1
2
0 0: not used by P LC
Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1: used by PL C
MI1
Displays
MI2 5 4 2
= bit5x 2 +bit4x2 +bit2x2
MI3 5 4 2
= 1x2 +1x2 + 1x 2
MI4 =32+16+4 =52
MI5
MI6
NOTE
MI7 14 13 12
2 =1638 4 2 =81 92 2 =40 96
MI8 11 10 9
2 =2048 2 =10 24 2 =51 2
MI10 8 7 6
2 =2 56 2 =1 28 2 =64
MI11 5 4 3 2
2 =3 22 =16 2 =8 2 =4
MI12 1 0
MI13 2 =2 2 =1
12-52
Display Analog Input Terminal occupied by PLC

P.02-53 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
0=O N
Weights 2
15
2
14
2
13
2
12
2
11
2
10
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1=O FF
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Relay 1
Relay 2
R ese rved
MO1
MO2
MO1 0
MO1 1
MO1 2
MO1 3
MO1 4 Fo r o p tio n
MO1 5 card
MO1 6
MO1 7
MO1 8
MO1 9
MO2 0
NO TE
7 6
2 =1 28 2 =6 4
5 3
2 =3 2 2 =1 6 2 =8
2 1 0
2 =4 2 =2 2 =1
For Example:
If the value of Pr.02-53 displays 0003h (Hex), it means RY1and RY2 are used by PLC.
0=NOT used by P LC
1=Used by PLC
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Weights
Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 R el ay 1
R el ay 2
R ese rve d
MO1
MO2
D isp la y va lu e
MO3 3 =2+1
MO4 =1x2 +1x2
1 0
=bi t 1x2 +b i t 0 x2
1 0
MO5
Display the Frequency Command Executed by External Terminal

Settings Read only
When the source of frequency command comes from the external terminal, if Lv or Fault occurs at
this time, the frequency command of the external terminal will be saved in this parameter.
Reserved
12-53
Reserved
Multi-function output terminal: Function 42: Brake Current Checking Point

Factory setting: 0
Settings 0~150%
Multi-function output terminal: Function 42: Brake Frequency Checking Point
Factory setting：0.00
Pr02-32, Pr02-33, Pr02-34, Pr02-57 and Pr02-58 can be applied on setting up cranes. (Choose
crane action #42 to set up multi-functional output Pr02-13, Pr02-14, Pr02-16, and Pr02-17)
When output current of a drive is higher than the the setting of Pr02-33 Pivot Point of the Current
(>=02-33) and when output frequency is higher than the the setting of Pr02-34 Pivot Point of the
Frequency (>= 02-34), choose #42 to set up Multi-functional output Pr02-13, Pr02-14, Pr02-16
and Pr002-17 after the delay time set at Pr402-32.
When the Pivot Point of the Current 's setting 02-57≠0 and when the output current of the drive is
lower than the setting of Pr02-57 (<02-57), or when the output frequency is lower than the setting
of Pr02-58 (<02-58), the disable the setting #42 of the multi-functional output Pr02-13, Pr02-14,
Pr02-16, Pr02-17
When Pr02-57 = 0, the output current is lower than setting of Pr02-33 Pivot Point of the
Current(<02-33) or when output frequency is lower than the setting of Pr02-58(<02-58), disable
the setting of #42 of the multi-functional output Pr02-13, Pr02-14, Pr02-16, Pr02-17.
12-54
03 Analog Input/Output Parameter This parameter can be set during operation.
Analog Input Selection (AVI)

Factory Setting: 1
Analog Input Selection (ACI)
Factory Setting: 0
Analog Input Selection (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Frequency command (torque limit under torque control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: PTC thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: PT100 thermistor input value
12~17: Reserved
When it is frequency command or TQC speed limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is
0 – max. output frequency(Pr.01-00)
When it is torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – max.
output torque (Pr.11-27).
When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – rated torque.
Positive torque
03-00~02=7
03-00~02=9 Positive torque limit
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit
Reverse Forward
03-00~02=10
Positive/negative torque limit 03-00~02=9
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=8
Negative torque limit
Negative Torque
Analog Input Bias (AVI)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~100.0%
12-55

It is used to set the corresponding AVI voltage of the external analog input 0.
Analog Input Bias (ACI)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.
Analog Voltage Input Bias (AUI)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AUI voltage of the external analog input 0.
The relation between external input voltage/current and setting frequency: 0~10V (4-20mA)
corresponds to 0-60Hz.
Reserved
Positive/negative Bias Mode (AVI)

Positive/negative Bias Mode (ACI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Zero bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is
recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operation frequency.
In the diagram below: Black color line: Frequency. Gray color line: Voltage
Frequency
Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz
Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
54Hz
0: No bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias volt age
while serving as the cent er
4: Serve bias as the cent er
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative frequency is not valid.
F orw ard and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forward run; negat ive
f requency = reverse run. Direct ion
can not be switched by digit al keypad or
external t eriminal control.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI)= 100%
12-56

Frequency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: N o bias
1: Lower than or equal t o bias
2: Greater than or equal t o bias
3: T he absolute value of the bias voltage
while serving as the center
6Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digit al keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = forward run; negative
frequency = reverse run. Direction
can not be sw itched by digit al keypad or
ext ernal teriminal cont rol.
Pr.03-11Analog I nput Gain (AVI)=100%
Frequency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)
54Hz 0: N o bias
6Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
F orward and reverse run is controlled
by digital keypad or ext ernal terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
f requency = forw ard run; negat ive
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 100%
Pr. 03-03=10%
Frequency
Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
60Hz
54Hz 0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal to bias
2: Great er t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of the bias volt age
while serving as t he cent er
4: Serve bias as t he cent er
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative frequency is not valid.
f requency = f orward run; negat ive
can not be swit ched by digital keypad or
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI) = 100%
12-57

Pr. 03-03=10%
F requency
60Hz 0: No bias
54Hz 1: Low er t han or equal to bias
2: Greater t han or equal to bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias volt age
Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)

-V V 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
by digit al keypad or ext ernal t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Posit ive
frequency = f orward run; negat ive
frequency = reverse run. Direct ion
F requency Pr.03-03=10%
60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)

0: No bias
1: Low er t han or equal t o bias
while serving as t he center
6Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
F orw ard and reverse run is cont rolled
Pr. 03-11Analog Input Gain (AVI )= 100%
54Hz
0: No bias
3: T he absolute value of t he bias voltage
6Hz
-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
by digital keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagt ive frequency is valid. Positive
f requency = forward run; negative
f requency = reverse run. Direction
ext ernal t eriminal cont rol.
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 100%
12-58

54Hz 0: No bias
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)

-6Hz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
by digital keypad or external t erminal.
can not be sw itched by digital keypad or
Pr.03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 100%
F requency Pr.03-03=-10%
0: No bias
6Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Forward and reverse run is controlled
1: Neagt ive f requency is valid. Posit ive
F requency Pr. 03-03=-10%

60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
1: Lower t han or equal t o bias
2: Greater t han or equal t o bias
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
by digit al keypad or external t erminal.
1: Neagtive f requency is valid. Positive
frequency = f orward run; negative
12-59


0: No bias
2: Great er t han or equal t o bias
3: T he absolut e value of t he bias voltage
4: Serve bias as t he center
6Hz
frequency = reverse run. D irection
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 100%

0: No bias
6Hz
0: N o bias
6Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12-60


0: No bias

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0: Negative f requency is not valid.
Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI )= 100%

0: No bias
6Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog Frequency Command f or Reverse R un)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
6Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
can not be switched by digital keypad or
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 100%
12-61


0: No bias
-V V Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse R un)

Pr. 03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI )= 1 11. 1%
10/ 9=111.1%
0: No bias

-V V
F orw ard and reverse run is cont rolled
Pr. 03-11Analog Input Gain (AVI )=111.1%
10/9 =111.1%
0: No bias
6.66Hz
-V V Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI ) = 111.1%
10/ 9 =111. 1%
12-62

F requency Pr. 03-03=10%

60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/ Negative Bias Mode)
0: No bias
3: The absolut e value of t he bias voltage

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
frequency = reverse run. D irect ion
Pr.03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/ 9 =111. 1%
0: No bias
2: Great er than or equal to bias
w hile serving as t he cent er
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)
-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
1: N eagt ive frequency is valid. Posit ive
external t eriminal cont rol.
Pr03-11 Analog Input Gain (AVI ) = 111. 1%
10/9 =111.1%
0: No bias
6.66Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
Pr03-11Analog I nput Gain (AVI ) = 111.1%
10/ 9 =111. 1%
12-63


0: No bias
6.66Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
Pr03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 111.1%
10/9 =111.1%

0: No bias

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative f requency is not valid.
-6.66Hz
Pr03-11 Analog I nput Gain (AVI) = 100%
10/ 9 =111. 1%
F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negat ive Bias Mode)

0: N o bias
60Hz
4: Serve bias as the cent er
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
6Hz
-V V F orward and reverse run is controlled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz XV＝ 10 ＝1.11V
10V XV 9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10
Calculate the gain: Pr.03-11＝ 10V × 100%＝90.0％
11.1V
12-64

F requency Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negative Bias Mode)

60Hz
0: No bias
Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency C ommand for Reverse Run)
-V V F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ext ernal teriminal control.
10V XV 9
1.11
Pr.03-03＝ × 100％
10
11.1V

0: No bias
60Hz
Pr. 03-10 (Analog F requency C ommand for Reverse Run)
6Hz 0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
-V V F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10V XV 9
1.11
Pr.03-03＝ × 100％
10
11.1V

0: No bias
60Hz
1: Low er t han or equal to bias

6Hz 0: Negative frequency is not valid.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz XV＝
10
＝1.11V
10V XV 9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10
11.1V
12-65

F requency Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/ Negative Bias Mode)

60Hz 0: No bias
6Hz
Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command for Reverse Run)
-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F orward and reverse run is cont rolled
by digital keypad or external t erminal.
can not be sw itched by digital keypad or
10V XV 9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10

11.1V

60Hz 0: No bias

-V V
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 F orward and reverse run is cont rolled

10V XV 9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10
11.1V

0: No bias
60Hz

6Hz
0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Calculate the bias: 60-6Hz ＝ 6-0Hz XV＝

10
＝1.11V
10V XV 9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10
11.1V
12-66


0: No bias
60Hz

6Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

10V XV 9
Pr.03-03＝ 1.11 × 100％
10
11.1V
Pr.00-21=0 (D gital keypad control and d run in F WD direct ion)

F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Positive/N egat ive Bias Mode)

54Hz 0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz can not be switched by digit al keypad or
Pr. 00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Dgital keypad control and d run in F WD direct ion)

60Hz Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/N egat ive Bias Mode)
0: No bias
2: Great er t han or equal t o bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz can not be switched by digit al keypad or
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negative I nput Gain (AUI )= 100%
12-67

Pr.00-21=0 (Dgit al keypad control and d run in F WD direction)

F requency
Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
54Hz 0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-V V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or Reverse Run)
f requency = forw ard run; negative
60Hz
Pr. 00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Dgit al keypad control and d run in F WD direct ion)

F requency
Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz
54Hz
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4: Serve bias as t he cent er
-V V
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive I nput Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negat ive Input Gain (AU I)= 100%
F requency Pr. 00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direct ion )
Pr. 03-05 Analog Positive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI ) = 10%
60Hz
54Hz
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz external teriminal control.
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negative I nput Gain (AUI )= 100%
12-68

Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad cont rol and run in F WD direct ion)

F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Positive Volt age Input Bias (AUI ) = 10%
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (D igit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion)

60Hz Pr. 03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/Negat ive Bias Mode)
54Hz 0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive I nput Gain (AUI )= 100%
Pr.03-14 Analog N egat ive Input Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion)

Pr.03-07~03-09 (Posit ive/N egat ive Bias Mode)
60Hz
0: No bias
54Hz
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)

-V V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive f requency is not valid.
60Hz
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive I nput Gain (AUI)= 100%
Pr. 03-14 Analog Negat ive I nput Gain (AUI)= 100%
12-69

F requency Pr. 00-21=0 (Digital keypad control and run in F WD direct ion )
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negat ive frequency is not valid.
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Positive I nput Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive Input Gain (AUI) = 100%
Pr. 00-21=0 (Digital keypad cont rol and run in F WD direction )

F requency
Pr. 03-05 Analog Positive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI) = 10%
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ext ernal teriminal control.
60Hz
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
F requency Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad cont rol and run in F WD direct ion )
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI)= 111. 1%
(10/ 9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive Input Gain (AU I) = 100%
12-70

Pr.00-21=0 (Digit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion )

F requency Pr.03-05 Analog Posit ive Volt age Input Bias (AU I) = 10%
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive I nput Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-21=0 (D igit al keypad cont rol and run in F WD direction)

60Hz
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pr.03-10 (Analog F requency Command f or R everse Run)

-V V 0: N egat ive frequency is not valid.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1: N eagt ive frequency is valid. Positive
external t eriminal cont rol.
60Hz
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive I nput Gain (AUI) = 90. 9%
(10/11) *100% = 90. 9%
Pr.00-21=0 (D igital keypad cont rol and run in F WD direction)

F requency Pr. 03-05 Analog Positive Voltage Input Bias (AUI) = 10%
0: No bias
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
60Hz
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr. 00-14 Analog Negative I nput Gain (AUI ) = 90. 9%
(10/11) *100% = 90.9%
12-71

Pr. 00-21=0 (D igit al keypad control and run in F WD direct ion)

F requency
Pr. 03-05 Analog Posit ive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI ) = 10%
0: No bias
-V V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0: Negative frequency is not valid.
60Hz
Pr. 00-13 Analog Positive I nput Gain (AUI )= 111.1%
(10/9) *100% = 111. 1%
Pr.00-14 Analog Negat ive I nput Gain (AUI) = 90. 9%
(10/11) *100% = 90. 9%
Pr.00-21=0 (D igital keypad cont rol and run in F WD direction)

F requency Pr. 03-05 Analog Positive Voltage I nput Bias (AUI) = 10%
0: No bias
3: The absolut e value of t he bias voltage
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
60Hz
Pr.00-13 Analog Posit ive Input Gain (AUI)= 111. 1%
(10/ 9) *100% = 111.1%
Pr. 00-14 Analog Negative Input Gain (AU I) = 90.9%
(10/ 11) *100% = 90.9%
Analog Frequency Command for Reverse Run

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Negative frequency is not valid. Forward and reverse run is controlled by digital
keypad or external terminal.
1: Neagtive frequency is valid. Positive frequency = forward run; negative frequency =
reverse run. Run direction can not be switched by digital keypad or the external
teriminal control.
Parameter 03-10 is used to enable reverse run command when a negative frequency (negative
bias and gain) is input to AVI or ACI anaglog signal input.
Analog Input Gain (AVI)

Analog Input Gain (ACI)
Analog Positive Input Gain (AUI)
Analog Negative Input Gain (AUI)
12-72


Settings -500.0~500.0%
Parameters 03-03 to 03-14 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog
voltage/current signal.
Analog Input Filter Time (AVI)

Analog Input Filter Time (ACI)
Analog Input Filter Time (AUI)
These input delays can be used to filter noisy analog signal.
When the setting of the time constant is too large, the control will be stable but the control response
will be slow. When the setting of time constant is too small, the control response will be faster but
the control may be unstable. To find the optimal setting, please adjust the setting according to the
control stable or response status.
Addition Function of the Analog Input

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable (AVI, ACI, AUI)
1: Enable
When Pr.03-18 is set to 0 and the analog input setting is the same, the priority for AVI, ACI and AUI
are AVI>ACI>AUI.
Frequ ency
Fco mmand= [( ay bias) *gain] * F max(01- 00)

10V or 16mA
Fcomma nd: the co rr esponding
frequen cy for 10V or 20mA
ay : 10 or 16mA
bias : Pr.03-03,Pr . 03-04, Pr .0 3-05
gain : Pr.03 -11 , Pr .03-12, Pr. 03- 13, Pr.0 3-14
Voltage
Treatment to 4-20mA Analog Input Signal Loss

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to stop
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
This parameter determines the behavior when 4~20mA signal is loss, when AVIc(Pr.03-28=2) or
ACIc (03-29=0).
When Pr.03-28 is not set to 2, it means the voltage input to AVI terminal is 0-10V or 0-20mA. At this
moment, Pr.03-19 will be invalid.
When Pr.03-29 is set to 1, it means the voltage input to ACI terminal is for 0-10V. At this moment,
Pr.03-19 will be invalid.
When setting is 1 or 2, it will display warning code “AnL” on the keypad. It will be blinking until the
12-73

loss of the ACI signal is recovered or drive is stop.
Multi-function Output 1 (AFM1)

Factory Setting: 0
Multi-function Output 2 (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~23
Function Chart
0 Output frequency (Hz) Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
1 Frequency command (Hz) Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
2 Motor speed (Hz) 600Hz is regarded as 100%
3 Output current (rms) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
4 Output voltage (2 X rated voltage) is regarded as 100%
5 DC Bus Voltage 450V (900V)=100%
6 Power factor -1.000~1.000=100%
7 Power Rated power is regarded as 100%
8 Output torque Full-load torque is regarded as 100%
9 AVI 0~10V=0~100%
10 ACI 0~20mA=0~100%
11 AUI -10~10V=0~100%
12 q-axis current (Iq) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
13 q-axis feedback value (Iq) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
14 d-axis current (Id) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
15 d-axis feedback value (Id) (2.5 X rated current) is regarded as 100%
16 q-axis voltage (Vq) 250V (500V) =100%
17 d-axis voltage(Vd) 250V (500V) =100%
18 Torque command Rated torque is regarded as 100%
19 PG2 frequency command Max. frequency Pr.01-00 is regarded as 100%.
20 Output for CANopen control For CANopen analog output
For communication output (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01,
21 RS485 analog output
CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
Analog output for For communication output (CMC-MOD01, CMC-EIP01,
22
communication card CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
Pr.03-32 and Pr.03-33 controls voltage/current output
23 Constant voltage/current output level
0~100% of Pr.03-32 corresponds to 0~10V of AFM1.
Gain of Analog Output 1 (AFM1)

Gain of Analog Output 2 (AFM2)
12-74

Settings 0~500.0%
It is used to adjust the analog voltage level (Pr.03-20) that terminal AFM outputs.
This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0.
Analog Output 1 when in REV Direction (AFM1)

Factory Setting: 0
Analog Output 2 when in REV Direction (AFM2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Absolute value in REV direction
1: Output 0V in REV direction; output 0-10V in FWD direction
2: Output 5-0V in REV direction; output 5-10V in FWD direction
10V( 20mA) 10V( 20mA) 10V( 20mA)
03-18
03-21
0V 03-24 0V F requenc y 5V F requenc y
( 0mA) ( 0mA) ( 12mA)
03-22=0 03-22=1 03-22=2

03-25=0 03-25=1 03-25=2
Selections for the analog output dir ec ti on
Reserved
AFM2 Output Bias

Settings -100.00~100.00%
Example 1, AFM2 0-10V is set output frequency, the output equation is
Output Frequency
10V × ( ) × 03 - 24 + 10V × 03 - 27
01 - 00
Example 2, AFM2 0-20mA is set output frequency, the output equation is
Output Frequency
20mA × ( ) × 03 - 24 + 20mA × 03 - 27
01 - 00
Example 3, AFM2 4-20mA is set output frequency, the output equation is
Output Frequency
4mA + 16mA × ( ) × 03 - 24 + 16mA × 03 - 27
01 - 00
AVI Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 0-10V
1: 0-20mA
2: 4-20mA
12-75

ACI Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 4-20mA
1: 0-10V
2: 0-20mA
When changing the input mode, please check if the switch of external terminal (SW3, SW4)
corresponds to the setting of Pr.03-28~03-29.
Status of PLC Output Terminal

Factory Setting: ##
Settings 0~65535
Monitor the status of PLC analog output terminals
P.03-30 shows the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
0=O N
1=O FF
Weights 2
15
2
14
2
13
2
12
2
11
2
10
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AFM 1
AFM 2
NO TE
7 6
2 =1 28 2 =6 4
5 4 3
2 =3 2 2 =1 6 2 =8
2 1 0
2 =4 2 =2 2 =1
For Example:
If the value of Pr.02-30 displays 0002h(Hex), it means AFM1and AFM2 are used by PLC.
0 =N o t use d b y PL C
1 =U se d by PL C
We ig h t s 2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
B it 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 AFM 1
AFM 2
D is p la y va lu e
1 0
2 = 1x2 + 0 x2
= bi t 1x2 + bi t 0 x2
1 0
AFM2 0-20mA Output Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 0-20mA output
1: 4-20mA output
AFM1 DC output setting level

AFM2 DC Output Setting Level
Settings 0.00~100.00%
12-76

~ Reserve
Analog Input Curve Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Regular Curve
1: 3 point curve of AVI
2: 3 point curve of ACI
3: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI
4: 3 point curve of AUI
5: 3 point curve of AVI & AUI
6: 3 point curve of ACI & AUI
7: 3 point curve of AVI & ACI & AUI
AVI Low Point

Settings 03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional Low Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
AVI Mid Point
Settings 03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional Mid Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
AVI High Point
Settings 03-28=0, 0.00~10.00V
03-28≠0, 0.00~20.00mA
AVI Proportional High Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
When Pr.03-28 = 0, AVI setting is 0-10V and the unit is in voltage (V).
When Pr.03-28 ≠ 0, AVI setting is 0-20mA or 4-20mA and the unit is in current (mA).
When setting anaolog input AVI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency).
Three of the AVI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage(current) and proportion,
12-77

there is no setting limit for ACI points.
ACI Low Point

Settings Pr.03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
Pr.03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional Low Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
ACI Mid Point
Settings 03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional Mid Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
ACI High Point
Settings 03-29=1, 0.00~10.00V
03-29≠1, 0.00~20.00mA
ACI Proportional High Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
When Pr.03-29=1, ACI setting is 0-10V and the unit is in voltage (V).
When Pr.03-29≠1, ACI setting is 0-20mA or 4-20mA and the unit is in current (mA).
When setting anaolog input ACI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency).
Three of the ACI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage(current) and proportion,
there is no setting limit for ACI points.
Positive AUI Voltage Low Point

Settings 0.00~10.00V
Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Low Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
Positive AUI Voltage Mid Point
Positive AUI Voltage Proportional Mid Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
12-78

Positive AUI Voltage High Point

Positive AUI Voltage Proportional High Point
Settings 0.00~100.00%
When setting positive voltage AUI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency) and the motor runs in forward direction.
Three of the positive voltage AUI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage and
proportion, there is no setting limit for AUI points.
Negative AUI Voltage Low Point

Settings 0.00~-10.00V
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Low Point
Settings 0.00~-100.00%
Negative AUI Voltage Mid Point
Factory Setting: -5.00
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional Mid Point
Settings 0.00~-100.00%
Negative AUI Voltage High Point
Negative AUI Voltage Proportional High Point
Settings 0.00~-100.00%
When setting negative voltage AUI to frequency command, it 100% corresponds to Fmax (Pr.01-00
Max. operation frequency) and the motor runs in reverse direction.
Three of the negative voltage AUI points can be set according to user’s demand on voltage and
proportion, there is no setting limit for AUI points.
12-79

04 Multi-Step Speed Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.

1st Step Speed Frequency
2nd Step Speed Frequency
3rd Step Speed Frequency
4th Step Speed Frequency
The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to setting 1~4 of Pr.02-01~02-08 and 02-26~02-31) are
used to select one of the AC motor drive Multi-step speeds(max. 15 speeds). The speeds
(frequencies) are determined by Pr.04-00 to 04-14 as shown in the following.
The run/stop command can be controlled by the external terminal/digital keypad/communication via
Pr.00-21.
Each one of multi-step speeds can be set within 0.0~600.0Hz during operation.
Explanation for the timing diagram for multi-step speeds and external terminals
The Related parameter settings are:
1. Pr.04-00~04-14: setting multi-step speeds (to set the frequency of each step speed)
2. Pr.02-01~02-08, 02-26~02-31: setting multi-function input terminals (multi-step speed 1~4)
Related parameters: 01-22 JOG Frequency, 02-01 Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1),
02-02 Multi-function Input Command 2 (MI2), 02-03 Multi-function Input Command 3 (MI3),
02-04 Multi-function Input Command 4 (MI4)
12-80

04-07
F re que nc y
04-06
04-08
04-05
04-09
04-04
04-10
04-03
04-11
04-02
04-12 J OG F req.
04-01 01-22
04-13
04-00
04-14
Master Spee d
Run/ Sto p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PU/ ext ernal t erminals
/commu ni cat ion ON
1s t spee d
Mul ti -functi on
OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
02-0 1~02-08
2nd sp eed OFF ON ON ON ON

term inals
MI1~MI4
3rd spe ed OFF ON ON

4t h s peed OFF ON
Jog Freq. OFF ON
Mu lt i- speed via Ex te rnal Te rmin als
Position command 1 (pulse)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings -32767~32767
Please refer to Pr.02-01~02-08 (Multi-function Input Command) for description on setting 34
(Switch between multi-step position and multi-speed control) and setting 36 (Enable multi-step
position learning function).
Multi-step position corresponding MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 Multi-step speed corresponding
10-19 0 0 0 0 Positioning for Encoder Position
04-16 Position command 1 (pulse) 0 0 0 1 04-00 1st step speed frequency
04-18 Position command 1 (pulse) 0 0 1 0 04-01 2nd step speed frequency
04-20 Position command 1 (pulse) 0 0 1 1 04-02 3rd step speed frequency
12-81

04-22 Position command 1 (pulse) 0 1 0 0 04-03 4th step speed frequency

Position command 1 (revolution)

To switch the target position of the external terminal, set external terminal parameters to
Pr.02-01=1, Pr.02-02=2, Pr.02-03=3, Pr.02-04= 4 by selecting the P2P target position via multi-step
speed.
Setting: Target Position = 04-15 × (10-01*4) + 04-16
Multi-step
Target Position of P2P Maximum Speed of P2P
Speed Status
0000 0 11-00 bit8=0 11-00 bit8=1
0001 Position 1 04-15 04-16 11-43 04-00
0010 Position 2 04-17 04-18 04-01
0011 Position 3 04-19 04-20 04-02
0100 Position 4 04-21 04-22 04-03
0101 Position 5 04-23 04-24 04-04
0110 Position 6 04-25 04-26 04-05
0111 Position 7 04-27 04-28 04-06
1000 Position 8 04-29 04-30 11-43 04-07
12-82

Multi-step
Target Position of P2P Maximum Speed of P2P
Speed Status
1001 Position 9 04-31 04-32 04-08
1010 Position 10 04-33 04-34 04-09
1011 Position 11 04-35 04-36 04-10
1100 Position 12 04-37 04-38 04-11
1101 Position 13 04-39 04-40 04-12
1110 Position 14 04-41 04-42 04-13
1111 Position 15 04-43 04-44 04-14
12-83

05 Motor Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.
Motor Auto Tuning

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: No function
1: Rolling test for induction motor (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
2: Rolling test for induction motor
3: No function
4: Rolling test for PM motor magnetic pole
5: Rolling test for PM motor
6: Rolling test for IM motor flux curve
12: FOC Sensorless inertia estimation
13: High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor parameter
Induction Motor
Press 【Run】to beging auto tuning. The measured value will be written into motor 1 (Pr.05-05
~05-09, Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current) and motor 2 (Pr.05-17 to Pr.05-21) automatically.
To begin AUTO-Tuning in rolling test:

1. Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is correct.
2. Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not connected
to any belt or gear motor. It is recommended to set to 2 if the motor can’t separate from the
load.
3.
Motor 1 Parameter Motor 2 Parameter
Motor Rated Frequency 01-01 01-35
Motor Rated Voltage 01-02 01-36
Motor Full-load Current 05-01 05-13
Motor Rated Power 05-02 05-14
Motor Rated Speed 05-03 05-15
Motor Pole Numbers 05-04 05-16
4. Set Pr.05-00=1 and press【Run】, the drive will begin auto-tuning. Please be aware of the
motor that it starts spinning as【Run】 is pressed.
5. When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the measured values are written into motor 1
(Pr.05-05 ~05-09) and motor 2 (Pr.05-17 ~05-21) automatically.
6. Mechanical equivalent circuit
Rs
I Lx
P r.0 5- 09
P r.0 5- 06
P r.0 5- 21
P r.0 5- 18
VS Lm Rr
P r.0 5- 08 P r.0 5- 07
P r.0 5- 20 P r.0 5- 19
※ If Pr.05-00 is set to 2 (static test), user needs to input the no-load current value of motor
into Pr.05-05 for motor 1/Pr.05-17 for motor 2.
12-84

Set Pr.05-00=6 to begin rolling test for IM motor flux curve. This function is available
when the drive is in FOC/TQC Sensorless control. User may begin auto-tuning after
setting up the motor information.
; Set up Pr.01-01, 01-02, 05-01~05-04 according to the motor nameplate information。

; Set Pr.05-00=6 and press【Run】, make sure no loading is applied to the motor
before setting Pr.05-00 to 6 and before performing auto-tuning.
When Pr.05-00=12, the drive begins FOC Sensorless inertia estimation for IM motor. This
function is available when the drive is in FOC/TQC Sensorless control. User may begin
auto-tuning after setting up the motor information.
; Note: Make sure the motor parameters (no-load current, Rs, Rr, Lm and Lx) of the
drive are set before performing Pr.05-00=12 (auto-tuningfor FOC Sensorless interia
estimation for IM motor).
1. Set Pr.00-10=2 (torque mode)

2. Set Pr. 00-13=2 (TQCPG, Open-loop torque mode)
3. Set Pr. 05-00=12 and press【Run】to begin FOC Sensorless inertia measure
4. When the process of inertia estimation is completed, check Pr.11-01 (unit: PU Q8) and
see if the measured value is acceptable.
Set up Sensorless FOC Mode
1. Set Pr.00-10 = 0 (speed mode)
2. Set Pr.00-11 = 5 (FOC sensorless mode)
3. Set bit0 of Pr.11-00 to 1 (use ASR gain function to automatically adjust the ASR
bandwidth in Pr.11-03,11-04,11-05)
NOTE
; In torque/vector control mode, it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.
; It is not recommended to use torque/vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds
the rated power of the AC motor drive.
; When auto-tuning 2 motors, it needs to set multi-function input terminals (setting 14) or
change Pr.05-22 for motor 1/motor 2 selection.
; The no-load current is usually 20~50% X rated current.
; The rated speed can not be greater than or equal to 120f/p (f = rated frequency
Pr.01-01/01-35; P: number of motor poles Pr.05-04/05-16).
Permanent Magnet Motor (PM)
Set Pr.05-00= 5 or 13 and press 【Run】 to begin auto tuning for PM motor. The
measured values will be written into Pr.05-39（Rs）, Pr.05-40 & 41（Ld & Lq） and
Pr.05-43（PM motor＇s Ke parameter）.
To begin AUTO-Tuning for PM motor in rolling test:
1. Make sure all the parameters are reset to factory setting and the motor wiring installtion is
12-85

correct.
2. For PM motor, set Pr.05-33=1 and complete the following settings according to your motor
specifications, Pr.05-34 rated current, Pr.05-35 rated power, Pr.05-36 rated speed and Pr.
05-37 pole number. The acceleration time and deceleration time should be set according to
your motor capacity.
3. Set Pr.05-00 to 5 and press 【Run】 to begin auto tuning for PM motor. Please be aware of
the motor that it starts spinning as【Run】 is pressed.
4. When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the measured values are written into
Pr.05-39~05-41 and Pr.05-43 automatically.
Set Pr.05-00=4 and press【Run】to begin auto-tuning for PM motor PG offset angle. The
measured value will be written into Pr.05-42 automatically.
; Note 1: When execute auto-tuning for PM motor PG origin, please make sure the
encoder setting are correct (Pr.10-00, 10-01, 10-02), otherwise the PG origin measure
error and motor stall may occur.
; Note 2: If PM motor runs in an opposite direction of the drive’s command, switch any
two of the UVW cable and re-connect, then execute PG origin search again. It is crucial
to execute auto-tuning after the switch otherwise PG origin measure error and motor
stall may occur.
Auto-tuning process for measuring PG offset angle of PM motor:
1. Set Pr.05-00=5 and press RUN, or manually input the values into Pr. 01-01, 05-34~-541 and
Pr.05-43.
2. It is strongly suggested to remove the motor and unload before beings auto-tuning.
3. Set Pr.05-00=4 and press【Run】 to begin auto-tuning. Please be aware of the motor that it
starts spinning as 【Run】is pressed.
4. When auto-tuning is completed, please check if the PG offset angle is written into Pr.05-42
automatically.
NOTE
When auto-tuning for PM motor is completed and the control mode setting is done, it is
recommend to turn the drive’s power off and restart again to ensure the drive operates according
to the motor parameter settings.
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 1（A）

Unit: Amper
Factory Setting: #.##
Settings 10 to 120% of drive’s rated current
nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25 and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)
12-86

Rated Power of Induction Motor 1(kW)

Settings 0~655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 1. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 1 (rpm)

Factory Setting:
1710（60Hz 4 poles）
1410（50Hz 4 poles）
Settings 0~65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated on
the motor nameplate.
Pole Number of Induction Motor 1

Factory Setting: 4
Settings 2~20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A)

Unit: Amper
Settings 0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.
Stator Resistance(Rs) of Induction Motor 1

Rotor Resistance(Rr) of Induction Motor 1
Factory Setting: #.###
Settings 0~65.535Ω
Magnetizing Inductance(Lm) of Induction Motor 1

Stator inductance(Lx) of Induction Motor 1
Settings 0~6553.5mH
~ Reserved
Full-load Current of Induction Motor 2（A）

Unit: Amper
Factory Setting:#.##
Settings 10~120%
12-87

nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.

Example: The rated current for 7.5HP (5.5kW) is 25A and factory setting is 22.5A. The range for
setting will be 10~30A.(25*40%=10A and 25*120%=30A)
Rated Power of Induction Motor 2 (kW)

Settings 0~655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor 2. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
Rated Speed of Induction Motor 2 (rpm)

Settings 0~65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated on
the motor nameplate.
Pole Number of Induction Motor 2

Factory Setting: 4
Settings 2~20
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
No-load Current of Induction Motor 2 (A)

Unit: Amper
Settings 0 to the factory setting in Pr.05-01
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.
Stator Resistance (Rs) of Induction Motor 2

Rotor Resistance (Rr) of Induction Motor 2
Factory Setting: #.###
Settings 0~65.535Ω
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) of Induction Motor 2

Stator Inductance (Lx) of Induction Motor 2
Settings 0~6553.5 mH
Induction Motor 1/ 2 Selection

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
It is used to set the motor that driven by the AC motor drive.
Frequency for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor

12-88

Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor IM

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
Delay Time for Y-connection/△-connection Switch of Induction Motor

P.05-23 and Pr.05-25 are applied in the wide range motors and the motor coil will execute the
switch of Y-connection/Δ-connection as required. (The wide range motors has relation with the
motor design. In general, it has higher torque at low speed and Y-connection and it has higher
speed at high speed and 　connection.
Pr.05-24 is used to enable/disable Y-connection/Δ-connection Switch.
When Pr.05-24 is set to 1, the drive will select by Pr.05-23 setting and current motor frequency to
switch motor to Y-connection or Δ-connection. At the same time, it will also affect motor
parameters.
Pr.05-25 is used to set the switch delay time of Y-connection/Δ-connection.
When output frequency reaches Y-connection/Δ-connection switch frequency, drive will delay by
Pr.05-25 before multi-function output terminals are active.
-connection is finishe d U
Pr.02-01 ~08 =30
MI1 V
W
-connecti on c ontrol W V U
Y-c onnec tion is finis hed
Pr.02-13~14=32
Pr.02-01 ~08 =29
MI2 RA
Y-c onnec tion control IM
Pr.02-11~14=31
MRA
X Y Z
Y- connection switch: can be used for wide range motor

Y -connection for low speed: higher torque can be used for rigid tapping
-connecti on fo r high spe ed: h igher torque can be u sed for hig h-speed dril ling
12-89

If switch poi nt is 60Hz,

the accel . switch point i s 62Hz
Decel. sw itch point is 58Hz
Pr.05-23
Y-△ switch
frequency In this area, motor i s i n free Bandwidth is 2Hz
run status . AC motor driv e Motor s peed w ill
Motor s peed/ stops outputti ng.
decrease
frequency by load inertia.
Pr. 05-25 Delay Time for Y-c onnection
/D -c onnec tion( Min. is 0.2 seconds)
Y-connection output ON Pr.02-13~14=31 ON
Y-conenction ON ON
Pr.02-13~14=29
confirmation input
△-connection output ON
Pr.02-13~14=32
△-connection ON
confirmation input
Pr.02-13~14=30 : mechanical bounc e time
f ree run stat us
output
frequency
Y-c onnection out put
ON
Pr.02-13~14=31
Y-c onnection
confir mat ion input ON
Pr. 02-01~08=29
△-connec ti on output
ON
Pr. 02-13~14=32
△-connect ion
confir mat ion input
Pr. 02-01~08=30
Y -△ s witch err or ON
f requency
2 seconds
delay ti me
Pr.05-25
Accumulative Watt Per Second of Motor in Low Word (W-sec)

Settings Read only
Accumulative Watt Per Second of Motor in High Word (W-sec)
Settings Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor (W-Hour)
Settings Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor in Low Word (KW-Hour)
Settings Read only
Accumulative Watt-hour of Motor in High Word (KW-Hour)
12-90

Settings Read only

Pr.05-26~05-29 records the amount of power consumed by motors. The accumulation begins
when the drive is activated and record is saved when the drive stops or turns OFF. The amount of
consumed watts will continue to accumulate when the drive activate again. To clear the
accumulation, set Pr.00-02 to 5 then the accumulation record will return to 0.
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 00~1439
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (day)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 00~65535
Pr. 05-31 and Pr.05-32 are used to record the motor operation time. To clear the operation time, set
Pr.05-31 and Pr.05-32 to 00. Operation time shorter than 60 seconds will not be recorded.
Induction Motor (IM) and Permanent Magnet Motor Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Induction Motor
1: Permanent Magnet Motor
Full-load current of Permanent Magnet Motor

Settings 0.00~655.35 Amps
Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Motor

Settings 0.00~655.35 kW
Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Motor

Settings 0~65535 rpm
Pole number of Permanent Magnet Motor

Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~65535
Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor

2 2
Settings 0.0~6553.5 kg.cm (0.0001kg.m )
This parameter setting is defined in kg-cm2 . If this measure is not familiar to you, please refer to
the chart below. (Delta’s motor inertia chart is for reference purpose only.)
12-91

Delta Motor (Low inertia model)

Rated Power(kW) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75 1 2
Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 3.70E-06 1.77E-05 2.77E-05 6.80E-05 1.13E-04 2.65E-04 4.45E-04
Delta Motor (Mid to High Inertia model)

Rated Power(kW) 0.5 1 1.5 2 2 0.3 0.6 0.9
Rotor inertia (kg.m^2) 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03 1.46E-03 3.47E-03 8.17E-04 8.41E-04 1.12E-03
※ For more information on motor inertia value, please refer to Pr.11-01.
Stator Resistance of PM Motor

Settings 0.000~65.535Ω
Permanent Magnet Motor Ld

Settings 0.00~655.35 mH
Permanent Magnet Motor Lq

Settings 0.00~655.35 mH
PG Offset angle of PM Motor

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0.0~360.0°
When Pr.05-00 is set to 4, the drive will detect offset angle and write into Pr.05-42.
Ke parameter of PM Motor
Unit: V/1000rpm
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535
12-92

06 Protection Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.
Low Voltage Level

Factory Setting:
Settings 230V Series:
Frame A to D: 150.o~ 220.0 Vdc 180.0
Frame A to D:
460V Series: 300.0~440.0V 360.0
It is used to set the Lv level. When the drive is in the low voltage, it will stop output and free to stop.
input voltage
30V(60V)
Pr. 06-00
LV
Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Settings 230V Series: 0.0~450.0V
460V Series:0.0~900.0V
0: Disabled
When Pr.06-01 is set to 0.0, the over-voltage stall prevention function is disabled.
During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to motor
regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate further and
keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value again.
This function is used for the occasion that the load inertia is unsure. When it stops in the normal
load, the over-voltage won’t occur during deceleration and fulfill the setting of deceleration time.
Sometimes, it may not stop due to over-voltage during decelerating to stop when increasing the
load regenerative inertia. At this moment, the AC drive will auto add the deceleration time until drive
stop.
When the over-voltage stall prevention is enabled, drive deceleration time will be larger than the
setting.
When there is any problem as using deceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
1. Add the suitable deceleration time.
2. Add brake resistor (refer to appendix B-1 for details) to consume the electrical energy that
regenerated from the motor with heat type.
Related parameters: Pr.01-13, 01-15, 01-17, 01-19 (settings of decel. time 1~4), Pr.02-13~02-14
(Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr. 02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)
12-93

High-vo ltage
a t DC si de
Ov er-v ol tage
detec ti on
level
Time
Ou tpu t
frequen cy
F requenc y Held
Deceleration c har acteristic

when Ov er-Voltag e Stall
Pr ev entio n enabled
Time
pre vious deceleration time
requir ed time for d ecelerating to 0Hz when over- voltage
stall preven tion is enab led.
Selectionfor Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
1: Smart over-voltage prevention
When Pr.06-02 is set to 1, the drive will maintain DCbus voltage when decelerating and prevent
OV.
60Hz Output Frequency
DCBUS Voltage
370Vdc
310Vdc
0 Time
230V Series
Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration
Settings Normal duty: 0~160% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 120
Heavy duty: 0~180% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 150
If the motor load is too large or drive acceleration time is too short, the AC drive output current may
increase abruptly during acceleration and it may cause motor damage or trigger protection
functions (OL or OC). This parameter is used to prevent this situation.
12-94

During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06-03 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this function
is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant until the
current drops below the maximum value.
When the over-current stall prevention is enabled, drive deceleration time will be larger than the
setting.
When the Over-Current Stall Prevention occurs due to too small motor capacity or in the factory
setting, please decrease Pr.06-03 setting.
When there is any problem by using acceleration time, refer to the following items to solve it.
Related parameters: Pr.01-12, 01-14, 01-16, 01-18 (settings of accel. time 1~4), Pr.01-44
1. dd the suitable acceleration time.
2. Setting Pr.01-44 Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting to 1, 3 or 4 (auto accel.)
Optimal Acceleration/Deceleration Setting, Pr.02-13~02-14 (Multi-function Output 1 RY1, RY2), Pr.
02-16~02-17 Multi-function Output (MO1, 2)
Output current
06-03
Setting frequency
Over-Current
Detection
Level
Output frequency
Over-Current Stall prevention during
Acceleration,frequency held
Time
Original setting of acceleration time
actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled
Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation
Settings Normal duty: 0~160% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 120
Heavy duty: 0~180% (100%: drive’s rated current) Factory Setting: 150
It is a protection for drive to auto decrease output frequency when the motor is over-load abruptly
during motor constant operation.
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-04 when the drive is operating, the drive
will decrease its output frequency (according to Pr.06-05) to prevent the motor stall. If the output
current is lower than the setting specified in Pr.06-04, the drive will accelerate (according to
Pr.06-05) again to catch up with the set frequency command value.
12-95

Ov er-Curr ent
D etec tion Level
06-04 Pr . 06-04 s etting
Current
Pr . 06-04 s et ting-
rated dr ive c urrent X 5%
Ov er-C urr ent Stall P revention
during Operation, output
frequency dec reases
D ecreases by Output
deceleration t ime F requenc y
T ime
over- curr ent stall pr eventi on during oper ation
Accel./Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at Constant Speed

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: by current accel/decel time
1: by the 1st accel/decel time
2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel
It is used to set the accel./decel. time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant speed.
Over-torque Detection Selection (OT1)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operation
after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection
Over-torque Detection Selection (OT2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
2: Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop operation
after detection
3: Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operation after
detection
4: Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after detection
12-96

When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 1 or 3, it will display a warning message and won’t have an
abnormal record.
When Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 are set to 2 or 4, it will display a warning message and will have an
abnormal record.
Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)

Settings 10 to 250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Settings 10 to 250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)
Over torque detection is determine by the following method: if the output current exceeds the
over-torque detection level (Pr.06-07, factory setting: 150%) and also exceeds Pr.06-08
Over-Torque Detection Time, the fault code “ot1/ot2” will appear. If a Multi-Functional Output
Terminal is to over-torque detection (setting 7 or 8), the output is on. Please refer to
Pr.02-13~02-14 for details.
current
5%
Pr.06-07,
Pr.06-10
Pr.06-08, 06-11
Current Limit
Settings 0~250% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Pr.06-12 sets the maximum output current of the drive. Pr.06-12 and Pr.11-17 ~ Pr.11-20 are used
to set the drive’s output current limit. When the drive is in VF, SVC or VFPG control mode, output
frequency will decreases as the output current reaches current limit. It is a current stall prevention.
Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)

Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)
Factory Setting: 2
Settings 0: Inverter motor
12-97

1: Standard motor
2: Disable
It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electronic thermal
relay to limit driver’s output power.
Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 1

Electronic Thermal Characteristic for Motor 2
The parameter is set by the 150% of motor rated current and the setting of Pr.06-14 and Pr.06-28 to
prevent the motor damaged from overheating. When it reaches the setting, it will display
“EoL1/EoL2” and the motor will be in free running.
Operation
time(min)
5
60Hz or more
4
50Hz
3 10Hz
5Hz
2
1
Load
0 20 40 60 80100120140160180200 factor (%)
Heat Sink Over-heat (OH) Warning

Settings 0.0~110.0℃
Pr.06-15 sets the heatsink temperature level of the drive. The drive will output an overheating
warning when the temperature exceeds the setting of Pr.06-15. If the setting of Pr.06-15 is higher
than the default setting of the drive, the drive will use the default setting level for warning output.
Capacitor (CAP) overheating level is set by the drive’s default setting, it can not be adjusted.
Over-heating Level (℃) Over-heating Level (℃)

Model IGBT OH1 CAP OH 2 Model IGBT OH1 CAP OH 2
VFD007C23A/E 100 90 VFD055C43A/E 100 95
VFD015C23A/E 100 90 VFD075C43A/E 95 75
VFD022C23A/E 100 90 VFD110C43A/E 95 75
VFD037C23A/E 100 95 VFD150C43A/E 95 75
VFD055C23A/E 100 75 VFD185C43A/E 95 80
VFD075C23A/E 100 75 VFD220C43A/E 95 80
VFD110C23A/E 100 75 VFD300C43A/E 100 80
VFD150C23A/E 95 70 VFD370C43A/E 95 60
VFD185C23A/E 95 70 VFD450C43A/E 95 60
VFD220C23A/E 95 70 VFD550C43A/E 100 60
VFD300C23A/E 95 60 VFD750C43A/E 100 60
VFD370C23A/E 95 60 VFD900C43A/E 100 60
12-98

Over-heating Level (℃) Over-heating Level (℃)

VFD450C23A/E 100 60 VFD1100C43A/E 100 60
VFD550C23A/E 100 60 VFD1320C43A/E 100 60
VFD750C23A/E 100 60 VFD1600C43A/E 100 60
VFD900C23A/E 100 60 VFD1850C43A/E 100 65
VFD007C43A/E 100 90 VFD2200C43A/E 100 65
VFD015C43A/E 100 90 VFD2800C43A/E 100 65
VFD022C43A/E 100 95 VFD3150C43A/E 100 65
VFD037C43A/E 100 100 VFD3550C43A/E 100 65
VFD040C43A/E 100 95
Stall Prevention Limit Level

Factory Setting: 50
Settings 0~100% (Refer to Pr.06-03, Pr.06-04)
When operation frequency is larger than Pr.01-01; e.g. Pr06-03=150%, Pr. 06-04=100% and Pr.
06-16=80%:
Calculate the Stall Prevention Level during acceleration: Pr.06-03 * Pr.06-16=150x80%=120%.
Calculate the Stall Prevention Level at constant speed: Pr.06-04 * Pr.06-16=100x80%=80%.
Present Fault Record

Second Most Recent Fault Record
Third Most Recent Fault Record
Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Settings
0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1)
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2) (for 40hp above)
12-99

18: tH1o (TH1 open: IGBT over-heat

protection error)
19: tH2o (TH2 open: capacitance over-heat
protection error)
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC)
25: Reserved
28: Low current (uC)
29: Home limit error (LMIT)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AUE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
48: Analog current input loss (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
51: External Base Block (bb)
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
12-100

58: Communication Time-out (CE10)

59: PU Time-out (CP10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb)
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF)
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5)
66-72: Reserved
73: External safety gate S1
74~78: Reserved
79: Uocc U phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
software protection)
80: Vocc V phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
81: Wocc W phase over current (Detection begins as RUN is pressed,
82: OPHL U phase output phase loss
83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss
84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss
85~100: Reserved
101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1
102: CHbE CANopen software disconnect2
103: CSYE CANopen synchronous error
104: CbFE CANopen hardware disconnect
105: CIdE CANopen index setting error
106: CAdE CANopen slave station number setting error
107: CFrE CANopen index setting exceed limit
108~110: Reserved
111: InrCOM Internal communication overtime error
When the fault occurs and force stopping, it will record in this parameter.
At stop with low voltage Lv (LvS warn, no record). During operation with mid-low voltage Lv (LvA,
Lvd, Lvn error, will record).
Setting 62: when dEb function is enabled, the drive will execute dEb and record to the Pr.06-17 to
Pr.06-22 simultaneously.
Fault Output Option 1

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 to 65535 sec (refer to bit table for fault code)
These parameters can be used with multi-function output (set to 35-38) for the specific
12-101

requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be activated (It needs
to convert binary value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-23 to Pr.06-26).
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6
Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) ●
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) ●
3: Over-current during constant speed(ocn) ●
4: Ground fault (GFF) ●
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ) ●
6: Over-current at stop (ocS) ●
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) ●
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) ●
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn) ●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) ●
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA) ●
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ●
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn) ●
14: Stop mid-low voltage (LvS ) ●
15: Phase loss protection (OrP) ●
16: IGBT over-heat (oH1) ●
17: Capacitance over-heat (oH2) ●
18: tH1o (TH1 open) ●
19: tH2o (TH2 open) ●
20: Reserved
21: Drive over-load (oL) ●
22: Electronics thermal relay 1 (EoL1) ●
23: Electronics thermal relay 2 (EoL2) ●
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3) (PTC) ●
25: Reserved
26: Over-torque 1 (ot1) ●
27: Over-torque 2 (ot2) ●
28: Low current (uC) ●
29: Home limit error (LMIT) ●
30: Memory write-in error (cF1) ●
31: Memory read-out error (cF2) ●
32: Reserved
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1) ●
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2) ●
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3) ●
12-102


Fault Code
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0) ●
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1) ●
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2) ●
39: occ IGBT short circuit detection error (Hd3) ●
40: Auto tuning error (AUE) ●
41: PID feedback loss (AFE) ●
42: PG feedback error (PGF1) ●
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2) ●
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3) ●
45: PG slip error (PGF4) ●
46: PG ref loss (PGr1) ●
47: PG ref loss (PGr2) ●
48: Analog current input loss (ACE) ●
49: External fault input (EF) ●
50: Emergency stop (EF1) ●
51: External Base Block (bb) ●
52: Password error (PcodE) ●
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (CE1) ●
58: Communication Time-out (CE10) ●
59: PU Time-out (CP10) ●
60: Brake transistor error (bF) ●
61: Y-connection/△-connection switch error ●
(ydc)
62: Decel. Energy Backup Error (dEb) ●
63: Slip error (oSL) ●
64: Electromagnet switch error (ryF) ●
65 : PG Card Error (PGF5) ●
66-72: Reserved
73: External safety gate S1 ●
74~78: Reserved
79: U phase over current (Uocc) ●
80: V phase over current (Vocc) ●
81: W phase over current (Wocc) ●
82: OPHL U phase output phase loss ●
12-103


Fault Code
83: OPHL Vphase output phase loss ●
84: OPHL Wphase output phase loss ●
85~100: Reserved
101: CGdE CANopen software disconnect1 ●
102: CHbE CANopen software disconnect2 ●
103: CSYE CANopen synchronous error ●
104: CbFE CANopen hardware disconnect ●
105: CIdE CANopen index setting error ●
106: CAdE CANopen slave station number ●
setting error
107: CFrE CANopen index setting exceed limit ●
108~110: Reserved
111: InrCOM Internal communication overtime ●
error
PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Warn and keep operating
3: No warning
Pr.06-29 setting defines how the will drive operate after PTC detection.
PTC Level
Settings 0.0~100.0%
It needs to set AVI/ACI/AUI analog input function Pr.03-00~03-02 to 6 (P.T.C. thermistor input
value).
It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input value.
Frequency Command for Malfunction

When malfunction occurs, use can check the frequency command. If it happens again, it will
overwrite the previous record.
Output Frequency at Malfunction

When malfunction occurs, use can check the current frequency command. If it happens
again, it will overwrite the previous record.
12-104

Output Voltage at Malfunction

When malfunction occurs, user can check current output voltage. If it happens again, it will
DC Voltage at Malfunction
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current DC voltage. If it happens again, it will
Output Current at Malfunction

Settings 0.00~655.35Amp
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current output current. If it happens again, it will
IGBT Temperature at Malfunction

When malfunction occurs, user can check the current IGBT temperature. If it happens again, it will
Capacitance Temperature at Malfunction

When malfunction occurs, user can check the current capacitance temperature. If it happens again,
it will overwrite the previous record.
Motor Speed in rpm at Malfunction

When malfunction occurs, user can check the current motor speed in rpm. If it happens again, it will
Torque Command at Malfunction

Settings 0~65535
When malfunction occurs, user can check the current torque command. If it happens again, it will
Status of Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction

12-105

Settings 0000h~FFFFh
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal at Malfunction
Settings 0000h~FFFFh
When malfunction occurs, user can check the status of multi-function input/output terminals. If it
happens again, it will overwrite the previous record.
Drive Status at Malfunction

Settings 0000H~FFFFh
When malfunction occurs, please check the drive status (communication address 2119H). If
malfunction happens again, the previous record will be overwritten by this parameter.
Reserved
Reserved
Treatment to Output Phase Loss Detection (OPHL)

Factory Setting: 3
3: No warning
Pr.06-45 defines how the drive will operates when output phase loss occur.
Deceleration Time of Output Phase Loss

Factory Setting:0.500
Current Bandwidth
Settings 0.00~655.35%
DC Brake Time of Output Phase Loss

Reserved
Time for Input Phase Loss Detection

Reserved
12-106

Ripple of Input Phase Loss

Factory Setting:30.0 / 60.0
Settings 230V Series: 0.0~160.0 Vdc
460V Series: 0.0~320.0 Vdc
Treatment for the detected Input Phase Loss （OrP）

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: warn, ramp to stop
1: warn, coast to stop
Over ripple protection
Reserved
Derating Protection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: constant rated current and limit carrier wave by load current and
temperature
1: constant carrier frequency and limit load current by setting carrier wave
2: constant rated current(same as setting 0), but close current limit
Setting 0:
When the rated current is constant, carrier frequency (Fc) outputted by PWM will auto decrease
according to surrounding temperature, overload output current and time. If overload situation is
not frequent and only cares the carrier frequency operated with the rated current for a long time
and carrier wave changes during short overload, it is recommended to set to 0.
Refer to the following diagram for the level of carrier frequency. Take VFD007C43A in normal duty
as example, surrounding temperature 50oC with independent installation and UL open-type.
When the carrier frequency is set to 15kHz, it corresponds to 72% rated output current. When it
outputs higher than the value, it will auto decrease the carrier frequency. If the output is 83% rated
current and the carrier frequency will decrease to 12kHz. In addition, it will also decrease the
carrier frequency when overload. When the carrier frequency is 15kHz and the current is
120%*72%=86% for a minute, the carrier frequency will decrease to the factory setting.
Setting 1:
It is used for the fixed carrier frequency and prevents the carrier wave changes and motor noise
caused by the surrounding temperature and frequent overload.
Refer to the following for the derating level of rated current. Take VFD007C43A in normal duty as
example, when the carrier frequency keeps in 15kHz and the rated current is decreased to 72%, it
will have OL protection when the current is 120%*72%=86% for a minute. Therefore, it needs to
operate by the curve to keep the carrier frequency.
Setting 2:
It sets the protection method and action to 0 and disables the current limit for the Ratio*160% of
12-107

output current in the normal duty and Ratio*180% of output current in the heavy duty. The
advantage is that it can provide higher output current when the setting is higher than the factory
setting of carrier frequency. The disadvantage is that it decreases carrier wave easily when
overload.
Derating curve diagram in the normal duty (Pr.00-16=0)

Pr.06-55=1 Pr.06-55=0 or 2
Pr.06-55=0 or 2
(40℃: UL open-type)
(30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by
(40℃:UL type1 or open type_size by
size)
size)
460V
460V
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD007~150C43A/E VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E VFD750~3550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
110
110
100
100
Ratio(%)
Ratio(%)
90
90
80
80
70
70
60
60 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
Fc (kHz)
Setting=1 Setting=0 or 2
Setting=0 or 2 (40℃: UL open-type)
(50℃: UL open-type) (30℃: UL type1 or open type_size by
size) 230V
230V VFD007~110C23A
VFD007~110C23A VFD150~370C23A;
VFD150~370C23A; VFD300~370C23E
VFD300~370C23E VFD450~900C23A/E
110
VFD450~900C23A/E
110 100
100
Ratio(%)
90
Ratio(%)
90
80
80
70
70
60
60 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Fc (kHz)
Fc (kHz)
12-108

Derating curve diagram in the heavy duty (Pr.00-16=1)

Pr.06-55=1 Pr.06-55=0 or 2
Pr.06-55=0 or 2
size)
size)
460V
460V
VFD007~150C43A/E
VFD007~150C43A/E VFD185~550C43A/E
VFD185~550C43A/E VFD750~3550C43A/E
VFD750~3550C43A/E
110
110
100
100
Ratio(%)
90
Ratio(%)
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
50
50
40
40 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz)
Fc (kHz)
230V 230V
VFD007~110C23A VFD007~110C23A
VFD150~370C23A; VFD150~370C23A;
VFD300~370C23E VFD300~370C23E
VFD450~900C23A/E VFD450~900C23A/E
110 110
100 100
Ratio(%)
90 90
Ratio(%)
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Fc (kHz) Fc (kHz)
It should be used with Pr. 00-16 and Pr.00-17 for setting.
NOTE
※ The mounting clearances stated in the figure is for installing the drive in an
open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or electric
box), please follow the following three rules: (1) Keep the minimum mounting
clearances. (2) Install a ventilation equipment or an air conditioner to keep
surrounding temperature lower than operation temperature. (3) Refer to
parameter setting and set up Pr. 00-16, Pr.00-17, and Pr. 06-55.
※ The following table shows heat dissipation and the required air volume when
installing a single drive in a confined space. When installing multiple drives,
the required air volume shall be multiplied by the number the drives.
※ Refer to the chart (Air flow rate for cooling) for ventilation equipment design
and selection.
※ Refer to the chart (Power dissipation) for air conditioner design and selection.
Minimum mounting clearances:
Frame A (mm) B (mm) C (mm) D (mm)
A~C 60 30 10 0
D~F 100 50 - 0
G 200 100 - 0
H 350 0 0 200 (100, Ta=40℃)
12-109


drive
3
Flow Rate (cfm) Flow Rate (m /hr) Power Dissipation
(Heat sink)
VFD007C23A - - - - - - 33 27 61
VFD015C23A 14 - 14 24 - 24 56 31 88
VFD022C23A 14 - 14 24 - 24 79 36 115
VFD037C23A 10 - 10 17 - 17 113 46 159
VFD055C23A 40 14 54 68 24 92 197 67 264
VFD075C23A 66 14 80 112 24 136 249 86 335
VFD110C23A 58 14 73 99 24 124 409 121 529
VFD150C23A 166 12 178 282 20 302 455 161 616
VFD185C23A 166 12 178 282 20 302 549 184 733
VFD220C23A 146 12 158 248 20 268 649 216 865
VFD300C23A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 913 186 1099
VFD370C23A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 1091 220 1311
VFD450C23A/E 228 73 301 387 124 511 1251 267 1518
VFD550C23A/E 228 73 301 387 124 511 1401 308 1709
VFD750C23A/E 246 73 319 418 124 542 1770 369 2139
VFD900C23A/E 224 112 336 381 190 571 2304 484 2788
VFD007C43A/E - - - - - - 33 25 59
VFD015C43A/E - - - - - - 45 29 74
VFD022C43A/E 14 - 14 24 - 24 71 33 104
VFD037C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 103 38 141
VFD040C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 116 42 158
VFD055C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 134 46 180
VFD075C43A/E 40 14 54 68 24 92 216 76 292
VFD110C43A/E 66 14 80 112 24 136 287 93 380
VFD150C43A/E 58 14 73 99 24 124 396 122 518
VFD185C43A/E 99 21 120 168 36 204 369 138 507
VFD220C43A/E 99 21 120 168 36 204 476 158 635
VFD300C43A/E 126 21 147 214 36 250 655 211 866
VFD370C43A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 809 184 993
VFD450C43A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 929 218 1147
VFD550C43A/E 179 30 209 304 51 355 1156 257 1413
VFD750C43A/E 186 30 216 316 51 367 1408 334 1742
VFD900C43A/E 257 73 330 437 124 561 1693 399 2092
VFD1100C43A/E 223 73 296 379 124 503 2107 491 2599
VFD1320C43A/E 224 112 336 381 190 571 2502 579 3081
VFD1600C43A/E 289 112 401 491 190 681 3096 687 3783
VFD1850C43A/E 454 771 4589
VFD2200C43A/E 454 771 5772
VFD2800C43A/E 769 1307 6381
VFD3150C43A/E 769 1307 7156
VFD3550C43A/E 769 1307 8007
※ The required airflow shown in chart is for installing one drive in confined space. ※ The heat dissipation shown in
※ When installing the multiple drives, the required air volume should be the the chart is for installing single
required air volume for single drive X the number of the drives. drive in a confined space.
※ When installing multiple drives,
volume of heat dissipation
should be the heat dissipated for
single drive X the number of the
drives.
※ Heat dissipation for each model
is calculated by rated voltage,
current and default carrier.
12-110

PT100 Detection Level 1

PT100 Detection Level 2
PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection

Settings 0.00~600.00 Hz
PT100 operation
(1) Use AVI, AUI or ACI(set to 0-10V) for analog voltage input and select PT100 mode.
(2) Choose one of the anolog voltage input type: (a)AVI (Pr.03-00=11), (b) AUI (Pr.03-02=11), or
(c) ACI (Pr.03-01=11 and Pr.03-29=1).
(3) When using ACI as analog voltage input, set Pr.03-01=11 and Pr.03-29=1. Then switch SW2
to 0-10V on the I/O control terminal block.
(4) Set Pr.03-23=23 and AFM2 to constant current output. Switch AFM2 (SW2) to 0-20mA on the
I/O control terminal block and set constanst current output to 9mA by setting Pr.03-33=45.
The AFM2 constant output current is 20mA * 45% = 9mA.
(5) Pr.03-33 is for adjusting the constant voltage or constang current of AFM2, the setting range
is 0~100.00%.
(6) There are two types of action level for PT100. The diagram of PT protecting action is shown
as below:
L e ve l 2= 0 6 -5 7
S e ttin g ra n g e: 0 .0 0 0~ 1 0 .0 0 0 V
Fa cto ry se tti n g : 7 .0 0 0 V
L e ve l 1= 0 6 -5 6
Se tti n g ra n g e: 0 .0 0 0~ 1 0 .0 0 0 V
Fa cto ry se tti ng : 5 .0 0 0 V
When volt age of PT 100 reaches level 1,

Fre q u e n cy t he drive passed t he delay time set at Pr06-59 ,
t he frequency command goes back t o Pr. 06-58.
C om ma n d
When voltage of PT 100 reaches level 2, the drive act ivate
protecting act ion by f ollowing t he setting of Pr.06-29.
Pr. 06- 59 D el a y tim e
(7) PT100 wiring diagram:
0-10V
0-10V 0-10V 0-20mA Open RC2 RB2 RA2 RC1 RB1 RA1
AFM1 AFM2 AVI ACI 485
-10-10V
0-20mA 0-20mA 0-10V 120
AFM1 +10V AVI ACI MO1 MO2 MCM +24V COM FWD MI1 MI3 MI5 MI7
AFM 2 -1 0V AUI ACM S1 SCM DFM DCM REV M I2 M I4 MI6 M I8 SG+ SG-
PT100 Rem ovable Term inal Block

Figure 1
12-111

When Pr.06-58=0.00Hz, PT100 function is disabled.
Example:
A PT100 is installed to the drive. If motor temperature reache 135℃ (275°F) or higher, the drive will
decrease motor frequency to the setting of Pr.06-58. Motor will operate at this frequency (Pr.06-58)
till the motor temperature decreases to 135℃(275°F) or lower. If motor temperature raise beyong
150℃(302°F), the motor will decelerate to stop and outputs an ‘OH3’ warning.
Set up process:
1. Switch AFM2 (SW2) to 0-20mA on the I/O control terminal block. (Refer to Figure 1, PT100 wiring
diagram)
2. Wiring (Refer to Figure 1, PT100 wiring diagram):
Connect external terminal AFM2 to (+)
Connect external terminal ACM to (-)
Connect external terminals AFM2 and AVI to short-circuit
3. Set Pr.03-00=11 or Pr.03-23=23 or Pr.03-33=45%(9mA)
4. Refer to RTD temperature and resistance comparison table
Temperature=135℃, current=151.71Ω; Inputut current: 9mA, Voltage: approximately: 1.37Vdc
Temperature=150℃, current=157.33Ω; Input current:9mA, Voltage: approximately: 1.42Vdc
5. Set Pr.06=56=1.37 and Pr.06-58=10Hz. When RTD temperature increases to 135℃ or higher,
the drive will decelerate to the selected frequency. When Pr.06-58=0, the drive will not run.
6. Set Pr.06-57=1.42 and Pr.06-29=1 (warning and decelerate to stop). When RTD temperature
increases to 150℃ or higher, the drive will decelerate to stop and outputs an ‘OH3’ warning.
Reserved
Software Detection GFF Current Level

Settings 0.0~6553.5 %
Software Detection GFF Filter Time

Settings 0.0~6553.5 %
Disable Level of dab

Settings 230V series: 0.0~220.0 Vic
460V series: 0.0~440.0 Vic
Fault Record 1 (min)

12-112


Settings 0~64799 min
Pr.06-63 to Pr.06-68 are used to record the operation time for 6 malfunctions and it can also check
if there is any wrong with the drive according to the internal time.
When the malfunction occurs during operation, it records fault in Pr.06-17~06-22 and operation
time is recorded in Pr.06-63~06-68.
For example: When the first fault ovA occurs after operation 3000 min., second fault ovd occurs at
3482 min., third fault ovA occurs at 4051 min., fourth fault ocA at 5003 min., fifth fault ocA at 5824
min., sixth fault ocd occurs at 6402 min. and seven fault ocS at 6951 min..
It’ll be recorded as the following table:
It will be recorded as the following table:
First fault Pr.06-17 ovA Pr.06-63 3000 ovA occurs at the 3000 min
after operating.
Second fault Pr.06-17 ovd Pr.06-63 3482 3482-3000=482 min

ovd occurs at 482 min after
last fault (ovA)
Pr.06-18 ovA Pr.06-64 3000
Third fault Pr.06-17 ovA Pr.06-63 4051 4051-3482=569 min

ovA occurs at 569 min after
last fault (ovd)
Pr.06-18 ovd Pr.06-64 3482
Pr.06-19 ovA Pr.06-65 3000
Seven fault Pr.06-17 ocS Pr.06-63 12 (12-5824)+64800=58988 min

ocS occurs at 58988 min after
last fault (ocA)
Pr.06-18 ocA Pr.06-64 5824
Pr.06-19 ocA Pr.06-65 5003
Pr.06-20 ovA Pr.06-66 4051
Pr.06-21 ovd Pr.06-67 3482
Pr.06-22 ovA Pr.06-68 3000
Time interval between errors occur (day)

Settings Read only
Time interval between errors occur (minute)

Settings Read only
Low Current Setting Level

12-113

Settings 0.0 ~ 6553.5 %
Low Current Detection Time

Settings 0.00 ~ 655.35 sec
Treatment for low current

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0 : No function
1 : warn and coast to stop
2 : warn and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
3 : warn and operation continue
The drive will operate as the setting of Pr.06-73 when output current is lower than the setting of
Pr.06-71 and when low current continues for a period longer than the setting of Pr.06-72. This
parameter can also be used with external multi-function output terminal 44 (MO44) for low current
output.
12-114

07 Special Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.
Software Brake Level

Settings 230V series: 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V series: 700.0~900.0Vdc
This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. Users can choose
the suitable brake resistor to have the best deceleration. Refer to Chapter 7 Accessories for the
information of the brake resistor.
It is only valid for the models below 30kW of 460 series and 22kW of 230 series.
DC Brake Current Level

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100%
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and stopping.
When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current is regarded as 100%. It is recommended to
start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper holding torque has been
attained.
When it is in FOCPG/TQCPG mode, DC brake is zero-speed operation. It can enable DC brake
function by setting to any value.
DC Brake Time at Start-up

The motor may be in the rotation status due to external force or itself inertia. If the drive is used with
the motor at this moment, it may cause motor damage or drive protection due to over current. This
parameter can be used to output DC current before motor operation to stop the motor and get a
stable start. This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command.
When it is set to 0.0, it is invalid.
DC Brake Time at Stop

The motor may be in the rotation status after drive stop outputting due to external force or itself
inertia and can’t stop accurately. This parameter can output DC current to force the motor drive
stop after drive stops to make sure that the motor is stop.
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. To DC brake at
stop, this function will be valid when Pr.00-22 is set to 0 or 2. When setting to 0.0, it is invalid.
Related parameters: Pr.00-22 Stop Method, Pr.07-04 Start-point for DC Brake
Start-Point for DC Brake

12-115
This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. When
this setting is less than start frequency (Pr.01-09), the start-point for DC brake will start from the
min. frequency.
Output frequen cy
DC Br ak Time
07-04
01-09 Star t- point for during St opping
Minimum
DC br ake
out put time during
frequen cy
stopping
Run /Stop OFF

ON Time
DC Brake Time
DC Brake at Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and
pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before
setting it in motion.
DC Brake at stop is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position,
such as crane or cutting machine.
DC Brake at Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as fans and
pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in position before
setting it in motion.
DC Brake at stop is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load in position,
such as crane or cutting machine.
Voltage Incrasing Gain

Settings 1~200%
When the user is using speed tracking, adjut Pr07-05 to slow down the increasing of voltage if
there are errors such as oL or ocv. Then the speed tracking time will be longer and the Pr07-09
Pivot Point of the Speed Tracking of the Current 20~200%, factory setting 50. If the pivot point of
the user is higher than the Pr06-03 pivot point of the oc stall, then the drive will choose the pivot
point of Pr06-03 as the highest pivot point of the speed tracking.
Restart after Momentary Power Loss

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed search for last frequency command
2: Speed search for the minimum output frequency
This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.
The power connected to the drive may power off momentarily due to many reasons. This function
allows the drive to keep outputting after power is on again after power off and won’t cause drive
stops.
Setting 1: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the Master
Frequency reference value after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous.
12-116
The motor has the characteristics of big inertia and small obstruction. For example, in the
equipment with big inertia wheel, it doesn’t need to wait to execute operation command until
wheel is complete stop after re-start to save time.
Setting 2: Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search starts with the master
frequency after drive output frequency and motor rotator speed is synchronous. The motor has
the characteristics of small inertia and bigger obstruction.
In PG control mode, the AC motor drive will execute the speed search function automatically by
the PG speed when this setting isn’t set to 0.
Maximum Power Loss Duration

If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will resume
operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive output is
then turned off (coast stop).
The selected operation after power loss in Pr.07-06 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “LU”.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.07-06 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.
Base block Time

When momentary power loss is detected, the AC drive will block its output and then wait for a
specified period of time (determined by Pr.07-08, called Base-Block Time) before resuming
operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual regeneration
voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is activated again.
7
Output frequency(H) Input B.B. signal

Stop output voltage
Output voltage(V) Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Output current A Speed search
07-09 Synchronization speed detection
Current Limit for 7 Frequency command before B.B.
Speed Search Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with last output frequency downward timing chart
12-117
Output frequency
(H) Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Output voltage Disable B.B. signal
(V) Waiting time 08.07
output current A
07-09 Current Limit Speed Search
for Speed Search Speed Synchronization speed detection
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
Input B.B. signal

Output frequency(H)
Stop voltage output
Disable B.B. signal
Output voltage(V)
Waiting time Pr.07-08
Output current A Speed search
Synchronization speed detection
06-03
Over-Current Stall
Prevention
during Accel. Time
FWD Run
B. B.
B.B. Search with minimum output frequency upward timing chart
Current Limit for Speed Search

Factory Setting: 50
Settings 20~200%
Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation only if
the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.07-09.
When executing speed search, the V/f curve is operated by group 1 setting. The maximum current
for the optimum accel./decel. and start speed search is set by Pr.07-09.
The speed search level will affect the synchronous time. It will get the synchronization faster when
this parameter is set to larger value. But too large value may active overload protection.
Treatment to Reboots After Fault

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed search starts with current speed
2: Speed search starts with minimum output frequency
12-118
Fault includes: bb,oc,ov,occ etc. To restart after oc, ov, occ, Pr.07-11 can not be set to 0.
Auto Restart After Fault
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~10
After fault (oc, ov, ov),occurs the AC motor drive can be reset/restarted automatically up to 10
times.
Setting this parameter to 0 will disable the reset/restart operation after any fault has occurred.
When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency
before the fault.
If the drive execute reset/restart after fault more than the numbers of time set in Pr.07-11 and the
limit is reached within the time period in Pr.07-33, the drive will stop execute reset/restart after
fault function. User will be need to input RESET manually for the drive to continue operation.
Speed Search during Start-up

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Speed search from maximum output frequency
2: Speed search from start-up motor frequency
3: Speed search from minimum output frequency
This parameter is used for starting and stopping a motor with a high inertia. A motor with high
inertia will take 2-5 minutes or longer to stop completely. By setting this parameter, the user does
not need to wait for the motor to come to a complete stop before restarting the AC motor drive. If a
PG card and encoder is used on the drive and motor, then the speed search will start from the
speed that is detected by the encoder and accelerate quickly to the commanded frequency. The
output current is set by the Pr.07-09.
Decel. Time at Momentary Power Loss (dEb function)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: 1st decel. time
2: 2nd decel. time
3: 3rd decel. time
4: 4th decel. time
5: Current decel. time
6: Auto decel. time
This parameter is used for the decel. time selection for momentary power loss.
dEb Return Time

12-119
function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop after momentary power loss. When the
momentary power loss occurs, this function can be used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with
deceleration stop method. When the power is on again, motor will run again after DEB return time.
(has applied on high-speed spindle)
Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low
voltage)/sudden heavy-load
DC BUS voltage
The level for DEB return tim e it doesn't need
(Lv=+30V+58V) multi-function terminals
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30) Lv level
Soft start relay at

power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss
07-14
DEB return time
NOTE
When Pr.07-14 is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be stopped and won't re-start
at the power-on again.
Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss

DC BUS voltage
The level for DEB return time

(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DE B function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for

momentary power loss
07-14
DE B return time
NOTE
For example, in textile machinery, you will hope that all the machines can be decelerated to stop to prevent broken stitching
when power loss. In this case, the host controller will send a message to the AC motor drive to use dEb function with
deceleration time via EF.
Dwell Time at Accel.

Dwell Frequency at Accel.
12-120
Dwell Time at Decel.
Dwell Frequency at Decel.
Settings 0.00~600.00 Hz
In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily, such as crane or
elevator.
Pr.07-15 to Pr.07-18 is for heavy load to prevent OV or OC occurs.
Frequency
07-18
07-16 Dwell
07-17
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
Frequency at Decel.
07-15 at Decel.
at Accel.
Dwell Time
at Accel. Time
Dwell at accel./decel.
Fan Cooling Control

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Fan always ON
1: 1 minute after the AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
2: When the AC motor drive runs, the fan is ON. When the AC motor drive
stops, the fan is OFF
3: Fan turns ON when preliminary heat sink temperature (around 60oC) is
attained.
4: Fan always OFF
This parameter is used for the fan control.
Setting 0: Fan will be ON as the drive’s power is turned ON.
Setting 1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
Setting 2: AC motor drive runs and fan will be ON. AC motor drive stops and fan will be OFF.
Setting 3: Fan run according to IGBT and capacitance temperature. Fan will be ON when
preliminary capacitance temperature is higher than 60oC. Fan will be OFF, when capacitance
temperature is lower than 40oC.
Setting 4: Fan is always OFF
Emergency Stop (EF) & Force Stop

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by 2nd deceleration time
3: Stop by 3rd deceleration time
12-121
4: Stop by 4th deceleration time

5: System Deceleration
6: Automatic Deceleration
Pr.07-20 determines AC motor drive stop method. When the multi-function input terminal is set to
10 or 18 and is activated, the drive will stop according to the setting in Pr.07-20.
Auto Energy-saving Operation
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
When Pr.07-21 is set to 1, the acceleration and deceleration will operate with full voltage. During
constant speed operation, it will auto calculate the best voltage value by the load power for the
load. This function is not suitable for the ever-changing load or near full-load during operation.
When the output frequency is constant, i.e. constant operation, the output voltage will auto
decrease by the load reduction. Therefore, the drive will operate with min. power, multiplication of
voltage and current.
Output
voltage
100 %
save up to 25%
output volt age
75%
Aut o energy- saving Fr equenc y
Energy-saving Gain
Settings 10~1000%
When Pr.00-19 is set to 1, this parameter can be used to adjust the gain of energy-saving. The
factory setting is 100%. If the result is not good, it can adjust by decreasing the setting. If the
motor oscillates, it should increase the setting.
Auto Voltage Regulation(AVR) Function

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
The rated voltage of the motor is usually 220V/200VAC 60Hz/50Hz and the input voltage of the
AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor
drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input voltage. When
the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its lifetime will be shorter
and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and unstable torque output.
AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the motor rated voltage.
12-122
For instance, if V/f curve is set at 200 VAC/50Hz and the input voltage is at 200V to 264VAC, then
the motor Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a maximum of 200VAC/50Hz. If the
input voltage is at 180V to 200VAC, output voltage to motor and input power will be in direct
proportion.
Setting 0: when AVR function is enabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by actual
DC-bus voltage. The output voltage won’t be changed by DC bus voltage.
Setting 1: when AVR function is disabled, the drive will calculate the output voltage by DC-bus
voltage. The output voltage will be changed by DC bus voltage. It may cause insufficient/over
current.
Setting 2: the drive will disable the AVR during deceleration, such as operated from high speed to
low speed.
When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to 2
with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker.
When it is in FOCPG or TQCPG, it is recommended to set to 0 (enable AVR).
Filter Time of Torque Command (V/F and SVC control mode)

When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When
the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control may be unstable. User can
adjust the setting by the control and response situation.
Filter Time of Slip Compensation (V/F and SVC control mode)

It can set Pr.05-22 and 05-23 to change the response time of compensation.
If Pr.05-22 and 05-23 are set to 10seconds, the response time of compensation is the slowest. But
the system may be unstable when the setting is too short.
Torque Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~10
When the motor load is large, a part of drive output voltage is absorbed by the resistor of stator
winding and causes insufficient voltage at motor induction and result in over output current and
insufficient output torque. It can auto adjust output voltage by the load and keep the air gap
magnetic fields stable to get the optimal operation.
In the V/F control, the voltage will be decreased in direct proportion when the frequency is
decreased. It’ll cause decrease torque at low speed due to small AC resistor and the same DC
resistor. Therefore, Auto torque compensation function will increase the output voltage in the low
frequency to get higher start torque.
When Pr.07-26 is set to large, it may cause motor overflux and result in too large output current,
motor overheat or triggers protection function.
12-123
Slip Compensation Gain (V/F and SVC control mode)

Settings 0.00~10.00
The induction motor needs the constant slip to produce magnetic torque. It can be ignore in the
higher motor speed, such as rated speed or 2-3% slip.
In the operation with variable frequency, the slip and the synchronous frequency will be in reverse
proportion to produce the same magnetic torque. That is the slip will be larger with the reduction
of synchronous frequency. The motor may stop when the synchronous frequency is decreased to
a specific value. Therefore, the slip serious affects the accuracy of motor speed at low speed.
In another situation, when the drive uses with induction motor, the slip will be increased by the
increasing load. It also affects the accuracy of motor speed.
This parameter can be used to set compensation frequency and reduce the slip to close the
synchronous speed when the motor runs in the rated current to raise the drive accuracy. When
the drive output current is larger than Pr.05-05 No-load Current of Induction Motor 1 (A), the drive
will compensation the frequency by this parameter.
When the control method (Pr.00-11) is changed from V/f mode to vector mode, this parameter will
auto be set to 1.00. Otherwise, it will be set to 0.00. Please do the compensation of slip after
overload and acceleration. The compensation value should be increased from small to large
gradually. That is to add the output frequency with motor rated slip X Pr.07-27 Slip Compensation
Gain when the motor is rated load. If the actual speed ratio is slow than expectation, please
increase the setting. Otherwise, decrease the setting.
Reserved
Slip Deviation Level

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100.0%
0: No detection
Detection Time of Slip Deviation
Factory Setting:1.0
Over Slip Treatment
Factory Setting:0
Settings 0: Warn and keep operation
3: No warning
Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31 are used to set allowable slip level/time and over slip treatment when the
drive is running.
Motor Hunting Gain
Factory Setting:1000
Settings 0~10000
12-124
0: Disable
The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by
setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, it can be set to 0. when the
current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.05-29.)
Recovery Time to Pr.07-11 (# of automatic reboots after fault)
Settings 00~6000.0 sec
When a reset/restart after fault occurs, the drive will regards Pr.07-33 as a time boundary and
beging counting the numbers of faults occur within this time period. Within the period, if numbers
of faults occurred did not exceed the setting in Pr.07-11, the counting will be cleared and starts
from 0 when next fault occurs. However, if the numbers of faults occurred within this time period
have exceed the setting in Pr.07-11, user will need to press RESET key manually for the drive to
operate again.
12-125
08 High-function PID Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.
Input Terminal for PID Feedback

Factory Setting:0
Settings 0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: input from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
2: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)
3: Negative PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
4: Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (Pr.03-00)
5: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15, skip direction)
6: Positive PID feedback from PG card (Pr.10-15)
7: Negative PID feeback from communication protocol
8: Positive PID feedback from communication protocol
Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
increased by increasing the output frequency.
Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback. It is used for the detection value will be
decreased by increasing the output frequency.
When Pr08-00≠7 neither ≠8, input value is disabled. The value of the setting remain the same
after the derive is off.
Common applications for PID control
; Flow control: A flow sensor is used to feedback the flow data and performs accurate flow
control.
; Pressure control: A pressure sensor is used to feedback the pressure data and performs
precise pressure control.
; Air volume control: An air volume sensor is used to feedback the air volume data to have
excellent air volume regulation.
; Temperature control: A thermocouple or thermistor is used to feedback temperature data for
comfortable temperature control.
; Speed control: A speed sensor or encoder is used to feedback motor shaft speed or input
another machines speed as a target value for closed loop speed control of master-slave
operation. Pr.10.00 sets the PID set point source (target value).
; PID control operates with the feedback signal as set by Pr.10.01 either 0~+10V voltage or
4-20mA current.
PID control loop:
drive execute PID control output v alue
¨ ¿¥
Setpoint + 1
K p (1+ + Td ×S ) IM
Ti × S
-
feedback signal
sens or
K p: Proportional gain(P) Ti : Integral time(I) Td: Derivative control(D) : O perator
12-126
Concept of PID control

1. Proportional gain(P):
the output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there will always be
a steady-state error.
2. Integral time(I):
the controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. To eliminate the
steady-state error, an “integral part” needs to be added to the controller. The integral time
decides the relation between integral part and error. The integral part will be increased by
time even if the error is small. It gradually increases the controller output to eliminate the
error until it is 0. In this way a system can be stable without steady-state error by proportional
gain control and integral time control.
3. Differential control(D):
the controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input. During
elimination of the error, oscillation or instability may occur. The differential control can be
used to suppress these effects by acting before the error. That is, when the error is near 0,
the differential control should be 0. Proportional gain(P) + differential control(D) can be used
to improve the system state during PID adjustment.
When PID control is used in a constant pressure pump feedback application:
Set the application’s constant pressure value (bar) to be the set point of PID control. The pressure
sensor will send the actual value as PID feedback value. After comparing the PID set point and
PID feedback, there will be an error. Thus, the PID controller needs to calculate the output by
using proportional gain(P), integral time(I) and differential time(D) to control the pump. It controls
the drive to have different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4-20mA
signal corresponding to 0-10 bar as feedback to the drive.
no fuse breaker
(NFB) water pump
R(L1) R(L1) U(T1)

S(L2) S(L2) V(T2) IM
T(L3) T(L3)
3~
W(T 3)
throttle
F eedback 4-20mA
cor responds pressure
0-10bar sensor
ACI/A VI
(4- 20mA /0- 10V )
DC
ACM - +
analog si gnal common
1. Pr.00-04 is set to 10 (Display PID analog feedback signal value (b) (%))
2. Pr.01-12 Acceleration Time will be set as required
3. Pr.01-13 Deceleration Time will be set as required
4. Pr.00-21=0 to operate from the digital keypad
5. Pr.00-20=0, the set point is controlled by the digital keypad
6. Pr.08-00=1 (Negative PID feedback from analog input)
7. ACI analog input Pr. 03-01 set to 5, PID feedback signal.
12-127
8. Pr.08-01-08-03 will be set as required

8.1 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-01(Proportional Gain (P))
8.2 If there is no vibration in the system, reduce Pr.08-02(Integral Time (I))
8.3 If there is no vibration in the system, increase Pr.08-03(Differential Time(D))
Refer to Pr.08-00 to 08-21 for PID parameters settings.
Proportional Gain (P)

Settings 0.0~500.0%
It is used to eliminate the system error. It is usually used to decrease the error and get the faster
response speed. But if setting too large value in Pr.08-01, it may cause the system oscillation and
instability.
If the other two gains (I and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective.
Integral Time (I)

0.00: Disable
The integral controller is used to eliminate the error during stable system. The integral control
doesn’t stop working until error is 0. The integral is acted by the integral time. The smaller integral
time is set, the stronger integral action will be. It is helpful to reduce overshoot and oscillation to
make a stable system. At this moment, the decreasing error will be slow. The integral control is
often used with other two controls to become PI controller or PID controller.
This parameter is used to set the integral time of I controller. When the integral time is long, it will
have small gain of I controller, the slower response and bad external control. When the integral
time is short, it will have large gain of I controller, the faster response and rapid external control.
When the integral time is too small, it may cause system oscillation.
If the integral time is set as 0.00, Pr.08-02 will be disabled.
Derivative Control (D)

The differential controller is used to show the change of system error and it is helpful to preview
the change of error. So the differential controller can be used to eliminate the error to improve
system state. With the suitable differential time, it can reduce overshoot and shorten adjustment
time. However, the differential operation will increase the noise interference. Please note that
too large differential will cause big noise interference. Besides, the differential shows the change
and the output of the differential will be 0 when there is no change. Therefore, the differential
control can’t be used independently. It needs to be used with other two controllers to make a PD
controller or PID controller.
This parameter can be used to set the gain of D controller to decide the response of error change.
The suitable differential time can reduce the overshoot of P and I controller to decrease the
oscillation and have a stable system. But too long differential time may cause system oscillation.
The differential controller acts for the change of error and can’t reduce the interference. It is not
12-128
recommended to use this function in the serious interference.
Upper limit of Integral Control

Settings 0.0~100.0%
This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency. The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
x (Pr.08-04 %).
Too large integral value will make the slow response due to sudden load change. In this way, it
may cause motor stall or machine damage.
PID Output Frequency Limit

Settings 0.0~110.0%
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The formula
is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) X Pr.08-05 %.
PID feedback value by communication protocol

Settings 0.00~200.00%
PID Delay Time

PID Mode Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
Pr.08-07 determines the primary low pass filter time when in PID control. Setting a large time
constant may slow down the response rate of drive.
Output frequency of PID control will filter by primary low pass function. This function could filtering
a mix frequencies. A long primary low pass time means filter degree is high and vice versa.
Inappropriate setting of delay time may cause system error.
PI Control: controlled by the P action only, and thus, the deviation cannot be eliminated entirely. To
eliminate residual deviations, the P + I control will generally be utilized. And when the PI control is
utilized, it could eliminate the deviation incurred by the targeted value changes and the constant
external interferences. However, if the I action is excessively powerful, it will delay the responding
toward the swift variation. The P action could be used solely on the loading system that
possesses the integral components.
PD Control: when deviation occurred, the system will immediately generate some operation load
that is greater than the load generated single handedly by the D action to restrain the increment of
the deviation. If the deviation is small, the effectiveness of the P action will be decreasing as well.
The control objects include occasions with integral component loads, which are controlled by the
12-129
P action only, and sometimes, if the integral component is functioning, the whole system will be
vibrating. On such occasions, in order to make the P action’s vibration subsiding and the system
stabilizing, the PD control could be utilized. In other words, this control is good for use with
loadings of no brake functions over the processes.
PID Control: Utilize the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to restrain the vibration,
thereafter, combine with the P action to construct the PID control. Use of the PID method could
obtain a control process with no deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
Serial connection
Inp ut Selection of the PID Cancelled F requ ency
PID Targe ted Value 08-00=0 command
00-20:KPC-CC 01/ or 02-01~ 06=21( pid off)
RS485 1
03-00~0 2: UP/D own 2
ke y PG
+
PID offset
08-06
+ P D +
Pro portio n Di ffere nti al
gain Time
Display of th e PID fee dback - 08- 01 08-03 +
00-04=1 0 display o f t he PID
PID feed back Delay
Time 08-05
Inp ut Selection I 08-07 PID Fr eq.
of the PID Fee dback out put
08-00:AVI/ACI 08-02
Int egral Time 08- 04 command
AUI /PG uppe r limit
limit
for
Int egral
08-09
Treatme nt o f t he
F eedback Signal Fau lt
If Hz>08 -05
time exce eds 08- 08
Parallel connection
In pu t Se le ctio n o f the
P ID Ta rg ete d Va lu e
0 0- 20 :KP C-CC0 1/RS48 5
0 3- 00 ~0 2: UP/Do wn ke y PG
PID Can cel le d 0 8- 00 =0 Fr eq ue ncy
o r 02 -0 1~06 =21 (p id off) co mman d
1
2
P
Pro po rti on ga in
P ID offset
+
08-01 08-06
+ D
Diffe re ntial
+
Time
- 08-03 + 08-05
Displ ay o f the PID fe ed ba ck PID Delay
I
0 0- 04 =1 0 d isp la y o f the Time
P ID fee db ack
08-07
P ID Fre q.
08-02 o utp ut
Integra l Time 08-04
In pu t Se le ctio n co mman d limi t
o f the PID Fe ed ba ck u pp er li mit
0 8- 00 :AVI/A CI fo r
In teg ra l 0 8- 09
A UI/PG Tre atme nt o f the Fee db a ck Sign al Fau lt
If Hz>08 -0 5, ti me exce ed s 08 -0 8
12-130
Feedback Signal Detection Time

Pr.08-08 is valid only if the feedback signal is ACI.
This parameter sets the detection time of abnormal PID derative. If detection time is set to 0.0,
detection function is disabled.
Feedback Signal Fault Treatment

Factory Setting: 0
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
This parameter is valid only when the feedback signal is ACI.
AC motor drive acts when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder) feedback)
are abnormal.
Sleep Frequency
Wake-up Frequency
Sleep Time
If the command frequency falls below the sleep frequency, for the specified time in Pr. 08-12, then
the drive will shut off the output and wait until the command frequency rises above Pr.08-11.
Frequency command
08-11
Wake-up frequency actual output frequency
08-10
Sleep frequency
sleep time 0Hz

08-12
Sleep Function
PID Deviation Level

Settings 1.0~50.0%
PID Deviation Time
12-131
Filter Time for PID Feedback

When the PID control function is normal, it should calculate within a period of time and close to the
setpoint value.
Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID
reference target value – detection value| > Pr.08-13 PID Deviation Level and exceeds Pr.08-14
setting, the PID control fault occurs. The treatment will be done as Pr.08-09 setting.
PID Compensation Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Parameter setting
1: Analog input
PID Compensation
Factory Setting: 0
Settings -100.0~+100.0%
Setting of Sleep Mode Function
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Follow PID output command
1: Follow PID feedback signal
Wake-up Integral Limit
Settings 0.0~200.0%
Enable PID to Change the Operation Direction

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable change of direction
1: Enable change of direction
12-132
09 Communication Parameters The parameter can be set during the operation.
8 1
M odbus RS- 485
When us ing communication devi ces, Pin 1~2,7, 8: Reserv ed
connects AC dr ive with P C by us ing Pin 3, 6: GND
Delt a I FD6530 or I FD6500. Pin 4: SG-
Pin 5: SG+
RS-485
COM1 Communication Address

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1~254
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication address
for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each AC motor
drive must be different and unique.
COM1 Transmission Speed

Settings 4.8~115.2 Kbps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC, etc.)
and AC motor drive.
COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment

Factory Setting: 3
3: No warning and continue operation
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
COM1 Time-out Detection

0.0: Disable
It is used to set the transmission time between communication and keypad.
COM1 Communication Protocol

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1: 7, N, 2 for ASCII
2: 7, E, 1 for ASCII
3: 7, O, 1 for ASCII
6: 8, N, 1 for ASCII
7: 8, N, 2 for ASCII
12-133
12: 8, N, 1 for RTU
13: 8, N, 2 for RTU
14: 8, E, 1 for RTU
15: 8, O, 1 for RTU
16: 8, E, 2 for RTU
17: 8, O, 2 for RTU
Control by PC or PLC (Computer Link)
A VFD-C2000 can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following
modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal
Unit).Users can select the desired mode along with the RS-485 serial port communication
protocol in Pr.09-00.
MODBUS ASCII（American Standard Code for Information Interchange）: Each byte data is the
combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII,
consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
1. Code Description
Communication protocol is in hexadecimal, ASCII: ”0”, “9”, “A”, “F”, every 16 hexadecimal
represent ASCII code. For example:
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’

ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
（7, N , 2）
Start Stop Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
（7 , E , 1）
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
12-134
（7 , O , 1）
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
11-bit character frame (For RTU):

（8 , N , 2）
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
（8 , E , 1）
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
（8 , O , 1）
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
2. Communication Protocol
Communication Data Frame: ASCII mode
STX Start character = ‘:’ (3AH)
Address Hi Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Address Lo
Function Hi Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Lo
DATA (n-1) Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
…….
n<=16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
END Lo
Communication Data Frame: RTU mode

START A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address Communication address: 8-bit address
Function Command code: 8-bit command
12-135
DATA (n-1) Contents of data:

n×8-bit data, n<=16
…….
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC check sum:
CRC CHK High 16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
END A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address (Communication Address)

Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0,
means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the
master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)

The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message: Response Message
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of data ‘0’
‘1’ (count by byte) ‘4’
Starting address
‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of starting ‘7’
‘0’ address 2102H ‘7’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘0’
Content of address 2103H
‘D’ ‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC Check
LF ‘1’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
21H Number of data
Starting data address 04H
02H (count by byte)
Number of data 00H Content of data 17H
(count by world) 02H address 2102H 70H
12-136
CRC CHK Low 6FH Content of data 00H

CRC CHK High F7H address 2103H 00H
CRC CHK Low FEH
CRC CHK High 5CH
06H: single write, write single data to register.

Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
Data address Data address
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘7’ ‘7’
Data content Data content
‘7’ ‘7’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘7’ ‘7’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘1’ ‘1’
CR CR
END END
LF LF
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 06H Function 06H
01H 01H
Data address Data address
00H 00H
17H 17H
Data content Data content
70H 70H
CRC CHK Low 86H CRC CHK Low 86H
CRC CHK High 22H CRC CHK High 22H
10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)

Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.04-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.04-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.
ASCII Mode
ADR 1 ‘0’ ADR 1 ‘0’
ADR 0 ‘1’ ADR 0 ‘1’
CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’
CMD 0 ‘0’ CMD 0 ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘5’ ‘5’
Starting data address Starting data address
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of data ‘0’ Number of data ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ (count by word) ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
12-137
Number of data ‘0’ ‘E’

LRC Check
(count by byte) ‘4’ ‘8’
‘1’ CR
END
‘3’ LF
The first data content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
‘F’
The second data content
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
‘A’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode:
ADR 01H ADR 01H
CMD 10H CMD 1 10H
05H 05H
Starting data address Starting data address
00H 00H
Number of data 00H Number of data 00H
(count by word) 02H (count by word) 02H
Number of data 04 41H
CRC Check Low
(count by byte)
13H CRC Check High 04H
The first data content
88H
The second data content 0FH
A0H
CRC Check Low ‘9’
CRC Check High ‘A’
Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, and the values
of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the
2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example,
01H+03H+21H+02H+00H+02H=29H, the 2’s-complement negation of 29H is D7H.
RTU mode:
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1:
Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2:
Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-bit CRC
register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3:
Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4:
12-138
If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then
repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB
zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5:
Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-bit
byte will have been processed.
Step 6:
Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until all
bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When
transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be
swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0Xffff;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0Xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc; // return register CRC
12-139
3. Address list
Content Address Function
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for
AC drive Parameters GGnnH
example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H.
0: No function
Command 1: Stop
2000H Bit 0-3
Write only 2: Run
3: Jog + Run
00B: No function
01B: FWD
Bit 4-5
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
00B: 1st accel/decel
01B: 2nd accel/decel
Bit 6-7
10B: 3rd accel/decel
11B: 4th accel/decel
Bit 8-11 000B: master speed
0001B: 1st accel/decel.
0010B: 2nd accel/decel
0011B: 3rd accel/decel
Bit 12 1: enable bit06-11 function
Bit 13~14 00B: No function
01B: operated by digital keypad
10B: operated by Pr.00-21 setting
11B: change operation source
Bit 15 Reserved
Command 2001H Frequency command
Write only Bit 0 1: EF (external fault) on
Bit 1 1: Reset
2002H
Bit 2 1: B.B. ON
Bit 3-15 Reserved
Status monitor Error code: refer to Pr.06-17 to Pr.06-22
2100H
Read only
AC Drive Operation Status
2101H Bit0 00b: Drive stops
01b: Drive decelerating
Bit1 10b: Drive standby
11b: Drive operating
Bit2 1: JOG Command
Operation Direction
Bit3 00b: FWD run
01b: from REV run to FWD run
Bit4 10b: REV run
11b: from FWD run to REV run
1: Master frequency controlled by communication
Bit8
interface
12-140

Bit9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
1: Operation command controlled by
Bit10
communication interface
Bit11 1: Parameter locked
Bit12 1: Enable to copy parameters from keypad
Bit13~15 Reserved
2102H Frequency command (F)
2103H Output frequency (H)
2104H Output current (AXX.X.X)
2105H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
2106H Output voltage (EXXX.X)
2107H Current step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation
2108H Reserved
2109H Counter value
201AH Power Factor Angle (XXX.X)
201BH Output Torque (%)
201CH Actual motor speed (rpm)
201DH Number of PG feed back pulses
201EH Number of PG2 pulse commands
201FH Power output (X.XXX)
2116H Multi-function display (Pr.00-04)
211BH Max. opeartion frequency (Pr.01-00) or Max. user defined value
(Pr.00-26)
2200H Display output current (A)
2201H Display counter value of TRG terminal (c)
2202H Display actual output frequency (H)
2203H Display DC-BUS voltage (u)
2204H Display output voltage of U, V, W (E)
2205H Display output power angle of U, V, W (n)
2206H Display actual motor speed kW of U, V, W (P)
2207H Display motor speed in rpm estimated by the drive or encoder
feedback (r00: positive speed, -00: negative speed)
2208H Display positive/negative output torque in %, estimated by the
drive (t0.0: positive torque, -0.0: negative torque)
2209H Display PG feedback (as NOTE 1)
220AH Display PID feedback value after enabling PID function in % (b)
220BH Display signal of AVI analog input terminal, 0-10V corresponds
to 0-100% (1.) (as NOTE 2)
220CH Display signal of ACI analog input terminal, 4-V20mA/0-10V
corresponds to 0-100% (2.) (as NOTE 2)
220DH Display signal of AUI analog input terminal, -10V~10V
corresponds to -100~100% (3.) (as NOTE 2)
220EH Display the IGBT temperature of drive power module in oC (c.)
220FH Display the temperature of capacitance in oC (i.)
2210H The status of digital input (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-12 (as
NOTE 3)
2211H The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18 (as
NOTE 4)
2212H Display the multi-step speed that is executing (S)
2213H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d.) (as NOTE
3)
2214H The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (O.) (as
NOTE 4)
2215H Number of actual motor revolution (PG1 of PG card) (P.) it will
start from 9 when the actual operation direction is changed or
keypad display at stop is 0. Max. is 65535 (P.)
2216H Pulse input frequency (PG2 of PG card)(S.)
12-141

2217H Pulse input position (PG card PG2), maximum setting is 65535.
2218H Position command tracing error (P.)
2219H Display times of counter overload (0.00~100.00%)
221AH Display GFF in % (G.)
221BH Display DCbus voltage ripples (Unit: Vdc) (r.)
221CH Display PLC register D1043 data (C)
221DH Display Pole of Permanent Magnet Motor
221EH User page displays the value in physical measure
221FH Output Value of Pr.00-05
2220H Number of motor tunrns when drive operates
2221H Opeartion position of motor
2222H Fan speed of the drive
2223H Control mode of the drive 0: speed mode 1: torque mode
2224H Carrier frequency of the drive
4. Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages
from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to
the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC
motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them.
An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be
displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the
exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an
exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example:
ASCII mode: RTU mode:
STX ‘:’ Address 01H
‘0’ Function 86H
Address
‘1’ Exception code 02H
‘8’ CRC CHK Low C3H
Function
‘6’ CRC CHK High A1H
‘0’
Exception code
‘2’
‘7’
LRC CHK
‘7’
CR
END
LF
The explanation of exception codes:

Exception
Explanation
code
Illegal data value:
1
The data value received in the command message is not available for the AC drive.
Illegal data address:
2 The data address received in the command message is not available for the AC
motor drive.
3 Parameters are locked: parameters can’t be changed
4 Parameters can’t be changed during operation
10 Communication time-out.
12-142
~ Reserved
Response Delay Time

Settings 0.0~200.0ms
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command as
shown in the following.
RS-485 BUS
PC or PLC command Response Message
of the AC Drive
Handling time Response Delay Time
of the AC drive Pr.09-09
Main Frequency of the Communication

When Pr.00-20 is set to 1 (RS485 communication). The AC motor drive will save the last
frequency command into Pr.09-10 when abnormal turn-off or momentary power loss. After reboots
the power, it will regards the frequency set in Pr.09-10 if no new frequency command is inputted.
Block Transfer 1
Block Transfer 2
Block Transfer 3
Block Transfer 4
Block Transfer 5
Block Transfer 6
Block Transfer 7
Block Transfer 8
Block Transfer 9
Block Transfer 10
Block Transfer 11
Block Transfer 12
Block Transfer 13
Block Transfer 14
Block Transfer 15
Block Transfer 16
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535
There is a group of block transfer parameter available in the AC motor drive (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20).
User can use them (Pr.09-11 to Pr.09-20) to save those parameters that you want to read.
12-143
~ Reserved
Communication Decoding Method

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0: Decoding Method 1
1: Decoding Method 2
Decoding Method 1 Decoding Method 2

Source of Digital Keypd Digital keypad controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
Operation External External terminal controls the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
Control Terminal
RS-485 Refer to address: 2000h~20FFh Refer to address: 6000h ~ 60FFh
CANopen Refer to index: 2020-01h~2020-FFh Refer to index:2060-01h ~ 2060-FFh
Communication Refer to address: 2000h ~ 20FFh Refer to address: 6000h ~ 60FFh
Card
PLC PLC commands the drive action regardless decoding method 1 or 2.
Internal Communication Protocol

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Modbus 485
-9: Reserve
-10: Internal Communication Master
-11: Reserve
-12: Internal PLC Control
~ Reserved
PLC Address
Factory Setting: 2
12-144
Settings 1~254
CANopen Slave Address

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1~127
CANopen Speed
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: 1M
1: 500k
2: 250k
3: 125k
4: 100k (Delta only)
5: 50k
CANopen Frequency Gain

Settings 1.00~2.00
CANopen Warning Record

Factory Setting: 0
Settings bit 0: CANopen Guarding Time out
bit 1: CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2: CANopen SYNC Time out
bit 3: CANopen SDO Time out
bit 4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5: Can Bus Off
bit 6: Error protocol of CANOPEN
CANopen Decoding Method
Factory Setting: 1
Settings 0: Delta defined decoding method
1: CANopen Standard DS402 protocol
CANopen Status
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
3: Pre Operation State
4: Operation State
12-145
5: Stop State
CANopen Control Status

Settings 0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick stop active state
13: Err reaction activation state
14: Error state
Reset CANopen Index

Settings: bit0: reset address 20XX to 0.
bit1: reset address 264X to 0
bit2: reset address 26AX to 0
bit3: reset address 60XX to 0
Reserved
CANopen Master Function

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
CANopen Master Address

Settings 1~127
~ Reserved
Identifications for Communication Card

Factory Setting: ##
Settings 0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
3: CANopen Slave/Master
12-146
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
Firmware Version of Communication Card

Factory Setting: ##
Settings Read only
Product Code
Factory Setting: ##
Settings Read only
Error Code
Factory Setting: ##
Settings Read only
~ Reserved
Address of Communication Card

Factory Setting: 1
Settings DeviceNet: 0-63
Profibus-DP: 1-125
Setting of DeviceNet Speed (according to Pr.09-72)

Factory Setting: 2
Settings Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125Kbps
1: 250Kbps
2: 500Kbps
3: 1Mbps (Delta only)
Non standard DeviceNet: (Delta only)
0: 10Kbps
1: 20Kbps
2: 50Kbps
3: 100Kbps
4: 125Kbps
5: 250Kbps
6: 500Kbps
7: 800Kbps
12-147
8: 1Mbps
Other Setting of DeviceNet Speed

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
It needs to use with Pr.09-71.
Setting 0: the baud rate can only be set to 0, 1, 2 or 3.
Setting 1: setting of DeviceNet baud rate can be the same as CANopen (setting 0-8).
Reserved
Reserved
IP Configuration of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Static IP
1: DynamicIP (DHCP)
Setting 0: it needs to set IP address manually.
Setting 1: IP address will be auto set by host controller.
IP Address 1 of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~255
Address Mask 1 of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~255
Getway Address 1 of the Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~255
12-148
Password for Communication Card (Low word)

Password for Communication Card (High word)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~255
Reset Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Reset, return to factory setting
Additional Setting for Communication Card

Factory Setting: 1
Settings Bit 0: Enable IP Filter
Bit 1: Internet parameters enable(1bit)
Enable to write internet parameters (1bit). This bit will change to disable
when it finishes saving the update of internet parameters.
Bit 2: Login password enable(1bit)
Enable login password (1bit). This bit will be changed to disable when it
finishes saving the update of internet parameters.
Status of Communication Card

Factory Setting: 0
Settings Bit 0: password enable
When the communication card is set with password, this bit is enabled.
When the password is clear, this bit is disabled.
12-149
10 PID Control This parameter can be set during operation.
In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator and PG is the
abbreviation for Pulse Generator.
Encoder Type Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: ABZ
2: ABZ (Delta encoder for PM motor)
3: Resolver (Standard encoder for PM motor)
4: ABZ/UVW (Standard encoder for PM motor)
For PG extension card EMC-PG01L and EMC-PG01O, set Pr.10-00=1. These extension cards
are for IM motor only.
For EMC-PG01U, when setting Pr.10-00=2 (Delta encoder) make sure SW1 is switched to D
(Delta type). If the setting for Pr.10-00, 10-01 and 10-02 has changed, please turn off the drive’s
power and reboots to prevent PM motor stall. This mode is suggested for PM motor.
For EMC-PG01R, when setting Pr.10-00=3 please also input 1024 ppr.
For EMC-PG01U, when setting Pr.10-00=4 (Standard ABZ/UVW Encoder) make sure SW1 is
switched to S (Standard Type). This mode is applicable for both IM and PM motor.
Encoder Pulse
Settings 1~20000
A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the
motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control, i.e.
the number of pulses for a cycle of A phase/B phase.
This setting is also the encoder resolution. With the higher resolution, the speed control will be
more accurate.
An errotic input to Pr.10-00 may result drive over current, motor stall, PM motor magnetic pole
origin detection error. If Pr.10-00 setting has changed, please trace the magnetic pole again, set
Pr.05-00=4 (static test for PM motor magnetic pole and PG origin again).
Encoder Input Type Setting

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse
run command
FWD REV
A
B
12-150
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse

run command
FWD REV
A
B
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L =reverse
direction, H=forward direction)
FWD REV
A
B
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=forward

direction, H=reverse direction)
FWD REV
A
B
5: Single-phase input
Output Setting for Frequency Division (denominator)

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1~255
This parameter is used to set the denominator for frequency division (for PG card EMC-PG01L or
EMC-PG01O). For example, when it is set to 2 with feedback 1024ppr, PG output will be
1024/2=512ppr.
Electrical Gear at Load Side A1

Electrical Gear at Motor Side B1
Electrical Gear at Load Side A2
Electrical Gear at Motor Side B2
Settings 1~65535
Parameters 10-04 to 10-07 can be used with the multi-function input terminal (set to 48) to switch
to Pr.10-04~10-05 or Pr.10-06~10-07 as shown as follows
12-151
PG D riv er
car d
Gear Gear Motor

load
A1 or A2 B1 or B2
encoder is us ed
at load side gear ratio
MI=48 ON = A2: B2
OF F=A 1:B 1
Treatment for Encoder Feedback Fault

Factory Setting: 2
1: Warn and RAMP to stop
2: Warn and COAST to stop
Detection Time of Encoder Feedback Fault

0: No function
When encoder loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time exceeds
the detection time for encoder feedback fault (Pr.10-09), the encoder signal error will occur. Refer
to the Pr.10-08 for encoder feedback fault treatment.
Encoder Stall Level

Settings 0~120%
0: No function
This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault occurs.
(Max. output frequency Pr.01-00 =100%)
Detection Time of Encoder Stall

Treatment for Encoder Stall

Factory Setting: 2
When the motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-10 setting and detection time exceeds Pr.10-11, it will
operate as Pr.10-12 setting.
12-152
Encoder Slip Range

Factory Setting: 50
Settings 0~50%
0: Disable
Detection Time of Encoder Slip
Treatment for Encoder Stall and Slip Error
Factory Setting: 2
When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds Pr.10-13 setting, detection time
exceeds Pr.10-14; it will start to accumulate time. If detection time exceeds Pr.10-14, the encoder
feedback signal error will occur. Refer to Pr.10-15 encoder stall and slip error treatment.
Pulse Input Type Setting (PG card: PG2)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a reverse
run command
FW D REV
A
B
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a reverse
run command
FW D RE V
A
B
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=reverse

direction, H=forward direction)
FWD REV
A
B
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (L=forward
direction, H=reverse direction)
FWD REV
A
B
When this setting is different from Pr.10-01 setting and the source of the frequency command is
pulse input (Pr.00-20 is set to 4 or 5), it may have 4 times frequency problem.
Example: Assume that Pr.10-01=1024, Pr.10-02=1, Pr.10-16=3, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it
12-153
needs 4096 pulses to rotate the motor a revolution.

Assume that Pr.10-01=1024, Pr.10-02=1, Pr.10-16=1, Pr.00-20=5, MI=37 and ON, it needs 1024
pulses to rotate the motor a revolution.
Position control diagram
d
Position dt kd
command
A 10- 21 11-25
B +
+ + Speed
Electr ical kp command
gear -
10- 17 11-00 bi t 0=0
10- 18 Position 11-24
feedbac k 11-00 bi t 0=1
11-05
Electrical Gear A
Electrical Gear B
Settings 1~65535
Rotation speed = pulse frequency/encoder pulse (Pr.10-00) * PG Electrical Gear A / PG Electrical
Gear B.
Positioning for Encoder Position

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535 pulse
This parameter determines the internal position in the position mode.
It needs to be used with multi-function input terminal setting =35 (enable position control).
When it is set to 0, it is the Z-phase position of encoder.
Range for Encoder Position Attained

Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~65535 pulse
This parameter determines the range for internal positioning position attained.
For example:
When the position is set by Pr.10-19 Positioning for Encoder Position and Pr.10-20 is set to 1000, it
reaches the position if the position is within 990-1010 after finishing the positioning.
Filter Time (PG2)

When Pr.00-20 is set to 5 and multi-function input terminal is set to 37 (OFF), the pulse command
will be regarded as frequency command. This parameter can be used to suppress the jump of
speed command.
Speed Mode (PG2)

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Electronic Frequency
12-154
1: Mechanical Frequency (base on pole pair)
Reserved
FOC&TQC Function Control

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~65535
Bit# Description
0 ASR control at sensorless torque
0:use PI as ASR; 1:use P as ASR
1~10 NA
11 Activate DC braking when executing zero torque command
0:ON , 1:OFF
12 FOC Sensorless mode, cross zero means speed goes from negative to
positive or positive to negative (forward to reverse direction or reverse to
forward direction). 0: determine by stator frequency , 1: determine by speed
command
13 NA
14 NA
15 Direction control at open loop status
0: Switch ON direction control 1: Switch OFF direction control
FOC Bandwidth of Speed Observer

Setting speed observer to higher bandwidth could shorten the speed response time but will create
greater noise interference during the speed observation. .
FOC Minimum Stator Frequency

Factory Setting:2.0
Settings 0.0~10.0%fN
This parameter is used to set the minimum level of stator frequency at operation status. This
setting ensures the stability and accuracy of observer and avoid interferences from voltage,
current and motor parameter.
FOC Low-pass Filter Time Constant

Factory Setting:50
Settings 1~1000ms
This parameter sets the low-pass filter time constant of a flux observer at start up. If the motor can
not be activated during the high-speed operation, please lower the setting in this parameter.
FOC Gain of Excitation Current Rise Time

Factory Setting:100
Settings 33~100% Tr (Tr: rotor time constant)
This parameter sets the drive’s excitation current rise time when activates at senslorless torque
mode. When the drive’s activation time is too long at torque mode, please adjust this parameter to
12-155
a shorter time constant.
Top Limit of Frequency Deviation

Pr.10-29 is for setting the maximum of frequency deviation.
Resolver Pole Pair

Factory Setting: 1
Settings 1~50
To use Pr.10-30 function, user must set Pr.10-00=3(Resolver Encoder) first.
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I/F Mode, current command

Factory Setting: 40
Settings 0~150%Irated (Rated current % of the drive)
PM Sensorless Obeserver Bandwith for High Speed Zone

PM Sensorless Observer Low-pass Filter Gain

PM Sensorless Control Word

Settings 0000~FFFFh
Bit No. Function Description
0 Reserved
1 Reserved
2 Choose a control mode to 0 :Start by IF mode
statrt. 1: Start by VF mode
3 Choose a mode to stop . 0 :Stop by IF mode
1 :Stop by VF mode
4 Reserved
5 Choose a control mode to stop 0 : When lower than Pr10-40, coast to stop
If lower than Pr10-40, decelerate to stop by VF mode.
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Frequency Point when switch from I/F mode to PM Sensorless mode
12-156

Frequency Point when switch from PM Sensorless Observation mde to I/F mode
I/F mode, low pass-filter time
Initial Angle Detection Time
Factory Setting: 5
Settings 0~20 ms
PM Sensorless Adjustment Procedure
1. When using high frequency standstill VFD parameter tuning, use VFD software v1.45 to
monitor adjustment procedure. To download VFD Sotware v1.45. go to:
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/drive/ac_motor/download/software/VFDSoft%20v1.45.zip
2. Testing PM High Frequency Standstill VFD (calculation of Rs, Ld, Lg)
Procedures:
A. Set control mode as VF mode (Pr00-10=0, Pr00-11=0
B. Output Frequency of Motor 1 (Pr01-01)
C. Output Voltage of Motor 1 (Pr01-02)
D. Induction Motor and Permanent Magnet Motor Selection (Pr05-33=1)
E. Full-load current of Permanent Magnet Motor(Pr05-34
F. Set Moto Auto Tuning Pr 05-00 =13; High frequency and blocked rotor test for PM motor. Then
run the drive.
3. Set control mode as PM sensorless Mode (Parameters 00-10=0, 00-11=6)
4. Set VFD Prameters
; Pr05-35 Rated Power of Permanent Magnet Motor
; Pr05-36 Rated speed of Permanent Magnet Motor
; Pr05-37 Pole number of Permanent Magnet Motor
; Pr05-38 Inertia of Permanent Magnet Motor
5. 設定 ASR 參數 Set ASR Parameters
; Pr11-00 bit0=1: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
; Pr11-02：ASR1/ASR2 Switch Frequency, it is recommended to set Pr10-39 higher than
10Hz.
; Pr11-03: ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth and Pr11-03, ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth. Do not set
Low-speed Bandwith too high to avoid dissipation of the estimator.
6. Set speed estimator and speed control’s parameter.
; Pr10-39 Frequency when switch from I/F Mode to PM sensorless mode.
; Pr10-32 PM Sensorless Obeserver Bandwith for High Speed Zone
7. Zero-load test
; Refer to switch point prodcedure of I/F and FOC as shown in the image below.
12-157
Set frequency com man d

(Hig her th an switch ing comm and)
Big variation of curre nt or

OC wh ile switch ing
Perfo rm RUN co mm and
Lower Per Unit of System
Inertia (Pr.11-01)/
Lower ASR1 Low-speed
Ban dwid th (Pr.11-03 )
Can the d rive run

NO
no rm ally until switching
to higher freque ncy?
Big variation of output
frequ ency or dissipa tion Observe output current/
fequen cy via
IncreasePM Sensorless Yes co mm nucation intreface
Observer Band width for
Hig h Spee d Zone (Pr.10-32)/
Decrease Pe r Unit of
System Inertia (Pr.11 -01)
NO Whe n running at high

frequency, is the freq uency
stable?
Obse rve o utput current/
Yes fequency via
com mnucation in treface
Increase load an d Test

Proced ure for switching between I/
F mo de and FOC mo de
12-158
11 Advanced Parameters This parameter can be set during operation.
In this parameter group, ASR is the abbreviation for Adjust Speed Regulator
System Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Auto tuning for ASR and APR
1: Inertia estimate (only in FOCPG mode)
2: Zero servo
3: Dead time compensation closed
7: Selection to save or not save the freqeuncy
8: Maximum speed of point to point position control
Bit 0=0: Pr.11-06 to 11-11 will be valid and Pr.11-03~11-05 are invalid.
Bit 0=1: system will generate an ASR setting. At this moment, Pr.11-06~11-11 will be invalid and
Pr.11-03~11-05 are valid.
Bit 1=0: no function.
Bit 1=1: Inertia estimate function is enabled. (Bit 1 setting would not activate the estimation
process, please set Pr.05-00=12 to begin FOC/TQC Sensorless inertia estimating)
Bit 2=0: no function.
Bit 2=1: when frequency command is less than Fmin (Pr.01-07), it will use zero servo function.
NO
Estimate i ner tia value
YES
Setting auto gain adjustment

Pr.11-00=1 Adjust gai n value by manual
Pr.11-00=0 ( factor y setting)
Adjust Pr.11- 03, 11-04 and 11-05
separately by speed response Adjust Pr.11- 06, 11-07, 11- 08,
11-09, 11- 10 and 11- 11
Adjust by r equi rement separately by speed response
Pr.11-13 ( PD FF function)
Adjust by r equi rement
Pr.11-14 ( for general,
no need to adj us t)

Pr.11-02
(A SR1/ASR 2 switch frequency)

Pr.11-17~20 ( tor que limit)
12-159
PI PI
Pr.11-05
11-06 us e to adjust the
11-07 1. Pr. 11-01 valu e
stren gth o f ze ro -
se rvo lo ck 2. set Pr.11 -0 0 to bit 0=1
11-08
11-04
11-09
11-10 11-05
11-11 5Hz 5Hz 5Hz 5Hz
Hz Hz
0Hz 11-02 0Hz 11-02
PI ad justment-ma nual gain PI ad justment-auto gai n
Bit 7=0: frequency is saved before power turns off. When power turns on again, the display
frequency will be the memorized frequency.
Bit 7=1: frequency is not saved before power turns off. When power turns ON again, the display
frequency will be 0.00Hz.
Bit 8=0: maximum speed for point-to-point position control is control by the setting of Pr.11-43.
Bit 8=1: maximum speed for point-to-point position control is control by the multi-step speed
setting of the external terminal device. When multi-step speed of the external device is set to 0,
the maximum operation speed will bet the setting of Pr.11-43.
Per Unit of System Inertia

Settings 1~65535（256=1PU）
To get the system inertia from Pr.11-01, user needs to set Pr.11-00 to bit1=1 and execute
continuous forward/reverse running.
Unit of induction motor system inertia is 0.001kg-m^2:
Power Setting Power Setting Power Setting
1HP 2.3 20HP 95.3 100HP 1056.5
2HP 4.3 25HP 142.8 125HP 1275.3
3HP 8.3 30HP 176.5 150HP 1900.0
5HP 14.8 40HP 202.5 175HP 2150.0
7.5HP 26.0 50HP 355.5 215HP 2800.0
10HP 35.8 60HP 410.8 300HP 3550.0
15HP 74.3 75HP 494.8
The base value for induction motor system inertia is set by Pr.05-38 and the unit is in 0.001kg-m^2.
ASR1/ASR2 Switch Frequency

ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth

Factory Setting: 10
Settings 1~40Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
12-160
ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth

Factory Setting: 10
Zero-speed Bandwidth
Factory Setting: 10
After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters
Pr.11-03, 11-04 and 11-05 separately by speed response. The larger number you set, the faster
response you will get. Pr.11-02 is the switch frequency for low-speed/high-speed bandwidth.
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 1

Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~40 Hz (IM)/ 1~100Hz (PM)
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 1
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (PI) 2

Factory Setting: 10
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 2
ASR(Auto Speed Regulation) Control (P) of Zero Speed
Factory Setting: 10
ASR(Auto Speed Regulation) Control (I) of Zero Speed
Gain for ASR Speed Feed Forward

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~100%
This parameter is used to improve speed response.
11- 12
G ain for ASR
speed feed for war d
+
+
00- 20 ASR + Tor que
command
- +
Tor que limit 11- 14
11- 17~11- 20
Speed feedback
T q B ias
12-161
PDFF Gain Value

Factory Setting: 30
Settings 0~200%
After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00 to bit 0=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-13 to reduce
overshoot. Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation.
This parameter will be invalid when Pr.05-24 is set to 1.
frequency
PI
PD FF
T ime
Low-pass Filter Time of ASR Output

It is used to set the filter time of ASR command.
Notch Filter Depth
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0~20db
Notch Filter Frequency
This parameter is used to set resonance frequency of mechanical system. It can be used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.
The larger number you set Pr.11-15, the better suppression resonance function you will get.
The notch filter frequency is the resonance of mechanical frequency.
Forward Motor Torque Limit

Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
Reverse Motor Torque Limit
Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
Settings 0~500%
The motor rated torque is 100%. The settings for Pr.11-17 to Pr.11-20 will compare with
Pr.03-00=7, 8, 9, 10. The minimum of the comparison result will be torque limit.
Calculation equation for motor rated torque:
P(W )
T ( N .M ) =
Motor rated torque= ω (rad / s) ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
12-162
RPM × 2π
= rad / s
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。 60
Po sitiv e
to rque
Rev ers e mot or mode Forward mo tor mo de
06-1 2 current limit 06-1 2 current limit
Exte rnal ana lo g t ermin als E xt ernal an alog t erminals

Pr. 03-00~02 P r. 03-00 ~02
7: positive to rque limit 7: po sitiv e t orque limit The level o f t orque limit will b e
10: pos itiv e/n egat iv e torque limit 10: pos itiv e/ne gativ e t orque limit th e min. va lu e of fo llowing thre e v alues
9: regen erativ e t orque limit
Pr. 11-19 Pr. 11-17

Reverse rege nerat ive Fo rwa rd moto r
to rque limit t orque limit
s peed Q uadr ant II Q uadr ant I speed
Q uadr an t III Q ua dr an t IV
Pr. 11-20 Pr. 11-18

Reverse mot or Forward re genera tive
to rque limit t orque limit
Ex te rnal ana lo g t ermin als E xt ernal an alog t erminals

Pr. 03-00~ 03-0 2 Pr. 03-00~03-02
8: nega tiv e to rque limit 8 : ne gativ e t orque limit
10: positive/n egat ive torque limit 10: pos itive/ne gativ e t orque limit
06-1 2 current limit 06-1 2 c urrent limit

Reverse mot or mode Nega tive Forward mo tor mo de
to rque
Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1

Factory Setting: 90
Settings 0~200%
Gain Value of Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2

Factory Setting: 90
Settings 0~200%
Pr.11-21 and 11-22 are used to adjust the output voltage of flux weakening curve.
For the spindle application, the adjustment method is
1. It is used to adjust the output voltage when exceeding rated frequency.
2. Monitor the output voltage
3. Adjust Pr.11-21 (motor 1) or Pr.11-22 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach motor
rated voltage.
4. The larger number it is set, the larger output voltage you will get.
12-163
output tor que

Fl ux weakening cur ve
11-21
or
11-22
100%
90%
01-01 frequency
or
01-35
Speed Response of Flux Weakening Area

Factory Setting: 65
Settings 0: Disable
0~150%
It is used to control the speed in the flux weakening area. The larger value is set in Pr.11-23, the
faster acceleration/deceleration will generate. In general, it is not necessary to adjust this
parameter.
APR Gain
Settings 0.00~40.00 (IM)/ 0~100.00Hz (PM)
Kip gain of internal position is determined by Pr.11-05.
Gain Value of APR Feed Forward
Factory Setting: 30
Settings 0~100
For the position control, if it set a larger value in Pr.11-25, it can shorten the pulse differential and
speed up the position response. But it may overshoot.
When the multi-function input terminal is set to 37(ON), this parameter can be set as required. If
this parameter is set to a non zero value and adjust Pr.10-21 (PG2 Filter Time) to reduce the
position overshoot and pulse differential. If it is set to 0, it won’t have overshoot problem in
position control but the pulse differential is decided by Pr.11-05 (KP gain).
APR Curve Time

It is valid when the multi-function input terminal is set to 35(ON). The larger it is set, the longer the
position time will be.
12-164
11-46
11-45
Ou tput
Frequency
PG Fe edback 10-19
10-0 0
10-0 1
RUN
M I=d3 5
M O=d 39
Time

Max. Torque Command
Settings 0~500%
The upper limit of torque command is 100%.
P(W )
motor rated torque: T ( N .M ) = ; P(W) value= Pr.05-02;
ω (rad / s)
RPM × 2π
ω(rad/s) value= Pr.05-03。 = rad / s
60
Source of Torque Offset

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
2: Torque offset setting (Pr.11-29)
3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.11-30 to Pr.11-32)
This parameter is the source of torque offset.
When it is set to 3, source of torque offset would determine Pr.11-30 to Pr.11-32 by
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will regard Pr.11-30~11-32 by the multi-function
input terminals (MI) setting (31, 32 or 33).
N.O. switch status: ON= contact closed, OFF= contact open
Pr. 11-32 Pr. 11-31 Pr. 11-30
MI=33(High) MI=32(Mid) MI=31(Low) Torque Offset
OFF OFF OFF None
OFF OFF ON 11-30
OFF ON OFF 11-31
OFF ON ON 11-30+11-31
ON OFF OFF 11-32
ON OFF ON 11-30+11-32
ON ON OFF 11-31+11-32
ON ON ON 11-30+11-31+11-32
Torque Offset Setting
12-165

Settings 0.0~100.0%
This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.

P(W )
ω (rad / s)
RPM × 2π
60
High Torque Offset

Settings 0.0~100.0%
Middle Torque Offset
Settings 0.0~100.0%
Low Torque Offset
Settings 0.0~100.0%
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will regard Pr.11-30, Pr.11-31 and Pr.11-32 by the
multi-function input terminals setting (31, 32 or 33). The motor rated torque is 100%.
P(W )
ω (rad / s)
RPM × 2π
60
Source of Torque Command

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Digital Keypad (Pr.11-34)
1: RS485 serial communication
2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
3: CANopen
4: Reserved
When Pr.11-33 is set to 0, torque command can be set in Pr.11-34.
When Pr.11-33 is set to 1 or 2, Pr.11-34 would only display the torque command
Torque Command
Settings -100.0~100.0%(Pr.11-27=100%)
This parameter is for the torque command. When Pr.11-27 is set to 250% and Pr.11-34 is set to
100%, actual torque command=250X100%=250% motor rated torque.
12-166
The drive will save the setting to the record before power turns off.
Low-pass Filter Time of Torque Command

When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay. When
the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable. User can
adjust the setting by the control and response situation.
Speed Limit Selection

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Set by Pr.11-37 (Forward speed limit) and Pr.11-38 (Reverse speed limit)
1: Set by Pr.11-37,11-38 and Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency
Command)
2: Set by Pr.00-20 (Source of Master Frequency Command).
Speed limit function: in TQCPG, when the motor speed is accelerated to speed limit value
(Pr.11-36, 11-37 and 11-38), it will switch to speed control mode to stop acceleration.
When the torque is positive direction, speed limit is positive direction. When the torque is negative
direction, speed limit is negative direction.
Pr. 11-36= 1 Pr. 11-36= 1
Pr. 11-36= 0 Whe n it is reverse runn in g,
Whe n it is f orward runn in g,
Forward/re vers e ru nning runn in g direc tion is limited
runn in g direc tion is limited
direc tion are by Pr. 11-37
by Pr. 00-20
limit ed b y Pr.11 -37 rev ers e runn in g direc tion
rev ers e runn in g direc tion
and Pr.1 1-38. is limit ed by P r.00-20 .
is limit ed by P r.11-38 .
to rque to rque to rque
mot or mot or mot or

speed speed speed
11-37 00-20 11-37
11-38 11-38 00-20
Forward Speed Limit (torque mode)

Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~120%
Reverse Speed Limit (torque mode)
Factory Setting: 10
Settings 0~120%
These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite
direction. (Pr.01-00 max. output frequency=100%)
Zero Torque Command Mode

Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0: Torque mode
1: Speed mode
This parameter defines the torque command mode at 0% of torque output. When Pr.11-39 is set
12-167
as 0 (the torque mode), if torque command is 0%, the motor will produce excitation current but no
torque current. When Pr.11-39 is set as 1 (the speed mode), if torque command is 0%, the AC
motor drive can still produce torque current through speed controller to prevent motor race and
the drive will also atomatically adjust the speed to 0 when the speed command is not equal to 0.
Command Source of Point-to-Point Position Control

Factory Settings:0
Settings 0: External terminal
1: Reserved
2: RS485
3: CAN
4: PLC
Reserved
系統控制旗標
Factory Settings: 0000
Settings 0000~FFFFh
Bit No. Function Description

0 At torque mode, selection between 0:Speed control at torque mode, the largest current
speed control and current control. limit is the torque command.
1: Speed control at torque mode, P06-12 the largest
current limit is Pr06-12
1 FWD/REV direction control 0: FWD/REV cannot be controlled by 02-12 bit 0 & 1
1: FWD/REV can be controlled by 02-12 bit 0&1
2 Fuzzy PID selection control 0: Fuzzy PID enabled
1: Fuzzy PID disabled
3~15 Reserved
Max. Frequency of Point- to-Point Position Control

Factory Settings:10.00
Accel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control

Settings 0.00~655.35sec
Decel. Time of Point-to Point Position Control

Settings 0.00~655.35sec
12-168
Position
M ax. Fre quency

Speed
11-4 3
11 -44 11-45
Accel. tim e Decel. time
12-169
Chapter 13 Warning Codes|C2000 Series
Chapter 13Warning Codes
D i s p l ay e r r o r s i g n a l
Warning
A b b r e v i a t e e r ro r c o d e
CE01 T h e c o d e i s d i sp l a y e d a s s h o w n o n K P C - C E 0 1 .
Comm. Error 1 Display error desc ription
Display on LCM Keypad Descriptions
Warning
CE01 Modbus function code error
Comm. Error 1
Warning
CE02 Address of Modbus data is error
Comm. Error 2
Warning
CE03 Modbus data error
Comm. Error 3
Warning
CE04 Modbus communication error
Comm. Error 4
Warning
CE10 Modbus transmission time-out
Comm. Error 10
Warning
CP10 Keypad transmission time-out
Keypad time out
Warning
SE1 Keypad COPY error 1
Save Error 1
Warning
Save Err or 2
Warning
Copy M odel Err 3
13-1
Warning
oH1 IGBT over-heating warning
Over heat 1 warn
Warning
oH2 Capacity over-heating warning
Over heat 2 warn
Warning
PID PID feedback error
PID FBK Error
Warning ACI signal error

ANL When Pr03-19 is set to 1 and 2.
Analog loss
Warning
uC Low current
Under Current
Warning
AUE Auto tuning error
Auto-tune error
Warning
PGFB PG feedback error
PG FBK Warn
Warning
PGL PG feedback loss
PG Loss Warn
Warning
oSPD Over-speed warning
Over Speed Warn
Warning
DAvE Over speed deviation warning
Deviation Warn
Warning
PHL Phase loss
Phase Loss
Warning
ot1 Over torque 1
Over Torque 1
13-2
Warning
ot2 Over torque 2
Over Torque 2
Warning
oH3 Motor over-heating
Motor Over Heat
Warning
oSL Over slip
Over Slip Warn
Warning
tUn Auto tuning processing
Auto tuning
Warning
CGdn CAN guarding time-out 1
Guarding T-out
Warning
CHbn CAN heartbeat time-out 2
Heartbeat T-out
Warning
CSYn CAN synchrony time-out
SYNC T-out
Warning
CbFn CAN bus off
Can Bus Off
Warning
CSdn CAN SDO transmission time-out
SDO T-out
Warning
CSbn CAN SDO received register overflow
Buf Overflow
Warning
Cbtn CAN boot up error
Boot up fault
Warning
CPtn CAN format error
Error Protocol
13-3
Warning
CIdn CAN index error
CAN/S Idx exceed
Warning
CAdn CAN station address error
CAN/S Addres set
Warning
CFrn CAN memory error
CAN/S FRAM fail
Warning
PLod PLC download error
Opposite Defect
Warning
PLSv Save error of PLC download
Save mem defect
Warning
PLdA Data error during PLC operation
Data defect
Warning
PLFn Function code of PLC download error
Function defect
Warning
PLor PLC register overflow
Buf overflow
Warning
PLFF Function code of PLC operation error
Function defect
Warning
PLSn PLC checksum error
Check sum error
Warning
PLEd PLC end command is missing
No end command
Warning
PLCr PLC MCR command error
PLC MCR error
13-4
Warning
PLdF PLC download fail
Download fail
Warning
PLSF PLC scan time exceed
Scane time fail
Warning
PCGd CAN Master guarding error
CAN/M G uard err
Warning
PCbF CAN Master bus off
CAN/M bus off
Warning
PCnL CAN Master node error
CAN/M Node Lack
Warning
PCCt CAN/M cycle time-out
Warning
PCSF CAN/M SDOover
CAN/M SDO over
Warning
PCSd CAN/M SDO time-out
CAN/M Sdo Tout
Warning
PCAd CAN/M station address error
CAN/M Addres set
Warning Duplicate MAC ID error

ECid Node address setting error
ExCom ID failed
13-5
Warning
ECLv Low voltage of communication card
ExCom pwr loss
Warning
ECtt Communication card in test mode
ExCom Test Mode
Warning
ECbF DeviceNet bus-off
ExCom Bus off
Warning
ECnP DeviceNet no power
ExCom No power
Warning
ECFF Factory default setting error
ExCom Facty def
Warning
ECiF Serious internal error
ExCom Inner err
Warning
ECio IO connection break off
ExCom IONet brk
Warning
ECPP Profibus parameter data error
ExCom Pr data
Warning
ECPi Profibus configuration data error
ExCom Conf data
Warning
ECEF Ethernet Link fail
ExCom Link fail
Warning
ECto Communication time-out for communication card and drive
ExCom Inr T-out
Warning
ECCS Check sum error for Communication card and drive
ExCom Inr CRC
13-6
Warning
ECrF Communication card returns to default setting
ExCom Rtn def
Warning
ECo0 Modbus TCP exceed maximum communication value
ExCom MTC P over
Warning
ECo1 EtherNet/IP exceed maximum communication value
ExCom EIP over
Warning
ECiP IP fail
ExCom IP fail
Warning
EC3F Mail fail
ExCom Mail fail
Warning
Ecby Communication card busy
ExCom Busy
Warning
Plra Adjust RTC
RTC Adjust
13-7
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions |C2000 Series
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions
D i s p l ay e r r o r s i g n a l
Warning
A b b r e v i a t e e r ro r c o d e
CE01 T h e c o d e i s d i sp l a y e d a s s h o w n o n K P C - C E 0 1 .
Comm. Error 1 Display error desc ription
Fault Name Fault Descriptions Corrective Actions

1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible
Over-current during poor insulation at the output.
Fault acceleration 2. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the
ocA (Output current exceeds Acceleration Time.
triple rated current during 3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Oc at accel
acceleration.) Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher
power model.

Fault deceleration 2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the
ocd (Output current exceeds Deceleration Time.
Oc at decel
deceleration.) Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher
power model.

Fault steady state operation 2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for
ocn (Output current exceeds possible motor stall.
Oc at normal SPD
constant speed.) Replace the AC motor drive with the next higher
power model.
Fault Hardware failure in

ocS Return to the factory
current detection
Oc at stop
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded,

short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor
drive rated current, the AC motor drive power
module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for
Fault AC motor drive protection, not for protecting the
GFF Ground fault user.
1. Check the wiring connections between the AC
Ground fault
motor drive and motor for possible short circuits,
also to ground.
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is
damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the output.
14-1

Short-circuit is detected
Fault between upper bridge
occ Return to the factory
and lower bridge of the
Short Circuit IGBT module
1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated

DC BUS over-voltage AC motor drive input voltage range.
Fault during acceleration 2. Check for possible voltage transients.
ovA (230V: DC 450V; 460V: 3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative
Ov at accel DC 900V) voltage, please increase the Deceleration Time
or add an optional brake resistor.

DC BUS over-voltage AC motor drive input voltage range.
Fault during deceleration 2. Check for possible voltage transients.
ovd (230V: DC 450V; 460V: 3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative
Ov at decel DC 900V) voltage, please increase the Deceleration Time

AC motor drive input voltage range.
Fault DC BUS over-voltage at 2. Check for possible voltage transients.
ovn constant speed (230V: DC
3. If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative
450V; 460V: DC 900V) voltage, please increase the Deceleration Time
Ov at nor mal SPD
Fault 1. Check if the input voltage falls within the rated

Hardware failure in
ovS AC motor drive input voltage range.
voltage detection
2. Check for possible voltage transients.
Ov at stop
Fault DC BUS voltage is less

1. Check if the input voltage is normal
LvA than Pr.06-00 during
acceleration 2. Check for possible sudden load
Lv at accel

Lvd than Pr.06-00 during
2. Check for possible sudden load
deceleration
Lv at decel

Lvn than Pr.06-00 in constant
speed 2. Check for possible sudden load
Lv at normal SPD
Fault DC BUS voltage is less 1. Check if the input voltage is normal

LvS than Pr.06-00 at stop 2. Check for possible sudden load
Lv at stop
14-2
Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases are

Fault connected without loose contacts.
OrP Phase Loss
For models 40hp and above, please check if the fuse
Phase lacked for the AC input circuit is blown.
1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within

the specified temperature range.
2. Make sure that the ventilation holes are not
IGBT overheating
Fault obstructed.
IGBT temperature
oH1 3. Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks
exceeds protection level
and check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
IGBT over heat
4. Check the fan and clean it.
5. Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation.
1. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within
Heatsink overheating the specified temperature range.
Fault 2. Make sure heat sink is not obstructed. Check if
Capacitance temperature
oH2 exceeds cause heatsink the fan is operating
Heat Sink oH overheating. 3. Check if there is enough ventilation clearance
for AC motor drive.
Motor overheating
1. Make sure that the motor is not obstructed.
The AC motor drive
Fault 2. Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within
detecting internal
oH3 the specified temperature range.
temperature exceeds the
3. Take the next higher power AC motor drive
Motor over heat setting of Pr.06-30 (PTC
model.
level)
Fault
tH1o IGBT Hardware Error Return to the factory
Thermo 1 open
Fault
tH2o Capacitor Hardware Error Return to the factory
Thermo 2 open
Overload 1. Check if the motor is overloaded.

Fault
The AC motor drive detects
oL 2. Take the next higher power AC motor drive
excessive drive output
current.
model.
Over load
Fault 1. Check the setting of electronics thermal relay

Electronics thermal relay 1
EoL1 (Pr.06-14)
protection
Take the next higher power AC motor drive model
Thermal relay 1
14-3
1. Check the setting of electronics thermal relay

Fault Electronics thermal relay (Pr.06-28)
EoL2 2 protection 2. Take the next higher power AC motor drive
Thermal relay 2 model
These two fault codes

Fault will be displayed when
ot1 output current exceeds
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Over torque 1 the over-torque detection
2. Check whether motor rated current setting
level (Pr.06-07 or
(Pr.05-01) is suitable
Pr.06-10) and exceeds
3. Take the next higher power AC motor drive
over-torque detection
model.
Fault (Pr.06-08 or Pr.06-11)
ot2 and it is set to 2 or 4 in
Over torque 2 Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09.
Fault
uC Low current detection Check Pr.06-71, Pr.06-72, Pr.06-73.
Under torque
Fault
LMIT Limit error
Limit Err or
Fault Internal EEPROM can 1. Press “RESET” key to the factory setting
cF1 not be programmed. 2. Return to the factory.
EEPROM write err
Fault Internal EEPROM can 1. Press “RESET” key to the factory setting
cF2 not be read. 2. Return to the factory.
EEPROM read err
Fault
U-phase error Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
cd1 keypad please return to the factory
Ias sensor err
Fault
V-phase error Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
Ibs sensor err
Fault
W-phase error Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
Ics sensor err
14-4
Fault
Reboots the power. If fault code is still displayed on the
Hd0 CC (current clamp)
keypad please return to the factory
cc HW error
Fault
Hd1 OC hardware error
Oc HW error
Fault
Hd2 OV hardware error
Ov HW error
Fault
Hd3 Occ hardware error
occ HW error
Fault 1. Check cabling between drive and motor

AUE Auto tuning error 2. Try again.
Auto tuning err
Fault 1. Check the wiring of the PID feedback

AFE PID loss (ACI) 2. Check the PID parameters settings
PID Fbk error
Fault PG feedback error Check if encoder parameter setting is accurate when

PGF1 it is PG feedback control.
PG Fbk error
Fault
PGF2 PG feedback loss Check the wiring of the PG feedback
PG Fbk loss
1. Check the wiring of the PG feedback

Fault
PG feedback stall 2. Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration is
PGF3 suitable
PG Fbk over SPD 3. Return to the factory
1. Check the wiring of the PG feedback

Fault 2. Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration
PGF4 PG slip error is suitable
PG Fbk deviate 3. Return to the factory
14-5
Fault 1. Check the pulse wiring

PGr1 Pulse input error
2. Return to the factory
PG Ref error
Fault 1. Check the pulse wiring

PGr2 Pulse input loss
2. Return to the factory
PG Ref loss
Fault 1. Check the ACI wiring

ACE ACI loss
2. Check if the ACI signal is less than 4mA
ACI loss
1. Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is closed to

Fault GND. Output U, V, W will be turned off.
EF External Fault
2. Give RESET command after fault has been
External fault cleared.
1. When the multi-function input terminals MI1 to

Fault MI6 are set to emergency stop, the AC motor
EF1 Emergency stop drive stops output U, V, W and the motor coasts
to stop.
Emergency stop
2. Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
1. When the external input terminal (B.B) is active,

Fault the AC motor drive output will be turned off.
bb External Base Block
2. Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to
Base block operate the AC motor drive again.
Fault Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON after

Pcod Password is locked. power OFF to re-enter the correct password. See
Pr.00-07 and 00-08.
Password error
Fault Check if the function code is correct (function code

CE1 Illegal function code
must be 03, 06, 10, 63)
PC err command
Fault Illegal data address (00H

CE2 Check if the communication address is correct
to 254H)
PC err address
Fault
CE3 Illegal data value Check if the data value exceeds max./min. value
PC err data
14-6
Fault
Data is written to read-only
CE4 Check if the communication address is correct
address
PC slave fault
Fault
CE10 Modbus transmission time-out
PC time out
Fault
CP10 Keypad transmission time-out
PU time out
Fault If the fault code is still displayed on the keypad after

bF Brake resistor fault
pressing “RESET” key, please return to the factory.
Braking fault
Fault 1. Check the wiring of the

Y-connection/Δ-connecti Y-connection/Δ-connection
ydc on switch error
Y-delta connect
2. Check the parameters settings
When Pr.07-13 is not set

Fault to 0 and momentary 1. Set Pr.07-13 to 0
dEb power off or power cut, it
will display dEb during 2. Check if input power is stable
Dec. Energy back
accel./decel. stop.
It will be displayed when

Fault 1. Check if motor parameter is correct (please
slip exceeds Pr.05-26
oSL decrease the load if overload
setting and time exceeds
2. Check the settings of Pr.05-26 and Pr.05-27
Over slip error Pr.05-27 setting.
Fault
S1 Emergency stop for external safety
S1-emergy stop
Fault
Uoc Phase U short circuit
U phase oc
Fault
Voc Phase V short circuit
V phase oc
14-7
Fault
Woc W phase short circuit
W phase oc
Electric valve switch

error when executing
Fault Soft Start.
ryF Do not disconnect RST when drive is still operating.
(This warning is for frame E
MC Fault
and higher frame of AC
drives)
Fault Hardware error of PG Check if PG Card is insert to the right slot and
PGF5 Card parameter settings for encoder are accurate.
PG HW Error
Fault
OPHL Output phase loss (Phase U)
U phase lacked
Fault
OPHL Output phase loss (Phase V)
V phase lacked
Fault
OPHL Output phase loss (Phase W)
W phase lacked
Fault
TRAP CPU trap error
CPU Trap Error
Fault
CGdE CANopen guarding error
Guarding T-out
Fault
CHbE CANopen heartbeat error
Heartbeat T-out
Fault
CSYE CANopen synchronous error
SYNC T-out
14-8
Fault
CbFE CANopen bus off error
Can bus off
Fault
CIdE CANopen index error
Can bus Index Err
Fault
CAdE CANopen station address error
Can bus Add. Err
Fault
CFrE CANopen memory error
Can bus off
Fault Internal communication time-out

ictE
InrCom Time Out
14-9
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview |C2000 Series
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview

Newest version is available at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/
15.1 CANopen Overview

15.2 Wiring for CANopen
15.3 How to control by CANopen
15.3.1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
15.3.2 Delta Defined Control Mode (There are two modes available)
15.3.3 DS402 Standard Control Mode
15.3.4 Remarks to Control Modes
15.4 CANopen Supporting Index
15.5 CANopen Fault Code
15.6 CANopen LED Function
Built-in EMC-COP01 card is included in VFDXXXC23E/VFDXXXC43E models.

The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive by using CANopen
protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized communication objects, including
real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data (Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions
(Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency message). And it also has network management data, including
Boot-up message, NMT message, and Error Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for
details. The content of this instruction sheet may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or
download the most updated version at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation
Delta CANopen supporting functions:

Support CAN2.0A Protocol;
Support CANopen DS301 V4.02;
Support DSP-402 V2.0.
Delta CANopen supporting services:
PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1~ PDO2
SDO (Service Data Object):
Initiate SDO Download;
Initiate SDO Upload;
Abort SDO;
SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every node.
SOP (Special Object Protocol):
Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;
Support SYNC service;
Support Emergency service.
NMT (Network Management):
Support NMT module control;
Support NMT Error control;
Support Boot-up.
Delta CANopen not supporting service:
Time Stamp service
15-1
15.1 CANopen Overview

CANopen Protocol
CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented machine
control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is standardized as
EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and communication profile (CiA
DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA 302), recommendations for cables
and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix representations (CiA 303-2).
Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA

DSP-401 DSP-404 DSP-XXX
OSI Layer 7
Application Communication Profile CiA DS-301
OSI Layer 2
CAN Controller CAN 2.0A
Data Link Layer
+ -
OSI Layer 1
Physical Layer + - ISO 11898
CAN bus
RJ-45 Pin Definition
8~1
plug
PIN Signal Description

1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-
7 CAN_GND Ground / 0V /V-
15-2
Pre-Defined Connection Set

To reduce configuration effort for simple networks, CANopen define a mandatory default identifier
allocation scheme. The 11-bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as follows:
COB Identifier (CAN Identifier)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function Code Node Number
Object Function Code Node Number COB-ID Object Dictionary Index

Broadcast messages
NMT 0000 - 0 -
SYNC 0001 - 80H 1005H, 1006H, 1007H
TIME STAMP 0010 - 100H 1012H, 1013H
Point-to-point messages
Emergency 0001 1-127 81H-FFH 1014H, 1015H
TPDO1 0011 1-127 181H-1FFH 1800H
RPDO1 0100 1-127 201H-27FH 1400H
TPDO2 0101 1-127 281H-2FFH 1801H
RPDO2 0110 1-127 301H-37FH 1401H
TPDO3 0111 1-127 381H-3FFH 1802H
RPDO3 1000 1-127 401H-47FH 1402H
TPDO4 1001 1-127 481H-4FFH 1803H
RPDO4 1010 1-127 501H-57FH 1403H
Default SDO (tx) 1011 1-127 581H-5FFH 1200H
Default SDO (rx) 1100 1-127 601H-67FH 1200H
NMT Error Control 1110 1-127 701H-77FH 1016H, 1017H
CANopen Communication Protocol

It has services as follows:
NMT (Network Management Object)
SDO (Service Data Objects)
PDO (Process Data Object)
EMCY (Emergency Object)
NMT (Network Management Object)
The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service. Only
one NMT master is in a network, and other nodes are regarded as slaves. All CANopen nodes have
a present NMT state, and NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. The state diagram
of a node is shown as follows:
15-3
(1)
Initializing
(15)
Reset Application (9)

(10)
(11)
(16)
Reset Communication
(2)F
(14)
Pre-Operation ABCD
(3) (4) (5) (7)
(13)
Stopped AB
(6) (8)
(12)
Operation ABCD
(1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state A: NMT

(2) Enter pre-operational state automatically B: Node Guard
(3) (6) Start remote node
C: SDO
(4) (7) Enter pre-operational state
D: Emergency
(5) (8) Stop remote node
(9) (10) (11) Reset node E: PDO
(12) (13) (14) Reset communication F: Boot-up
(15) Enter reset application state automatically
(16) Enter reset communication state automatically
Initializing Pre-Operational Operational Stopped

PDO ○
SDO ○ ○
SYNC ○ ○
Time Stamp ○ ○
EMCY ○ ○
Boot-up ○
NMT ○ ○ ○
NMT Protocol is shown as follows:

CS
NMT Master Start Remote Node NMT Slave(s) Value Definition
Request byte 0 byte 1 Indication(s) 1 Start
CS Node-ID
request
Indication 2 Stop
COB-ID=0 Indication
Indication
128 Enter Pre-Operational
129 Reset Node
130 Reset Communication
15-4
SDO (Service Data Objects)
SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client/Server model. One
SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data between two
nodes. No data limit for SDOs to transfer data. But it needs to transfer by segment when data
exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment.
The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in CANopen node. Every node has an OD in the
system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior. The access
path of OD is the index and sub-index, each object has a unique index in OD, and has sub-index if
necessary. The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows:
Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7

Type 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Index Index Index Data Data Data Data
command L H Sub LL LH HL HH
Initiate Client 0 0 1 - N E S
Domain Server 0 1 1 -
- - - -
Download
Initiate Client 0 1 0 - - - - -
Domain Server 0 1 0 - N E S
Upload
Abort Domain Client 1 0 0 - - - - -
Transfer Server 1 0 0 - - - - -
N: Bytes not use
E: normal(0)/expedited(1)
S: size indicated
PDO (Process Data Object)
PDO communication can be described by the producer/consumer model. Each node of the network
will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message has to be
processed or not after receiving the message. PDO can be transmitted from one device to one
another device or to many other devices. Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and a
RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a non-confirmed mode.
PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index (1400h for the 1st
RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO), and all transmission types are listed in the following table:
PDO
Type Number
Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only
0 ○ ○
1-240 ○ ○
241-251 Reserved
252 ○ ○
253 ○ ○
254 ○
255 ○
Type number 1-240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions.
Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving SYNC.
Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.
Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format.
Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission.
15-5
All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.
Example:
Master transmits PDO data to Slave
PDO1
CAN(H)
CAN(L)
Master Slave
PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,
0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x88,
Index Sub Definition Value R/W Size
0x1600 0 0. Number 1 R/W U8

0x1600 1 1. Mapped Object 0x60400010 R/W U32
PDO1 Map 0x1600 2 2. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x1600 3 3. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x1600 4 4. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
U16
0x60400010 0x6040 0 0. Control word 0x2211 R/W (2 Bytes)
Slave returns message to Master

PDO1
CAN(H)
CAN(L)
Master Slave
PDO1 data value Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,
0xF3, 0x00,
Index Sub Definition Value R/W Size
0x1A00 0 0. Number 1 R/W U8

0x1A00 1 1. Mapped Object 0x60410010 R/W U32
PDO1 Map 0x1A00 2 2. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x1A00 3 3. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x1A00 4 4. Mapped Object 0 R/W U32
0x6041 0 Status Word 0xF3 R/W U16
EMCY (Emergency Object)

Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt. The data
format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following:
Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Content Emergency Error Code Error register
Manufacturer specific Error Field
(Object 1001H)
Please refer to Chapter 5 CANopen error codes for emergency definition of C2000.
15-6
Example:
Master send NM message to slave 1 for RESET request.

Slave 1 responds no error
Slave 1 responds a boot up message
Master enter Index6040 = 7EH in slave 1
Slave 1 responds OK
Master enter Index6040= 7FH in slave 1
Slave 1 responds OK
Master enter value for Index6041 to slave 1
Slave 1 responds 0640H
Master enter SYNC
Master enter PD01=2211H to slave 1
15-7
15.2 Wiring for CANopen

An external adapter card: EMC-COP01 is used for CANopen wiring; establish CANopen to VFD
C2000 connection. The link is enabled by using RJ45 cable. The two farthest ends must be
terminated with 120Ω terminating resistors.
15-8
15.3 How to Control by CANopen

15.3.1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
There are two control modes for CANopen; Pr.09.40 set to 1 is the factory setting mode DS402
standard and Pr.09.40 set to 0 is Delta’s standard setting mode.
15.3.2 Delta Defined Control Mode

There are two control modes.
1. Wiring for hardware (refer to chapter 15-2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Operation source setting: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
3. Frequency source setting: set Pr.00.20 to 6 (CANopen setting. If torque control or position
control is required, set Pr.0.02 to 2. Also set Pr.09.30 to 1(default setting) to allow new address
60XX to function, the old address 20XX can not support the control function for position and
torque.
4. Source of torque setting is set by Pr.11-33.
5. CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen
slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If error occurred (CAdE or CANopen memory error) as station
setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.)
6. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANopen Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and 50K(5))
7. CANopen decode method setting: set Pr.09.40 to 0 (Delta decoding method). It provides two
decoding method by using Pr.09-30 and the default setting of the drive is in decoding method 2
(Pr.09-30=1).
8. Decoding method 1. In index 2020.01 enter 0002H for motor run; 0001H for motor stop. In index
2020.02 enter 1000, frequency will be 10.00Hz. Refer to Index 2020 and 2021 for more detail.
9. Decoding method 2. In index 2060.01 enter 0080H for motor switch on; enter 0x81 for motor run
to the target frequency. Various control mode options are available in Pr.00-40, select your
control mode.
15.3.3 DS402 Standard Control Mode

To control the AC motor drive by CANopen, please set the parameters by the following steps:
1. Wiring for hardware (refer to Chapter 2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Operation source setting: set Pr.00.21 to 3 (CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET
disabled.)
3. Frequency source setting: set Pr.02.00 to 6 for CANopen communication card control. For
CANopen to do torque control, set Pr.11-33 to 3; to do position control, set Pr.11-40 to 3. Also
set Pr.09-30 to 1 (decoding method 2), use new address 60XX to control torque and position.
The old address 20XX does not support torque and position control.
4. Source of torque setting is set by Pr.11-33.
5. CANopen station setting: set Pr.09-36 (Range of setting is 1~127. When Pr.09-36=0, CANopen
slave function is disabled. ) (Note: If error occurred (CAdE or CANopen memory error) as station
15-9
setting is completed, press Pr.00-02=7 for reset.)

6. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1M(0), 500K(1), 250K(2),
125K(3), 100K(4) and50K(5))
7. Set multiple input functions to Quick Stop (it can also be enable or disable, default setting is
disable). If it is necessary to enable the function, set MI terminal to 53 in one of the following
parameter: Pr.02.01 ~Pr.02.08 or Pr.02.26 ~ Pr.02.31. (Note: This function is available in DS402
only.)
8. Switch to C2000 operation mode via the NMT string; control word 0x6040 (bit 0, bit 1, bit 2, bit 3
and bit 7) and status word 0x6041.
For example:
1. If the multi-function input terminal MI set Quick Stop to disable, enable the responsive
terminal of such MI terminal.
2. Set index 6040H to 7EH.
3. Set index 6040H to 7FH, the drive is now in operation mode.
4. Set index 6042H to 1500 (rpm), the default setting for pole is 4 (50Hz). Set the pole in
Pr.05.04 (Motor1) and Pr.05.16 (Motor 2).
120
Calculation for motor speed: n = f × where n = ramp per minute (rpm/min);
p
P = poles
f = frequency (Hz)
Example 1: set motor running in forward direction, f = 30Hz, P = 4.

(120*30)/4 = 900rpm
Example 2: set motor running in reverse direction, f = 20Hz, P = 6.

(120*15)/6 = 300rpm; 300rpm = 0x012C
Also,
Bit15 defines the positive and negative sign.
i.e. Index 6042 = -300 = ( 300’ + 1) = 012CH’ + 1 = FED3H +1 = FED4H
Switching mode:
15-10
Power
Start Fault Reaction Active
Disable
X0XX1111
Not Ready to Switch On

X0XX0000 Fault
X0XX1000
XXXXXXX
Switch On Disable
0XXXXX0X X1XX0000
0XXXXX0X
0XXXX110 or
and 0XXXX01X
Disable QStop=1 or
Disable QStop=0
Ready to Switch On
0XXXXX0X
X01X0001 or
0XXXX01X Fault
0XXXX111 0XXXX110 or
Disable QStop=0 Power
Switch On
Enable
X01X0011
0XXXXX0X
or
0XXX1111 0XXX0110 0XXXX01X Fout=0
or
0XXX1111 Disable QStop=0
Operation Enable Quick Stop Active
X01X0111 0XXX1111 X00X0111
and
Disable QStop=1
< Status Switching Graph>
9. The operation of AC motor drive in DS402 standard is controlled by the Control Word 0x6040
(bit4~bit6), as shown in the following chart:
bit 6 bit 5 bit 4
Outcome
ramp function reference ramp function disable ramp function enable
0 0 0 STOP
1 0 0 STOP
0 1 0 STOP
1 1 0 STOP
0 0 1 STOP
LOCK
1 0 1
(at present frequency)
0 1 1 STOP
1 1 1 RUN
10. Follow the same steps, refer to status switching process for status word 0x6041(bit 0 to bit 6), bit
7= warn, bit 9 = 1 (permanently), bit 10= target frequency reached, bit 11= output exceeds
maximum frequency.
15-11
15.3.4 Remarks to Control Modes

C2000 series offers 3 control modes for CANopen. Please refer to the following definitions for the
index setting of each control modes:
When CANopen is set in different control mode, the Index Setting is different:
DS402 Decoding Method 1 Decoding Method 2
Pr.09-40=1 Pr.09-40=0 and 09-30=0 Pr.09-40=0 and 09-30=1
Index Sub Index Sub Index Sub
2020h 01h
Control Command 6040h 00h 2060h 01h
2020h 03h
Speed Command 6042h 00h 2020h 02h 2060h 03h
Position Command 607Ah 00h No control 2060h 05h
Torque Command 6071h 00h No control 2060h 07h
Control modes have no influence to CANopen, Index setting has no function.

DS402 Decoding Method 1 Decoding Method 2
Pr.09-40=1 Pr.09-40=0 and Pr.09-30=0 Pr.09-40=0 and Pr.09-30=1
Index Sub Index Sub Index Sub
Treatment to Decelerate by maximum Decelerate by maximum
6007h 00h
Signal Loss speed speed
Acceleration Time 604Fh 00h 604Fh 00h 604Fh 00h
Deceleration Time 6050h 00h 6050h 00h 6050h 00h
Quick Stop 6051h 00h Disable Disable
Switching Mode 6060h 00h 6060h 00h 6060h 00h
Max. Torque 6072h 00h Disable Disable
When the drive is in Demo mode, Index can be read when setting to either DS402 mode, Decoding
method 1 or Decoding method 2.
15-12
15.4 CANopen Supporting Index

Basic Index Support by C2000:
Index Sub Definition Factory Setting R/W Size Note
1000H 0 Device type 00010192H R U32
1001H 0 Error register 0 R U8
1005H 0 COB-ID SYNC message 80H R U32
Unit: us
The setting value should be in a
1006H 0 Communication cycle period 0 RW U32
multiple of 500us (integer)
within the range 500us to 16ms
1008H 0 Manufacturer device name 0 R U32
Manufacturer hardware
1009H 0 0 R U32
version
Manufacturer software
100AH 0 0 R U32
version
100CH 0 Guarding time 0 RW U16 Unit: ms
100DH 0 Guarding factor 0 RW U8
0 Store Parameter 2 R U8
1010H 1 Save all parameters 0 RW U32

Save communication
2 1 RW U32
parameter
0 Restore Parameter 2 R U8
1011H 1 Restore all parameters 0 RW U32

Restore communication
2 1 RW U32
parameter
0000080H+Node-I
1014H 0 COB-ID emergency R U32
D
Unit:100us
1015H 0 Inhibit time EMCY 0 RW U16 The setting value should be in a
multiple of 10 (integer)
0 Consumer heartbeat time 1 R U8
1016H Unit: 1ms
1 Consumer 1 0 RW U32 Disable Guarding time to
function properly
Unit: 1ms
1017H 0 Producer heartbeat time 0 RW U16 Disable Guarding time to
function properly
0 Number 0 R U8
1 Vender ID 000001DDH R U32
1018H 2A00+machine
2 Product code R U32
code
3 Revision 00010000H R U32
0 Server SDO Parameter 2 R U8
0000600H+Node-I
1200H 1 COB-ID Client -> Server R U32
D
0000580H+Node-I
2 COB-ID Client <- Server R U32
D
1400H 0 Number 2 R U8
15-13

00000200H+Node-
1 COB-ID used by PDO RW U32
ID
00:Acyclic& Synchronous
2 Transmission Type 5 RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
255:Asynchronous
0 Number 2 R U8
80000300H+Node-
ID
1401H
00: Acyclic & Synchronous
255:Asynchronous
0 Number 2 R U8
80000400H+Node-
ID
1402H
255:Asynchronous
0 Number 2 R U8
80000500H+Node-
ID
1403H
2 Transmission Type 5H RW U8 01~240:Cyclic & Synchronous
255:Asynchronous
0 Number 2 RW U8
1 1.Mapped Object 60400010H RW U32
1600H 2 2.Mapped Object 60420010H RW U32
3 3.Mapped Object 0 RW U32
0 Number 3 RW U8
1601H 2 2.Mapped Object 2026A110H RW U32
3 3.Mapped Object 2026A210H RW U32
0 Number 3 RW U8
1602H 2 2.Mapped Object 607A0020H RW U32
0 Number 3 RW U8
1603H 2 2.Mapped Object 60710010H RW U32
15-14

0 Number 5 R U8
00000180H+Node-
ID
1800H 255:Asynchronous
Unit: 100us
3 Inhibit time 0 RW U16 The setting value should be in a
4 CMS-Priority Group 3 RW U8
5 Event timer 0 RW U16 Unit: 1ms
0 Number 5 R U8
80000280H+Node-
ID
Unit: 100us
0 Number 5 R U8
80000380H+Node-
ID
Unit: 100us
0 Number 5 R U8
80000480H+Node-
ID
Unit: 100us
1A00H 0 Number 2 RW U8
15-15

0 Number 4 RW U8
1A01H 2 2.Mapped Object 20266110H RW U32
0 Number 3 RW U8
0 Number 3 RW U8
C2000 Index:
Parameter index corresponds to each other as following:
Index sub-Index
2000H + Group member+1
For example:
Pr.10.15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment)
Group member
10(0 A H) - 15(0FH)
Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A

Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H
C2000 Control Index:
Delta Standard Mode (Old definition)

Factory
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Note
Setting
2020H 0 Number 3 R U8
1 Control word 0 RW U16 Bit 0~1 00B:disable
01B:stop
10B:disable
11B: JOG Enable
Bit2~3 Reserved
Bit4~5 00B:disable
01B: Direction forward
15-16
Factory
Setting
10B: Reverse
11B: Switch Direction
Bit6~7 00B: 1st step
acceleration/deceleration
nd
01B: 2 step
acceleration/deceleration
Bit8~15 Reserved
2 vl target velocity（Hz） 0 RW U16
Bit0 1: E.F. ON
3 Other trigger 0 RW U16 Bit1 1: Reset
Bit2~15 Reserved
2021H 0 Number DH R U8
1 Error code 0 R U16
2021H 2 AC motor drive status 0 R U16 Bit 0~1 00B: stop
01B: decelerate to stop
10B: waiting for operation
command
11B: in operation
Bit 2 1: JOG command
Bit 3~4 00B: forward running
01B: switch from reverse
running to forward running
10B: switch from forward
running to reverse running
11B: reverse running
Bit 5~7 reserved
Bit 8 1: master frequency command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit 9 1: master frequency command
controlled by analog signal
input
Bit 10 1: operation command
controlled by communication
interface
Bit
Reserved
11~15
3 Frequency command（F） 0 R U16
4 Output frequency（H） 0 R U16
5 Output current（AXX.X） 0 R U16
6 Reserved 0 R U16
7 Reserved 0 R U16
8 Reserved 0 R U16
9 Display output current（A） 0 R U16
A Display counter value（c） 0 R U16
Display actual output
B 0 R U16
frequency (H)
C Display DC-BUS voltage (u) 0 R U16
D Display output voltage (E) 0 R U16
Display output power angle
E 0 R U16
(n)
Display output power in kW
F 0 R U16
(P)
Display actual motor speed
10 in rpm (r) 0 R U16
0 Number R U8
2022H 1 Display output current 0 R U16
2 Display counter value 0 R U16
15-17
Factory
Setting
Display actual output
3 0 R U16
frequency
4 Display DC-BUS voltage 0 R U16
5 Display output voltage 0 R U16
6 Display output power angle 0 R U16
7 Display output power in kW 0 R U16
Display actual motor speed
8 0 R U16
rpm
Display estimate output
9 0 R U16
torque %
A Display PG feedback (G) 0 R U16
B Display PID feedback in % 0 R U8
Display AVI in %, 0~10V is
C 0 R U16
set as 0~100%
Display ACI in %,
D 4~20mA/0~10V are set as 0 R U16
0~100%
2022H Display AUI in %, -10V~10V
E 0 R U16
is set as -100~100%
Display the temperature of
F 0 R U16
IGBT in ℃
Display the temperature of
10 0 R U16
capacitance in ℃
The status of digital input
11 0 R U16
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-10
The status of digital output
12 0 R U16
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-15
13 Display Multi-step speed 0 R U16
The corresponding CPU pin
14 0 R U16
status of digital input
The corresponding CPU pin
15 0 R U16
status of digital output
Actual motor position (PG1
of PG card). When the
motor direction changes or
16 the drive stops, the counter 0 R U16
will start from 0 (display
value restarts counting from
0) (Max. 65535)
Pulse input frequency (PG2
17 0 R U16
of PG card)
Pulse input position (PG2 of
18 0 R U16
PG card) (max. 65535)
Display position command
19 0 R U16
tracing error
1A Overload counting 0 R U16
1B GFF Ground Fault (Unit :%) 0 R U16
1C Reserve 0 R U16
1D Display PLC data D1043 0 R U16
Display PM motor magnetic
1E 0 R U16
pole zone
Display output of user
1F 0 R U16
defined
Display Pr.00-05 output
20 0 R U16
value
21 Number of motor revolution 0 R U16
22 Motor position 0 R U16
23 Operation speed of fan 0 R U16
15-18
Factory
Setting
Control Mode display: 0=
24 Speed control mode (SPD), 0 R U16
1= torque control mode
Present operating carrier
25 0 R U16
frequency of drive
Descriptions
Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode
bit DefinitionPriority
2060h 00h R U8
0:fcmd =0
Pulse 1: Pulse 1: Return
0 Ack 4 1:fcmd =
Position control to home
Fset(Fpid)
0: FWD run
command
1 Dir 4
1: REV run
command
2
0: drive run till
target speed is
attained
3 Halt
1: drive stop by
declaration
setting
0: drive run till
target speed is
attained
4 Hold
1: frequency
stop at current
frequency
0:JOG OFF
5 JOG Pulse 1:JOG
RUN
6 QStop Quick Stop
01h RW U16
0:Power OFF 0:Power OFF 0:Power OFF 0:Power OFF
7 Power
1:Power ON 1:Power ON 1:Power ON 1:Power ON
Multi-step Multi-step
Cmd
11~8 frequency position
SW
switching switching
00b: 1st step
accel/decel time
01b: 2nd step
Acc/Dec accel/decel time
13~12
SW 10b: 3rd step
accel/decel time
11b 4th step
accel/decel time
0: Multi-step 0: Multi-step
command and command and
accel/decel time accel/decel time
switching is switching is
disabled disabled
14
1: Multi-step 1: Multi-step
command and command and
accel/decel time accel/decel time
switching is switching is
enabled enabled
Pulse 1: Fault Pulse 1: Fault Pulse 1: Fault Pulse 1: Fault
15
code cleared code cleared code cleared code cleared
02h RW U16
03h RW U16 Speed command
15-19
Descriptions
Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode Position Mode Home Mode Torque Mode
bit DefinitionPriority
(unsigned
decimal)
04h RW U16
Position
05h RW S32
command
06h RW
Torque
command
07h RW U16
(signed
decimal)
Speed limit
08h RW U16 (unsigned
decimal)
Frequency Position Homing
0 Arrive Torque attained
attained attained complete
0: Motor FWD 0: Motor FWD
0: Motor FWD 0: Motor FWD
run run
1 Dir run run
1: Motor REV 1: Motor REV
1: Motor REV run 1: Motor REV run
run run
01h R U16 2 Warn Warning Warning Warning Warning
3 Error Error detected Error detected Error detected Error detected
4
5 JOG JOG JOG JOG JOG
2061h 6 QStop Quick stop Quick stop Quick stop Quick stop
7 Power On Switch ON Switch ON Switch ON Switch ON
15~8
02h R
Actual output Actual output Actual output Actual output
03h R U16
frequency frequency frequency frequency
04h R
Actual position Actual position Actual position Actual position
05h R S32
(absolute) (absolute) (absolute) (absolute)
06h R
07h R S16 Actual torque Actual torque Actual torque Actual torque
DS402 Standard
Factory PDO
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Unit Mode Note
Setting Map
0: No action
6007h 0 Abort connection option code 2 RW S16 Yes 2: Disable Voltage,
3: quick stop
603Fh 0 Error code 0 R0 U16 Yes
6040h 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes
6041h 0 Status word 0 R0 U16 Yes
6042h 0 vl target velocity 0 RW S16 rpm Yes vl
6043h 0 vl velocity demand 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
6044h 0 vl control effort 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
604Fh 0 vl ramp function time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl Unit must be: 100ms, and
6050h 0 vl slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl check if the setting is set to
6051h 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl 0.
605Ah 0 Quick stop option code 2 RW S16 No 0 : disable drive function
1 :slow down on slow down
ramp
2: slow down on quick stop
ramp
15-20
Factory PDO
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Unit Mode Note
Setting Map
5 slow down on slow down
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
6 slow down on quick stop
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
0: Disable drive function
Disable operation option 1: Slow down with slow
605Ch 0 1 RW S16 No
code down ramp; disable of the
drive function
1: Profile Position Mode
2: Velocity Mode
6060h 0 Mode of operation 2 RW S8 Yes
4: Torque Profile Mode
6: Homing Mode
6061h 0 Mode of operation display 2 RO S8 Yes Same as above
6064h 0 pp Position actual value 0 RO S32 Yes pp
0.1
6071h 0 tq Target torque 0 RW S16 Yes tq Valid unit: 1%
%
0.1
6072h 0 tq Max torque 150 RW U16 No tq Valid unit: 1%
%
6075h 0 tq Motor rated current 0 RO U32 mA No tq
0.1
6077h 0 tq torque actual value 0 RO S16 Yes tq
%
0.1
6078h 0 tq current actual value 0 RO S16 Yes tq
%
6079h 0 tq DC link circuit voltage 0 RO U32 mV Yes tq
607Ah 0 pp Target position 0 RW S32 1 Yes pp
Remote I/O
Factory
Setting
2026H 0h Number DFh R U8
Bit 0 FWD
Bit 1 REV
Bit 2 MI1
Bit 3 MI2
Bit 4 MI3
Bit 5 MI4
Bit 6 MI5
Bit 7 MI6
1h MI Status 0x00 R U16
Bit 8 MI7
Bit 9 MI8
Bit 10 MI9 (Extension card)
2h~40h Reserved 0x00 R U16
41h MO Control 0x00 RW U16 Bit 0 RY1
Bit 1 RY2
Bit 2
Bit 3 MO1
15-21
Factory
Setting
Bit 4 MO2
Bit 5 MO3 (Extension card)
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
42h~60h Reserved 0x00 R U16
61h AVI 0x00 R U16 0.0 ~100.0%
62h ACI 0x00 R U16 0.0 ~100.0%
63h AUI 0x00 R S16 -100.0 ~100.0%
64h~A0h Reserved 0x00 R U16
A1h AFM1 0x00 RW U16 0.0 ~100.0%
A2h AFM2 0x00 RW U16 0.0 ~100.0%
A3h~DFh Reserved 0x00 R U16
Note: For using Remote I/O, user must set MO or AO as CANopen control first. For example, if wish to control
MO2, user must set Pr.02-17=50; if wish to control AO, user must set Pr.03-23=20.
15-22
15.5 CANopen Fault Code

CANopen
CANopen fault
Display Fault code Description
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Fault
ocA 0001H Over-current during acceleration 2213 H 1
Oc at accel
ocd 0002H Over-current during deceleration 2213 H 1

Oc at decel
Fault Over-current during steady status

ocn 0003H 2214H 1
operation
Oc at normal SPD
Ground fault. When (one of) the output

terminal(s) is grounded, short
circuit current is more than 50% of AC
Fault
GFF 0004H motor drive rated current. 2240H 1
Ground fault NOTE: The short circuit protection is
provided for AC motor drive
Protection, not for protection of the user.
Short-circuit is detected between upper
Fault
occ 0005H bridge and lower bridge of the 2250H 1
Short Circuit IGBT module.
Fault Over-current at stop. Hardware failure in

ocS 0006H 2314H 1
current detection
Oc at stop
Over-current during acceleration.

ovA 0007H 3210H 2
Hardware failure in current detection
Ov at accel
Fault Over-current during deceleration.

ovd 0008H 3210H 2
Hardware failure in current detection.
Ov at decel
Over-current during steady speed.

Fault
ovn 0009H Hardware failure in current detection. 3210H 2
Ov at normal SPD 230V: 450Vdc; 460V: 900Vdc
15-23
CANopen
CANopen fault
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Over-voltage at stop. Hardware failure in
Fault
ovS 000AH current detection 3210H 2
Ov at stop
Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00

LvA 000BH 3220H 2
during acceleration.
Lv at accel
Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00

Lvd 000VH 3220H 2
during deceleration.
Lv at decel
Fault DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06.00 in

Lvn 000DH 3220H 2
constant speed.
Lv at normal SPD
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 at

Fault
LvS 000EH stop 3220H 2
Lv at stop
Fault
OrP 000FH Phase Loss Protection 3130H 2
Phase La cked
IGBT overheat
IGBT temperature exceeds protection
Fault
oH1 0010H level. 4310H 3
IGBT over heat 1~15HP: 90℃
20~100HP: 100℃
Heatsink overheat
Fault
oH2 0011H Heat sink temperature exceeds 90oC 4310H 3
Hear Sink oH
Temperature detection circuit error

Fault
tH1o 0012H (IGBT) FF00H 3
Thermo 1 open IGBT NTC
Temperature detection circuit error

Fault
tH2o 0013H (capacity module) FF01H 3
Thermo 2 open CAP NTC
15-24
CANopen
CANopen fault
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Fault
PWR 0014H Power RST off FF02H 2
Power RST OFF
Overload. The AC motor drive detects

excessive drive output current.
Fault NOTE: The AC motor drive can
oL 0015H 2310H 1
withstand up to 150% of the rated current
Inverter oL
for a maximum of 60 seconds.
Fault Electronics thermal relay 1 protection

EoL2
EoL1 0016H 2310H 1
Thermal relay 1
2
Fault Electronics thermal relay 2 protection

EoL2 0017H 2310H 1
Thermal relay 2
Motor overheating
Fault The AC motor drive detects that the
EoL2
oH3 0018H FF20H 1
internal temperature exceeds
Thermal
Motor over
relay
heat
2
Pr.06-30 (PTC level)
These two fault codes will be displayed
Fault
001AH when output current exceeds 8311H 3
EoL2
ot1
Thermal
Over torqrelay
ue 1 2 the over-torque detection level (Pr.06.07
or Pr.06.10) and exceeds
Fault over-torque detection(Pr.06.08 or
EoL2
ot2 001BH Pr.06.11) and it is set 2 or 4 in 8311H 3
Thermal
Over torqrelay
ue 2 2 Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09.
Fault
EoL2
uC 001CH Low current 8321H 1
Thermal
Under to rque
relay12
Fault
EoL2
LMIT 001DH Limit error 7320H 1
Thermal
Limit Error
relay 2
Internal EEPROM can not be

Fault
EoL2
cF1 001EH programmed. 5530H 5
Thermal relay
EEPROM write2Err
15-25
CANopen
CANopen fault
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Fault
EoL2
cF2 001FH Internal EEPROM can not be read. 5530H 5
Thermal relay
EEPROM read2Err
Fault
EoL2
cd1 0021H U-phase error FF04H 1
Thermal
Ias sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
EoL2
cd2 0022H V-phase error FF05H 1
Thermal
Ibs sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
EoL2
cd3 0023H W-phase error FF06H 1
Thermal
Ics sensor
relay
Err 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd0 0024H cc (current clamp) hardware error FF07H 5
Thermal
cc HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd1 0025H oc hardware error FF08H 5
Thermal
oc HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd2 0026H ov hardware error FF09H 5
Thermal
ov HW Error
relay 2
Fault
EoL2
Hd3 0027H GFF hardware error FF0AH 5
Thermal
GFF HW relay
Error 2
Fault Auto tuning error

EoL2
AUE 0028H FF21H 1
Thermal
Auto tuning
relay
Err2
Fault PID loss (ACI)

EoL2
AFE 0029H FF22H 7
Thermal
PID Fbk Error
relay 2
Fault PG feedback error

EoL2
PGF1 002AH 7301H 7
Thermal
PG Fbk Error
relay 2
15-26
CANopen
CANopen fault
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Fault PG feedback loss

EoL2
PGF2 002BH 7301H 7
Thermal
PG Fbk Loss
relay 2
Fault PG feedback stall

EoL2
PGF3 002BH 7301H 7
Thermal
PG Fbk Over
relaySPD
2
Fault PG slip error

EoL2
PGF4 002CH 7301H 7
Thermal
PG Fbk deviate
relay 2
Fault Pulse input error

EoL2
PGr1 002DH FF23H 7
Thermal
PG ref Error
relay 2
Fault Pulse input loss

EoL2
PGr2 002FH FF24H 7
Thermal
PG ref loss
relay 2
Fault ACI loss

EoL2
ACE 0030H FF25H 1
Thermal
ACI loss relay 2
External Fault
Fault When input EF (N.O.) on external
EoL2
EF 0031H 9000H 5
terminal is closed to GND, AC motor
Thermal relay
External Fault 2
drive stops output U, V, and W.
Emergency stop
When the multi-function input terminals
MI1 to MI6 are set to
Fault
EoL2
EF1 0032H emergency stop, the AC motor drive 9000H 5
Thermal relay
Emergency stop
2 stops output U, V, W and
the motor coasts to stop
External Base Block

When the external input terminals MI1 to
Fault
EoL2
bb 0033H MI16 are set as bb and active, the AC 9000H 5
Thermal
Base block
relay 2 motor drive output will be turned off
15-27
CANopen
CANopen fault
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Password will be locked if three fault
Fault
EoL2
Pcod 0034H passwords are entered FF26H 5
Thermal relay
Password Error
2
Fault Software error

EoL2
ccod 0035H 6100H 5
Thermal
SW code relay
Error2
Fault Illegal function code

EoL2
cE1 0036H 7500H 4
Thermal CMD
Modbus relay err
2
Fault
cE2 0037H Illegal data address (00H to 254H) 7500H 4
Thermal ADDR
Modbus relay 2err
Fault Illegal data value

cE3 0038H 7500H 4
Thermal DATA
Modbus relay 2err
Fault Data is written to read-only address

cE4 0039H 7500H 4
Thermal slave
Modbus relay FLT
2
Fault Modbus transmission timeout.

cE10 003AH 7500H 5
Thermal time
Modbus relayout
2
Fault Keypad transmission timeout.

cP10 003BH 7500H 4
Thermaltime
Keypad relayout
2
Fault Brake resistor fault

bF 003CH 7110H 4
Thermalfault
Braking relay 2
Fault
ydc 003DH Motor Y-Δ switch error 3330H 2
Thermalconnect
Y-delta relay 2
Fault
dEb 003EH Energy regeneration when decelerating FF27H 2
Thermal
Dec. Energy
relayback
2
15-28
CANopen
CANopen fault
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Overslip error. Slip exceeds Pr.05.26
Fault limit and slip duration exceeds Pr.05.27
oSL 003FH FF28H 7
setting.
Thermal
Over slip relay
Error2
Fault
ryF 0040H Electromagnet switch error 7110H 5
Thermal
MC Faultrelay 2
Fault
PGF5 0041H PG Card Error FF29H 5
Thermal
PG HW Error
relay 2
Fault External emergency stop

S1 0049H FF2AH 5
Thermal relay
S1-Emergy stop
2
Fault
Uocc 004FH U phase short circuit FF2BH 1
Thermal
U phase short
relay 2
Fault
Vocc 0050H V phase short circuit FF2CH 1
Thermal
V phase short
relay 2
Fault
Wocc 0051H W phase short circuit FF2DH 1
Thermal
W phase relay
short 2
Fault
OPHL 0052H U phase output phase loss 2331H 2
Thermal
U phase lacked
relay 2
Fault
OPHL 0053H V phase output phase loss 2332H 2
Thermal
U phase lacked
relay 2
Fault
OPHL 0054H W phase output phase loss 2333H 2
Thermal
U phase lacked
relay 2
Fault
FStP 005AH Force to stop FF2EH
Thermal
Force Stop
relay 2
15-29
CANopen
CANopen fault
fault code register
(bit 0~7)
Fault
TRAP 0063H CPU command error 6000H 7
Thermal
CPU Traprelay
Error2
Fault
CGdE 0065H Guarding time-out 1 8130H 4
Thermal relay
Guarding T-out2
Fault
CHbE 0066H Heartbeat time-out 8130H 4
Thermal relay
Heartbea t T-out
2
Fault
CSyE 0067H CAN synchrony error 8700H 4
Thermal
SYNC T-out
relay 2
Fault CAN bus off

CbFE 0068H 8140H 4
Thermalb us
CAN/S relay
off 2
Fault Can index exceed

CIdE 0069H 8110H 4
Thermal relay 2
Fault CAN address error

CAdE 006AH 0x8100 4
Thermal relay 2
CAN frame fail

Fault
CFdE 006BH 0x8100 4
Thermal relay 2
Fault
ictE 006FH Internal communication signal fail 0x7500 0x4
Thermal relay 2
15-30
15.6 CANopen LED Function

There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR.
RUN LED:
LED status Condition CANopen State
OFF Initial
Blinking Pre-Operation
Single flash Stopped
ON Operation
ERR LED:
LED status Condition/ State
OFF No Error
Single One Message fail
flash
Double Guarding fail or heartbeat fail

flash
Triple flash SYNC fail
ON Bus off
15-31
Chapter 16 PLC Function |C2000 Series
Chapter 16 PLC Function

16.1 PLC Overview
16.2 Precautions for Using PLC
16.3 Start-up
16.4 PLC Ladder Diagram
16.5 PLC Devices
16.6 Commands
16.7 Error Code and Troubleshoot
16.8 CANopen Master Application
16.9 Descriptions of PLC Modes and Controls (Speed, Torque,
Homing and Position)
16.10 Internal Communication for Master Control
16.11 Counting Function via MI8
16-1

16.1 PLC Overview

16.1.1 Introduction
The built in PLC function in C2000 allows following commands: WPLSoft, basic commands and
application commands; the operation methods are the same as Delta DVPPLC series. Other than
that, CANopen master provides 8 stations for synchronous control and 126 asynchronous controls.
NOTE
In C2000, CANopen master synchronous control complies with DS402 standard and supports homing mode, speed mode,
torque mode and point to point control mode; CANopen slave supports two control modes, speed mode and torque mode.
16.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft

WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and C2000 series for WINDOWS. Besides
general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as cut, paste, copy,
multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment editing and other special
functions (e.g. register editing, settings, the data readout, the file saving, and contacts monitor and
set, etc.).
Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft:
Item System Requirement
Operation System Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP
CPU Pentium 90 and above
Memory 16MB and above (32MB and above is recommended)
Capacity: 50MB and above
Hard Disk
CD-ROM (for installing WPLSoft)
Resolution: 640×480, 16 colors and above,
Monitor
It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800×600.
Mouse General mouse or the device compatible with Windows
Printer Printer with Windows driver
RS-232 port At least one of COM1 to COM8 can be connected to PLC
Applicable Models All Delta DVP-PLC series and C2000 series
16-2
16-2 Precautions for Using PLC Functions

1. Default setting of PLC communication protocol is 7,N,2 ,9600, station number 2. User can
change PLC station using Pr.09-35 but station address must be different to the AC motor drive’s
station address(Pr.09-00).
2. C2000 series offers 2 communication ports for PLC program upload and download. Refer to the
figure follows for port location. The communication protocol of Channel 1 is always
19200,8,N,2。
Cha nnel 1
SG+ SG-
Channe l 2
8 1 M odbus RS-485
Pin 1~2, 7, 8:Reserved
Pin 3, 6:GND
Pin 4:SG-
RS-485 Pin 5:SG+
3. Host controller can read/write data from/to both the AC motor drive and the internal PLC
program by setting the drive and internal PLC program to two different station numbers. For
example, if user wants to set AC motor drive as station 1 and PLC as station 2, please write
following setting to the host controller:
When setting 01(Station) 03(Read) 0400(Address) 0001(1 data), the host controller can read the
Pr.04-00 from the AC motor drive.
When setting 02(Station) 03(Read) 0400(Address) 0001(1 data), host controller will read X0
data from the internal PLC program.
4. The internal PLC program will stop operation when upload/download programs.
5. When using WPR command to write parameters, parameters can be changed for a maximum of
109 times. It is crucial not to exceed this limit to prevent occurrence of serious error.
6. When Pr.00-04 is set to 28, D1043 value of PLC register will be displayed on the digital keypad:
Digital Keypad KPC-CC01 Digital Keypad KPC-CE01
Display range: 0~65535 Display range: 0~9999
Display for values exceed 9999
16-3

H 0.00Hz
A 0.00Hz
C _____
7. When PLC is in PLC Run or PLC Stop mode, Pr.00-02 (settings 9 and 10) are disabled.
8. When Pr.00-02 is set to 6, PLC function settings will return to factory settings.
9. When the Input Terminal X of PLC is programmed, the corresponding MI will be disabled (no
function).
10. When AC motor drive operation status is controlled by PLC function, the setting of Pr.00-21 has
no function and the drive is fully under the control of PLC function.
11. When PLC function is programmed with FREQ command, AC motor drive frequency is now
under PLC function control. The setting of Pr.00-20 and Hand ON/OFF are disabled and has no
control over AC motor drive frequency.
12. When PLC is programmed with TORQ command, AC motor drive torque is now under PLC
function control. The setting of Pr.11-33 and Hand ON/OFF function are disabled and has no
control over AC motor drive torque.
13. When PLC is programmed with POS command, AC motor drive position is now under PLC
function control. The setting of Pr.11-40 and Hand ON/OFF function are disabled and has no
control over AC motor drive position.
14. If the Stop function of digital keypad is enabled when AC motor drive frequency is under PLC
function control, the AC motor drive will trigger FStP error and AC motor drive will stop
operation.
16-4
16.3 Start-up
16.3.1 The Steps for PLC Execution
Please operate PLC functions by following the steps indicate below:
1. Press menu key on KPC-CC01 Æ select 3: PLC Æ ENTER.

MENU PLC
F 60.00Hz 1.Pr Setup 1.Disable
H 0.00Hz 2.Copy Pr 2.PLC Run
A 0.00Hz 3.PLC 3.PLC Stop
Press Select 3.PLC

MENU
Press ENTER
NOTE
When using KPC-CE01 series digital keypad, switch the mode to PLC2 for program download/upload:
A. Press MODE key and select ‘PLC’.
B. Press ‘UP’ key and look for ‘PLC2’ then press ‘ENTER’.
C. If succeed, display ‘END’ for one to two seconds and return to ‘PLC2’ page.
The PLC warning that is displayed before program downloaded to C2000 can be ignored, please continue the
operation.
Disable Run PLC PLC Stop

i AC d i
2. Connection: Connect RJ-45 of AC motor drive to the computer by using RS485.
3. Run the program.

PLC function, select function 2 (PLC Run).
PLC
1: Disable (PLC0)
1.Disable
2: PLC Run (PLC1)
2.PLC Run
3.PLC Stop 3: PLC Stop (PLC2)
Optional accessories: Digital keypad KPC-CE01, display
PLC function as shown in the ( ).
When external input terminals (MI1~MI8) are set to PLC Mode select bit0 (51) or PLC Mode
select bit1 (52), it will force to switch to PLC mode regardless the terminal is ON or OFF.
Meanwhile, switching via keypad is disabled. Please refer to the chart below:
PLC Mode PLC Mode select bit1(52) PLC Mode select bit0 (51)
Disable (PLC 0) OFF OFF
PLC Run (PLC 1) OFF ON
PLC Stop (PLC 2) ON OFF
Previous state ON ON
When KPC-CE01 execute PLC function:

1. When switching the page from PLC to PLC1, it will execute PLC. The motion of PLC
(Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.
16-5

2. When switching the page from PLC to PLC2, it will stop PLC. Again the motion of PLC
(Execute/Stop) is controlled by WPL editor.
3. The control of external terminals follows the same method.
NOTE
When input/output terminals (FWD REV MI1~MI8 MI10~15, Relay1, Relay2 RY10~RY15, MO1~MO2 MO10~MO11,)
are used in PLC program, they cannot be used in other places. Fro example, when PLC program (PLC1 or PLC2) is
activated, such as when it controls Y0, the corresponding output terminals Relay (RA/RB/RC) will be used. At this
moment, Pr.03.00 setting will be invalid since the terminal has been used by PLC. Refer to Pr.02-52, 02-53, 03-30 to
check which DI DO AO are occupied by PLC.
16.2.2 I/O Device Reference Table

Input device:
Device X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
1 FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8
2 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13 MI14 MI15
3 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13

1: I/O extension card
2: I/O extension card EMC-D611A (D1022=4)
Output device:
Device Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
RY
1 RY2 MO1 MO2
1
2 MO10 MO11
3 RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15

1: I/O extension card
3: I/O extension card EMC-R6AA (D1022=6)
16-6
16.2.3 WPLSoft Installation

Download PLC program toC2000: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for program coding and download the editor
(WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/
16.2.4 Program Input
16.2.5 Program Download

Please download the program by following steps:
Step 1. Press button for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft.
Step 2. After compiler is finished, choose the item “Write to PLC” in the communication items.
16-7

After finishing Step 2, the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive by the
communication format.
16.2.6 Program Monitor

If you execute “start monitor” in the communication item during executing PLC, the ladder
diagram will be shown as follows.
16-8
16.3 Ladder Diagram

16.3.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram
Read input state from outside
X0 X1
Calculate the result by Start Y0
Y0
ladder diagram
algorithm (it doesn’t M100 X3 X10 Repeats the
sent to the outer output Y1 execution in
:
point but the inner : cycle.
equipment will output X100 M505
immediately.) Y126
End
Send the result to the output point
16.3.2 Ladder Diagram

Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a
diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after
ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that
indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit. Many basic
symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of
traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc.
The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal
equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It
doesn’t have the real components in it. In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit
is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the coil is OFF. You should read the
corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a). Otherwise,
you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally
Closed, NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, such as 8-bits makes up a byte. 2
bytes can make up a word. 2 words make up double word. When using many relays to do
calculation, such as add/subtraction or shift, you could use byte, word or double word.
Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also value of
counting time and times.
16-9

In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these
equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.
Brief introduction to the internal devices of PLC:
Internal Device Function

Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external input point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch
and receive external input signal). Input signal from external will decide it to
display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of input relay by program design or
Input Relay forced ON/OFF via WPLSoft. The contacts (contact a, b) can be used unlimitedly.
If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and can’t
be used with other functions.
; Equipment indication method: X0, X1…X7, X10, X11… The symbol of
equipment is X and numbering in octal.
Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external output point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by
input relay contact, the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact. It
uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can
Output Relay
be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the corresponding output
relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.
; Equipment indication: Y0, Y1…Y7, Y10, Y11… The symbol of equipment is
Y and numbering in octal.
The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in

PLC. Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each
auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of
input relay, output relay or other internal equipment. Its contacts can be used
Internal Relay
unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output directly, it should output with
output point.
; Equipment indication: M0, M1…M799. The symbol of equipment is M and
numbering in decimal system.
Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the
pulse of counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter.
When coil is from OFF to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter
Counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit and high-speed counter for user to use.
; Equipment indication: C0, C1… C79. The symbol of equipment is C and
Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil
is ON, its contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining
desired time. The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its
regular period. User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period.
Timer Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact a is open and contact b is
close) and the timer will be set to zero.
; Equipment indication: T0, T1…T159. The symbol of equipment is T and
numbering in decimal system. The different number range corresponds with
the different timing period.
Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value
16-10
and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores
16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number
of data register to store double words.
; Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D399. The symbol of equipment is D and
The structure of ladder diagram and information:

Ladder Diagram Explanation Command Device
Structure
Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, T, C
Normally closed, contact b LDI X, Y, M, T, C
Serial normally open AND X, Y, M, T, C
Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, T, C
Parallel normally closed ORI X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger switch LDF X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge trigger in serial ANDP X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger in
ANDF X, Y, M, T, C
serial
Rising-edge trigger in
ORP X, Y, M, T, C
parallel
Falling-edge trigger in
ORF X, Y, M, T, C
parallel
Block in serial ANB none
Block in parallel ORB none
16-11

MPS
Multiple output MRD none
MPP
Output command of coil
OUT Y, M
drive
Basic command/
Basic command,
Application
Application command
command
Inverse logic INV none
16.3.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram

The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (The right power line will be
omitted during the edited of WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The
maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have
the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices. The continuous
number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly. The
drawing is shown as follows.
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
00000 Y0
Row Number
The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output
handling, including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in
ladder diagram.
Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the
right corner is the explanation order.
X0 X1 Y1 X4
Y1
M0 T0 M3
TMR T0 K10
X3 M1
The explanation of command order:

1 LD X0
2 OR M0
3 AND X1
4 LD X3
AND M1
ORB
5 LD Y1
16-12
AND X4
The explanation of command order:
6 LD T0
AND M3
ORB
7 ANB
8 OUT Y1
TMR T0 K10
The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram
1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.

LD command LD command
AND Block OR Block

The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that
command LDP and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in
the following.
Rising-edge
Falling-edge
X0 X0
Time Time
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.

AND command AND command
The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.
OR command OR command OR command

The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.
16-13

ANB command
5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.
ORB command
If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or
network from up to down or from left to right.
6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various
outputs.
7. The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place
between horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command
or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have
memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the
PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times
and you can recognize this command by the symbol “┬”.
8. MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same
in the same horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing
other ladder diagram. You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol “├”.
9. MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because
it is the last item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.
MPS
( )
( )
( )
( )
MRD
( )
MPP ( )
( )
16-14
16.3.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program
Start, Stop and Latching

In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop
switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are
several latching circuits in the following:
Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop
When start normally open contact X1=On, Y1 X2

stop normally contact X2＝Off, and Y1=On Y1
are set at the same time, if X2=On, the coil
Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls STOP
X1
priority of stop.
START
Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start

When start normally open contact X1=On,
stop normally contact X2＝Off and Y1=On X1 X2
(coil Y1 will be active and latching) are valid Y1
at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be
active due to latched contact. Therefore, it
calls priority of start. Y1
Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands

The figure at the right side is latching circuit
that made up of RST and SET command. Top priority of stop
It is top priority of stop when RST command X1
is set behind SET command. When
SET Y1
executing PLC from up to down, The coil Y1
is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2
X2 act at the same time, therefore it calls RST Y1
priority of stop.
It is top priority of start when SET command
is set after RST command. When X1 and
X2 act at the same time, Y1 is ON so it calls
Top priority of start
top priority of start.
X2
RST Y1
X1
SET Y1
The common control circuit

Example 4: condition control
X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self
latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact
connects to Y2 in series. Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.
16-15

X1 X3
Y1 X1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Example 5: Interlock control

The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start
contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other
won’t act. (This is called interlock.) Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2
won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram,
Y1 has higher priority than Y2.
X1 X3 Y2
X1
Y1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Y2
Example 6: Sequential Control

X1 X3 Y2 If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to
Y1 be an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in
Y1 the left side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop
Y1 after acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute
in sequential.
X2 X4 Y1
Y2
Y2
Example 7: Oscillating Circuit

The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT
Y1 Y1
Y1
T T
The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close
contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the
coil Y1 will be ON and output 1. In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1
normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON. Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF. The result of
repeated scan, coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle time ΔT (On) +ΔT (Off).
16-16
The vibrating circuitry of cycle time ΔT (On) +ΔT (Off):
X0 Y1
TMR T0 Kn X0
T0
Y1
Y1
nT T
The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be
closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is
the setting of timer and it is decimal number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))
Example 8: Blinking Circuit

X0 T2
X0
TMR T1 Kn1
n2 *T
T1
TMR T2 Kn2
Y1
X0 T1
Y1
n1* T
The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It
uses two timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2.
T is the base of timer (clock period)
Example 9: Triggered Circuit

X0
M0 X0
M0 Y1 T
Y1 M0
M0 Y1
Y1
In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single
pulse of ΔT (a scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be
OFF, normally close M0 and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being
ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON
for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This circuit usually executes alternate two
actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a period T, output coil
Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.
Example 10: Delay Circuit

X0
TMR T10 K1000
X0
T10
Y1
Y1
TB = 0.1 sec
100 seconds
When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding
normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delaying
100 seconds (K1000*0.1 seconds =100 seconds) once input X0 is OFF and T10 is ON. Please
refer to timing chart above.
16-17

Example 11: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two
timers.
No matter input X0 is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.
X0
TMR T5 K50 X0
T5 T6 5 seconds
Y4 T5
Y4
Y0
Y4 X0
TMR T6 K30
T6
3 seconds
Example12: Extend Timer Circuit

In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is
clock period. Timer: T11, T12; Timer cycle: T.
X0
X0
TMR T11 Kn1 n1* T
T11
T11
TMR T12 Kn2
n2* T
T12
Y1 T12
Y1
(n1+n2)* T
16-18
16.4 PLC Devices Function

Items Specifications Remarks
Stored program, cyclic scan
Control Method
system
Batch processing (when END I/O refresh instruction is
I/O Processing Method
instruction is executed) available
Basic commands (minimum 0.24 Application commands (1 ~
Execution Speed
us) dozens us)
Program Language Instruction, Ladder Logic, SFC
Program Capacity 1000 STEPS
30 basic commands
Commands 80 commands
50 application commands
Input/Output Contact Input (X): 10, output (Y): 4
Device Item Range Function

X0~X17, 16 points, Correspond to external
X External Input Relay Total is
octal number system input point
32
Y0~Y17, 16 points, Correspond to external
Y External Output Relay points
octal number system output point
For general M0~M799, 800 points Total is
Contacts can switch to
M Auxiliary M1000~M1079, 80 192
Relay bit mode
For special On/Off in program

points points
When the timer
indicated by TMR
Total is
command attains the
T Timer 100ms timer T0~T159, 160 points 16
setting, the T contact
points
with the same number
will be On.
When the counter
indicated by CNT
Total is
16-bit count up command attains the
C Counter C0~C79, 80 points 80
for general setting, the C contact
points
with the same number
will be On.
When timer attains, the
T Present value of timer T0~T15, 160 points contact of timer will be
On.
Register WORD data
When timer attains, the

C0~C79, 16-bit counter, 80
C Present value of counter contact of timer will be
points
On.
For latched D0~D399, 400 points
D1000~D1099, 100 Total is
Data For general It can be memory area
D points 1300
register for storing data.
D2000~D2799, 800 points
For special
points
K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
Constant
H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
Communication port (program read/write) RS485 (slave)

Analog input/output Built-in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output
Function extension module (optional) EMC-D42A; EMC-R6AA; EMCD611A
16-19

16.4.1 Devices Functions

The Function of Input/output Contacts
The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with
input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for contact A or contact B of each input contact X in
program. The On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but can’t
be changed by using peripheral equipment (WPLSoft).
The Function of Output Contact Y

The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending
On/Off signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is
unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for
output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be
decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method.
X0 The output of Y0 will be decided by
Y0 1 2 , i.e. decided by On/Off of
circuit ○
X10.
Y0 is repeated
X10
Y0 2
Value, Constant [K] / [H]

K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
Constant
H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is
the explanation of value types.
Binary Number (BIN)
It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary
system is in the following.
Bit Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.
Nibble It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to
represent number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.
Byte It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0. It can used to
represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system.
Word It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16-bit, b15~b0. It can used to
represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.
Double Word It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32-bit, b31~b0. It can used to
represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system.
The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.
16-20
DW Double Word
W1 W0 Word
BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 Byte
NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0 Nibble
Bit
¾ Octal Number (OCT)

The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.
Example:
External input: X0~X7, X10~X17… (device number)
External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17… (device number)
¾ Decimal Number, DEC

The suitable time for decimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
; To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
; To be the device number of M, T, C and D. For example: M10, T30. (device number)
; To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
¾ Binary Code Decimal (BCD)

It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16-bit can use to represent the
four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or
output value to 7-segment display to be display.
¾ Hexadecimal Number (HEX)

The suitable time for hexadecimal number to be used in DVP-PLC system.
; To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)
¾ Constant K:
In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100
in decimal number.
Exception: The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or
double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12
and 16-bit data separately.
¾ Constant H:
In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100
means 100 in hexadecimal number.
The Function of Auxiliary Relay

There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage
times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly.
There are two types divided by its characteristics.
16-21

1.Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to Off when power loss during running. Its
state will be Off when power on after power loss.
2.Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function.
Please don’t use undefined auxiliary relay.
The Function of Timer
The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be On
when the present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data
register D can be also used as settings.
• The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings
The Features and Functions of Counter

Item 16-bit counters 32-bit counters
Type General General High speed
Count direction Count up Count up/down
Settings 0~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Designate for
Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)
constant
Present value Counter will stop when attaining Counter will keep on counting when attaining
change settings settings
When count up attains settings, contact will be
When count attains the settings
On and latched.
Output contact value, contact will be On and
When count down attains settings, contact will
latched.
reset to Off.
The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will
Reset action
reset to Off.
Present register 16-bit 32-bit
After scanning, act together.
Contact action After scanning, act together. Act immediately when count attains. It has no
relation with scan period.
Functions:
When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On, the present value of counter equals to settings
and output coil is On. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.
16-bit counters C0~C79:
; Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32, 767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be
On immediately at the first count.
; General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the
value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.
; If using MOV command, WPLSoft to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at
the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be
set to the same as settings.
; The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register
D1000~D1044) to be indirect setting.
; If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it
can be positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is
-32,768.
16-22
Example:
LD X0 X0
RST C0 RST C0
LD X1 X1
CNT C0 K5 CNT C0 K5
LD C0 C0
OUT Y0 Y0
1. When X0=On, RST command is executed, X0

C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to
Off. X1
2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will
5
count up (add 1). 4
C0 settings
3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0 3
present 2
contact is On and C0 = setting =K5. C0 value 1
won’t accept X1 trigger signal and C0 0 0
remains K5. Contacts Y0, C0
16.4.2 Special Auxiliary Relays

Special Read(R)/
Function
M Write(W)
M1000 Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is On when running and it is On when
Read only
the status is set to RUN.
M1001 Normally closed contact (b contact). This contact is Off when running and it is Off Read only
when the status is set to RUN.
M1002 On only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive pulse in the Read only
RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1003 Off only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative pulse in Read only
the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1004 Reserved -
M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives Read only
M1006 Output frequency is 0, M1006 On Read only
M1007 Operation direction of AC motor drives (FWD: M1007 Off, REV: M1007On) Read only
M1008 -
~ Reserved
M1010
M1011 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off Read only
M1012 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off Read only
M1013 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off Read only
M1014 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off Read only
M1015 Frequency attained, M1015=On Read only
M1016 Parameter read/write error, M1016=On Read only
M1017 Succeed to write parameter, M1017 =On Read only
M1018 Reserved
M1019 Reserved
M1020 Zero flag Read only
M1021 Borrow flag Read only
M1022 Carry flag Read only
16-23

Special Read(R)/
Function
M Write(W)
M1023 Divisor is 0 Read only
M1024 Reserved -
M1025 RUN(ON) / STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive Read/Write
M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive (FWD: OFF, REV: ON) Read/Write
M1027 AC motor drive reset Read/Write
M1028 Reserved
M1029 Reserved
M1030 Reserved
M1031 Reserved
M1032 Reserved
M1033 Reserved
M1034 Enable CANopen real time control Read/Write
M1035 -
~ Reserved
M1039
M1040 Power On Read/Write
M1041 Reserved -
M1042 Quick stop Read/Write
M1043 Reserved -
M1044 Halt Read/Write
M1045 -
~ Reserved
M1047
M1048 New position Read/Write
M1049~
Reserved
M1051
M1052 Freuqency Lock Read/Write
M1053 -
~ Reserved
M1054
M1055 Home Read/Write
M1056 Power on ready Read only
M1057 Reserved -
M1058 On quick stopping Read only
M1059 CANopen master setting complete Read only
M1060 Initializing CANopen slave Read only
M1061 Initialize CANopen slave failed Read only
M1062 Reserved -
M1063 Target torque attained Read only
M1064 Target position attained Read only
M1065 Set pos ack Read only
M1066 Read/ Write CANopen data complete Read only
M1067 Read/ Write CANopen data suceed Read only
16-24
Special Read(R)/
Function
M Write(W)
M1068 -
~ Reserved
M1079
M1070 Homing complete Read only
M1071 Home error Read only
M1072 Reserved
~
M1079
16.4.3 Special Registers

Special D Read(R)/
Function
Write(W)
D1000 Reserved -
D1001 PLC firmware version Read only
D1002 Program capacity Read only
D1003 Checksum Read only
D1004
~ Reserved -
D1009
D1010 Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) Read only
D1011 Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) Read only
D1012 Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) Read only
D1013
~ Reserved -
D1019
D1020 Output frequency (0.000~600.00Hz) Read only
D1021 Output current (####.#A) Read only
The ID of the extension card: Read only
0: no card
D1022 1: Relay Card( 6 out )
2: I/O Card ( 4 in 2 out )
3~7: Reserved
The ID of the extension card:
0: no card
1: DeviceNet Slave
D1023 2: Profibus-DP Slave Read only
3: CANopen Slave
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet/IP Slave
6~8: Reserved
D1024
~ Reserved -
D1026
D1027 Frequency command of the PID control Read only
D1028 The responsive value of AUI AVI (analog voltage input) (0.00~100.00%) Read only
D1029 The responsive value of AUI ACI (analog current input) (0.0~100.00%) Read only
D1030 The corresponding value for AUI (-100.0~100.00%) Read only
D1031 Reserved -
16-25

Special D Read(R)/
Function
Write(W)
~
D1035
D1036 AC motor drive error code Read only
D1037 AC motor drive output frequency Read only
D1038 DC Bus voltage Read only
D1039 Output voltage Read only
D1040 Analog output value AFM1 (-100.00~100.00%) Read/Write
D1041
~ Reserved -
D1042
User defined (When Pr.00.04 is set to 28, the register data will be
D1043 Read/Write
displayed as C xxx)
D1044 Reserved -
D1045 Analog output value AFM2 (-100.00~100.00%) Read/Write
D1046
~ Reserved -
D1049
Actual mode
0: Velocity mode
D1050 1: Position mode Read only
2: Torque mode
3: Homing mode
+D1051
~ Reserved -
D1052
D1053 Actual torque Read only
D1054 Present count value of MI8(L word)
D1055 Present count value of MI8 (H word)
D1056 Read only
~ Reserved
D1059
Mode setting
0: Speed Mode
D1060 1: Position Mode Read/Write
2: Torque Mode
3: Homing Mode
D1061
~ Reserved Read/Write
D1069
D1100 Tartget frequency Read only
D1101 Target frequency (operating) Read only
D1102 Reference frequency Read only
D1103 Target position L Read only
D1104 Target position H Read only
D1105 Target torque Read only
D1106 - -
D1107 - -
D1108 - -
D1109 Random value Read only
D1110 Number of internal communication nodes RW
D1111 - -
D1112 - -
D1113 - -
16-26
Special D Read(R)/
Function
Write(W)
D1114 - -
D1115 Synchronous time cycle of internal communication Read only
D1116 Internal communication node error Read only
D1117 Corresponding on-line bit of internal communication node Read only
D1118 - -
D1119 Random value Read only
D1120 Control command of internal communication node 0 Read/Write
D1121 Mode of internal communication node 0 Read/Write
D1122 Reference command L of internal communication node 0 Read/Write
D1123 Referenc command H of internal communication node 0 Read/Write
D1124 - -
D1125 - -
D1126 Status of internal communication node 0 Read only
D1127 Reference status L of internal communication node 0 Read only
D1128 Reference status H of internal communication node 0 Read only
D1129 - -
D1134 - -
D1135 - -
D1139 - -
D1144 - -
D1145 - -
D1149 - -
D1154 - -
D1155 - -
D1159 - -
D1164 - -
D1165 - -
16-27

Special D Read(R)/
Function
Write(W)
D1169 - -
D1174 - -
D1175 - -
D1179 - -
D1184 - -
D1185 - -
D1189 - -
D1194 - -
D1195 - -
D1199 - Read only
CANopen Master Special D (Special D can be written only when PLC is at STOP)
Power
PDO Factory
Special D Function Failure R/W
Map Setting
Memory
The station which completed CANopen
D1070 NO NO 0 R
initialization (bit0=Machine code0 …….)
The station which error occurs during CANopen
D1071 NO NO 0 R
initialization (bit0=Machine code0 …….)
D1072 Reserved - - -
CANopen station cut off (bit0=Machine
D1073 NO NO R
code0 …….)
Error code of master error
0: no error
D1074 1: slave setting error NO NO 0 R
2: synchronous cycle setting error (the setting is
too low)
D1076 SDO fault (main index value) NO NO R
D1077 SDO fault (sub-index value) NO NO R
16-28
Power
PDO Factory
Special D Function Failure R/W
Map Setting
Memory
D1078 SDO fault (error code L) NO NO R
D1079 SDO fault (error code H) NO NO R
D1081 Reserved NO NO R
D1087 Reserved
~ - - -
D1089
D1090 Synchronous cycle setting NO YES 4 RW
The station for initialization during initializing RW
D1091 NO YES FFFFH
process.
D1092 Delay time before initializing NO YES 0 RW
D1093 Break off detection time NO YES 1000ms RW
D1094 Times of Break off detection NO YES 3 RW
D1095
~ Reserved - - -
D1096
Type of P to P send (PDO) RW
D1097 NO YES 1
Setting range: 1~240
Type of P to P received (PDO) RW
D1098 NO YES 1
Setting range: 1~240
Delay time of initialization complete RW
D1099 NO YES 15 sec
Setting range: 1~60000 sec.
C2000 supports up to 8 CANopen protocol slaves; each slave occupies 100 of special D register
and is numbered in 1~8. There are in total of 8 stations.
Slave No. Slave No. 1 D2000 Station number
D2001 Factory code(L)
~ ~
D2099 Mapping address 4 (H)of receiving station
Slave No. 2 D2100 Station number
~ ~
D2199 Mapping address 4(H) of receiving station
4
~ ~
D2299 Mapping address 4(H) of receiving station
16-29

4
Ø

~ ~
D2799 Mapping address 4(H)of receiving station
4
Slave No. 0~7
PDO Pre-defined
Special D Function Save R/W
Map setting
Station number of slave No. n
D2000+100*
Setting range: 0~127 NO 0 RW
n
0: CANopen disable
The category of slave No. n
D2001+100*
192H: AC motor drive/ AC servo motor and drive NO 0 R
n
191H: remote I/O module
D2002+100*
Factory code (L) of slave No. n NO 0 R
n
D2003+100*
Factory code (H) of slave No. n NO 0 R
n
D2004+100*
Factory product code (L) of slave No. n NO 0 R
n
D2005+100*
Factory product code (H) of slave No. n NO 0 R
n
Basic definition
Slave No. 0~7
PDO Pre-defined CAN PDO
Map setting Index 1 2 3 4
Treatment for slave No. n 6007H-001
D2006+100*n YES 0 ● ● ● RW
communication disconnect 0H
YES 603FH-001
D2007+100*n Error code of slave No. n 0 ● ● ● R
0H
YES 6040H-001
D2008+100*n Control word of slave No. n 0 RW
0H
YES 6041H-001
D2009+100*n Status word of slave No. n 0 R
0H
YES 6060H-000
D2010+100*n Control mode of slave No. n 2 RW
8H
YES 6061H-000
D2011+100*n Actual mode of slave No. n 2 R
8H
16-30
Speed Control
Slave No. 0~7
PDO Pre-define CAN PDO
Map d Setting Index 1 2 3 4
YES 6042H-001
D2012+100*n Target speed of slave No. n 0 ● RW
0H
YES 6043H-001
D2013+100*n Actual speed of slave No. n 0 ● R
0H
Speed deviation of slave No. 6044H-001
D2014+100*n YES 0 R
n 0H
604FH-002
D2015+100*n Accel. Time of slave No. n YES 1000 R
0H
6050H-002
D2016+100*n Decel. Time of slave No. n YES 1000 RW
0H
Torque control
Slave No. 0~7
Map Setting Index 1 2 3 4
6071H-001
D2017+100*n Target torque of slave No. n YES 0 ● RW
0H
6077H-001
D2018+100*n Actual torque of slave No. n YES 0 ● R
0H
6078H-001
D2019+100*n Actual current of slave No. n YES 0 R
0H
Position control
Slave No. 0~7
Target position(L) of slave
D2020+100*n YES 0 607AH-002 RW
No. n
●
Target position(H) of slave YES 0H
D2021+100*n 0 RW
No. n
Actual position(L) of slave YES
D2022+100*n 0 6064H-002 R
No. n
●
Actual position(H) of slave YES 0H
D2023+100*n 0 R
No. n
Speed diagram(L) of slave RW
D2024+100*n YES 10000 6081H-002
No. n
Speed diagram (H) of slave 0H RW
D2025+100*n YES 0
No. n
16-31

20XXH address corresponds to MI MO AI AO.

Slave No. n=0~7
2026H-011
D2026+100*n MI status of slave No. n YES 0 ● RW
0H
YES 2026H-411
D2027+100*n MO setting of slave No. n 0 ● RW
0H
YES 2026H-611
D2028+100*n AI1 status of slave No. n 0 ● RW
0H
YES 2026H-621
D2029+100*n AI2 status of slave No. n 0 ● RW
0H
2026H-631
D2030+100*n AI3 status of slave No. n YES 0 ● RW
0H
2026H-A11
D2031+100*n AO1 status of slave No. n YES 0 ● RW
0H
YES 2026H-A2
D2032+100*n AO2 status of slave No. n 0 ● RW
10H
YES 2026H-A3
D2033+100*n AO3 status of slave No. n 0 ● RW
10H
PDO Pre-defined
Map Setting
D2034+100*n Transmission setting of slave No. n NO YES 000AH RW
The mapping address 1(L) for slave No. n
D2035+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
transmitting station 1
The mapping address 1(H) for slave No.n
D2036+100*n NO YES 6040H RW
D2037+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
D2038+100*n NO YES 6042H RW
D2039+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2040+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2041+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2042+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2043+100*n NO YES 0110H RW
D2044+100*n NO YES 2026H RW
D2045+100*n NO YES 6110H RW
16-32
PDO Pre-defined
Map Setting
D2046+100*n NO YES 2026H RW
D2047+100*n NO YES 6210H RW
D2048+100*n NO YES 2026H RW
D2049+100*n NO YES 6310H RW
D2050+100*n NO YES 2026H RW
D2051+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
D2052+100*n NO YES 6040H RW
D2053+100*n NO YES 0020H RW
D2054+100*n NO YES 607AH RW
D2055+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2056+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2057+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2058+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2059+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
D2060+100*n NO YES 6040H RW
D2061+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
D2062+100*n NO YES 6071H RW
D2063+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2064+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2065+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2066+100*n NO YES 0 RW
D2067+100*n Receiving setting of slave No. n NO YES 0000H RW
D2068+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
receiving station 1
D2069+100*n NO YES 6041H RW
receiving station 1
D2070+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
receiving station 1
16-33

PDO Pre-defined
Map Setting
D2071+100*n NO YES 6043H RW
receiving station 1
D2072+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 1
D2073+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 1
D2074+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 1
D2075+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 1
D2076+100*n NO YES 4110H RW
receiving station 2
D2077+100*n NO YES 2026H RW
receiving station 2
D2078+100*n NO YES A110H RW
receiving station 2
D2079+100*n NO YES 2026H RW
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
D2081+100*n NO YES 2026H RW
receiving station 2
receiving station 2
D2083+100*n NO YES 2026H RW
receiving station 2
D2084+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
receiving station 3
D2085+100*n NO YES 6041H RW
receiving station 3
D2086+100*n NO YES 0020H RW
receiving station 3
D2087+100*n NO YES 6064H RW
receiving station 3
D2088+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 3
D2089+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 3
D2090+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 3
D2091+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 3
D2092+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
receiving station 4
D2093+100*n NO YES 6041H RW
receiving station 4
D2094+100*n NO YES 0010H RW
receiving station 4
D2095+100*n NO YES 6077H RW
receiving station 4
16-34
PDO Pre-defined
Map Setting
D2096+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 4
D2097+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 4
D2098+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 4
D2099+100*n NO YES 0 RW
receiving station 4
16.4.4 Communication Address for PLC Devices

Device Range Type Address (Hex)
X 00~17 (Octal) bit 0400~040F
Y 00~17 (Octal) bit 0500~050F
T 00~159 bit/word 0600~069F
M 000~799 bit 0800~0B1F
M 1000~1079 bit 0BE8~0C37
C 0~79 bit/word 0E00~0E47
D 00~399 word 1000~118F
D 1000~1099 word 13E8~144B
D 2000~2799 word 17D0~1AEF
Function Code
Function Code Description Supported Devices
01 Read coil status Y, M, T, C

02 Read input status X,Y,M,T,C
03 Read one data T,C,D
05 Force changing one coil status Y,M,T,C
06 Write in one data T,C,D
0F Force changing multiple coil Y,M,T,C
status
10 Write in multiple data T,C,D
Only when PLC is at Stop status, PLC data can be read/write via communication device. When PLC
is at Run status, the communication address should be the mapping address, e.g. for Pr.04-00 it
maps to 0400H.
NOTE
When PLC function is activated, C2000 can Read/Write the PLC and drive’s parameter by different addresses (pre-defined
station number for the AC motor drive is 1, for PLC station number is 2)
16-35

16.5 Commands
16.5.1 Basic Commands
Commands
Commands Function Operands
LD Load contact A X, Y, M, T, C
LDI Load contact B X, Y, M, T, C
AND Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, T, C
ANI Series connection with B contact X, Y, M, T, C
OR Parallel connection with A contact X, Y, M, T, C
ORI Parallel connection with B contact X, Y, M, T, C
ANB Series connects the circuit block --
ORB Parallel connects the circuit block --
MPS Save the operation result --
Read the operation result (the pointer is
MRD --
not moving)
MPP Read the result --
Output Command
OUT Drive coil Y, M
SET Action latched (ON) Y, M
RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y, M, T, C, D
Timer and Counter

TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D
CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D（16 bit）
Main Control Command

Connect the common series connection
MC N0~N7
contacts
Disconnect the common series connection
MCR N0~N7
contacts
Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact

LDP Rising-edge detection operation starts X, Y, M, T, C
LDF Falling-edge detection operation starts X, Y, M, T, C
ANDP Rising-edge detection series connection X, Y, M, T, C
ANDF Falling-edge detection series connection X, Y, M, T, C
ORP Rising-edge detection parallel connection X, Y, M, T, C
ORF Falling-edge detection parallel connection X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands

PLS Rising-edge output Y, M
PLF Falling-edge output Y, M
16-36
End Command
END Program end --
Other Command
NOP No function --
INV Inverse operation result --
P Indicator P
16.5.2 Explanation for the Command
Mnemonic Function
LD Load A contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
L The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or
the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to
save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status
into the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram Command code Operation

Example
X0 X1 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
Y1
Connect to contact A of
AND X1
X1 in series
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic Function
LDI Load B contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or
the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to
save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status
into the accumulative register.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Operation:

Example
LDI X0 Load contact B of X0
X0 X1
Y1 AND X1 Connect to contact A of
X1 in series
16-37

Mnemonic Function
AND Series connection- A contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Example
Load contact B of
X1 X0 LDI X1
Y1 X1
Connect to contact
AND X0
A of X0 in series
Mnemonic Function
ANI Series connection- B contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
X1
Load contact A of
Example X0 LD X1
Y1 X1
Connect to contact
ANI X0
B of X0 in series
Mnemonic Function
OR Parallel connection- A contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculations with the logic calculation result before the
16-38

X0 Load contact A of
Example Y1 LD X0
X0
X1 Connect to contact
OR X1
A of X1 in parallel
Mnemonic Function
ORI Parallel connection- B contact
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculations with the logic calculation result before the
Example
X0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
Y1 Connect to contact B of
ORI X1
X1 X1 in parallel
Mnemonic Function
ANB Series connection (Multiple Circuits)
Operand None
To perform the “ANB” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
contents of the accumulative register.
Example
X0 X1
LD X0 Load contact A of X0
ANB
ORI X2
X2 in parallel
X2 X3 LDI X1 Load contact B of X1
Block A Block B OR X3
X3 in parallel
Connect circuit block in
ANB
series
Mnemonic Function
ORB Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)
Operand None
ORB is to perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results
and contents of the accumulative register.
16-39


Example
X0 X1 Block A
ANI X1
X1 in series
X2 X3 LDI X2 Load contact B of X2
ORB
Block B AND X3
X3 in series
Connect circuit block in
ORB
parallel
Mnemonic Function
MPS Store the current result of the internal PLC operations
Operand None
To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result
operation pointer pluses 1)
Mnemonic Function
MRD Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
Operand None
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of
operation result doesn’t move)
Mnemonic Function
MPP Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
Operand None
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the stack pointer
will decrease 1)
Example
MPS
X0 X1 MPS Save in stack
Y1 Connect to contact A of
X2 AND X1
X1 in series
MRD M0 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Read from the stack
Y2 MRD (without moving
MPP pointer)
END Connect to contact A of
AND X2
X2 in series
OUT M0 Drive M0 coil
MPP Read from the stack
END End program
16-40
Mnemonic Function
OUT Output coil
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－ 9 9 －－－
Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.
Motion of coil contact:

OUT command
Contact
Operation
result B contact
Coil A contact
(normally
(normally open)
closed)
FALSE Off Non-continuity Continuity
TRUE On Continuity Non-continuity
Example
X0 X1 LD X0 Load contact B of X0
Y1
AND X1
X1 in series
Mnemonic Function
SET Latch (ON)
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－ 9 9 －－－
When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will
keep “ON” whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command
to set the device to “OFF”.
Example X0 Y0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
SET Y1
Connect to contact B of
AN Y0
Y0 in series
SET Y1 Y1 latch (ON)
Mnemonic Function
RST Clear the contacts or the registers
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－ 9 9 9 9 9
When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows:
Device Status
Y, M Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”.
Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil
T, C
and contact will be set to “OFF.”
D The content value will be set to 0.
When the RST command is not driven, motion of its specific device is unchanged.
16-41

Command code: Operation:

Example Ladder diagram
X0
RST Y5 RST Y5 Clear contact Y5
Mnemonic Function
TMR 16-bit timer
T-K T0~T159, K0~K32,767
Operand
T-D T0~T159, D0~D399
When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to
count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value),
the contact will be as following
Open
NO(Normally Open) contact
collector
Close
NC(Normally Closed) contact
collector
When the RST command is not driven, motion of its specific device remains
unchanged.
Example Ladder Diagram: Command code: Operation:

X0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
TMR T5 K1000
T5 Setting of T5 counter
TMR
K1000 is K1000.
Mnemonic Function
CNT Clear contact or register
C-K C0~C79, K0~K32,767
Operand
C-D C0~C79, D0~D399
When the CNT command is executed from OFFÆON, which means that the counter
coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter
achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the
contact is as follows:
Open
NO(Normally Open) contact
collector
Close
NC(Normally Close) contact
collector
If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the contacts and the counting
values will be unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use
the RST command.
Command code: Operation
Example Ladder diagram:
LD X0 Load contact A of
X0
CNT C2 K100 Setting of C2 counter is
CNT C2 K100
K100.
16-42
Mnemonic Function
MC/MCR Master control Start/Reset
Operand N0~N7
1. MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the
execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC
command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is
described as follows:
Command Description
Timer The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and
the contact are both turned OFF
Accumulative timer The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the
contact stay at their present condition
Subroutine timer The counting value is back to zero. Both coil and
contact are turned OFF.
The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the
Counter
contact stay at their present condition
Coils driven up by the OUT
All turned OFF
command
Devices driven up by the SET
Stay at present condition
and RST commands
All of them are not acted , but the nest loop
FOR-NEXT command will still be executed for
Application commands
times defined by users even though the MC-MCR
commands is OFF.
2. MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the
main-control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the
MCR command.
3. Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program support the nest program
structure, with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~
N7, and refer to the following:
Ladder Diagram:
Example LD X0 Load A contact of X0
X0
MC N0
Enable N0 common
MC N0 series connection
X1
Y0
contact
LD X1 Load A contact of X1
X2
MC N1 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil
X3
Y1 :
MCR N1 Enable N1 common
MC
N1 series connection
MCR N0 contact
X10
MC N0 LD X3 Load A contact of X3
X11
Y10
:
MCR N0 Disable N1 common
MCR N1 series connection
contact
16-43

:
Disable N0 common
MCR N0 series connection
contact
:
Enable N0 common
MC N0 series connection
contact
Enable N0 common
OUT Y10 series connection
contact
: Load A contact of X1
MCR N0 Drive Y0 coil
Mnemonic Function
LDP Rising-edge detection operation
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.
Example Ladder diagram:
Start X0 rising-edge
LDP X0
X0 X1 detection
Y1 Series connection A
AND X1
contact of X1
Please refer to the specification of each model series for the applicable range of
Remarks
operands.
If rising-edge status is ON when PLC power is off, then the rising-edge status will be
TRUE when PLC power is on.
Mnemonic Function
LDF Falling-edge detection operation
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is
used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the
acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.
16-44

Example X0 X1 Start X0 falling-edge
LDF X0
Y1 detection
Series connection A
AND X1
contact of X1
Mnemonic Function
ANDP Rising-edge series connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.
Ladder diagram: Command code:

Operation:
Example X0 X1 Load A contact of X0
Y1 LD X0
X1 rising-edge
ANDP X1 detection in series
connection
Mnemonic Function
ANDF Falling-edge series connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.

Example X0 X1 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1
X1 falling-edge
ANDF X1 detection in series
connection
Mnemonic Function
ORP Rising-edge parallel connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s
rising-edge detection.
16-45


Example X0 LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1 X1 rising-edge
X1 ORP X1 detection in parallel
connection
Mnemonic Function
ORF Falling-edge parallel connection
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
9 9 9 9 9 －
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge
detection.
Y1 X1 falling-edge
X1 ORF X1 detection in parallel
connection
Mnemonic Function
PLS Rising-edge output
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－ 9 9 －－－
When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will
send the pulse of one time which the length is the time needed for one scan cycle.
PLS M0 PLS M0 M0 rising-edge output
M0
Load the contact A of
SET Y0 LD M0
M0
SET Y0 Y0 latched (ON)
Timing diagram:
X0
M0 Time for one scan cycle
Y0
Mnemonic Function
PLF Falling-edge output
X0~X17 Y0~Y17 M0~M799 T0~159 C0~C79 D0~D399
Operand
－ 9 9 －－－
When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0
will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.
16-46

Example X0 LD X0 Load contact A of X0
PLS M0 PLF M0 M0 falling-edge output
M0
LD M0 Load contact A of M0
SET Y0
SET Y0 Y0 latched (ON)
Timing Diagram:
X0
M0 Time for one scan cycle
Y0
Mnemonic Function
END Program End
Operand None
It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or
command program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after the
execution it will return to address 0 and scan again.
Mnemonic Function
NOP No action
Operand None
NOP command does no operation in the program; the result of executing this
command will remain the logic operation. Use NOP command if user wants to delete
certain command without changing the length of the program.
Ladder diagram:
Example LD X0 Load contact B of X0
NOP command will be simplified and not
displayed when the ladder diagram is NOP No function
displayed.
X0
NOP Y1
Mnemonic Function
INV Inverse operation result
Operand None
The operation result (before executing INV command) will be saved inversely into
cumulative register.
Ladder diagram:
Example LD X0 Load contact A of X0
X0
Y1 Operation result
INV
inversed
16-47

Mnemonic Function
P Indicator
Operand P0~P255
Indicator P allows API 00 CJ command and API 01 CALL command to skip from 0.
Though it is not necessary to start from number 0, same number can not be used
twice or serious error would occur.
Ladder diagram:
Example LD X0 Load contact A of X0
X0
CJ P10
CJ P10 Skip command CJ to
P10
X1 :
P10 Y1
P10 Indicator P10
16.5.3 Description of the Application Commands

Mnemonic Codes P STEPS
API Function
16-bit 32-bit Command 16bit 32bit
01 CALL - 9 CALL subroutine 3 -
Loop control
06 FEND - - The end of main program 1 -
10 CMP – 9 Compare 7 13
Transmission 11 ZCP – 9 Zone compare 9 17
Comparison 12 MOV – 9 Data Move 5 9
15 BMOV – 9 Block move 7 –
– Perform the addition of BIN 13
20 ADD 9 7
data
– Perform the subtraction of 13
21 SUB 9 7
Four BIN data
Fundamental – Perform the multiplication 13
22 MUL 9 7
Operations of of BIN data
Arithmetic – Perform the division of BIN 13
23 DIV 9 7
data
24 INC – 9 Perform the addition of 1 3 5
25 DEC – 9 Perform the subtraction of 1 3 5
30 ROR – 9 Rotate to the right 5 –
Rotation and –
Displacement 31 ROL 9 Rotate to the left 5 –
Data
40 ZRST – 9 Zero Reset 5 -
Processing
Contact type Contact Logical Operation
215 LD& DLD& - 5 9
LD#
logic Contact type logic
216 LD| DLD| - 5 9
operation operation LD＃
Contact Logical Operation
217 LD^ DLD^ - 5 9
LD#
218 AND& DAND& - 5 9
AND#
16-48
Mnemonic Codes P STEPS

API Function
16-bit 32-bit Command 16bit 32bit
219 ANDl DANDl - 5 9
AND#
220 AND^ DAND^ - 5 9
AND#
221 OR& DOR& - 5 9
OR＃
222 OR| DOR| - 5 9
OR＃
223 OR^ DOR^ - 5 9
OR＃
224 LD＝ DLD＝ - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
225 LD＞ DLD＞ - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
226 LD＜ DLD＜ - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ - Load Compare LD※ 5 9
232 AND＝ DAND＝ - AND Compare※ 5 9
233 AND＞ DAND＞ - AND Compare※ 5 9
234 AND＜ DAND＜ - AND Compare※ 5 9
Contact Type
DAND＜ AND Compare※
Comparison 236 AND＜＞ - 5 9
＞
DAND＜ AND Compare※
237 AND＜＝ - 5 9
＝
DAND＞ AND Compare※
238 AND＞＝ - 5 9
＝
240 OR＝ DOR＝ - OR compare ※ 5 9
241 OR＞ DOR＞ - OR compare ※ 5 9
242 OR＜ DOR＜ - OR compare ※ 5 9
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ - OR compare ※ 5 9
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ - OR compare ※ 5 9
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ - OR compare ※ 5 9
139 RPR – 9 Read the parameters 5 –
140 WPR – 9 Write the parameters 5 –
Special 141 FPID – 9 Drive PID control 9 –
command for 142 FREQ – 9 Control the drive frequency 7 –

AC motor 261 CANRX – 9 Read CANopen Slave data 9 -
drive 263 TORQ – 9 Set target torque 5 -
264 CANTX – 9 Write CANopen Slave data 9 -
9 Update the mapping
265 CANFLS – 3 -
special D of CANopen
16-49

16.5.4 Explanation for the Application Commands
API
CALL S Call Subroutine
01 P
Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (3 STEPS)

CALL CALLP
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D
Operands: 32-bit command
S: Operand S can designate P. －－－－
Flag signal: None
Operand S of C2000 series can designate P0~P63.
1. S: The pointer of call subroutine.
Explanation
2. Edit the subroutine designated by the pointer after FEND instruction.
3. If only CALL instruction is in use, it can call subroutines of the same pointer
number with no limit of times.
4. Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL instruction. (If
entering the sixth level, the subroutine won’t be executed.)
16-50
API
FEND － The end of the main program (First End)
06
Bit Devices Word Devices 16-bit command (1 STEP)

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FEND －－
Operands: 32-bit command

No operand －－－－
No contact to drive the instruction is required. Flag signal: None
1. This instruction denotes the end of the main program. It has the same function
Explanation
as that of END instruction when being executed by PLC.
2. CALL must be written after FEND instruction and add SRET instruction in the
end of its subroutine. Interruption program has to be written after FEND
instruction and IRET must be added in the end of the service program.
3. If several FEND instructions are in use, place the subroutine and interruption
service programs between the final FEND and END instruction.
4. After CALL instruction is executed, executing FEND before SRET will result in
errors in the program.
When X1=ON,
CALL operation
Command procedure
Main Program
When X1=OFF, X1
operation
CALL P63
procedure
Main Program
Main Program
P63 CALL Sub command

program
Main Program
16-51

API
CMP S1 S2 D Compare
10 D P
Bit Devices Word Devices

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command ( 7 STEPS)
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ CMP CMPP
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊ 32bits command (13 STEPS)
－－－－
Operand
Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
Flag signal: None
Explanation 1. S1: value comparsion 1, S2: value comparison 2 , D: result comparison

2. The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and result is stored in D.
3. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values
are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction, the comparison
will regard the value as negative binary values.
1. Designate device Y0, and operand D automatically occupies Y0, Y1, and Y2.
Example 2. When X10 = On, CMP instruction will be executed and one of Y0, Y1, and Y2
will be On. When X10 = Off, CMP instruction will not be executed and Y0,
Y1, and Y2 remain their status before X10 = Off.
3. If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a series
parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.
X10
CMP K10 D10 Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On
4. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.

X10
RST M0
RST M1
RST M2
16-52
API
ZCP S1 S2 S D Zone Compare
11 D P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command (9 STEPS)
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ ZCP ZCPP
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
D ＊＊－－－－
Operands:
Flag signal: none
S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper
bound of zone comparison S: Comparison value
D: Comparison result
E xplanation 1. S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper bound of zone
comparison S: Comparison value D: Comparison result
2. S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D.
3. When S1 > S2, the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the
lower/upper bound.
4. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two
values are signed binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction or
b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as
negative binary values.
1. Designate device M0, and operand D automatically occupies M0, M1 and
Example
M2.
2. When X0 = On, ZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0, M1, and
M2 will be On. When X10 = Off, ZCP instruction will not be executed and
M0, M1, and M2 remain their status before X0 = Off.
3. If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a
series parallel connection between Y0 ~ Y2.

X0
ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
If K10 <
= C10 <
= K100, M1 = On
M2
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
4. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.
X0 X0
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2
16-53

API
MOV S D Moving the data
12 D P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MOV MOVP
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
D ＊＊＊＊＊－－－－
Operand: None Flag signal: None
E xplanation 1. S: Source of data D: Destination of data
2. When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly
to D. When this instruction is not executed, the content of D remains
unchanged.
Example
1. When X0 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X0 = On, the
value K10 will be moved to D10 data register.
2. When X1 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X1 = On, the
present value T0 will be moved to D10 data register.
X0
MOV K10 D0
X1
MOV T0 D10
16-54
API
BMOV S D n Block Move
15 P

BMOV BMOVP
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command
n ＊＊－－－－
Operand:
Flag signal: None
Range of n ＝1~512
E xplanation 1. S: Start of source devices D: Start of destination devices n: Number of data to

be moved
2. The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be
moved to n registers starting from the device designated by D. If n exceeds the
actual number of available source devices, only the devices that fall within the
valid range will be used.
Example When X10 = On, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20
1 ~ D23.
X10
D20 K4 D0 D20
D1 D21 n=4
D2 D22
D3 D23
Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the
Example
number of digits of S and D has to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same.
M1000
2 M0
D0 D20 K4
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
n=3
M6
M7
M8 Y10
M9 Y11
M10 Y12
M11 Y13
16-55

Example To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two
operands and cause confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the
3 designated device numbers.
When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3
X10
D20 1 D19
BMOV D20 D19 K3 2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21
When S < D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1

X11
D10 3 D11
BMOV D10 D11 K3 2
D11 D12
1
D12 D13
API
ADD S1 S2 D BIN Addition
20 D P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ADD ADDP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊－－－－
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Operands: None Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
E xplanation 1. S1: Summand S2: Addend D: Sum
2. This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D.
3. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic
addition, e.g. 3 + (-9) = -6.
4. Flag changes in binary addition
16-bit command:
A. If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
B. If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
C. If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
Example 16-bit command:

When X0 = On, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be
stored in D20.
X0
ADD D0 D10 D20
16-56
Remarks Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values:

16 bit: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
-2, -1, 0 -32,768 -1, 0 1 32,767 0 1 2
The highest bit The highest bit

Borrow flag of the data of the data Carry flag
= 1 (negative) = 0 (positive)
32 bit: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
-2, -1, 0 -2,147,483,648 -1, 0 1 2,147,483,647 0 1 2
The highest bit The highest bit

Borrow flag Carry flag
of the data of the data
= 1 (negative) = 0 (positive)
API
SUB S1 S2 D Subtraction
21 D P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SUB SUBP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊－－－－
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Operands: None Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
E xplanation 1. S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Remainder
2. This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
3. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic
subtraction.
4. Flag changes in binary subtraction
In 16-bit instruction:
If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
Example In 16-bit BIN subtraction:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will
be stored in D20.
X0
SUB D0 D10 D20
16-57

API
MUL S1 S2 D BIN Multiplication
22 D P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MUL MULP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊－－－－
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Operands:
Flag signal: None
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
E xplanation 1. S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplication D: Product
2. This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
Be careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit
and 32-bit operations.
16-bit command:
S1 S2 D +1 D
b15..........b0 b15..........b0 b31..........b16b15..............b0

X =
b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.
Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.
When D serves as a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 and construct a 16-bit result,
occupying consecutive 2 groups of 16-bit data.
Example The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The
higher 16-bit are stored in D21 and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. On/Off of the
most left bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value.
X0
MUL D0 D10 D20
MUL D0 D10 K8M0
16-58
API
DIV S1 S2 D BIN Division
23 D P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DIV DIVP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
D ＊＊＊＊＊－－－－
Operands: Flag signal: none`
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
E xplanation 1. S1: Dividend S2: Divisor D: Quotient and remainder
2. This instruction divides S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be
careful with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and
32-bit operations.
16-bit instruction:
Quotient Remainder
+1
/ =
If D is the bit device, it allocates K1~K14 to 16-bit and occupies 2 continuous sets
of quotient and remainder.
Example When X0 = On, D0 will be divided by D10; the quotient will be stored in D20 and
remainder in D21. On/Off of the highest bit indicates the positive/negative value of the
result.
X0
DIV D0 D10 D20
DIV D0 D10 K4Y0
16-59

API
INC D Increment: BIN plus 1
24 D P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D INC INCP
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Operands: none
－－－－
Flag signal: none
E xplanation 1. D: Destination device

2. If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the
designated device D will plus “1” in every scan period whenever the
instruction is executed.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (INCP).
4. In 16-bit operation, 32,767 pluses 1 and obtains -32,768. In 32-bit
operation, 2,147,483,647 pluses 1 and obtains -2,147,483,648.
Example When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 pluses 1 automatically.
X0
INCP D0
16-60
API
DEC D Decrement: BIN minus 1
25 D P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DEC DECP
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Operands: none
－－－－
Flag signal: none
E xplanation D: Destination
1. If the command is not a pulse execution type, the content in the designated
device D will minus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is
executed.
2. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECP).
3. In 16-bit operation, -32,768 minuses 1 and obtains 32,767. In 32-bit operation,
-2,147,483,648 minuses 1 and obtains 2,147,483,647.
Example When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 minuses 1 automatically.
X0
DECP D0
16-61

API
ROR D n Rotate to the Right
30 P
Bit Devices Word Devices 16 bit command (5 STEPS)

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROR RORP
D ＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command
n ＊＊
－－－－
Operands:
D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16-bit) is valid Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
n: n=K1~K16 (16-bit)
E xplanation 1. D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
2. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for
n bits.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RORP).
Example When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16-bit (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to
the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry
flag M1022.
X0
RORP D10 K4
Rotate to the right

upper bit lower bit
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
upper bit lower bit
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Carry
* flag
16-62
API
ROL D n Rotate to the Left
31 P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROL ROLP
D ＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command
n ＊＊－－－－
Operands:
D: if in KnY and KnM, only K4 (16-bit) is valid
n: n=K1~K16 (16-bit) Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
E xplanation 1. D: Device to be rotated; n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation

2. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for
n bits.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ROLP).
Example When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16-bit (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to
the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry
flag M1022.
X0
D10 K4
Rotate to the left

upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag 16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
upper bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag
16-63

API
ZRST D1 D2 Zero Reset
40 P

D1 ＊＊＊＊＊ ZRST ZRSTP
D2 ＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command
Operands:
－－－－
No of D1 operand. ≦No. of D2 operand
D1 and D2 must select same device type
Flag signal: none
Please refer to the specification of each model series
for applicable range of the device.
E xplanation D1: Start device of the range to be reset D2: End device of the range to be reset
When D1 > D2, only operands designated by D2 will be reset.
Example 1. When X0 = On, auxiliary relays M300 ~ M399 will be reset to Off.
2. When X1 = On, 16 counters C0 ~ C127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact
and coil being reset to Off).
3. When X10 = On, timers T0 ~ T127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact and coil
being reset to Off).
4. When X3 = On, data registers D0 ~ D100 will be reset to 0.
X0
ZRST M300 M399
X1
ZRST C0 C127
X10
ZRST T0 T127
X3
ZRST D0 D100
Remarks 1. Devices, e.g. bit devices Y, M, S and Word Devices T, C, D, can use RST
instruction.
2. API 16 FMOV instruction is also to send K0 to Word Devices T, C, D or bit
registers KnY, KnM, KnS for reset.
X0
RST M0
RST T0
RST Y0
FMOV K0 D10 K5
16-64
API
215~ LD# S1 S2 Contact Logical Operation LD#
D
217

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD# ZRSTP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DLD# －－－
Operands: ＃: &, |, ^
Please refer to the specifications of each model for the Flag signal: none
range of operands.
E xplanation 1. S1: Data source device 1 S2: Data source device 2
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not “0”, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “0”, the continuity of the
instruction is disabled.
3. LD# (#: &, |, ^) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.
16 -bit 32 -bit No-continuity
API No. Continuity condition
instruction instruction condition
215 LD& DLD& S1 & S2 ≠0 S1 & S2 =0

216 LD| DLD| S1 | S2 ≠0 S1 | S2 =0
217 LD^ DLD^ S1 ^ S2 ≠0 S1 ^ S2 =0
4. &: Logical “AND” operation

5. |: Logical “OR” operation
6. ^: Logical “XOR” operation
Example 1. When the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
2. When the result of logical OR operation of D200 and D300 ≠ 0 and X1 = On,
Y11 = On will be retained.
LD & C0 C10 Y10

X1
LD I D200 D300 SET Y11
16-65

API
218~ AND# S1 S2 Contact Logical Operation AND#
D
220

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND# ZRSTP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DAND# －－－
Operands: ＃: &, |, ^
range of operands.
3. AND# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on series contacts.

218 AND& DAND& S1 & S2 ≠0 S1 & S2 =0

219 AND| DAND| S1 | S2 ≠0 S1 | S2 =0
220 AND^ DAND^ S1 ^ S2 ≠0 S1 ^ S2 =0
Example 1. When X0 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 =
On.
2. When X1 = Off and the result of logical OR operation of D10 and D0 ≠ 0 and X1 =
On, Y11 = On will be retained.
3. When X2 = On and the result of logical XOR operation of 32-bit register D200
(D201) and 32-bit register D100 (D101) ≠ 0 or M3 = On, M50 = On.
X0
AND & C0 C10 Y10
X1
AND I D10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND ^ D200 D100 M50
M3
16-66
API
221~ OR# S1 S2 Contact Logical operation OR#
D
223

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR# ZRSTP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DOR# －－－
Operand: ＃: &, |, ^
range of operands.
3. OR# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on parallel contacts.

221 OR& DOR& S1 & S2 ≠0 S1 & S2 =0

222 OR| DOR| S1 | S2 ≠0 S1 | S2 =0
223 OR^ DOR^ S1 ^ S2 ≠0 S1 ^ S2 =0

Example When X1 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
1. M60 will be On, if X2 and M30 are On with one of the following two conditions: 1.
The OR operation result of 32-bit register D10 (D11) and 32-bit register D20(D21)
does not equal to 0. 2. The XOR operation result of 32-bit counter C235 and
32bits register D200 (D201) does not equal 0.
LD= K200 C10 Y10
X1
LD> D200 K-30 SET Y11
16-67

API
224~ LD※ S1 S2 Load Compare※
D
230

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD※ ZRSTP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
32 位 bits command (9 STEPS)
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DLD※ －－－
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
range of operands.
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API224 (LD=) for
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the
result is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3. LD※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.
16 -bit 32 -bit Continuity No-continuity

API No.
instruction instruction condition condition
224 LD＝ DLD＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
225 LD＞ DLD＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
226 LD＜ DLD＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
Example 1. When the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.

2. When the content in D200 > K-30 and X1 = On, Y11= On will be retained.
X1
Y0
OR & C0 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR I D10 D20
16-68
API
232~ AND※ S1 S2 AND Compare※
D
238

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND※ ZRSTP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DAND※ －－－
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
range of operands.
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API232 (AND=) for
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result
is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3. AND※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) is a comparison instruction is used on series

contacts
16 –bit 32 –bit Continuity No-continuity

API No.
232 AND＝ DAND＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
233 AND＞ DAND＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
234 AND＜ DAND＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
Example 1. When X0 = On and the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.

2. When X1 = Off and the content in D0 ≠ K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
3. When X2 = On and the content in 32-bit register D0 (D11) < 678,493 or M3 =
On, M50 = On.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10
X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3
16-69

API
240~ OR※ S1 S2 OR Compare※
D
246

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR※ ZRSTP
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DOR※ －－－
Operands: ※: =, >, <, <>,≦,≧
range of operands.
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API240 (OR=) for
example, if the result is “=”, the continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the
result is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3. OR※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) is an comparison instruction used on parallel
contacts.
16 -bit 32 -bit Continuity No-continuity
API No.
232 AND＝ DAND＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
233 AND＞ DAND＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
234 AND＜ DAND＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
Example 1. When X1 = On and the present value of C10 = K200, Y0 = On.

2. When X1 = Off and the content in D0 ≠ K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
3. M50 will be On when X2=On and the content of 32-bit register D0(D11) <678,493
or M3= On.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10
X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3
16-70
16.5.5 Description to drive’s special commands
API
RPR S1 S2 Read the AC motor drive’s parameters
139 P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D RPR RPRP
S1 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
S2 ＊
－－－－
Operands: none
Flag signal: none
E xplanation S1: Data address for reading S2: The register that saves the read data
API
WPR S1 S2 Write the AC motor drive’s parameters
140 P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D WPR WPRP
S1 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
S2 ＊＊＊
－－－－
Operands: None
Flag signal: none
E xplanation S1: The data for writing. S2: The parameters address for the write data.
1. It will read the data in parameter H2100 of the C2000 and write into D0; H2101 is
Example
read and write into D1.
2. When M0=On, data in D10 will be written into Pr. H2001 of C2000.
3. When M1=ON, data in H2 will be written into Pr. H2001 of C2000, which is to
activate the AC motor drive.
4. When M2=ON, data in H1 will be written into H2000 of C2000, which is to stop
the AC motor drive.
5. When data writing successfully, M1017 will be on.
M1000
RPR H2100 D0
RPR H2101 D1
M0
WPR D10 H2001
M1
WPRP H2 H2000
M2
WPRP H1 H2000
M1017
Y0
END
16-71

API
FPID S1 S2 S3 S4 PID control for the AC motor drive
141 P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FPID FPIDP
S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊ 32-bit command
S3 ＊＊＊－－－－
S4 ＊＊＊
Operands: None Flag signal: None
E xplanation 1. S1: PID Set Point Selection, S2: Proportional Gain P, S3: Integral Time I, S4:
Derivative control D
2. This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive
directly, including Pr.08.00 PID set point selection, Pr.08.01 Proportional gain
(P), Pr.08.02 Integral time (I) and Pr.08.03 Derivative control (D)
Example 1. Assume that when M0=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=0, S3 =1
(unit: 0.01 seconds) and S4=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds).
2. Assume that when M1=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=1 (unit:
0.01), S3 =0 and S4=0.
3. Assume that when M2=ON, S1 is set to 1(frequency is inputted by digital
keypad), S2=1 (unit: 0.01), S3 =0 and S4=0.
4. D1027: frequency command after PID calculation.
M0
FPID H0 H0 H1 H1
M1
FPID H0 H1 H0 H0
M2
FPID H1 H1 H0 H0
M1000
MOV D1027 D1
END
16-72
API
FREQ S1 S2 S3 Operation control of the AC motor drive
142 P

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ FREQP
S1 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
S2 ＊＊＊－－－－
S3 ＊＊＊
Flag signal: M1028
Operands: None
E xplanation 1. S1: frequency command, S2: acceleration time, S3: deceleration time
2. This command FREQ can control frequency command, acceleration time and
deceleration time of the AC motor drive. Special register control is shown as
following:
M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. (Run is valid when Servo
On (M1040 On).)
M1026: Operation directions FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive.
M1040: controls Servo On (On)/ Servo Off (Off).
M1042: enable quick stop(ON)/ disable quick stop(Off)
M1044: enable Stop (On)/ disable stop(Off)
M1052: frequency locked (On)/ disable frequency locked(Off)
Example 1. M1025: controls RUN (On)/STOP (Off) of the drive. M1026: operation direction
FWD (On)/REV (Off) of the drive. M1015: frequency attained.
2. When M10=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to
K300(3.00Hz) and acceleration/deceleration time is 0.
3. When M11=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to
K3000(30.00Hz), acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60.
M1000
M1025
M11
M1026
M1000
M1040
M12
M1042
M13
M1044
M14
M1052
M10 M11
FREQP K300 K0 K0
M11 M10
FREQ K3000 K50 K60
END
16-73

API
TORQ S1 S2 Torque Control of AC Motor Drive
263 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TORQ TORQ P
S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊ 32-bit command
－－－－
Operands: None
Flag signal: M1063
E xplanation 1. S1: torque command (display in signed decimal with one decimal place)
S2: speed limit
2. This command can control torque command and speed limi. Special register
control is shown as following:
M1040: controls Servo On(On)/ Servo Off(Off). Torque output and speed limit
are defined by the setting of TORQ command when TORQ command is set
when Servo is ON.
Example 1. M1040: control Servo On(On)/ Servo Off(Off). M1063: target torque attained.
D1060: control mode setting. D1053: actual torque.
2. When M0=Off, setting torque command of the AC motor drive to K+300(+30.0%)
and speed limit to 3000(30Hz).
3. When M0=On, setting torque command of AC motor drive to K-300(-30.0%) and
speed limit to 3000(30Hz)。
4. When M10=On, AC motor drive begins to execute torque command.
5. When target torque is attained, M1063 will switch ON and flag signal will be
blinking.
16-74
API
DPOS S1 Point to Point Position Control of AC Motor Drive
262 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D －－－－
S1 ＊＊＊
32-bit command (5 steps)
Operands: None DPOS DPOSP
Flag signal: M1064, M1070
E xplanation S1: target position (signed decimal)

This DPOS command can control the motor position of AC motor drive. Special
register control is shown as following:
M1040: controls Servo On(On)/ Servo Off(Off). M1055: searching origin point.
M1048: operate to the new position point. In the condition D1060 = 1 (control
mode is set to position mode), M1040=1 (Servo ON), and DPOS command is
given; when M1048 is set from OFF to ON the AC motor drive will operate till the
new position point.
Example 1. M1040: controls Servo On(On)/ Servo Off(Off). M1064: target position attained.
D1060: control mode setting. D1051(L) and D1052(H): actual position point.
2. When X0=On, setting M1040 to ON (Servo On).
3. When X1=On, setting DPOS position command to +300000. It will delay for 1
second then set M1048 to ON (operate to the new position). Please observe if the
D1051 value changes. When position is attained, M1064 will set to ON and Y0
will output an ON signal.
API CANRX S1 S2 S3 D Read CANopen slave data
16-75

261 P

S1 ＊＊
32-bit command
S2 ＊＊－－－－
S3 ＊＊
D ＊＊＊
Flag signal: M1028
Operand: none
E xplanation 1. S1: Slave station number, S2: main index, S3: sub-index + bit length, D: save
address
2. Command CANRX can read the corresponding slave. Index. When executing this
command, it will send SDO message to the slave. At this time, M1066 and M1067
are 0 but when reading is complete M1066 will set to 1. If the slave replied an
accurate response, the value will be written to the designated register and M1067
is now set to 1. However, if the slave replied an inaccurate response, this error
message will be recorded in D1076~D1079.
Example M1002: touch once to activate PLC and change K4M400=K1. After the change,
different message will be displayed when M1066 is set to 1.
16-76
API
CANTX S1 S2 S3 S4 Write CANopen slave data
264 P

S1 ＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command
S3 ＊＊－－－－
S4 ＊＊ Flag signal: M1028
Operands: None
E xplanation 1. S1: slave station number, S2: the address to write, S3: main index, S4: sub-index+
bit length.
2. Command CANTX can read the corresponding index of the slave. When
executing this command, it will send SDO message to the slave. At this time,
M1066 and M1067 are 0 but when reading is complete M1066 will set to 1. If the
slave replied an accurate response, the value will be written to the designated
register and M1067 is now set to 1. However, if the slave replied an inaccurate
response, this error message will be recorded in D1076~D1079.
16-77

API
CANFLS D Update the mapping special D of CANopen
265 P

D ＊＊
32-bit command
Operands: None
－－－－
Flag signal: M1028
E xplanation 1. D: the special D for update.

2. CANFLS can update the Special D command. When it executes in read only
mode, it sends equivalent message as CANRX to the slave and saves the slave
response to this particular Special D. When it executes in read/write mode, it
sends equivalent message as CANTX to the slave and saves this special D
value to the corresponding slave.
3. M1066 and M1067 are both 0. When reading is complete, M1066 will be 1 and
this value will write to the designated register if the slave replies an accurate
response. When slave replies a fault response then M1067 will be 0 and this
error message will be recorded to D1076~D1079.
16-78
16.6 Error and Troubleshoot

Fault ID Fault Descript Corrective Action
PLiC 48 Internal communication signal off Check if shielded wire is properly inserted
to communication port COM1.
Check if there is error in the program and
PLod 50 Data write error
download the program again.
Re-apply the power and download the
PLSv 51 Data write error when executing
program again.
Upload again. If error occurs continuously,
PLdA 52 Program upload error
please return to the factory.
Command error when download Check if there is error in the program and
PLFn 53 download the program again.
program
Program capacity exceeds memory Re-apply the power and download the
PLor 54 program again.
capacity
PLFF 55 Command error when executing
PLSn 56 Check sum error
There is no “END” command in the Check if there is error in the program and
PLEd 57
program download the program again.
The command MC is continuous Check if there is error in the program and
PLCr 58
used more than 9 times download the program again.
Download program error Check if there is error in the program and
PLdF 59
PLC scan time over-time Check if the program code is inaccurately
PLSF 60
written and download the program again.
16-79

16.7 CANopen Master Application

Simple control of multiple-axes for certain application can be done by C2000 if the device supports
CANopen protocol. One of the C2000 could acts as Master to perform simple synchronous control,
e.g. position, speed, zero return, and torque control. The setup can be done in 7 steps:
Step 1: Activate CANopen Master

1. Set Pr.09-45 to 1. (To activate Master function, turn off the power after setting and reboot.
The digital keypadKPC-CC01 status will display “CAN Master”.)
2. Set Pr.00-02 to 6 for PLC reset. (Note: This action will erase the program and PLC register
and will be set to factory setting.)
3. Turn off the power and reboot.
4. Set PLC control to”PLC Stop mode” by digital keypad KPC-CC01. (If the digital keypad is
KPC-CE01 series, set PLC control to”PLC 2”. If the drive just came out of the factory, since
PLC program is not yet installed, the digital keypad will show PLFF warning code.)
Step 2: Configuration of the Special D in Master

Each slave occupies 100 of Special D space and is numbered 1 to 8. There are in total of 8
stations. Please refer to 4-3 Special Register in this chapter for Special D register definition.
Slave No. Slave No. 1 D2000 Station number

~ ~
D2099 The mapping address 4(H) of receiving
station 4
~ ~
D2199 The mapping address 4 (H)of receiving
station 4
~ ~
D2299 The mapping address 4 (H)of receiving
station 4
~ ~
D2799 The mapping address 4(H) of receiving
station 4
1. When communication cable 485 is connected, set PLC status to “stop” by WPL soft. (If PLC
had already switched to “PLC Stop” mode then PLC status should be “stop” already.)
16-80
2. To control the slave address and corresponding station. For example, control 2 stations of
the slave (max. 8 stations synchronous control), if the station number is 21 and 22, set
D2000 and D2100 to 20 and 21 and then set D2200, D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600 and
D2700 to 0. The setting can be done via PLC software editor WPL, follow the steps shown:
Open WPL Editor > communication> Edit Register Memory(T C D)
When the “Register” window appears, click “Transmit”.
When transmission window appear, select “read” and input the range D2000~D2799
then press enter. The value in D2000~D2799 will be read. If communication failed,
check the communication format (pre-defined PLC station is 2, 9600, 7N2, ASCII).
Insert the slave station for control. Set D2000 and D2100 to 20 and 21 then set D2200,
D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600 and D2700 to 0.
Click”Transmit” again. When transmission window appears, input the range
D2000~D2799 and enter. The value in D2000~D2799 will be write (If communication
error occur and display failed, it means PLC is not in “stop” status. The value can only
16-81

be write in “stop” status, pleas switch PLC to “stop”.)

Another method is by setting D1091. Set the corresponding bit of the excluding slave
to 0 (slave station range from No.1~8). For example, if the user wants to exclude slave
No. 2, 6 and 7, please set D1091 = 003B by following steps: WPL Editor >
communication> Edit Register Memory(T C D)
3. Setup the communication setting. If following conditions apply to you then no additional
setting needs to be done:
; If the only control in this application is the speed mode of AC motor drive. (For
other control such as position and torque control, D2000~D2799 should be set. Please
refer to synchronous control on position, torque and zero return for more set up detail.
To perform synchronous control on position for the slave, please enable the
corresponding function PDO 3. (P to P function is not yet supported by C2000.)
To activate PDO 3 TX (Master sending command to Slave), please set up bit
8~11 of the PLC address D2034+n*100. This special D register is defined as
below:
PDO4 PDO3 PDO2 PDO1
Torque Position Remote I/O Speed
Bit 15 14 ~ 12 11 10 ~ 8 7 6~4 3 2~0
Definition En Number En Number En Number En Number
The pre-defined setting of PDO 3 TX has corresponded to CANopen control word

“Index 6040”and CANopen target position” Index 607A”. If position control is the
only control in this application then simply set Special D register value to 0x0A00.
To activate PDO 3 RX (Slave response with the status to Master), please set up
bit 8~11 of the PLC address D2067+n*100. This special D register is defined as
below:
PDO4 PDO3 PDO2 PDO1
Torque Position Remote I/O Speed
Bit 15 14 ~ 12 11 10 ~ 8 7 6~4 3 2~0
Definition En Number En Number En Number En Number
The pre-defined setting of PDO 3 TX has corresponded to CANopen control word

“Index 6041”and CANopen actual position” Index 6064”. If position control is the
only control in this application then simply set Special D register value to 0x0A00.
In same theory, to perform torque control, please enable the mapping function
PDO4.
; The speed for 1 corresponding cycle is 8ms. (When shorten the cycle time to < 8ms,
make sure the time is enough for the data to be transmitted.
User should calculate the corresponding PDO quantity before setting the cycle. The
PDO quantity should not be greater than the N. The quantity can be calculated by the
following formula.
N = (1 cycle (ms) * rate (kbs) )/250
16-82
Example: 1 cycle is 2ms, speed= 1000k, max PDO value is 2*1000/250 = 8. If user
wants to set the cycle time to 2ms, turns off 4 of the C type AC motor drive slave
stations must be turned off (since the pre-defined setting is 8 slaves, half of the
slave station would be 4). The slave station can be turned off by setting the
D2000+n*100 of the unused slaves to 0.
; Number of control station ≤ 8.
Controlling 8 slave stations at once can only be done by asynchronous control where
to Read/Write the slave is done by CANRX and CANTX command. This is similar to
the Read/Write action of Modbus protocol.
; The slave complies with DS402 standard.

; Does not control Slave IO terminal.
; If above conditions do not apply, please set up the slave corresponding addresses
manually by open WPL editor > communication> Edit Register Memory (T C D).
Step 3: Set up Master station number and communication speed.

; Set up the station number for the Master (the default setting of Pr.09-46=100). Do not
to set the same station number as the Slave.
; Set up CANopen communication parameter Pr.09-37. It does not matter if the drive is
defined as a Master or a Slave, communication speed is set by Pr.09-37 in both case.
Step 4: Coding
Real-time corresponding action: the data can be Read/Write directly to the corresponding
special “D” register.
Non Real-time corresponding action:
Read: Reading is made by CANRX command. When reading process is complete,
M1066=1. If reading succeeded, M1067 =1; if reading failed, M1067= 0.
Write: Writing is made by CANTX command. When writing process is complete, M1066
=1. If writing succeeded, M1067=1; if reading failed, M1067 =0.
Update: Updating the data is made by CANFLS command. (If special D register is defined
as RW type, Master will write the value into the slave. If special D register is
defined as RO type, then the data in the Slave will be read and write into the
Master.) When updating process is complete, M1066 will be 1. If updating
succeeded, M1067=1; if updating failed, M1067=0.
NOTE
When executing CANRX, CANTX and CANFLS commands, the device will wait till M1066 is
completed before the next CANRX, CANT or CANFLS begins. When the commands
completed, download the program to the drive. (Note: The factory setting of PLC
communication protocol is ASCII 7N2 9600 and station number is 2. Please change WPL
Editor setting at Setting> Communication Setting)
Step 5: Setting the Slave station number, communication speed, operation
source and command source
CANopen communication is supported by Delta C2000 series and EC series AC motor drive.
The corresponding slave and CANopen speed are shown as below:
16-83

Corresponding
Parameter of Drive Value Definition
C2000 E-C
Slave 0 Disable CANopen Hardware Interface
09-36 09-20
address 1~127 CANopen communication address
0 1M
1 500K
CANopen 2 250K
09-37 09-21
speed 3 125K
4 100K
5 50K
Source of 00-21 3
operation
02-01 5
command
Source of 00-20 6
frequency
02-00 5
command
Torque
11-34 3
command
The only servo motor and drive that supports CANopen communication interface is A2 series.
The corresponding slave station number and communication speed are shown as below:
Corresponding
Parameter of Drive Value Definition
A2
CANopen communication
Slave address 03-00 1~127
address
R= 0 125K
R= 1 250K
bit8~11 of Pr.03-01
CANopen speed R= 2 500K
XRXX
R= 3 750K
R= 4 1M
Control/Command
01-01 B
Source
Step 6: Hardware connection

The terminating resistor must be installed at the two farthest ends as shown in the figure
below:
16-84
Characteristic Characteristic
line impedance line impedance
Step 7: Activate PLC Control Function

Download the program after coding is complete and switch PLC mode to Run status. Then
reboots the power for Slave and Master. Please refer to CANMaster Test 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp.
Example:
C2000 AC motor drive (1 master vs. 2 slave control)
Step 1: Activate CANopen Master

; Set Pr.09-45 to 1. (To activate Master function, turn off the power after setting and
reboot. The digital keypadKPC-CC01 status will display “CAN Master”.)
; Set Pr.00-02 to 6 for PLC reset. (Note: This action will erase the program and PLC
register and will be set to factory setting.)
; Turn off the power and reboot.
; Set PLC control to”PLC Stop mode” by digital keypad KPC-CC01. (If the digital
keypad is KPC-CE01 series, set PLC control to”PLC 2”. If the drive just came out of
the factory, since PLC program is not yet installed, the digital keypad will show PLFF
warning code.)
Step 2: Configuration of the Special D in Master
; Open WPL editor
; Set PLC mode to PLC Stop (PLC2) via the keypad
; WPL editor read D1070~D1099 and D2000~D2799
; Set D2000=10 and D2100=11
; Set D2100, 2200, 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700=0
; Download D2000~D2799 setting
Step 3: Set up Master station number and communication speed

; Set up the station number for the Master (the default setting of Pr.09-46=100). Do not
to set the same station number as the Slave.
; Set up CANopen communication speed to 1 M (parameter Pr.09-37= 0). It does not
matter if the drive is defined as a Master or a Slave, communication speed is set by
Pr.09-37 in both case.
16-85

Step 4: Coding
Real-time corresponding action: the data can be Read/Write directly to the corresponding
special “D” register.
Non Real-time corresponding action:
Read: Reading is made by CANRX command. When reading process is complete,
M1066=1. If reading succeeded, M1067 =1; if reading failed, M1067= 0.
Write: Writing is made by CANTX command. When writing process is complete, M1066
=1. If writing succeeded, M1067=1; if reading failed, M1067 =0.
Update: Updating the data is made by CANFLS command. (If special D register is defined
as RW type, Master will write the value into the slave. If special D register is
defined as RO type, then the data in the Slave will be read and write into the
Master.) When updating process is complete, M1066 will be 1. If updating
succeeded, M1067=1; if updating failed, M1067=0.
NOTE
When executing CANRX, CANTX and CANFLS commands, the device will wait till M1066 is completed before
the next CANRX, CANT or CANFLS begins. When the commands completed, download the program to the
drive. (Note: The factory setting of PLC communication protocol is ASCII 7N2 9600 and station number is 2.
Please change WPL setting at setting> communication setting)
Step 5: Set Slave station number and communication speed.

Slave No.1: Pr.09-37 = 0(speed 1M), Pr.09-36=10 (station number 10)
Slave No.2: Pr. 09-37 = 0(speed 1M), Pr.09-36=10 (station number 11)
Step 6: Hardware connection
The terminating resistor must be installed at the two farthest ends as shown in the figure
below:
Characteristic Characteristic
line impedance line impedance
Step 7: Activate PLC Control Function

Download the program after coding is complete and switch PLC mode to Run status. Then
reboots the power for Slave and Master. Please refer to CAN Master Test 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp.
16-86
16-9 Descriptions of PLC Control Modes

(Speed, Torque, Homing and Position Modes)
When the AC motor drive is in FOC vector control, it can perform torque mode, position mode and
speed mode. However, auto-tuning of motor must be done first for these modes to function.
There are two types of motors, Induction Motor (IM) and Permanent Magnetic Motor (PM). After
auto-tuning process, IM motor is ready for AC motor drive to control. For PM motor, user must
complete PG offset angle process after auto-tuning. Please refer to Pr.12-58 and Pr.05-00 for more
detail.
※ Set up Delta ECMA series PM motor by enter motor parameters, follow the motor parameters
shown in Delta Servo Motor Catalogue. It is not required to execute auto-tuning for using Delta
ECMA series PM motors.
Setting and Description for Other Control Modes:
Speed Control:
The corresponding registers for Speed Mode are listed in the chart below:
Special M Control Settings
Special M Descriptions R/W

M1025 AC motor drive operation status: (0) Stop (1) Start up (must also set M1040 =1) RW
M1026 AC motor drive opeartion direction: (0) FWD (1) REV RW
M1040 Power ON RW
M1042 Quick stop RW
M1044 Halt RW
M1052 Frequency lock RW
Special M Status
Special M Descriptions R/W

M1015 Target frequency attained RO
M1056 Power ON ready RO
M1058 Quick decelerating to stop RO
Special D Control Settings
Special D Descriptions R/W

D1060 Mode setting (speed mode = 0) RW
Speical D Status

D1037 Output frequency of AC motor drive command (0.00~600.00) RO
16-87


D1050 Actual mode (0:Speed, 1: Position, 2: Torque, 3: Homing) RO
Control command for Speed Mode:

FREQ(P) S1 S2 S3
Target speed 1st step accel. time 1st step decel. time
Example of Speed Control Mode:
If the drive is in FOC control mode, please auto-tuning the motor before setting PLC control mode to
speed control.
1. When setting D1060 = 0, AC motor drive is in speed mode (default setting).

2. Write FREQ command to PLC program to control AC motor drive's frequency and accel./decel.
time.
3. When setting M1040 = 1, AC motor drive power turns ON but frequency remains 0.
4. When setting M1025 = 1, AC motor drive begins to operate till the FREQ frequency is attained
and will accel./decel. according to the setting of FREQ.
5. Use M1052 to lock present operation frequency.
6. Use M1044 to hault the drive and decelerate by the decleration setting.
7. Use M1042 to quick stopping the drive. The drive will declerate by it's maximum deceleration
speed and it is the speed that would not trigger a fault alarm. However if loading is too large, a
fault alarm may still occur.
8. Priority of the control command is: M1040(Power ON) > M1042(Quick Stop) >M1044(Halt)
>M1052(LOCK)
M1002
0 MOV K0 D1060
Position RUN Instantly Control Setting
Beginning 0: Speed
6 X0
FREQ K3500 K100 K200
14 X0
FREQ K4500 K40 K50
(M1026)
23 X1 AC Driver operating direction FWD (OFF)
(M1040)
Power supply by hardware
25 X2
(M1025)
AC Driver RUN(ON)STOP (OFF)
27 X3
(M1044)
29 X4 Pause
(M1052)
31 X5 Frequency locked
(M1042)
Park instantly
33
END
9999
16-88
Torque Control:
The corresponding registers for Torque Mode are listed in the chart below:
Special M Control Setting

Special M Description R/W
M1040 Power ON RW
Special M Status
M1056 Power ON ready RO
M1063 Target torque attained RO
Special D Conrol Setting

Special D Description R/W
D1060 Mode setting (Torque mode=2) RW
Special D Status
D1053 Actual torque RO
Control command for Torque Mode:

TORQ(P) S1 S2
Target torque (signed decimal) Frequency limit
Example of Torque Control Mode:

Before setting PLC program to torque control mode, maker sure the torque parameter settings of
the AC motor drive are completed.
1. When setting D1060 = 2, AC motor drive is in torque mode.
2. Write TORQ command to PLC program for torque and speed limit control.
3. When setting M1040 = 1, AC motor drive power turns ON and operate till target torque or
speed limit is attained. Actual torque value can be read in D1053.
16-89

0 M1002
MOV K2 D1060
ON only for 1scan a Set control mode (0:V)
6 M1000
TMR T0 K30
Normally open contact Power on delay
T0
Power on delay Ready

13 X1
TORQ K100 K1000
Set Torque
19 X1
TORQ K-200 K1000
Set Torque
25 M0 X4
Ready Power on
28
END
9999
16-90
Homing/Position Control:
The corresponding registers for Homing/Position Mode are listed in the chart below:

M1040 Power ON RW
Run till the new position is attained. For M1048 to function, also need to set
M1048 RW
control mode to position mode (D1060=1) and set M1040 = 1.
Home action begins. For 1055 to function, also need to set control mode to
M1055 RW
position mode (D1060=3) and set M1040=1.
Special M Status

M1064 Target position attained RO
M1070 Homing completed RO
M1071 Homing error RO
Special D Control Setting

D1060 Mode selection (1: Position, 3: Homing) RW
Special D Status

D1051 Actual position (Low word) RO
D1052 Actual position (High word)
※ Read both D1051 and D1052 for actual position. The display value is in signed decimal.
Control Command for Position Mode:
DPOS(P) S1
Target position (signed decimal)
Example of Homing and Position Mode:
Before setting PLC program to homing mode or position mode, maker sure the motor parameter
settings of the AC motor drive are completed.
1. Set Pr.00-40 to homing mode and set up corresponding limit sensor and origin point by MI
(MI=44 is for reverse run limit, MI=45 is for forward run limit and MI=46 is for homing to origin
point). C2000 series AC motor drive only supports Z phase homing to origin point, please
choose an Encoder with Z phase.
16-91

2. When setting D1060 = 3, AC motor drive is in homing mode.
3. When setting M1040 = 1, AC motor drive power turns ON.
4. When setting M1055=1, AC motor drive search for origin point.
5. When homing is complete, M1070 will be ON. Then set D1060=1 to switch control mode to
position mode. (Ensure M1040 should not be turned OFF to avoid inaccurate origin point.)
6. Write DPOS command to PLC program for setting AC motor drive’s target position. Use
Pr.00-12 for the absolute or relative position selection.
7. Set M1048 to Pulse ON for one time and needs to be longer than 1ms, then AC motor drive
will begin to operate till the target position is attained (only when M1040=1). Present motor
position can be read from D1051 and D1052.
Step 1 ~ 7 can be categorized into three parts, please refer to the following example:
Part I: Set control mode to Homing Mode (D1060=3) and turn AC motor drive power ON by trigger
X2.
Initial condition
0 M1002
MOV K3 D1060
ON only for 1scan a Set control mode (0:V)
SET M100
Home mode
RST M101
P2P mode
10 X2
Servo on req Power on
Part II (Homing action): Begins homing mode by trigger X3. The drive will switch to position mode
automatically when homing is complete.
Home mode
12 M100 X3
Home Home Home

mode req
M1070
RST M100
Home
finish
RST M100
16-92
Part III (Point to Point Position Control): Switch control mode to Position Mode (D1060=1) and
motor will be running forward and reverse between the position setting(+300000 ~ -300000 ).
P2P mode
20 M101
MOV K1 D1060
P2P mode Set control mode (0:V)
MOV K1 K4M200
+300000
33 M200
DPOS K300000
+300000
TMR T100 K10
43
M201 M1064
TMR T101 K10
Ack Target Position atta
49
M202
DPOS K300000
-400000
TMR T102 K10
59 M1064
TMR T103 K10
Ack Target Position atta
65 M200 T100
ROLP K4M200 K1
+300000 +300000
M200 T100
+300000
M200 T100
+300000
M200 T100
+300000
81 M202
(M1048)
Ack
M203
84 Ack
END
※ If user’s application does not require homing action, you may skip Part I and Part II and go to the
next step. In this example, turn AC motor drive power ON by trigger X2 and set M1002 to
position mode, then the PLC program will be in position mode when drive power turns ON.
16-93

16-10 Internal Communication for Master

Control
The ‘Internal Communication’ function is designed and developed for the applications where
CANopen communication is not applicable or accessable. It replaces CANopen by RS485 and
provides real-time transmission as CANopen communication. This communication protocol is
available for C2000 series and CT2000 series AC motor drives only and the way it functions is similar
to Master/Slave control. A master drive could control a maximum of 8 slaves and the master/slave
setting process is very simple.
Slave Drives Settings:

1. Set Pr.09-31= -1~-8, the drive is able to control 8 nodes.
2. Set Pr.00-21=1, set source of control to RS485.
3. Select for what RS485 should control: Pr.00-21=2 (Speed command) or Pr.11-33 = 1 (Torque
command) or Pr.11-40=2 (Position command).
4. Once completed, the slave setting is done. It is not required to turn on PLC functions.
Master Drives Settings:

1. Set Pr.09-31= -10 and set PLC to Enable.
Connection for Hardware:
Establish Master drive and Slave drives connections by using RS485 cable. The CT2000 series AC
motor drive is designed with 2 types of RS485 ports, as shown in the figure following:
(Refer to Chapter 06 Control Terminal for more about wiring terminals)
8 1 8 1
SG+ SG-
Mod bus RS-485

Pi n 1 ~ 2 , 7 ~ 8 :R e s e rve d
Removable Term inal Block Pi n 3 , 6 :G N D
Pi n 4 :SG -
Pi n 5 :SG +
16-94
16-95

PLC Programming for Master Drive Control
1. In PLC program, D1110 is used for assigning the slave drive user wishes to control. The range
setting for D1110 is 1~8 (if D1110 is set to 0 slave 8 is assigned).
2. Once the Slave drive is assigned, set M1035=1 for the Master to control the Slave.
3. Write control command to the corresponding Slave address then Master is able to control the
Slave drive.
The corresponding registers for Internal Communication are listed in the chart below:

M1035 Enable internal communication control RW
Special D Control Setting

D1110 Number of internal communication nodes(1~8) RW
Description
Special D R/W
Definition bit Priority Speed Mode Position Mode Torque Mode Homing Mode
Command Return to
0 4 - -
Enable Origin Point
Reverse
1 4 Switch - -
Command
2 4 - - - -
Momentary Momentary
3 3 - -
Stop Stop
Frequency Momentary
4 4 - -
Locked Stop
5 4 JOG - - -
Contorl Command for
6 2 Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop
D1120 + 10*N Internal Communication RW
Node N 7 1 Servo ON Servo ON Servo ON Servo ON
Switch Switch
11~8 4 Multi-step Multi-step - -
Speed Speed
Switch
13~12 4 Deceleration - - -
Time
Enable Bit Enable Bit
14 4 - -
13 ~ 8 13 ~ 8
Clear Fault Clear Fault Clear Fault Clear Fault
15 4
Code Code Code Code
Contorl Mode for Internal
D1121 + 10*N
Communication Node N
0 1 2 3 RW
Reference Command L of Speed Position Torque
Internal Communication Command Command Command
D1122 + 10*N - RW
Node N (unsigned (signed (signed
decimal) decimal) decimal)
Reference Command H of
D1123 + 10*N Internal Communication - Speed Limit - RW
Node N
※ N=0~7
Special D Status
D1115 Synchronous time cycle of internal communication(ms) RO
Internal communication node error (bit0= Slave 1, bit1= Slave 2, …, bit7= Slave
D1116 RO
8)
D1117 Corresponding on-line bit of internal communication node (bit0= Slave 1, bit1= RO
16-96

Slave 2, …, bit7= Slave 8)
Description R/W
Special D
Definition bit Definition bit Definition bit
0 Frequency Attained Position Attained Torque Attained Homing Completed
Forward Run Forward Run Forward Run Forward Run
1
Reverse Run Reverse Run Reverse Run Reverse Run
2 Warning Warning Warning Warning
D1126 + 10*N RO
3 Error Error Error Error
5 JOG
6 Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop Quick Stop
7 SERVO ON SERVO ON SERVO ON SERVO ON
Actual Torque
D1127 + 10*N Actual Frequency Actual Position -
(signed decimal)
(signed decimal) RO
D1128 + 10*N - - -
※ N=0~7
Example: The PLC programming diagram below shows how to use ‘Internal Communication’ to
control the frequency of Slave 1 and switches between 30.00Hz and 60.00 Hz.
Diagram 1: Detects Slave drive on-line status and check if error occurs. Then set internal
communication node 0 to the control command user wishes to control.
0 M1000
MOV D1117 K1M700
operation Monitoring Internal node Node 0 online
opening Point (a) Line correspondence
MOV D1126 K4M250
Internal node Node 0 arrive
Status of 0
MOV K4M200 D1120
Node 0 ack Internal node 0
(M1035)
Enable internal communication control
16-97

Diagram 2: When Slave 1 on-line status is detected, it will delay for 3 seconds before control
command is enabled.
17 M700
MOVP K0 D1121
Node 0 online Internal node control mode
TMR T0 K30
Enable Control Delay
T0
( M100 )
Enable Control Delay Enable Control
T0
( M215 )
Enable Control Delay Reset
33 M100
MOVP K0 D1121
Enable Control Internal node control mode
( M207 )
Node 0 Servo On
( M200 )
Node 0 Ack
Diagram 3: Commanding Slave 1 to forward run in 30.00Hz for 1 second and reverse run in 60.00Hz
for 1 second and repeats frequency switching.
41 M300
MOV K3000 D1122
+30.00Hz
Reference command of Internal Node 0
M250
TMR T10 K10
Node 0 arrive
52 M301
( M200 )
-60.00Hz Rev
MOV K6000 D1122
Reference command of Internal Node 0
M250
TMR T11 K10
Node 0 arrive
64 M302
MOV K1 K1M300
Repeat +30.00Hz
M100
Enable control
73 M300 T10 M100
ROLP K4M300 K1
+30.00Hz Enable control +30.00Hz
M301 T11
-60.00Hz
84 END
16-98
16-11 Counting Function via MI8

The Multi-function Input Terminal (MI8) can be used for single direction Pulse counting and provides
a maximum speed of 100K. To initiate MI8 for counting, simply set M1038 to ON and the count value
will be saved to D1054 and D1055 in 32bit signed decimal. When M1039 is ON, counting value will
reset to 0.
0 M1000
MOV D1054 D0
Operation Monitoring MI8 current calculating value
Opening Point (a)
MOV D1055 D1
11 M0 MI8 current calculating value

(M1038)
MI8 Start counting
13 M0改 M1
(M1039)
RESET MI8 calculated value
15 END
※ WhenPLC program M1038 and M1039 uses MI8 for counting function, the previous AC
motor drive setting of MI8 is disabled and have no function.
16-99

Chapter 17 How to Select the Right

AC Motor Drive
17-1 Capacity formula

17-2 General Precautions
17-3 How to choose a suitable motor
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence on its
lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the motor and
motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the required
performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.
But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed, power
and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider, depending on
your requirements.
Related Specification
Item Speed and torque Time Overload Starting
characteristics ratings capacity torque
Friction load and weight
load
Liquid (viscous) load ● ●
Load type
Inertia load
Load with power
transmission
Constant torque
Load speed and
Constant output ● ●
torque
Decreasing torque
characteristics
Decreasing output
Constant load
Shock load
Load
Repetitive load ● ● ● ●
characteristics
High starting torque
Low starting torque
Continuous operation, Short-time operation ● ●
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
Maximum output current (instantaneous) ● ●
Constant output current (continuous)
Maximum frequency, Base frequency ●
Power supply transformer capacity or
percentage impedance
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance ● ●
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring ● ●
Duty cycle modification ●
17-1
17-1 Capacity Formulas

1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor
The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=
k×N ⎛ GD 2 N ⎞
⎜⎜ TL + × ⎟ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive ( kVA)
973 × η × cos ϕ ⎝ 375 t A ⎟⎠
2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor

2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
k×N ⎡ ⎤
[nT + ns(ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢1 + ns (ks − 1)⎥⎥ ≤ 1.5 × the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
η × cos ϕ ⎢⎣ nT ⎥⎦
Acceleration time ≧60 seconds

k×N ⎡ ⎤
[nT + ns (ks − 1)] = PC1⎢⎢1 + ns (ks − 1)⎥⎥ ≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
η × cos ϕ ⎢⎣ nT ⎥⎦
2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
Acceleration time ≦60 seconds
nT + IM ⎡⎢⎣1+ nnTS ⎛⎜⎝ kS −1⎞⎟⎠ ⎤⎥⎦ ≤ 1.5 × the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
Acceleration time ≧60 seconds
nT + IM ⎡⎢⎣1+ nnTS ⎛⎜⎝ kS −1⎞⎟⎠ ⎤⎥⎦ ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
17-2
2.3 When it is running continuously

The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=
k × PM
≤ the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
η × cosϕ
The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive
k × 3 × VM × IM × 10−3 ≤ the _ capacity_ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
k × IM ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive( A)
Symbol explanation
PM : Motor shaft output for load (kW)
η : Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)
cos ϕ : Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)
VM : Motor rated voltage(V)
IM : Motor rated current(A), for commercial power
k : Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on PWM
method)
PC 1 : Continuous motor capacity (kVA)
kS : Starting current/rated current of motor
nT : Number of motors in parallel
nS : Number of simultaneously started motors
GD 2
: Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2)
TL : Load torque
tA : Motor acceleration time
N : Motor speed
17-3
17-2 General Precaution

Selection Note
1. When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer (600kVA or
above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents may occur in the power
input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid this, use an AC input reactor
(optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the current and improve the input power
efficiency.
2. When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single AC Motor
Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated currents).
3. The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current and the
overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L. (Direct On-Line),
a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If higher starting torque is
required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.) use an AC Motor Drive of higher
capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive.
4. When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor Drive
output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an external
mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.
Parameter Settings Note

1. The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some models) with
the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For safety, the use of the
upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.
2. High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may cause
overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is recommended.
3. Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
4. If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended to a
length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a certain time
with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the required time, either use
an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the model, (to shorten deceleration
time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and the AC Motor Drive.
17-4
17-3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor

Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the following
precautions:
1. The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
2. Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor temperature may
rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the motor’s fan. Consider external
forced motor cooling.
3. When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be decreased.
4. The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:
Load duty-cycle
25%
40% 60%
100
82
torque(%)
70
60
50 continuous
0 3 6 20 60
Frequency (Hz)
5. If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special inverter
duty motor.
6. Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating speed
exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
7. Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power supply
drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be connected.
8. Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:
Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount
equipment that runs at varying speed.
Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher
frequency.
To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.
9. The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.
Special motors:
1. Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and
select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number the motor
needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or regenerative voltage is too
high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).
17-5
2. Submersible motor:
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation and
choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between AC motor
drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.
3. Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex) requirements.
Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special precautions.
4. Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation will be
different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time at low speed
and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.
5. Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check before
operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC motor drive
operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing the motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism

Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts and
chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above, lifetime
reducing noises and vibrations may occur.
Motor torque
The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains power
are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):
AC motor drive Motor
180 180
155 60 seconds 155 60 seconds
140
torque (%)
torque (%)
100 100
80
55 55
38 38
0 3 20 60 120 0 3 20 60 120
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz V/F for 220V/60Hz
180
140 60 seconds 150 60 seconds
130
torque (%)
torque (%)
100
85 100
68 80
45 45
35 35
0 3 20 50 120 0 3 20 50 120
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz V/F for 220V/50Hz
17-6
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives |C2000 Series
Chapter 18 Suggestions and Error

Corrections for Standard AC Motor Drives
18-1 Maintenance and Inspections

18-2 Greasy Dirt Problem
18-3 Fiber Dust Problem
18-4 Erosion Problem
18-5 Industrial Dust Problem
18-6 Wiring and Installation Problem
18-7 Multi-function Input/Output Terminals Problem
The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different alarms
and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be activated.
The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display. The six most
recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.
The AC motor drive is made up by numerous components, such as electronic components, including IC,
resistor, capacity, transistor, and cooling fan, relay, etc. These components can’t be used permanently.
They have limited-life even under normal operation. Preventive maintenance is required to operate this
AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life.
Check your AC motor drive regularly to ensure there are no abnormalities during operation and follows
the precautions:
; Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of
input terminal.
; When the power is off after 5 minutes for ≦ 22kW models and 10 minutes for ≧
30kW models, please confirm that the capacitors have fully discharged by
measuring the voltage between + and -. The voltage between + and - should be less
than 25VDC.
; Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain drives. Please take off any
metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools
are allowed.
; Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
; Make sure that installation environment comply with regulations without abnormal
noise, vibration and smell.
18-1
18-1 Maintenance and Inspections

Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between DC+ and DC-. The voltage between DC+ and
DC-should be less than 25VDC.
Ambient environment
Maintenance
Check Items Methods and Criterion Period
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Check the ambient temperature, humidity, Visual inspection and
vibration and see if there are any dust, gas, measurement with equipment ○
oil or water drops with standard specification
If there are any dangerous objects Visual inspection ○
Voltage
Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Check if the voltage of main circuit and Measure with multimeter with ○
control circuit is correct standard specification
Digital Keypad Display

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Is the display clear for reading Visual inspection ○
Any missing characters Visual inspection ○
Mechanical parts
Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any abnormal sound or vibration Visual and aural inspection ○
If there are any loose screws Tighten the screws ○
If any part is deformed or damaged Visual inspection ○
If there is any color change by overheating Visual inspection ○
If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection ○
18-2
Main circuit
Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there are any loose or missing screws Tighten or replace the screw ○
Visual inspection
If machine or insulator is deformed, cracked,
NOTE: Please ignore the
damaged or with color change due to ○
color change of copper
overheating or ageing
plate
If there is any dust or dirt Visual inspection ○
Terminals and wiring of main circuit

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If the terminal or the plate is color change or ○
Visual inspection
deformation due to overheat
If the insulator of wiring is damaged or color ○
Visual inspection
change
If there is any damage Visual inspection ○
DC capacity of main circuit

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any leak of liquid, color change, ○
Visual inspection
crack or deformation
If the safety valve is not removed? If valve is ○
Visual inspection
inflated?
Measure static capacity when required ○
Resistor of main circuit

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any peculiar smell or insulator ○
Visual inspection, smell
cracks due to overheat
If there is any disconnection Visual inspection ○
Measure with multimeter with ○
If connection is damaged?
standard specification
18-3
Transformer and reactor of main circuit

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any abnormal vibration or peculiar Visual, aural inspection and
○
smell smell
Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there are any loose screws Visual and aural inspection ○
If the contact works correctly Visual inspection ○
Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Tighten the screws and ○
If there are any loose screws and connectors press the connectors firmly
in place.
If there is any peculiar smell and color change Visual and smell inspection ○
If there is any crack, damage, deformation or ○
Visual inspection
corrosion
If there is any liquid is leaked or deformation in ○
Visual inspection
capacity
Cooling fan of cooling system

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Visual, aural inspection and
turn the fan with hand (turn
If there is any abnormal sound or vibration off the power before ○
operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly
If there is any loose screw Tighten the screw ○
If there is any color change due to overheat Change fan ○
18-4
Ventilation channel of cooling system

Maintenance
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any obstruction in the heat sink, air ○
Visual inspection
intake or air outlet
NOTE
Please use the neutral cloth for clean and use dust cleaner to remove dust when necessary.
18-5
18-2 Greasy Dirt Problem

Serious greasy dirt problems generally occur in processing industries such as machine tools,
punching machines and so on. Please be aware of the possible damages that greasy oil may cause
to your drive:
1. Electronic components that silt up with greasy oil may cause the drive to burn out or even
explode.
2. Most greasy dirt contains corrosive substances that may damage the drive.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from dirt. Clean and remove greasy
dirt regularly to prevent damage of the drive.
18-6
18-3 Fiber Dust Problem

Serious fiber dust problems generally occur in the textile industry. Please be aware of the possible
damages that fiber may cause to your drives:
1. Fiber that accumulates or adheres to the fans will lead to poor ventilation and cause
overheating problems.
2. Plant environments in the textile industry have higher degrees of humidity that may cause the
drive to burn out, become damaged or explode due to wet fiber dust adhering to the devices.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from fiber dust. Clean and remove
fiber dust regularly to prevent damage to the drive.
18-7
18-4 Erosion Problem

Erosion problems may occur if any fluids flow into the drives. Please be aware of the damages that
erosion may cause to your drive.
1. Erosion of internal components may cause the drive to malfunction and possibility to explode.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet to keep it away from fluids. Clean the drive regularly
to prevent erosion.
18-8
18-5 Industrial Dust Problem

Serious industrial dust pollution frequently occurs in stone processing plants, flour mills, cement
plants, and so on. Please be aware of the possible damage that industrial dust may cause to your
drives:
1. Dust accumulating on electronic components may cause overheating problem and shorten the
service life of the drive.
2. Conductive dust may damage the circuit board and may even cause the drive to explode.
Solution:
Install the AC motor drive in a standard cabinet and cover the drive with a dust cover. Clean the
cabinet and ventilation hole regularly for good ventilation.
18-9
18-6 Wiring and Installation Problem

When wiring the drive, the most common problem is wrong wire installation or poor wiring. Please be
aware of the possible damages that poor wiring may cause to your drives:
1. Screws are not fully fastened. Occurrence of sparks as impedance increases.
2. If a customer has opened the drive and modified the internal circuit board, the internal
components may have been damaged.
Solution:
Ensure all screws are fastened when installing the AC motor drive. If the AC motor drive functions
abnormally, send it back to the repair station. DO NOT try to reassemble the internal components or
wire.
18-10
18-7 Multi-function Input/Output Terminals Problem

Multi-function input/output terminal errors are generally caused by over usage of terminals and not
following specifications. Please be aware of the possible damages that errors on multi-function
input/output terminals may cause to your drives:
1. Input/output circuit may burns out when the terminal usage exceeds its limit.
Solution:
Refer to the user manual for multi-function input output terminals usage and follow the specified
voltage and current. DO NOT exceed the specification limits.
18-11

C2000 User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C2000 User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C2000 User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com Email: charles@automatedpt.

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com Email: [email protected]

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com Email: [email protected]

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................... 2-1

CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING .......................................................................................................... 3-1

CHAPTER 4 WIRING .................................................................................................................. 4-1

CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS ................................................................................ 5-1

CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ......................................................................................... 6-1

CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................ 7-1

CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS .................................................................................................... 8-1

CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................... 9-1

CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD .............................................................................................. 10-1

CHAPTER 11 SUMMARPY OF PARAMETERS........................................................................ 11-1

CHPAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS.................................................. 12-1

CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES............................................................................................. 13-1

CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................... 14-1

CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW...................................................................................... 15-1

CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION ................................................................................................. 16-1

CHAPTER 17 HOW TO SELECT THE RIGHT AC MOTOR DIRVE........................................... 17-1

CHAPTER 18 SUGGESTIONS AND ERROR CORRECTIONS FOR STANDARD AC MOTOR

Application Control BD V1.01;

CALL NOW 800-985-6929 http://www.automatedpt.com Email: [email protected]

Chatpers Changes Detail

Receiving and Inspection

Encl osure type (IPXX)

Serial Number 007 C4 3A7T9300 002

Screw Torque: 8~10kg-cm(6.9-8.7 lb -in.)

Remove the MOV-PLATE by hands, no screws need to be loosen.

Main power isolated from earth:

Detail A (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Detail A (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

D2: VFD300C23E; VFD370C23E; VFD370C43E; VFD450C43E; VFD550C43E; VFD750C43E

D1*: Flange mounting

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

Minimum Mounting Clearance and Installation

Multiple drives, side-by-side installation（Frame A,B,C, G, H）

Multiple drives side-by-side installation and in rows (Frame A,B,C )

Minimum mounting clearance

Frame A VFD007C23A; VFD007C43A/E; VFD015C23A; VFD015C43A/E; VFD022C23A;

Frame E VFD450C23A/E; VFD550C23A/E; VFD750C23A/E; VFD900C43A/E; VFD1100C43A/E

Air flow rate for cooling Power dissipation of AC motor

VFD037C43A/E 10 - 10 17 - 17 103 38 141

Derating Curve Diagram of Normal Duty (Pr.00-16=0)

 Set Pr.06-55 = 1  Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2

Derating Curve Diagram of Heavy Duty (Pr.00-16=1)

Loosen the 8 screws that fastened on the pallet

Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

Secure the drive from the external. (Skip to the

Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

Remove the crate cover, EPEs, rubber and manual.

Frame H Secure the drive

(VFDXXXCXXE) & (VFDXXXCXXE-1)

Secure the drive from the internal.

Secure the drive from the external.

The Lifting Hook

Set Pr.06-55 = 1 Set Pr.06-55 = 0 or 2